Samsung Samsung Entro (SPH-m350) SPH-M350 - Mode d'emploi - Manuel de l'utilisateur - Manuels- Samsung SAMSUNG sur FNAC.COM  - Liste des manuels utilisateur Samsung

- Revenir à l'accueil

 

 

 

Description

DATE DE SORTIE descending

Langue

Dossier descending

Manuel de l'utilisateur(Bell) 2010.07.22 ANGLAIS 7.2 MB
fileDown fileDown
Manuel de l'utilisateur(Bell) 2010.07.22 FRANÇAIS 7.84 MB
fileDown fileDown

 

http://www.samsung.com/ca_fr/support/model/SPH-M350ZAABMC-downloads

http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201007/20100722022758609/BMC_m350_UG_FR.pdf

http://downloadcenter.samsung.com/content/UM/201007/20100722022758609/BMC_m350_UG_EN.pdf

 

Manuels Utilisateurs Samsung :

Samsung-ME40A-TP40-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-UA40ES5500-UA40ES5500R-Chine-Manuels

Samsung-700TSn-2-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-ME46A-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-NC190-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-320TSN-3D-SSD-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P5110-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-E1720NR-Japon-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-10.1-GT-P5100-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-2-7.0-GT-P3100-Manuels

Samsung-S22B350B-Manuels

Samsung-51-PS51E490WXZF-serie-4-3D-HD-TV-PDP-TV-PS51E490B1W-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-II-GT-N7100-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300-Manuels

SAMSUNG/SAMSUNG-DV90-Manuels

Samsung-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-AQV12KBBN-Pologne-Manuels

Samsung-ML-2165W-Roumanie-Manuels

Samsung-Notebook-Serie-7-Chronos-700Z5C-S01-NP700Z5C-S01DE-Manuels

Samsung-Player-One-noir-Open-market-GT-S5230-Manuels

Samsung-LE32E420E2W-Manuels

Samsung-910MP-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S-SCL-noir-Open-market-GT-I9003-M4-Manuels

Samsung-Samsung-Galaxy-Pro-gris-Open-market-GT-B7510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Gio-noir-SFR-GT-S5660-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Teos-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5800-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Spica-noir-Bouygues-GT-I5700-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7610-noir-Open-market-GT-B7610-Manuels

Samsung-S5610-GT-S5610-Manuels

Samsung-LE32C650-LE32C650L1W-Manuels

Samsung-LE26D450G1W-Manuels

Samsung-N145Plus-NP-N145P-Manuels

Samsung-N150-NP-N150-Manuels

Samsung-NP20-NP20FK02BG-SEF-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5570_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_110726_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9070P_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_120710_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-GT-I9300_UM_Open_Icecream_Fre_Rev.1.2_120725_Screen.pdf-Manuels

Samsung-LE32D400E1W-Manuels

Samsung-Gainable-Slim-MH026FEEA-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z573N-Manuels

Samsung-40-UE40D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE40D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C8700-UE46C8790XS-Manuels

Samsung-UE32D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-TV-3D-UE46ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-2012_Skype_Eng-0316-1-Manuels

Samsung-NS140SDXEA-Manuels

Samsung-MH050FXEA2B-Manuels

Samsung-UE75ES9000S-Slim-LED-75-SMART-Interaction-3D-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HAWW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-P6200-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-1porteA-350-L-Blanc-RR82FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE26EH4000-ZF-LED-26-HD-TV-UE26EH4000W-Manuels

Samsung-E-MANUAL-X9DVBEU4E-ENG-Manuel

Samsung-GT-S5360_UM_Open_Gingerbread_Fre_Rev.1.0_111130_Screen-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuel

Samsung-Galaxy-Tab-10-1-GT-P7500-M16-Manuels

Samsung-GT-S5360-Manuels

Samsung-Lecteur-Multimedia-Galaxy-S-WiFi-4-0-Blanc-8Go-YP-G1CW-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-551-noir-Open-marketGT-I5510-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Note-10-1-GT-N8000-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-S-II-LTE-SC-03D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Note-SC-05D-JP-Manuels

Samsung-NP-R530-NP-R530-JA02FR-Manuels

Samsung-UE40C6000-UE40C6000RW-Manuels

Samsung-Congelateur-1porteA-277-L-Blanc-RZ80FHSW-Manuels

Samsung-GT-B5310-Manuels

Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-GT-B5310-Manuels

Samsung-32-LE32D450WXZF-serie-4-HD-TV-LCD-TV-Manuels

Samsung-46-UE46D5700WXZF-serie-5-SMART-TV-FULL-HD-LED-TV-UE46D5700RS-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6560S-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES8000-ZF-Slim-LED-46-SMART-INTERACTION-3D-UE46ES8000S-Manuels

Samsung-UE55ES6300-ZF-Slim-LED-55-SMART-TV-3D-UE55ES6300S-Manuels

Samsung-AQV18UGAX-Manuels

Samsung-UE50EH5300W-Manuels

Samsung-LE46A676-LE46A676A1M-Manuels

Samsung-UE46C7700-UE46C7700WS-Manuels

Samsung-CW21Z503N-Manuels

Samsung-AQ18UGFN-Manuels

Samsung-Refrigerateur-DP-A275-L-Blanc-RT34GBSW-Manuels

Samsung-UE46ES6100W-Manuels

Samsung-RR92HASX-Manuels

Samsung-LE40S71B-Manuels

Samsung-UE32ES6710-ZF-Slim-LED-32-SMART-TV-3DUE32ES6710S-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-Ace-noir-Open-market-GT-S5830-Manuels

Samsung-GALAXY-Tab-GT-P1000-GT-P1000-M16-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Pro-B7330-noir-Open-market-GT-B7330-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-Lite-noir-Orange-GT-B7300-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-S2-GT-I9100-Manuels

Samsung-Nexus-S-noir-Open-market-GT-I9023-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFRGT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-II-noir-SFR-GT-I8000-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-7-noir-Open-market-GT-I8700-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-noir-Bouygues-GT-I7500-Manuels

Samsung-Galaxy-mini-gris-Open-market-GT-S5570-Manuels

Samsung-XE700T1A-HF1FR-Manuels

17,3" Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S01FR - Manuels

40", UE40D6500WXZF, série 6, SMART TV, 3D, FULL HD, LED TV - UE40D6500VS - Manuels

CLX-3185FW Manuels

Galaxy Ace GT-S5830

Galaxy S II GT-I9100

Galaxy Tab 8.9 GT-P7310/M16

Galaxy Tab 10.1 GT-P7500/M16

Galaxy YGT-S5360

LE32C350 LE32C350D1W

LE40C630 LE40C630K1W

MM-C330D

MM-D330D

Micro-chaîne, MM-D330DWXZF, série 3 - MM-D330 - Manuels

N145Plus - NP-N145P - Manuels

N150 - NP-N150 - Manuels

RSH5UEPN

SGH-F490

Samsung Galaxy Ace noir - Open market - GT-S5830 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S II noir - Open market - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S III - GT-I9300 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy S noir - Open market - GT-I9000 - Manuels

Samsung Galaxy NoteGT-N7000

Samsung Galaxy SGT-I9000

Série 3 300E7A - NP300E7A-S03FR - Manuels

T23A550 T23A550

UE40D6500ZF UE40D6500VS

UE55ES8000/ZF, Slim LED 55", SMART INTERACTION, 3D - UE55ES8000S - Manuels

Wave 575 GT-S5750E

Wave II GT-S8530

16/4ppm Imprimante laser couleur CLP-310 Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3170FN Manuels

16/4ppm Multifonction lasercouleur CLX-3185FW Manuels Samsung

16/4ppm Multifonction laser couleur CLX-3185 Manuels Samsung

samsung-Wave-II-noir-Open-market-GT-S8530-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-noir-Open-market-GT-S8500-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-M-noir-Open-market-GT-S7250-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-578-noir-Open-market-GT-S5780-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-533-noir-Open-market-GT-S5330-Manuels

Samsung-Wave-3-noir-Open-market-GT-S8600-Manuels

Samsung-Player-HD-noir-Open-market-GT-I8910-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Duo-noir-Open-market-SGH-D980-Manuels

Samsung-Player-Addict-noir-Open-market-SGH-I900-Manuels

Samsung-Omnia-W-noir-Open-market-GT-I8350-Manuels

PRODUITS SAMSUNG :
Belkin Chargeur Secteur pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Coque pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire Translucide
Belkin Etui cuir Verve Folio pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Belkin Etui Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Belkin Kit de Charge Secteur + Automobile pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Anti-reflets
Belkin Lot de 3 protections d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Transparentes
Belkin Micro-Chargeur allume-cigares pour Samsung Galaxy S
Belkin Protection d'écran Screen Guard pour Samsung Galaxy SII - Confidentialité 360°
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Câble Omenex Plug & Phone pour Samsung
Coque semi-rigide glossy noire pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Déclencheur sans Fil Hahnel combi TF pour Canon/Pentax/Samsung
Enceintes iLuv iSM524 noir pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Etui-Brassard Belkin DualFit pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Etui Samsung CC9S70B noir
Fnac chargeur secteur POWY pour Samsung SGH-D800
G-Mobility Pack confort pour Samsung Galaxy SII i9100
Imprimante Samsung CLX-3185FN - Ethernet
Kensington Etui pliant pour Samsung Galaxy Tab
Le Tanneur Etui cuir Pouch pour Samsung Galaxy S11 I9100 - Noir
Lunettes 3D actives Samsung SSG-4100GB
Modelabs 2 protections écran pour Samsung Galaxy ACE S5830
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran One Touch pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Transparentes
Modelabs Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Transparentes
Muvit Adaptateur Jack 3,5 mm pour Samsung (ancienne connectique)
Muvit Coque à rabat Agenda pour Samsung Galaxy Note - Noire
Muvit Coque Doodle Coeur pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Extraterrestres pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque Doodle Rose pour Samsung i9000 Galaxy S
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy Ace
Muvit Coque silicone pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Etui Clapet pour Samsung I9100 - Noir
Muvit Etui Slim Clapet pour Samsung Galaxy Note
Muvit Housse Minigel pour Samsung Galaxy - Noire
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung nexus S - 1 Miroir/1 Secret
Muvit Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Pack Accessoires pour Samsung S5830
Muvit Sticker Carbone pour Samsung I9100
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Ibiza
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love London
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love New-York
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Paris
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - I Love Tokyo
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - United Kingdom
Muvit Sticker Drapeau pour Samsung I9100 - USA
QDOS Coque Cubic pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100
QDOS Coque Steel 4 pour Samsung Galaxy S II
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED
Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste
Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD
Samsung B5722 Double SIM
Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles
Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310
Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB
Samsung batterie IA-BP420E
Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST
Samsung batterie SLB-10A
Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS
Samsung BD-E5300
Samsung BD-E5500 3D
Samsung BD-E6100 3D
Samsung BD-E8300 3D
Samsung BD-ES5000
Samsung BD-ES6000 3D
Samsung C3050 Stratus
Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"
Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung
Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100
Samsung CB20A12
Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir
Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB
Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir
Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir
Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung CLP-C300A
Samsung CLP-K300A
Samsung CLP-M300A
Samsung CLP-Y300A
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi
Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0
Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet
Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Samsung Coque pour Galaxy S3 - Noire
Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 512 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go - 830 Series
Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series
Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0 + Sennheiser RS170
Samsung DP7000A3B-A01FR 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0
Samsung DP700A3B-S02FR 23" LED Tactile
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel
Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi + Etui
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi
Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi + Etui
Samsung E1150 - Silver
Samsung ES90 Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir
Samsung Etui coque pour Samsung Galaxy Y S5360 - Noir
Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir
Samsung Etui rabat pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir
Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S
Samsung EX1
Samsung Flash SEF15A
Samsung Flash SEF20A
Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Note
Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Note - Dark Blue
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Blanc Marbre
Samsung Galaxy S3 (I9300) - Bleu Galet
Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 16 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Blanc Wifi + HP Housse Mini Sleeve 10,2" pour Netbook et Tablette - Ocean Drive
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT 16 Go Noir Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Argent
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 10,1" 16 Go - Blanc
Samsung Galaxy Tab 2 7.0" LED 8 Go
Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi
Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Android)
Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Android)
Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir
Samsung Graveur Externe BluRay SE-506AB
Samsung HMX-F80 Noir
Samsung HMX-Q20 Noir
Samsung HMX-QF20 Noir
Samsung HMX-W350 Noir (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung HMX-W350 Rouge (tout terrain) + Kit Accessoires Sport + micro SDHC 8 Go
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"
Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung HT-D330
Samsung HT-D350
Samsung HT-D4500
Samsung HT-D5000 3D
Samsung HT-E4200 3D
Samsung HT-E4500 3D
Samsung HT-E5200 3D
Samsung HT-E5530 3D
Samsung HT-ES4200 3D
Samsung HT-ES6200 3D
Samsung HT-ES8200 3D
Samsung HW-E350
Samsung HW-E450
Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)
Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX
Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220
Samsung kit HDMI
Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm
Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm
Samsung LE32E420
Samsung LE40D503
Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500
Samsung ML-2010D3
Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi
Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet
Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome
Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung MLT-D1052S
Samsung MLT-D1082S
Samsung MLT-D1092S
Samsung MM-D430D
Samsung MM-E320
Samsung MV800 Noir
Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir
Samsung NP300E7A-S09FR 17,3" LED
Samsung NP700Z5C 15.6" LED
Samsung NP-RC730-S07FR 17.3"LED
Samsung NX1000 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS
Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8
Samsung NX 50 - 200 mm f/4.0 - 5.6 ED OIS II i-Fonction; Dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides
Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200
Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100
Samsung Pack HMX-F800 Noir : Caméscope HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung Pack HMX-Q200 Noir : Caméscope Full HD + Etui + Carte SDHC 4 Go
Samsung PC portable NP300E5A-S0AFR 15.6"LED
Samsung PL210 Noir
Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go
Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal
Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante
Samsung PS43E450
Samsung PS43E490 3D
Samsung PS43E490 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung PS51E450
Samsung PS51E490 3D
Samsung PS51E530
Samsung Q3 noir 4 Go
Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go
Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED
Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes
Samsung S19A100N Moniteur 18,5" - Flat Panel Display
Samsung S22B150N 21,5" LED
Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED
Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D
Samsung S23B350H 23" LED
Samsung S23B550V Moniteur 23" LED
Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED
Samsung S27B350H 27" LED
Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet
Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions
Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi
Samsung SCX-4200A
Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi
Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet
Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0
Samsung SE-218BB graveur DVD externe ultra slim USB 2.0
Samsung SLB07A pour ST50
Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000
Samsung ST200F Noir - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Rouge - WiFi
Samsung ST200F Violet - WiFi
Samsung ST65 Noir
Samsung ST65 Rouge
Samsung ST66 Noir
Samsung ST77 Blanc
Samsung ST77 Noir
Samsung ST77 Rouge
Samsung ST77 Violet
Samsung ST88 Noir
Samsung station d'accueil
Samsung station d'accueil HD2
Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"
Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR
Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED
Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED
Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D
Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX
Samsung T22A300 21.5" Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T22B300EW 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T24B301 24" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung T27A550 27" LED Tuner TNT HD
Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir
Samsung UE19ES4000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5000 LED
Samsung UE22ES5410 LED
Samsung UE26EH4000 LED
Samsung UE26EH4500 LED
Samsung UE32EH4000 LED
Samsung UE32EH5000 LED
Samsung UE32ES5500 LED
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE37ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40D5000 LED
Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D
Samsung UE40EH5000 LED
Samsung UE40ES5500 LED
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D
Samsung UE46EH5000 LED
Samsung UE46ES5500 LED
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc
Samsung UE46ES8000 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D
Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D + Console Xbox 360 4 Go
Samsung UE60ES6100 LED 3D
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" - Aluminium + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B 13,3" LED USB 3.0 - Aluminium+ Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir
Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Marron
Samsung Ultrabook NP530U3C 13,3" HD LED - Série 5 Ultra - Rose
Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10
Samsung Wave 575
Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi
Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi
Samsung WB690 Noir
Samsung WB700 Noir
Samsung WB850F Noir - WiFi - GPS
Samsung WMN250M accroche murale
Samsung XE700T1A-A02FR 11,6" 64 Go SSD
Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go
Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go
Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose
Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go
Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go
Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go
Samyang 14 mm f/2.8 Aspherical IF ED UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang 35 mm f/1.4 AS UMC; Monture Samsung NX
Samyang Fish-eye 8 mm f/3.5 Aspherical IF MC; Monture Samsung Type NX
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 3,6" 8 Go + Casque weSC Conga Matte noir
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 4,2" 8 Go
Tablette Samsung Galaxy S WiFi 5" 8 Go
T'nB Coque Clip On pour Samsung Galaxy SII - New York
Toner Samsung CLT-C4072S - Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-C4092S Cyan
Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S - Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-K4092S Noir
Toner Samsung CLT-M4072S - Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-M4092S Magenta
Toner Samsung CLT-P4092C - Pack de 4 Toners
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4072S - Jaune
Toner Samsung CLT-Y4092S Jaune
Toner Samsung MLT-D1042S - Noir
We Digital by Samsung - Silver We 1 To USB 2.0
We Digital by Samsung - Silver WE 2 To USB 2.0
Xqisit Coque iPlate Glossy pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Blanche
Xqisit Coque iPlate Style pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Transparente/Noire
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanche
Xqisit Coque Soft Grip pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noire
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Blanc
Xqisit Etui Flipcover pour Samsung Galaxy S3 - Noir

Samsung - Aspirateur robot Navibot SR8845

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86G0 gris foncé/fuchsia

Samsung - Aspirateur sans sac SC4780 noir

Samsung - Four micro-ondes MW73B - blanc

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 36 L - Micro ondes 36 L - CP1395ES

SAMSUNG - Micro ondes 42 L - Micro ondes 42 L - CQ1570U

Samsung - Micro-ondes combiné CE117PT-B

SAMSUNG - Micro-ondes Grill simultané GS89F-1SP

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED

Samsung 305U1A 11,6" LED + Office Famille et Etudiant 2010 1 poste

Samsung Aspirateur sans sac EcoStyle SC86H0 gris clair/bleu

Samsung B1930HD 18.5" LCD TNT HD

Samsung B5722 Double SIM

Samsung Bac papier supplémentaire ML-S3710A - 520 feuilles

Samsung Batterie ED-BP1310

Samsung batterie IA-BH130LB

Samsung batterie IA-BP420E

Samsung batterie IA-BP85ST

Samsung batterie SLB-10A

Samsung batterie SSB-690 ELS

Samsung BD-E5300

Samsung BD-E5500 3D

Samsung BD-E8300 3D

Samsung C3050 Stratus

Samsung Câble Adaptateur HDTV pour Galaxy Tab 8.9" / 10.1"

Samsung Câble data pour téléphones mobiles Samsung

Samsung Caméra additionnelle de vidéosurveillance SEB-1015RWP EX

Samsung caméra Skype CY-STC1100

Samsung CB20A12

Samsung Ch@t335 - GT-S3350 - Noir

Samsung Chargeur allume-cigares micro-USB

Samsung chargeur de voyage pour SGH-P260 et SGH-G600 - Modèle Noir

Samsung Chargeur secteur de voyage micro-USB

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi

Samsung CLP-325 WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLP-620ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung CLP-C300A

Samsung CLP-K300A

Samsung CLP-M300A

Samsung CLP-Y300A

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185 + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi

Samsung CLX-3185FW WiFi + Toner Samsung CLT-K4072S Noir + MCL Samar câble imprimante USB 2.0

Samsung CLX-3185N Ethernet

Samsung CLX-3185W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung CLX-6220FX - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung Coque silicone Croisillons pour nexus S

Samsung CY-SMN1000D meuble TV

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 128 Go MZ-7PC128N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256D 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 256 Go MZ-7PC256N 830 Series

Samsung Disque Dur interne SSD 64 Go MZ-7PC064D 830 Series

Samsung dongle Wi-Fi WIS12ABGNX

Samsung DP7000A3B 23" LED Tactile USB 3.0

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire + 1 Camel

Samsung Duo de 2 coques pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - 1 Noire matelassée + 1 Rose

Samsung DV300F Argent/Rouge - WiFi

Samsung DV300F Noir - WiFi

Samsung E1150 - Silver

Samsung E2550

Samsung EcoBlue SC61E0 bleu azur

Samsung ES30 Noir

Samsung ES30 Noir + Carte SD 2 Go

Samsung Etui coque pour Galaxy Note - Noir

Samsung Etui cuir pour Galaxy S II - Noir

Samsung Etui flap en cuir pour Samsung Galaxy II I9100 - Noir

Samsung Eui cuir pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Flash SEF15A

Samsung Flash SEF20A

Samsung Galaxy Ace s5830 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Mini (sous Android)

Samsung Galaxy Note

Samsung Galaxy Note - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy Note - Rose

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Blanc

Samsung Galaxy S2 (I9100G) - Noir

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go + Western Digital My Book Live 1 To Ethernet

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Tab 10,1" TFT Noir 16 Go 3G

Samsung Galaxy Tab 8,9" TFT Blanc 32 Go Wifi

Samsung Galaxy Xcover s5690 (sous Androïd) - Smartphone Samsung Solide certifié IP67

Samsung Galaxy Y Pro B5510 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Galaxy Y Young s5360 (sous Androïd)

Samsung Graveur DVD Externe Wifi - SE-208BW - Noir

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Housse Folio pour Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung HT-D330

Samsung HT-D350

Samsung HT-D423

Samsung HT-D4500

Samsung HT-D5000 3D

Samsung HT-E4200 3D

Samsung HT-E4500 3D

Samsung HT-E5200 3D

Samsung HT-ES6200 3D WiFi

Samsung HW-E450

Samsung I9103 Galaxy R (sous Android)

Samsung Kit de connexion USB & SD pour Galaxy Tab 10.1"

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SDE-3003P/EX

Samsung Kit de vidéosurveillance tout-en-un SME-4220

Samsung Kit Etui + Clavier Bluetooth pour Galaxy Tab 10,1" - Brun foncé

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit HDMI

Samsung kit papier 10 x 15 cm

Samsung kit piéton filaire stéréo Jack 3,5 mm

Samsung LE40D550

Samsung Lot de 2 protections d'écran pour Galaxy S2 - Transparente/Miroir

Samsung Lot de 2 Protections d'écran pour i9000 Galaxy S

Samsung Lunettes 3D SSG-3050GB

SAMSUNG ME106V-SX

Samsung ME82V Micro-onde monofonction

SAMSUNG ME82V-SX

SAMSUNG Micro ondes MW87Y

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE117APT B

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes combiné CE137NEMX

SAMSUNG Micro-ondes FW113T002

Samsung ML-1630/SCX4500

Samsung ML-2010D3

Samsung ML-2165 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2165W - Imprimante WiFi

Samsung ML-2545 - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-2955DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung ML-2955ND - Imprimante Ethernet

Samsung ML-3310D - Imprimante Monochrome

Samsung ML-3710DW - Imprimante Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung MLT-D1052S

Samsung MLT-D1082S

Samsung MLT-D1092S

Samsung MM-D430D

Samsung MV800 Noir

Samsung MV800 Noir + Etui Zadig & Voltaire Noir

Samsung NP300E7A-S03FR 17,3" LED

Samsung NP700Z5A-S02FR 15,6" LED

Samsung NX 60 mm f/2.8 ED OIS SSA Macro i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX 85 mm f/1.4 ED SSA i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 16 mm f/2.4 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 20 mm f/2.8 i-Function; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX Pancake 30 mm f/2.0; dédié Boîtiers Hybrides

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 18 - 55 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 OIS + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung NX200 Noir + Obj. Samsung NX 20 - 50 mm f/3.5 - 5.6 ED i-Function + Flash SEF-8A NG8

Samsung Oreillette Bluetooth HM1200

Samsung Pack d'accessoire pour Galaxy S II I9100

Samsung Pack étui cuir + chargeur + protection d'écran pour Galaxy S

Samsung PL170 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir

Samsung PL210 Noir + Carte mémoire Lexar MicroSDHC 8 Go

Samsung PL90 Noir et Rouge

Samsung Player mini 2 c3310 - Gris Métal

Samsung Player Mini C3300 - Noir

Samsung Port parallèle ML-PAR100 pour imprimante

Samsung PS43D450

Samsung PS43E450

Samsung PS43E490 3D

Samsung PS51E450

Samsung PS51E490 3D

Samsung PS59D530

Samsung Q3 rose 4 Go

Samsung RC530-S03FR 15,6" LED

Samsung RC730-S06FR 17,3" LED

Samsung RF712 E7P-C7261 17,3" LED 3D Blu-Ray USB 3.0 + lunettes

Samsung S22A300B 21,5" TFT

Samsung S22B350H 21,5" LED

Samsung S23A750D 23" LED 3D

Samsung S23B350H 23" LED

Samsung S24B300HL Moniteur 23,6" LED

Samsung S27B350H 27" LED

Samsung SC4340 noir ébène

Samsung SC4790 - Aspirateur sans sac - traineau - rouge

Samsung SCX-3405 - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405F - Imprimante Multifonctions

Samsung SCX-3405FW - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi & Ethernet

Samsung SCX-3405W - Imprimante Multifonctions WiFi

Samsung SCX-4200A

Samsung SCX-4729FD - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SCX-4729FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet & WiFi

Samsung SCX-5737FW - Imprimante Multifonctions Ethernet

Samsung SE-084D graveur DVD externe slim USB 2.0

Samsung SE208AB Graveur DVD externe USB 2.0

Samsung SLB07A pour ST50

Samsung SLB-11A pour Samsung WB1000

Samsung ST65 Noir

Samsung ST65 Rouge

Samsung station d'accueil

Samsung station d'accueil HD2

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 10,1"

Samsung Station d'accueil pour tablette Galaxy Tab 8,9"

Samsung station d'accueil SSD-760 E2/EUR

Samsung SyncMaster C23A550U 23" LED

Samsung SyncMaster C23A750X 23" LED

Samsung Syncmaster S23A700D 23" LED 3D

Samsung SyncMaster S24A350H 24" LED

Samsung Syncmaster T22A550 21,5" LED Tuner TNT HD

Samsung Système de vidéosurveillance Baby Monitor SEW-3022WP/ EX

Samsung T22A350 21,5" LED Tuner TNT

Samsung Toner MLT-D101S pour imprimantes Samsung SCX-3405 & ML-2165 - Noir

Samsung UE19D4010 LED

Samsung UE19ES4000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5000 LED

Samsung UE22ES5410 LED

Samsung UE26EH4000 LED

Samsung UE26EH4500 LED

Samsung UE32D5000 LED

Samsung UE32EH4000 LED

Samsung UE32EH5000 LED

Samsung UE32ES5500 LED

Samsung UE32ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE32ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE40D5000 LED

Samsung UE40D5710 LED

Samsung UE40D6500 LED 3D

Samsung UE40EH5000 LED

Samsung UE40ES5500 LED

Samsung UE40ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE40ES6710 LED 3D

Samsung UE46EH5000 LED

Samsung UE46ES5500 LED

Samsung UE46ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung UE46ES6710 LED 3D blanc

Samsung UE55ES6300 LED 3D

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U3B-A02 13,3" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED + Microsoft Explorer Touch Mouse - Souris BlueTrack sans fil

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + CaseLogic Sacoche double pour ordinateurs 14" & tablettes 10,1" - Grise

Samsung ultrabook NP530U4B-S01FR 14" LED USB 3.0 + Samsonite Sac pour ordinateur portable 14,1" S Noir

Samsung Viseur électronique EVF10

Samsung WB150F Blanc - WiFi

Samsung WB150F Noir - WiFi

Samsung WB700 Noir

Samsung WB750 Noir

Samsung WIS09ABGN LinkStick WLAN-Adapter

Samsung WMN250M accroche murale

Samsung YP-F3 bleu 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-F3 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go

Samsung YP-Q3 rose 8 Go + Casque JVC HA-S155-P rose

Samsung YP-U6 noir 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 noir 4 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 2 Go

Samsung YP-U6 rose 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 blanc 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 bleu 4 Go

Samsung YP-Z3 rose 4 Go

SPH-m350 P O R T A B L E D u a l - M o d e T E L E P H O N E User Guide Please read this manual before operating your phone, and keep it for future reference. BMC_m350_UG_EN_0716010_D8Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating thereto (the “Phone System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, provincial laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc.. SAMSUNG is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its related entities. Licensed by Qualcomm Incorporated under one or more of the following patents: U.S. Patent No. 4, 901, 307; 5, 056, 109; 5, 099, 204; 5, 101, 501; 5, 103, 459; 5, 107, 225; 5, 109, 390. Openwave ® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc. RSA ® is a registered Trademark of RSA Security, Inc. Post-it ® is a registered Trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company aka 3M CORPORATION DELAWARE. The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability Except as set forth in the express warranty contained on the warranty page enclosed with the product, the purchaser takes the product "as is", and Samsung makes no express or implied warranty of any kind whatsoever with respect to the product, including but not limited to the merchantability of the product or its fitness for any particular purpose or use; the design, condition or quality of the product; the performance of the product; the workmanship of the product or the components contained therein; or compliance of the product with the requirements of any law, rule, specification or contract pertaining thereto. Nothing contained in the instruction manual shall be construed to create an express or implied warranty of any kind whatsoever with respect to the product. In addition, Samsung shall not be liable for any damages of any kind resulting from the purchase or use of the product or arising from the breach of the express warranty, including incidental, special or consequential damages, or loss of anticipated profits or benefits. Privacy The privacy and copyright laws of Canada govern the disclosure, reproduction and distribution of data, media and other content, including music and video content. Certain activities, including downloads or transfer by any means (including, via cable, Bluetooth® or otherwise) of such content may be an infringement of privacy or copyright law. Neither Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. nor any of its affiliates shall be liable or responsible for any data or content disclosed, reproduced, downloaded or distributed by the user of this equipment. Warning Depending on the user interface used in the handset, you may experience slow keypad response when performing tasks in the background. This can impact making phone calls. When there is no activity or change in the icons at the top of the main LCD display, the handset will resume normal operations.Open Source Announcement Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under the the Mozilla Public License. And this product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) To obtain the source code covered under the MPL, please visit http://opensource.samsung.com/category/mobile/mobile-phone/. LICENSE ISSUES ============== The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/ or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software Component License OpenSSL OpenSSL License Mozilla Mozilla Public License 1.1developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:// www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/ or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public Licence.]Mozilla Public License 1.1 (MPL 1.1) 1. Definitions. 1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party. 1.1. ''Contributor'' means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications. 1.2. ''Contributor Version'' means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. 1.3. ''Covered Code'' means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof. 1.4. ''Electronic Distribution Mechanism'' means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data. 1.5. ''Executable'' means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code. 1.6. ''Initial Developer'' means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A. 1.7. ''Larger Work'' means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. 1.8. ''License'' means this document. 1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. 1.9. ''Modifications'' means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is: A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications. B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications. 1.10. ''Original Code'' means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License. 1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.1.11. ''Source Code'' means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge. 1.12. "You'' (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, "You'' includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control'' means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity. 2. Source Code License. 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof). (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination). (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor. 3. Distribution Obligations. 3.1. Application of License. The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.3.2. Availability of Source Code. Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code. 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL'' which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file. (c) Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License. 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License.If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer. 3.7. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. 4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation. If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it. 5. Application of this License. This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code. 6. Versions of the License. 6.1. New Versions. Netscape Communications Corporation (''Netscape'') may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. 6.2. Effect of New Versions. Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License.6.3. Derivative Works. If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases ''Mozilla'', ''MOZILLAPL'', ''MOZPL'', ''Netscape'', "MPL", ''NPL'' or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.) 7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS'' BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. 8. TERMINATION. 8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive. 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: (a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above. (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that Participant. 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license. 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination. 9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Covered Code is a ''commercial item,'' as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of ''commercial computer software'' and ''commercial computer software documentation,'' as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein. 11. MISCELLANEOUS. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. 12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS. As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability. 13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE. Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple-Licensed. Multiple-Licensed means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A. EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original Code is ______________________________________. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________. Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______ _______________________. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): ______________________________________. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the [___] License), in which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___] License." [NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]Table of Contents Getting Started..............................................................................................1 Portrait Mode Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Landscape Mode Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Viewing the Display Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Turning Your Phone On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using Your Phone’s Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the Travel Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Using a microSDTM Memory Card in Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Phone Basics..............................................................................................11 Accessing Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Responding to Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TTY Use With Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Entering Text ..............................................................................................20 Predictive Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Roaming .....................................................................................................23 Setting Your Roaming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Update PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Voice Command .........................................................................................25 Customizing Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Main Menu ..................................................................................................30 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Web ............................................................................................................31 Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Menu to Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Messaging ..................................................................................................34 Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Picture Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Text Message Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Picture Message Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Alert Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Contacts......................................................................................................45 Adding a New Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Finding Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Tools ...........................................................................................................48 Self Serve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Update Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Calls............................................................................................................61 Recent Calls Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Bluetooth.....................................................................................................63 Enabling Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Trusted Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Device Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Pairing Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sending Items Via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 My Downloads ............................................................................................68 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Assigning Ringers and Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Playing Games. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Launching Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Camera .......................................................................................................70 Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 My Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Settings.......................................................................................................75 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ringers & Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Speech to Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Roaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Safety..........................................................................................................88 Getting the Most Out of Your Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Caring for the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Acknowledging Special Precautions and Industry Canada Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 User Guide Proprietary Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Manufacturer’s Warranty.............................................................................94 Index ...........................................................................................................971 Getting Started Getting Started Portrait Mode Phone Features 1. Earpiece: The Earpiece lets you hear the other caller and automated prompts. 2. Signal Strength Indicator: This shows the signal strength by displaying bars. The more bars displayed, the better the signal strength. 3. Display Screen: The Display Screen shows indicators for signal and battery strength, time, day, and date. It also displays incoming calls or messages. 9. Volume Button 4. Back Key 3. Display Screen 13. Accessories/ Power Cable Jack 7. Camera Lens 11. Microphone 10. microSD Slot 2. Signal Strength Indicator 1. Earpiece 1. Earpiece 12. Camera Button 14. Power/Lock Button 15. Front Indicator Light (LED) 5. Talk Key 6. End Key 16. Headset Jack 8. SpeakerGetting Started 2 Getting Started 4. Back Key: Press to return to the previous menu or screen when navigating features on your phone. 5. Talk Key: Press to answer an incoming call. 6. End Key: Press to end a call. 7. Camera Lens: Allows you to take pictures with the integrated digital camera. 8. Speaker: Allows you to hear a caller’s voice in speakerphone mode, and to hear ringtones and sounds. 9. Volume Button: Allows you to adjust the ringer volume in idle mode or to adjust the voice volume during a call. It can also be used to scroll up or down in various menus to access the options. 10. MicroSD™ Slot: This expansion slot allows you to insert a microSD™ memory card to add additional memory and storage capacity 11. Microphone: The Microphone allows the other caller to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them. 12. Camera Button: This key is used to launch the integrated digital camera. 13. Accessories/Power Cable Jack: The power/accessory interface connector is used to plug in the charging accessories and to connect any available accessory cables to your phone. 14. Power/Lock Button: Allows you to turn on or off, or lock or unlock the phone. In a menu, it returns the phone to the unlock screen and cancels any input. 15. Front Indicator Light (LED): Displays the phone’s connection status. 16. Headset Jack: Allows you to plug in a headset for safe, convenient conversations.3 Getting Started Landscape Mode Phone Features 17. QWERTY Keyboard: A retractable alphnumeric character keyboard layout. 18. Fn Key: Allows you to access the blue numbers/symbols on the QWERTY keyboard. 19. Shift Key: Toggles the alpha characters between mixed case, uppercase, and lowercase. Case remains selected until Shift key is pressed again. 20. Symbol Key: Allows you to access symbol characters. 21. Space Key: Allows you to add spaces between words and characters. 22. Enter/OK Key: Press to select the function highlighted in the current menu or to enter additional lines of text. 23. Back Key: Deletes characters from the display when you are in text entry mode and also returns to the previous menu or previous web page when in a menu or web mode. Viewing the Display Screen The following list identifies the icons you’ll see on your phone’s display screens: Signal Strength: Displays your current signal strength. When you are receiving maximum signal strength, six bars are shown. No Service: Means there is no service because your phone cannot find a signal. Roaming: Indicates that your phone is roaming. 22. Enter/OK Key 19. Shift Key 18. Fn Key 20. Symbol Key 17. QWERTY Keyboard 21. Space Key 23. Back KeyGetting Started 4 Getting Started Data Service Status: Indicates that your 1X connection is active. Incoming voice calls go directly to Voicemail. Outgoing voice calls can be made, but the connection will terminate. Data Service Transmitting/Receiving: Indicates that data is being transferred over the 1X network. The arrow direction indicates whether the handset is sending or receiving data. Data Service Unavailable: Indicates that your 1X connection is unavailable or dormant. Battery Strength: Displays your current battery charge level. Battery Strength Low: Displays your current battery strength at 20% charge remaining. Battery Strength Critical: Displays your current battery strength at 3% charge remaining. Ringers: Indicates that the ringer is turned on. Beep: Indicates that the ringer is set to 1-Beep. Vibrate All: Indicates that your phone is in vibrate all mode. Silence All: Indicates that the phone is set to Silence. Alarm: Indicates that an alarm has been scheduled. Bluetooth Active: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is enabled. Bluetooth Searching: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is searching for available (visible) Bluetooth devices.. Bluetooth Connected: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is connected to a wireless headset. Missed Indicator: Indicates that you have new text messages. It also indicates that you have missed a call, voicemail message, Calendar event, Alarm, Email, Picture Mail, or Text Message.5 Getting Started Turning Your Phone On and Off To turn your phone on: • Press and hold to turn your phone on. Once your phone is On, it displays “Entering SVC area” which indicates that your phone is searching for a signal. When your phone finds a signal, it automatically enters standby mode – the phone’s idle state. At this point, you are ready to begin making and receiving calls. If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically activated. When a signal is found, your phone automatically returns to standby mode. In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal periodically without your intervention. You can also initiate a search for service by pressing any key (when your phone is turned On). Tip: The Power Save feature helps to conserve your battery power when you are in an area where there is no signal. To turn your phone off: • Press for two or more seconds until you see the powering down animation on the display screen. Your screen remains blank while your phone is off (unless the battery is charging).Getting Started 6 Getting Started Using Your Phone’s Battery and Charger Battery Capacity Your phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (LiIon) battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is fully drained. When the battery is at 20% charge capacity, is displayed to remind you to recharge the battery. At 3% charge capacity, is displayed and blinks, an audible alert sounds, and the phone powers down. Note: Long backlight settings, low signal strength, searching for service, vibrate mode, playing games, or browser use affect the battery’s talk and standby times. Tip: Be sure to watch your phone’s battery level indicator and charge the battery before it runs out of power. Installing the Battery To install the LiIon battery: 1. Press the top of the battery cover and slide the it in the direction of the arrow to release it. Lift the cover up by the bottom corners to remove it.7 Getting Started 2. Insert the bottom end of the battery into the phone housing in the direction of the arrow printed on the battery. The gold contacts on the bottom of the battery should match those on the phone. 3. Push the top end of the battery down until it snaps into place. 4. Insert the top end of the battery cover into the grooves of the phone. Snap the lid into place. Removing the Battery Note: Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose any stored numbers or messages. To remove your battery: • Use your finger to lift the battery (top end first) up and away from the phone. Charging the Battery Your phone’s LiIon battery is rechargeable and should be charged as soon as possible so you can begin using your phone. Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery level becomes too low, your phone automatically turns off and you will lose all the information you were just working on. For a quick check of your phone’s battery level, glance at the battery charge  Getting Started 8 Getting Started indicator located in the upper-right corner of either of your phone’s display screens. indicates that the battery is full. If the battery charge is getting too low, the battery icon blinks and the phone sounds a warning tone and shuts off. Always use a Samsung-approved desktop charger, travel adapter, or vehicle power adapter to charge your battery. WARNING! FOR CONNECTION TO AN ELECTRICAL SUPPLY NOT LOCATED IN NORTH AMERICA, YOU MUST USE AN ADAPTER OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. USE OF THE WRONG ADAPTER COULD DAMAGE YOUR PHONE AND VOID YOUR WARRANTY. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. Note: You must unplug the adapter before removing the battery from the phone during charging to avoid damage. Using the Travel Adapter 1. Locate the interface connector on the side of the phone and pull out and turn the plastic cover. 2. Plug the flat end of the charger into the phone’s charger jack. 3. Plug the other end into an electrical outlet. Correct Incorrect9 Getting Started 4. An animated battery icon is displayed on the main screen and the screen is locked. The icon indicates the battery’s charge state and percent of charge. Note: It takes approximately 4 hours to fully recharge a completely drained standard battery. With the Samsung approved LiIon battery, you can recharge the battery before it drains completely. Using a microSD TM Memory Card in Your Phone Your phone is capable of supporting a memory storage media known as a microSD TM memory card. This card is the newest standard of flash memory specifically designed for use with ultra-small mobile phones and other devices. It is ideal for storing media-rich files, such as music and photographs in your phone. The maximum storage size for this media card is 32 GB. Note: Compatibility with all high capacity microSD TM memory cards is not guaranteed. Using non-recommended microSD TM cards could cause data loss and damage your phone. Installing the microSD TM Memory Card Your phone has a memory card slot on the lower left side. You can install a microSD TM card to provide additional memory for storing files (such as sound files and photos) in your phone. To install the card: 1. Locate the memory slot on the left side of the phone and pull out and turn the plastic cover.Getting Started 10 Getting Started 2. Make sure the microSD TM card’s gold contacts are facing down. 3. Carefully insert the microSD TM card into the opening and firmly push it in until you hear a click, indicating that the card is now securely installed. 4. With the card now securely installed, resecure the plastic cover over the microSD TM slot on the phone. Note: To remove the card once it has been inserted, firmly push the end of the card further into the phone and release—the card should pop out of the memory card slot. If this does not work, repeat the process again. Note: The microSD TM card can be easily damaged by improper operation. Please be careful when inserting, removing, or handling the card. Note: DO NOT remove the microSD TM card while files are being accessed or transferred. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD TM card. Your data may become damaged or unusable if the battery runs out while using the microSD TM card.11 Phone Basics Phone Basics Your handset supports a flexible user interface that allows you to modify the user interface via downloadable themes. The availability of a custom user interface is subject to your carrier. The following description of the basic capabilities of the phone is a general description and not specific to a particular user interface. However, there are some general principles that govern the handset's user interface. For each user interface, you can access a main menu that provides access and control for most of the phone's capability. Accessing Menus When the phone is locked and is pressed, the unlock screen displays. To access the menu functions you must first drag the screen to unlock the phone (drag up from the blue arrow tab at the bottom left of the unlock screen). Note: You can also slide open the keyboard to unlock the phone. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch the menu items to open them. Displaying Your Phone Number 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Phone Information.Phone Basics 12 Phone Basics Making and Answering Calls To make a call: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter a phone number using the onscreen dialpad. (If you make a mistake while dialing, press to erase one digit at a time. Press and hold to erase the entire number.) 3. The phone number appears in the button as you type. Touch to call the number, the press . 4. Press when you are finished. Tip: To redial your last recent call, press twice. Tip: Some networks support + dialing. + dialing automatically indicates to the network that you are dialing an international call and adds the international dialing prefix (typically ‘011’) to the call automatically. To use + dialing, press and hold the 0 key (until the + appears) before entering the phone number. To answer an incoming call: 1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls go to Voicemail.) 2. Press to answer the call. Your phone notifies you of incoming calls in the following ways: • The phone rings or vibrates (unless set to Silence All). • The backlight illuminates. • The screen displays an incoming call message. • The is displayed at the top of the display screen. If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the Contacts entry’s name is displayed. The caller’s phone number may also be displayed, if available. The following options are also available to handle an incoming call: • Press to end the call and send the caller to Voicemail. You can press the volume key on the side of the phone to quiet the ringer. TALK Talk13 Phone Basics • Touch or press and hold the volume key to send the incoming call to your Voicemail box immediately. • Touch to send the call to your Voicemail box and immediately send the caller a text message. To disconnect a call when you are finished: • Press . Missed Call Notification When an incoming call is not answered, a Missed Call message is displayed on your screen. • To dial a missed call back, press . Calling Emergency Numbers You can place calls to 911 (dial 911 and press ), even if your phone is locked or your account is restricted. Warning: After initiating a 911 call, you must end the call by pressing * and # on your keypad. This notifies the phone that the 911 call was terminated intentionally by the user. No other calls can be made prior to terminating the emergency call. In-Call Options During a call, touch an option on the screen to Mute or UnMute your phone or use the speakerphone. • Mute On or Mute Off: Drag the keys left or right to toggle the phone’s microphone on/off. • Speaker On or Speaker Off: Drag the keys left or right to activate or deactivate the speakerphone. • Add Call: Allows you to talk to two different people at the same time. (For more information, see "Making a Three-Way Call" on page 17.) • Dialpad: Displays the onscreen dialpad where you can Save or Pause the current number or End Call. • Options: Allows you to access other functions during the call: • Contacts: Accesses the Contacts menu options. • Recent Calls: Checks your call log for Missed, Outgoing, Incoming and Recent calls. You can also erase the logs from this menu. • Messaging: Allows you to check notifications and access the contents of voice or text messages. Ignore Ignore + TXTPhone Basics 14 Phone Basics • Notes: Allows you to type notes. • Calendar: Allows you to open the Calendar. • Clock: Allows you to display the Clock. • Calculator: Allow you to use the Calculator. • Phone Info: Displays the phone number, hardware/software version, and advanced information. WARNING! Because of higher volume levels, do not place the device near your ear during speakerphone use. End-of-Call Options After receiving a call from or making a call to a phone number that is not in your Contacts, the phone number and the duration of the call are displayed. Touch Save to save the new number in your Contacts. (See "Saving a Phone Number" on page 15” below for more information.) Touch Redial to redial the number. Touch Done to exit the end-of-call screen. Saving a Phone Number from the End-of-Call Screen After you have received or made a call, the phone displays end-of-call options. 1. Press to end the current call. 2. Touch Save. 3. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact. 4. Touch a label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others). The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. Note: Step 3 does not appear when your Contacts list is empty. 5. Touch the Enter Name field and use the keyboard to enter the new contact name. See "Using the Keyboard" on page 21 6. Touch Done (onscreen) to store the name and save the new entry. Note: If the current number has already been stored in your Contacts, Save is replaced with Contacts.15 Phone Basics Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls identified as Unknown ID or Restricted Number. Saving a Phone Number You can store up to 600 phone numbers in the Contacts list. (For more information, see "Adding a New Contact" on page 45.) 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter a number and touch Save. 3. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact. 4. Touch a label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others). The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. Note: Step 3 does not appear when your Contacts list is empty. 5. Touch the Enter Name field and use the keyboard to enter the new contact name. See Entering Text 6. Enter information into the other field as needed using the keyboard. 7. Touch Done (onscreen) to store the name and save the new entry. Finding a Phone Number 1. In the Main menu, touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Scroll down through your list of contacts to highlight the name. Touch the name to select it and then touch the phone number to make the call. Tip: To search through your list more quickly, switch to landscape mode and enter the first few letters in the Name box. The display will move down the list to the first entry that matches the text in the Name box. Tip: If the entry contains more than one phone number, scroll up or down to highlight the number you want to call and then touch the number to make the call.Phone Basics 16 Phone Basics Dialing and Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems, such as Voicemail or credit card billing numbers. • Pause: Sends the next set of numbers when you press . Note: You can have multiple pauses in a phone number. To dial or save phone numbers with pauses: 1. Touch Phone and enter a phone number. 2. Touch Pause. A P is displayed at the end of the phone number. 3. Enter additional numbers. 4. Press or touch to dial the number. — or— Touch Save to save the number in your Contacts. Using Speed Dialing You can store up to 8 numbers in your phone’s speed dial memory to make it easy to contact friends and family. With this feature, you can dial Speed Dial entries by touching one of the numbers on the screen. To use Speed Dialing: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Speed Dial. 3. Touch a speed dial number to call the number. Note: Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming. When roaming you must always dial the number using eleven digits (1 + area code + number). Caller ID Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before answering the phone by displaying the number of the incoming call. You can block your number from being displayed when you make a call. To block Caller ID: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter *67 + Phone Number.17 Phone Basics 3. Press or touch . To permanently block your number, call your service provider. Responding to Call Waiting When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you of incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your phone’s screen informs you that another call is coming in and displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and you are in digital mode). To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call: • Press . (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the second call.) To switch back to the first caller: • Touch the caller entry to re-activate the first call and place the second caller on hold. Making a Three-Way Call With three-way calling, you can talk to two people at the same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime rates will be charged for each of the two calls. To use Add Call: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter the number you want to call and press or touch . 3. Once you have established the connection, touch Add Call. 4. Select Speed Dial, Contacts, History, or Dialpad. 5. Touch an entry, use the dialpad to enter the second number, or touch Talk to connect to the second caller. 6. When the second call is connected, touch to begin your three-way call. If one of the people you called hangs up during your call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected. Tip: You can also begin a three-way call by displaying a phone number stored in your Contacts, Recent History, or Messaging. To call the third party, press . Once disconnected, a redial screen appears to provide you with the opportunity to call back any of the individual callers from the recent three-way call.Phone Basics 18 Phone Basics To use Redial: 1. Touch Redial for the first caller. 2. Repeat steps 4-5 in "To use Add Call:" on page 17. 3. When the second call is connected, touch to begin your three-way call. TTY Use With Handset A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone), is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. Your phone is compatible with selected TTY devices. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it supports digital wireless transmission. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone's headset jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable. Note: Not all service providers support TTY. Consult your service provider for more information. To turn TTY Mode on or off: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch TTY. (A brief explanation of TTY will display.) 5. Touch OK to continue. 6. Touch TTY On or TTY Off. Note: In TTY Mode, your phone will display the TTY access icon. If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY devices connected to the headset jack my be impaired.19 Phone Basics IMPORTANT Note for 911 Emergency Calling: We recommend that TTY users make emergency calls by other means, including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and land line communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when received by public safety answering points (PSAPs) rendering some communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY equipment or software used by PSAPs. The wireless industry and PSAP community are currently working to resolve this.Entering Text 20 Entering Text Entering Text The phone includes a built-in QWERTY keyboard, which is located beneath the display screen and is accessed by sliding it open. This orients the phone’s display to landscape (widescreen) mode. Using the QWERTY keyboard, you can type letters, numbers, punctuation, and other special characters into text entry fields or other applications. To open the phone and access the keyboard: 1. Rotate the phone 90 degrees counter-clockwise. 2. Slide the top section of the phone up to open the keyboard. The display screen rotates to the landscape viewing mode. Your phone’s keyboard provides a convenient way of entering letters, numbers, and symbols when you are prompted to enter text. Using your phone’s keyboard is like using a standard computer keyboard, except that each key had a primary character in white on the bottom (usually letters) and a secondary character in red on the top (numbers and punctuation). Predictive Text Input Predicitve Text (XT9) Input analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word database and creates a suitable word. (The word may change as you type.) Other possible words appear in a list below your text. • To choose a word displayed in the list, scroll up and down using the up and down navigation keys. • To accept a word, press . • To accept a word and insert a space, press . • Press to erase a single character. Press and hold to delete an entire entry. Function: Allows you to enter the numbers or characters displayed in blue at the top of the QWERTY keys. (Press twice to turn Fn lock on.) Shift: Toggles the text input mode between Upper Case, Lower Case, and Mixed Case. (Press twice to turn Shift lock on.) Sym: Launches the Symbols page. Select from onscreen symbols by using their associated numbers. Space: Inserts an empty space. Enter: Accepts a change or option. While entering text, moves the insertion point to the next line in a message. Back: Deletes the previous character.21 Entering Text • To enter a period, press the “.” key. To enter other special characters, press and press the key for the required character. If the required character does not display, press . • To insert a number, press and press the key for the required number. Note: To use the keyboard, the phone must be in Landscape mode. You can only enter text using the keyboard. To enter text using Predictive Text: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Text Entry. 5. Turn Predictive Text on. Using the Keyboard To enter text: • Press the required letter keys to enter words • Press once to capitalize the next letter. • Press twice to turn on Shift (Caps) lock. • Press to erase the previous letter. • Press and hold to erase all previous text. To enter numbers and punctuation: • Press and then press the key displaying the required character. • To enter only the top row of characters, press twice to fix all consecutive characters. Note: In some applications, certain fields may default to entering numbers (such as the phone number fields in Contacts). In others, you will need to use to enter numbers. Symbols Symbols are entered by accessing onscreen menus and touching the required item. To enter symbols: 1. Press .Entering Text 22 Entering Text 2. Touch the numeric key corresponding to the required symbol. Note: You can exit from the Symbols page by pressing any keyboard key or . To edit specific text by touching the screen: • Touch a location in your text message to move the cursor to that location. To edit specific text using the onscreen navigation keys: • Use the navigation keys to move your cursor to the required location. • If you make a mistake, press to reveal the keyboard and press to erase a single character. • Press and hold to erase an entire word or all entered characters.23 Roaming Roaming Recognizing Icons on the Display Screen Your phone’s display screen always lets you know when you’re off the network. If you are roaming on a digital system, the roaming icon will be displayed along with the text Roaming. Note: You might pay a higher per-minute rate for roaming calls. Roaming on Other Digital Networks When you’re roaming, you may not be able to access certain features, such as web services. Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the network and enter an area where roaming is available, your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in an area where you think service is available, turn your phone off and on again to reconnect to the network. Setting Your Roaming Mode By using the Roaming menu option, you can determine which signals your phone accepts. Choose from three different settings on your phone to control your roaming experience: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Roaming. 4. Touch Roaming Mode. 5. Highlight an option: • Automatic: This setting seeks service. When service is unavailable, the phone searches for an alternate system. • Home Only: This setting allows you to access the home network only and prevents roaming on other networks. Roaming Indicator Other Digital NetworksRoaming 24 Roaming Update PRL You can manually update your PRL (Preferred Roaming List) to access additional networks provided by new roaming partners of your service provider, or by new systems that have been enabled. This typically results in either a better signal or expanded coverage. This is not a frequent activity and does not require constant checking. Access this feature if you know you will be traveling outside of your service provider’s network to ensure that you always have the best coverage possible. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Roaming. 4. Touch Update PRL. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions.25 Voice Command Voice Command Voice recognition allows you to say commands to perform common functions supported by your phone. To activate voice recognition: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. (The phone prompts you to say a voice command.) 4. Wait for the beep and then say one of the following commands: Call You can dial any valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number. You can also dial by pronouncing a name stored in your Contacts. Tips for using Call : • Voice Service works best in quieter environments. • When saying a number, speak at a normal speed and say each digit clearly. There is no need to pause between digits. • The phone recognizes the digits one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, zero, and oh. The phone does not recognize numbers such as "one eight hundred" for "1-800." Instead, say "one-eight-zero-zero." • The phone recognizes only valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone numbers. • If your phone does not usually recognize you correctly when you are using Voice Service, try adapting Voice Service to your voice, which can significantly improve accuracy for some speakers. To place a call using Call : 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. • Call • Go To

• Send Text • Check • Lookup Voice Command 26 Voice Command 4. When the phone says, "Say a command", say “Call” followed by either a name stored in your Contacts or a valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number naturally and clearly. • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by the correct number, say Yes. (You can also select the correct number from those displayed on the screen by touching the correct number. The phone will then dial the number.) • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by an incorrect number, say No. (If there are other alternatives, the phone will prompt you with the next one. You can also press the navigation key up or down to select the correct number from the Choice List, and then touch the correct number to dial it.) 5. Alternatively, you can call a person in your Contacts by saying the name of the person, exactly as it is entered in your Contacts. (The phone plays the name through the earpiece and displays it on the screen.) If you said a name listed in your Contacts that has more than one number associated with it, the phone displays the different locations (Home, Work, Mobile, Pager, Others) and asks you which one to dial. Say one of the location names and the phone will dial the number for the location you specified. Send Text To compose a text message using Voice Service: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, "Say a command", say “Send Text” followed by either a name stored in your Contacts or a valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number. • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by the correct number, say Yes. (You can also touch the correct number from those displayed on the screen.) • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by an incorrect number, say No. (If there are other alternatives, the phone will prompt you with the next one. You can also touch the correct number in the Choice List.) 5. Compose your text message and touch Send to deliver it. For more information, see "To send a text message:" on page 34.27 Voice Command Lookup You can retrieve contact information for any person in your Contacts by saying the full name of the person. To retrieve information using Lookup : 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Lookup” followed by the name of the person, exactly as it is entered in your Contacts. (The phone will play the name it recognized through the speaker, and then open the contact information for that name.) If the phone says, “Did You Say” followed by an incorrect name, say “No”. The phone then prompts you with the next name, if there is one. If there are no more names, the phone will say "Sorry, No Match Found". Go To You can open an application or access a menu by saying “Go To” followed immediately by the “destination”, either an application or menu. To see a list of possible destinations: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Go To”. A list of valid destinations is displayed and the phone prompts you with “Which shortcut”. If the list is too long to fit on one screen, the screen displays “Next Menu”. You can say the name of a destination, or say “Next Menu” to view the next screen. 5. Say the name of the application that you want the phone to activate. Check The voice recognition Status option gives you an update on your phone's service, signal strength, and battery level. To retrieve your phone's status information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools.Voice Command 28 Voice Command 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Check” followed by one of the following items: • Status: Plays back and displays ALL status information. • Time: Plays back and displays current date and time information. • Signal Strength: Plays back and displays current signal strength. • Network: Plays back and displays the type of network coverage. • Battery: Plays back and displays the current level of battery charge. • My Phone Number: Plays back and displays your phone number. Customizing Voice Command Configuring Confirmation You can configure your phone’s confirmation setting for voice-based commands. To configure confirmation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Confirmation. 5. Highlight one of the following options: Automatic, Always Confirm, or Never Confirm. Configuring Voice Adaptation You can configure your phone to adapt to your voice when using voice-based commands. To configure voice adaptation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Adaptation. 5. Touch Adapt Voice. 6. Touch Start. 7. You will be prompted to record a series of commands. 8. When you have finished the session an Adapting message is displayed. 9. Touch OK to save.29 Voice Command Note: It is recommended that you perform the complete Adapt Voice session at least once to achieve the maximum benefit of this feature. If a partial adaptation is performed, you can return later and resume the process from the halfway point. Tip: To reset the voice, touch Reset Voice in the Adaptation menu. Changing Audio Guidance Mode By default, your phone is set to prompt mode and provides audio prompts such as “Please say a command”. To change the audio guidance mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Audio Modes. 5. Touch one of the following: • Expert Mode: Displays a selectable list of matching entries. If the first entry is not correct, the phone continues to read each available option until it detects a confirmation (Yes) or rejection (No). • Prompt Mode: Displays a selectable list of available dialing options and only reads out the entry name. You have to touch an option to activate a command.Main Menu 30 Main Menu Main Menu User Interface Your phone is equipped with the capability to provide multiple user interfaces that can provide a different look and feel, and be customized to user preference. The availability of a customized user interface is subject to your service provider. Below the idle screen, all user interfaces provide a main menu to support the operation and configuration of the handset's feature. This user guide focuses on describing the functions and features of the main menu. For other ways of accessing the main menu, please see the additional printed material that comes with your phone or talk to your service provider's customer support. Menu Layout The main menu consists of the following sub-menus: • Web: Access the internet to browse pages customized for mobile devices. Please see "Web" on page 31 for more information. • Messaging: Stay in touch with others via messaging. Please see "Messaging" on page 34 for more information. • Contacts: Manage your phone book. Please see "Contacts" on page 45 for detail description. • Tools: Access productivity tools to help manage your daily work. Please see "Tools" on page 48 for more information. • Calls: Manage incoming, outgoing, missed, and recent calls. Please see "Calls" on page 61 for more information. • Bluetooth: Enable and use Bluetooth. Please see ‘Bluetooth” on page 63 for more information. • My Downloads: Download contents like screen savers, ringers, games, and applications to personalize your phone. Please see "My Downloads" on page 68 for more information. • Camera: Use the Camera and Camcorder features. Please see "Camera" on page 70 for more information. • Settings: Configure the phone to your preferences and network environment. Please see "Settings" on page 75 for more information.31 Web Web When you launch the browser, the phone will connect to the Internet and the service indicator icon will display. Launching the Web Browser • Touch Menu and then touch Web. The first time you use the Web Browser, you will be prompted to go through a setup process that takes approximately three minutes. If you had a previous web connection, the last page you visited will be displayed. Navigating the Web By default both the Address Bar (top of display screen) and Navigation toolbar (bottom of display screen) are displayed when the browser is launched. They can be toggled on to reveal more features and functions. • Touch FULL SCR to switch the display from URL Mode to Full Screen mode in which the Address Bar is hidden. • Touch MENU to reveal additional Browser menu options. • Slide your finger up or down the display screen to scroll through the web page. • Touch and drag in any direction to move around a web page. • Touch an onscreen item or hyperlink to select it. Links are displayed as underlined text and allow you to jump to web pages, select special functions, and place phone calls. • Touch an onscreen text field or Search field to display the text input screen and then enter text into the field. See ‘Using the Keyboard” on page 21. • Press to go back one web page. This button is also used to delete text when you are entering it into a text field. • If the items on a page are numbered, you can use the number keys on your keyboard to select an item. Tip: The tenth item in a numbered list can be selected by pressing the 0 key on the keyboard, even though the number 0 doesn’t appear on the screen.Web 32 Web Creating a Bookmark Bookmarks allow you to store the addresses of websites so that you can easily access them again later. To create a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Go to the web page that you want to bookmark. 4. Touch MENU. 5. Touch My Favorites. 6. Touch Add this page to favorites. 7. Touch Add. 8. Touch OK. The new bookmark is added to the top of the list of bookmarks. Note: Bookmarking a page does not store the page contents, just its address. Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a web page can be bookmarked or not is controlled by its creator. To access a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Touch MENU. 4. Touch My Favorites. 5. Touch an entry in the list to launch the bookmark’s web page. To delete a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Touch MENU. 4. Touch My Favorites. 5. Touch an entry in the list and touch OPTIONS. 6. Touch Delete this Favorite. 7. Touch REMOVE to confirm the deletion. 8. Touch OK.33 Web Using the Menu to Navigate Touch MENU to display a list of options for navigating between web pages. The Browser Menu can be opened when a data session is active and from any web page. It contains the following options: • Back: Move back by one web page (if you have not accessed more than one web page, this option is greyed out). • Forward: Move forward by one web page (if you have not returned from a previous web page, this option is greyed out). • Home: Returns to your service provider’s home page. • My Favorites: Displays your list of Bookmarks. • Search: Takes you to a search engine. • Settings: Displays the following options: • Font Size: Allows you to use a slider to adjust the current text size displayed in the browser. Touch Save to save your settings. • Send this page to...: Copies the current web address and attaches it to an outgoing text message. • Clear private data: Allows you to delete the current browsing history, browser cache, cookies, and stored passwords. • Advanced: Allows you to access additional Browser Menu options, such as: Page info, Images on/off, Reset browser, Turn on error logging, Send referrer, Redirect prompt, Reset browser settings, and About browser.Messaging 34 Messaging Messaging You can send and recieve email messages and text messages, and participlate in webbased chat rooms right from your phone. After you access the Messaging menu, you will see the following options: • Send Message: Allows you to send text and picture messages. • Text & Picture Message: Allows you to view text and picture messages that you have received, sent, and saved. • IM: Allows you to send instant messages. • Email: Allows you to send email messages. • Web Alert: Allows you to receive an alert that a new web message is available. • Voicemail: Allows you to listen to any voice messages saved on the voice mail server. • Settings: Allows you to configure the messaging options. Text Messaging To send a text message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Send Message. 3. The list of recipients of recently sent messages is displayed. Touch one of the names or touch one of the following options: • Recent List: Select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages. • Contacts: Select a recipient from your Contacts (the Contacts entry must contain a wireless phone number or an email address). • Manual Entry: Use the keyboard to manually enter a recipient by selecting either: • Enter phone number: Use the keyboard or onscreen dialpad to enter a wireless phone number. Touch Done to continue. • Enter email address: Use the keyboard to enter the recipient’s email address. 4. Enter your message using the keyboard. If you want to change your text message options, touch OPTIONS and select one of the following: • Preview: Displays a preview of the message as it will be displayed on the recipient’s phone. • Add Item: Allows you to add a picture or voice memo to the message.35 Messaging • Sending Options: Allows you to set the message priority and callback number. • Save as Draft: Stores a copy of the text message in your Drafts folder. • Save Text: Stores a copy of the text message in the Preset Messages folder. • Message Details: Displays the recipient’s number or email address, message priority, and message size. • Preset Messages: Allows you to select from a list of preset messages. 5. Touch Send to send the message. To reply to the text message: 1. While the message is open, touch Reply. 2. Compose your reply or use a pre-composed message. • To type a message, use your keyboard to enter the text. • To use pre-written messages, touch OPTIONS and touch Preset Messages. Touch the preset message to add it to the reply message. 3. Touch Send. To erase messages: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Text & Picture Message. 3. Touch Inbox. 4. Touch to open the Delete menu. 5. Touch the message(s) that you want to delete or touch to select all of the messages. Selected messages are highlighted in blue. 6. Touch Delete selected to delete the selected messages. 7. Touch Delete to confirm the deletion. Picture Messages Your phone lets you take pictures, view them using the phone's display, and instantly send them to your friends and family. To send a Picture Message from your Phone 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Send Message.Messaging 36 Messaging 3. The list of recipients of recently sent messages is displayed. Touch one of the names or touch one of the following options: • Recent List: Select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages. • Contacts: Select a recipient from your Contacts (the Contacts entry must contain a wireless phone number or an email address). • Manual Entry: Use the keyboard to manually enter a recipient by selecting either: • Enter phone number: Use the keyboard or onscreen dialpad to enter a wireless phone number. Touch Done to continue. • Enter email address: Use the keyboard to enter the recipient’s email address. 4. Scroll up and touch Picture. 5. Touch My Album to select an existing picture, touch one or more thumbnail images, and touch OK. • You can also touch Take New Picture to take a new picture and then touch to attach it to the message. 6. Enter your message using the keyboard. If you want to change your text message options, touch OPTIONS and touch one of the following options: • Preview: Displays a preview of the message as it will be displayed on the recipient’s phone. • Add Item: Allows you to add a picture or voice memo to the message. • Erase Item: Allows you to remove a picture or voice memo from the message. • Priority: Allows you to set the message priority. • Save as Draft: Stores a copy of the text message in your Drafts folder. • Save Text: Stores a copy of the text message in the Preset Messages folder. • Message Details: Displays the recipient’s number or email address, message priority, and message size. • Preset Messages: Allows you to select from a list of preset messages. 7. Scroll up and use Voice Memo to record and attach a voice memo, if needed. 8. Touch Send to send the message.37 Messaging Note: If you have not registered and configured this feature, you will be prompted to do so. Follow the instructions on screen, then continue with this procedure. Instant Messaging You can use your phone to access popular instant messaging clients and have online chats. To access Instant Messaging: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch IM. 3. Select an IM program and follow the on-screen instructions. Email Your phone can access online emails using the preloaded Email application. To access the online e-mail service: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Email. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Voicemail All unanswered calls to your phone are automatically transferred to your Voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off. However, you are only notified of new messages when your phone is turned on and you are in a Service Area. To set up your Voicemail: 1. Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keyboard. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) 2. Follow the system prompts to create your passcode, record your greeting, and record your name announcement. To call your Voicemail: • Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keyboard. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) • Touch at the top of the display screen to open an onscreen popup. Touch New Voicemail.Messaging 38 Messaging To display your Missed Calls: • Touch Menu and then touch Calls. The Recent Calls list is displayed. • From the While you were out screen, touch a number or Contacts entry in the list. Important: When you are roaming off the network, you might not receive notification of new Voicemail messages. It is recommended that you periodically check your Voicemail by dialing 1 + area code + your Phone Number. When your Voicemail answers, enter your passcode. You will be charged roaming rates when accessing Voicemail while roaming off the network. Voicemail Notification Your phone alerts you to new messages in several ways: • By displaying a message on the display screen. • By the LED blinking red. • By sounding the assigned ringer type. • By displaying at the top of the display screen. When you have missed a call or recieve a new message (such as a Voicemail or Text), your phone alerts you and displays a While you were out icon ( ). Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages You can review your messages directly from your phone or from any other touch-tone phone. To dial from your phone, you can either speed dial your Voicemail or use the menu keys. To Use One-Touch Message Access • Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keypad. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) Follow the system prompts. To Use the Menu Keys on Your Phone to Access Your Messages 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Call Voicemail to call the Voicemail server. Clearing the Message Icon Your phone may temporarily continue to display the message icon after you have checked your voicemail, text messages, missed events, email, etc. To clear the icon from the display screen: 1. Touch at the top of the display screen.39 Messaging 2. Touch a voicemail, text message, or missed call entry. When the messages have been reviewed, is no longer displayed. Voicemail # This menu allows you to change your voice mail number. To change your voice mail number: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Voicemail #. 4. Touch Other. 5. Use the keyboard to enter the new voice mail # . 6. Touch Save. To change your voice mail back to the default voice mail: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Voicemail #. 4. Touch the default number. Settings Several options are associated with voicemail and text messaging. The Settings menu allows you to customize the options to fit your preferences. To access the Settings menu: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Select General, Text Message, Picture Message, or Alert Setup. General General settings affect voicemail and text messages. • Preset Messages: Allows you add or delete preset messages. • Message Alert: Allows you to configure the default ringer for messages, voicemail, and reminder alerts. • Auto-Erase: Sets the phone to automatically delete old messages from the mail boxes when they become full. This allows new messages to be added to a full mail box without having to manually delete old messages to free up space first.Messaging 40 Messaging • Save in Outbox: Sets the phone to automatically save the message in the Outbox folder, to prompt you before saving the message, or to not save the message. • Draft Alert: Sets the phone to automatically display an alert when the message is saved to the Draft folder. You can also turn the alert off. Preset Messages A preset message can be selected and automatically entered into the current message. To add a preset message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Touch . 6. Touch Add New. 7. Enter your message using the keyboard. 8. Touch Save when finished to add your message to the list. To edit a quick message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Scroll up or down and touch the message that you want to edit. 6. Edit the message using the keyboard. Press and hold to erase the message. Enter your new message or edit the existing one and touch Save. To delete a preset message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Touch . 6. Touch Delete. 7. Scroll up or down and touch the message that you want to delete.41 Messaging 8. Touch Delete Selected. 9. Touch Yes to confirm the deletion. Note: When you send a message using Preset Messages, the last message selected automatically displays as the first choice when sending a new message. Message Alert The Message Alert menu allows you to configure the default Message Ringer, Voicemail Ringer, and Reminder settings for your messages. To set the Message Ringer: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Message Ringer. 6. Select a ringer from the list. To set the Volume Ringer: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Voicemail Ringer. 6. Select a ringer from the list. To set the Reminder: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Reminder. 6. Set the required duration to Off, Once, or Every 2 min.Messaging 42 Messaging Auto-Erase This option allows you to automatically delete old messages when the memory becomes full. This prevents new messages from being rejected due to the Inbox being full. To turn this option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Select Auto-Erase. 5. Touch Yes or No. Save in Outbox Save In Outbox allows you to save a copy of the outgoing text message in the outbox. To turn the Save in Outbox option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Save in Outbox. 5. Touch Auto Save, Prompt, or Do not Save. Draft Alert Allows you set your phone to display a prompt to save a text message in the Draft folder. To turn the Draft Alert option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Draft Alert. 5. Touch On, or Off. Text Message Settings Text Message settings only affect text messages. • Priority: Allows you to configure the default priority level for your text message. • Callback #: Allows you to change the default callback number for text messages. To set the Priority level: 1. Touch Messaging.43 Messaging 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Text Message. 4. Touch Priority. 5. Touch Normal or Urgent. To change the Callback #: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Text Message. 4. Touch Callback #. 5. Touch None, your mobile directory number, or Other for a different phone number. 6. For Other, enter the number using the keyboard and touch Save. Picture Message Settings Picture Message settings only affect text messages. • Priority: Allows you to configure the default priority level for your picture message. • Auto Download: Allows you to toggle the Auto Download option on or off . To set the Priority level: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Picture Message. 4. Touch Priority. 5. Touch High, Normal, or Low. To change the Auto Download setting: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Picture Message. 4. Toggle Auto Download to be On or Off.Messaging 44 Messaging Alert Setup This menu allows you to set your phone to automatically connect to the Internet to receive Web Alerts. 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Alert Setup. 4. Touch On or Off.45 Contacts Contacts Adding a New Contact Your phone can store up to 600 phone numbers. Each contact entry can store up to a total of seven phone numbers, three email addresses, one URL, one memo, and each entry’s name can contain up to 64 characters. To add a new contact: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. In the upper left corner of the display screen, touch to create a new Contacts entry. The screen is re-oriented to display in Landscape mode. 4. Touch the Enter Name field and enter a name using the keyboard. 5. Touch the Add Number field and enter a number using the keyboard. 6. Use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. The Select Number Type menu opens. Scroll up or down and touch Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. 7. Enter information into any of the other fields using the keyboard. 8. Touch Done to save the Contacts entry. Once saved, the new Contacts entry is displayed within the Contacts page. Tip: ICE - In Case Of Emergency. To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify important contacts, you can list your local emergency contacts under “ICE” in your phone’s contact list. Saving a Phone Number You can save the phone number from your call history. To save a phone number from your call history: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch the arrow to the right of the number that you want to save. 4. Touch Save. 5. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact.Contacts 46 Contacts 6. Touch an option for the number type: Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. 7. Touch the Enter Name field and enter a name for the Contact. 8. Enter information into any of the other fields using the keyboard. 9. Touch Done to store the name and save the new entry. Finding Contacts 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the Search field and use the keyboard to type the letters of the Contact’s name. The display changes to display all names starting with those letters. Touch the required name to make the call. 4. You can also scroll down through your list of contacts and touch the name to make the call. Editing an Existing Contact To add a number to an existing entry: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Scroll up to the Add Number box. Enter the phone number using the keyboard and use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. 5. The Select Number Type menu opens. Scroll up or down and touch Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. 6. When you are finished, touch Done. To edit an entry’s phone number: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Select the phone number to be edited. 5. Press and hold to erase the entire number or press once to erase the last digit.47 Contacts 6. Enter the phone number using the keyboard and then use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. 7. Select the number type (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax, or Others). 8. Touch Done. To select a ringer type for an entry: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Touch the Set Ringer field. 5. Scroll up or down and touch the required Ringer. 6. Touch Done.Tools 48 Tools Tools After you access Tools menu, you will see the following options: • Self Serve: Allows you to access your service provider’s customer service area where you can check your account balance, service plan details, etc. • Voice Command: Allows you to use voice recognition to perform common functions that are supported by your phone. • Calculator: Allows you to use your phone’s built-in calculator. • Notes: Allows you to compose and store reminders and notes to help keep you organized. • Calendar: Helps you to organize your time and reminds you of important events. • Clock: Displays the time in different time zones around the world together with one or more major cities, states, regions, or countries in a time zone. • Music: Allows you to download and store music on a memory card in your phone. • Update Phone: Allows you to automatically download and update the software in your phone. Only the internal software is updated. No contact entries or other information saved to your phone will be deleted. • Voice Memo: Allows you to record brief memos to remind you of important events, phone numbers, or other items. Self Serve Launches the web browser and opens your service provider’s self service page in which you can access your account balance, etc. To use self serve: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Self Serve. 4. The web browser launches and your service provider’s self serve page opens. Follow the onscreen instructions. Voice Command For information on Voice Command, see "Voice Command" on page 25. Calculator Your phone comes with three built-in calculators. • Calculator: Your phone comes with a built-in calculator. This application becomes the default until another calculator option is selected.49 Tools • Tip Calculator: The tip calculator calculates the tip on a meal or service and splits the bill between the number of people paying. • Unit Convertor: Your phone comes with a built-in conversion application. To use the calculator: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Calculator again. 5. Enter a number with onscreen keypad. 6. Touch the appropriate icons to select add, subtract, multiply, and divide. 7. Enter the next number using the onscreen keypad. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed. 8. Touch the Equals (=) icon to view the results. To use the tip calculator: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Tip Calculator. 5. Use the onscreen keypad to enter the total bill amount and touch Done. The tip amount is then displayed at the default percentage (default is 15%). 6. Touch the Tip Rate field and use the onscreen keypad to enter a new tip percentage value. Touch Done. The correct tip will be calcualted instantly. 7. If you’re splitting the check, touch the Split field and enter the number of people in your party. Touch Done. 8. Touch Reset to delete all values. To use the unit convertor: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Unit Convertor.Tools 50 Tools 5. Select a type of unit to convert from: Distance, Temperature, Speed, Volume, Weight, and Area. 6. Touch the unit fields to select the initial and target units. 7. Use the onscreen keypad to enter a value for the initial unit. (The converted value is instantly calculated.) 8. Touch Reset to delete all of the numbers. Notes Your phone comes with a notepad that you can use to compose and store reminders and notes to help keep you organized. To compose a note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. In the upper left corner of the display screen, touch to add a new note. 5. Use the keyboard to type your note. 6. Touch Save. To read a saved note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch a note in the list. To delete saved notes: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch an hold a note in the list until it detaches from the page, drag the selected note to and release it by lifting your finger off the display screen. 5. You can also touch , touch the note you want to delete, touch Delete Selected and touch Delete.51 Tools To send a saved note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch the note that you want to send. 5. Edit the note if needed. 6. Touch Send. For more information on sending messages, see ‘Messaging” on page 34. Calendar Your Calendar helps you organize your time and reminds you of important events. Event Alert Menu When your phone is turned on and you have an event alarm scheduled, your phone alerts you and displays the event summary. By default, the alarm will sound 10 minutes before the event, and then again on the event. Your phone alerts you to scheduled events by playing the assigned ringer type or illuminating the backlight. To silence the alarm and reset the schedule, touch and drag the Dismiss button. You can also silence the alaem by pressing the side volume button. To view additional options, use the appropriate onscreen slider: • View: Silences the alarm and displays the details of the current event. • Dismiss: Silences the alarm and replays it again at the time of the event. • Snooze: Silences the alarm and schedules it to replay again later. To add an event to the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day to which you want to add an event by either: • Touching a day on the calendar. • Use the and navigation arrows to view a different month and then touch the required day. 5. Touch to open the New Event window. 6. Switch to Landscape mode and use the keyboard to enter the event description. See ‘Using the Keyboard” on page 21.Tools 52 Tools 7. Select a start and end time for the event by touching the corresponding Start and End fields. 8. Assign an hour and minute by either: • Scrolling through both reels (Hours and Minutes) by sliding your finger up and down on the display screen. • Touching the arrows above/below each field. Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. • Touch either am or pm. • When you have finished setting the times, touch Done. Note: If you need to adjust the end date for an event, touch the Date field and select a new end date by touching a day in the onscreen calendar. 9. Select an alert time for the event by touching the Alert field and touching one of the following options: On Time, 5 minutes before, 10 minutes before, 15 minutes before, 30 minutes before, 1 hour before, 3 hours before, 5 hours before, 1 day before. 10. Select a ringer type for the alarm by touching Set Ringer and then selecting a ringer. • Touch to play a sound sample for a selected ringer. • If a ringer has been previously selected, scroll through the list of available ringers and touch a ringer name to assign it. 11. Select a reminder status for the event by touching the Reminder field and then touching one of the following options: Off, Every 2 minutes, and Every 15 minutes. 12. Touch Save to save the new event. Note: If the end time and date fall before the start time and date, an onscreen warning message is displayed and you can edit the values onscreen.53 Tools To view an event in the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day for which you want to view events by touching it. (If you have events scheduled for the selected day, they will be listed in chronological order.) Tip: In the calendar view, days with events scheduled are underlined in blue. 5. To display an event’s details, touch the event entry from the selected day’s listing. To delete an event from the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day from which you want to erase the event. 5. Touch an event to display its details page. 6. Touch and touch Delete to erase the event. To delete all or multiple scheduled events: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day from which you want to erase the event. 5. Touch . 6. Touch the events that you want to delete to select them. • You can also touch to select all events in the list. 7. Touch Delete selected and then touch Delete to erase the selected events.Tools 54 Tools Clock Your phone comes with a clock that allows you use it as an alarm clock, timer, and stopwatch, and to display the time in different world locations. Alarm Clock Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock that has multiple alarm capabilities. To use the alarm clock: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Alarm. 5. Touch to create a new alarm. 6. Touch the alarm activation button to turn the alarm On or Off. 7. Select a time for the alarm by touching the time field. • Assign an hour and minute by either scrolling through both reels (Hours and Minutes) or by touching the up and down arrows above/below each field. Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. • Touch either am or pm. • When you have finished setting the times, touch Done. 8. Select a reminder status for the event by touching Repeat and selecting an option: Once, Mon to Fri, Sat & Sun, Daily, or Set days. 9. Select a ringer type for the alarm by touching the RInger field and selecting a ringer type. • Touch to play a sound sample for a selected ringer. • If a ringer has been previously selected, scroll through a list of available ringer sounds and touch a ringer name to assign it. 10. Select a snooze status for the alarm by touching the Snooze field and selecting an option: 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 20 minutes. 11. Touch Save to save the new alar,55 Tools Note: Any stored alarms will appear on the Alarm page in the order in which they were created. To turn off an alarm (when sounding): 1. With the alarm sounding an alert, touch either: • Stop Alarm: Permanently deactivates the alarm notification. • Snooze: Temporarily deactivates the alarm for a few minutes until the new notification. To delete alarm events: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Alarm. 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch to select all alarms in the list. Selected events are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected alarms. Timer Use the timer to count down to an event based on a preset time length (hours, minutes, and seconds). To use the timer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Timer. 5. Select the countdown time length for the alert by setting the Hours, Minutes, and Seconds values. • Assign the time by scrolling through the reesl or touching the up or down arrows above/below each field.Tools 56 Tools Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. 6. Touch Start to start the countdown. 7. Touch Stop to stop the countdown and touch Restart to start it again. 8. Touch Reset to set the timer back to 00. 9. Press to return to the previous screen. Stopwatch To use the stopwatch: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Stopwatch. 5. Touch Start to turn on the timer. 6. Touch Lap to place a marker in the list. This helps you to keep track of specific time segments. 7. Touch Stop to stop the stopwatch. 8. Touch Restart to continue the stopwatch from its last paused time marker or touch Reset to stop the process and set the counter back to zero. 9. Press to return to the previous screen. World Clock To add a world clock entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. 5. Touch to begin using the world map. 6. Touch Canada or Other Countries. An alphabetical list of the available cities available in that category is displayed. • Touch Canada to display all available major cities within Canada.57 Tools • Touch Other Countries to display countries and in some cases, cities and their corresponding countries. Note: Dark clocks indicate that the selected time zone is currently in its evening (nightime) hour. 7. Touch a city in the list. 8. Repeat the process to add other cities. To delete a world clock entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch the location(s) you want to delete. Selected entries are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected entries. To assign daylight saving time: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. Stored locations indicate the Daylight Saving Time icon at the bottom-right of each onscreen clock. • indicates that Daylight Saving Time is on. • indicates the Daylight Saving Time is off. 5. Touch a location containing to turn Daylight Saving Time off or touch a location containing to turn Daylight Saving Time on.Tools 58 Tools Music You can download and store music to your phone. Music requires that a microSD™ card be installed in the phone. To access the music player: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Music. 4. Navigate through the library option and select a song to launch the music player. 5. Use the onscreen control buttons to play, pause, forward to the next song in your playlist or return to the previous song. Update Phone Update Phone allows you to automatically download and update the software on your phone. Only the internal software is updated. No Contacts entries or other information saved on your phone will be deleted. To access the Update Phone setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Update Phone. 4. Touch Update Firmware. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to update your phone. Voice Memo A total of 10 minutes in 10 separate memos can be recorded and saved. Individual memos can record up to 60 seconds of audio. To record a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Record. (The phone prompts you to start recording after the beep.) 5. Wait for the beep and then start speaking.59 Tools • Touch Pause to pause the recording of the memo. (When a memo is paused, touch Resume to start recording again.) 6. Touch Finish to stop the recording and save it to the phone. To play a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voice memos.) 5. Touch a memo to play it. • Touch Pause to pause the recording of the memo. (When a memo is paused, touch Resume to start recording again.) To erase a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voice memos.) 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch the voice memo(s) that you want to delete. Selected entries are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected voice memos. To erase all voice memos: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Erase All. 5. Touch Delete to delete all of the voice memos in the list. To edit a voice memo caption: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools.Tools 60 Tools 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voicememos.) 5. Touch beside the voice memo you want to edit. 6. Touch Edit Caption. 7. The phone switches to Landscape mode. Use the keyboard to edit the caption. 8. Touch Save to save the caption. To view voice memo information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voicememos.) 5. Touch beside the voice memo you want to edit. 6. Touch Info. 7. View the voice memo’s information (Title, Recorded Date, and Length). 8. Press to return to the previous screen.61 Calls Calls Your phone displays your call history, which includes incoming, outgoing, and missed calls. Recent Calls makes redialing a number fast and easy. The list of your call history is continually updated as new numbers are added to the beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the bottom of the list. When you place, accept, or miss a call, a record of the call is saved in the Recent Calls list. When you view the numbers in this list, the phone icon to the left of the number indicates the call type: • Received: Indicates any received calls that were answered. • Missed: Indicates any missed calls. • Dialed: Indicates all outgoing calls made from your phone. Each entry contains a phone number (if available) and Contacts entry name (if the phone number is in your Contacts). Duplicate calls (same number and type of call) might only appear once in the list. To call an entry in the Recent Calls list: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch an entry’s phone number to dial it. Tip: You can also access your list of recent calls by pressing . Note: You cannot make calls from within the Recent Calls list that are identified as No Caller ID or Restricted. Note: Recent Calls only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on. If a call is received while your phone is turned off, it will not be included in the phone’s call history. SMS conversation histories are also saved. If you return a call from the voicemail menu, it will not be included in your phone’s history.Calls 62 Calls Recent Calls Options To display the Recent Calls options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch to display the entry’s options. Tip: An unknown entry only displays a contact number. A known entry (found in the Contacts list) displays the entry’s name and contact number. 4. If the entry is not currently part of your Contacts list, touching displays the following options: • Save: To store the entry in your Contacts list. • Call: To dial the phone number for the currently selected entry. • Message: To send the current history entry a new text message. 5. If the entry has previously been entered into your Contacts list, touching displays the Contacts entry page and the following options: • Caller’s name: Displays if the number is already in your Contacts. • Edit Entry ( ): To either edit the existing number (if already in your Contacts list) or create a new entry. • Send New Text Message ( ): To send a text message to the current recent call entry. • Send Contact: Delivers the current recent call entry information to an available user via a wireless connection. See ‘Bluetooth” on page 63.63 Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as headsets, hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless phones. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 10 meters (30 feet). Note: There are many Bluetooth devices in the market whose compatibility with the SPHm350 cannot be guaranteed. Enabling Bluetooth By default, your device’s Bluetooth functionality is turned off. Turning Bluetooth on makes your phone “discoverable” to other in-range Bluetooth devices. To turn Bluetooth on or off: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch the Bluetooth button to toggle it On or Off. (The page refreshes to display new functionality and options.) Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance: • Bluetooth is active and visible. • Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device. • Bluetooth is active, visible and searching for a compatible device. Visibility The Visibility setting allows you to manage your availability to other Bluetooth devices. To configure your phone’s visibility (discoverability): 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Visibility. 4. Select a Visibility setting: • Always visible: Allows other Bluetooth devices to detect and identify your phone.Bluetooth 64 Bluetooth • Visible for 3min: Allows other devices to detect and identify your phone for three minutes before changing your status to hidden. • Hidden: Prevents other Bluetooth devices from detecting and identifying your phone. Trusted Devices Displays a list of trusted connections between your phone and other Bluetooth devices. To display the list of trusted devices: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. The phone searches for the other devices with which it has a trusted connection and displays them in a list. Device Info Displays your phone’s Bluetooth profiles and address. To view the device information for your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Device Info. Device Name Your phone’s Bluetooth name will appear to other in-range Bluetooth devices, depending on your Visibility settings. To change your Bluetooth name for your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Device name. 4. The phone switches to Landscape mode. Use the keyboard to edit the current name. See "Using the Keyboard" on page 21. Tip: Give your handset an easily recognized name so other people can select your handset quickly in environments in which multiple Bluetooth devices are visible.65 Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth Devices Paired Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your phone and another Bluetooth device. When devices are paired, a passkey is shared between devices, allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process. Note: To pair Bluetooth devices with your phone it must be visible to other devices. See "Visibility" on page 63. To pair your phone with another Bluetooth device: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. Your phone searches for and then displays a list of discovered, in-range Bluetooth devices. 4. Scroll down the list and touch a device name to begin the pairing process. 5. If necessary, enter the passkey (PIN) for the external device and touch Pair. 6. Once the recipient enters the passkey the pairing will be complete. Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-compatible devices. To disconnect your paired device: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. Your phone searches for and then displays a list of discovered, in-range Bluetooth devices. 4. Touch an entry’s name in the Trusted Devices list to begin the disconnection process.Bluetooth 66 Bluetooth Sending Items Via Bluetooth You can send data saved on your phone to another bluetooth device. To send contact information via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch Contacts to begin searching in your available Contacts (Transfer Contacts list). 6. Select a Contacts entry from the Transfer contacts page. Selected Contacts are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Send. 8. Touch Send again to confirm the transfer. 9. The recipient must accept the incoming Contact card. Accepting places a copy of the incoming entry into the recipient’s Contacts list. To send My Info via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch My Info to send your contact information to the recipient. • If you have not created a My Info card, use the keypad to enter your personal information in the required fields, such as your name, phone numbers, email addresses, url, etc. Touch Done, touch the target Bluetooth device in the list, and touch My Info. 6. The recipient must accept the incoming My Info data. Accepting places a copy of the information on the recipient’s phone. To send pictures via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices.67 Bluetooth 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch My Album to begin searching for an available image. 6. Touch a folder and touch a picture to send. You can select multiple pictures, which are then highlighted in blue. • To deselect a picture, touch it again so that it is no longer highlighted. 7. Touch OK to accept the image selection and begin transferring the image(s). 8. The recipient must either accept or decline the incoming image file.My Downloads 68 My Downloads My Downloads You can download the following types of items to your phone: • Ringers: Allows you to download and assign ringer types to voice calls. • Wallpaper: Allows you to download and assign wallpaper to your phone. • Games: Allows you to download and play games. You can also play pre-installed demo games. • Applications: Allows you to download and run applications on your phone. Downloading To download items to your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Ringers, Wallpaper, Games, or Applications. 4. Touch Get New... The browser will launch and take you to the specified download menu. 5. Highlight and select the item that you want to download. (For more information on navigating the Web, see "Navigating the Web" on page 31.) 6. Follow the web page instructions to complete your purchase. Note: You can store a limited number of downloaded applications, ringers, wallpapers, games, and themes on your phone, depending on the file sizes. To check the Memory Status, touch Menu, touch Settings, touch General, and then touch Memory status. Assigning Ringers and Wallpaper Assigning Downloaded Ringers You may assign a ringer to more than one type of call. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Ringers. 4. Touch a ringer to select it. 5. Touch Play. 6. Touch Assign To to assign the ringer to a phone function. 7. Touch Voice Call, Contact ID, Voicemail, Message, Alarm/Timer/Calendar.69 My Downloads Assigning Downloaded Wallpaper You can assign a Wallpaper to more than one task. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Wallpaper. 4. Touch an image from the list. 5. Touch Assign. 6. Touch Background. Note: Wallpaper for Contacts and Incoming/Outgoing Calls can also be set. Playing Games 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Games. 4. Touch the game you want to play. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the game. When you are finished, touch Exit (or Quit). Launching Applications 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Applications. 4. Touch the application you want to launch. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to launch the application. When you are finished, select Exit (or Quit). Note: Your phone comes equipped with preloaded tools such as Backup Manager. To activate these services, please contact your service provider.Camera 70 Camera Camera You can take pictures with your phone’s built-in camera. Taking Pictures To take a picture: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. Tip: To activate Camera mode, you can also press and hold the side camera button (see "Portrait Mode Phone Features” on page 1). 4. Using the phone’s display screen as a viewfinder, aim the camera lens at your subject. 5. Press until the shutter sounds. (Make sure the camera is steady.) The picture is automatically saved in the current default storage location (by default, this is In phone). Note: Pictures can be stored in either the phone’s internal memory or on a microSD™ card (sold separately). Your phone’s internal memory contains 100 MB of storage capacity and the phone can support microSD™ cards of up to 32 GB. 6. Take a few minutes to get familiarized with the layout of the Camera screen. Resolution White Balance Battery Charge Settings Display Image Saved Location View My Photos Folder71 Camera My Album Pictures are stored on the phone and accessed through My Album. Using My Album To use My Album: 1. When the picture has been taken, touch to open the display screen, displaying the current picture. • You can also touch Menu, touch Camera, and touch My Album. 2. Touch a CAMERA folder on either the phone or microSD™ card. 3. Select a picture file. To use the My Album options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch one of the options: • Slideshow ( ): Display a slideshow sequence of the pictures in the current folder. • Send ( ): Send the picture via Messaging or Bluetooth. • Delete ( ): Delete the active file. To use the Picture options: 1. Touch Menu. Picture Launch Slideshow Send Delete Grid ViewCamera 72 Camera 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch an picture and select one of the following options: • Delete ( ): Delete the active file. • Bluetooth ( ): Send the picture via Bluetooth. • Slideshow ( ): Display a slideshow sequence of the pictures in the current folder. • Zoom ( ): Increase/decrease the magnification of the currently active file. • Send ( ): Send the picture via Messaging or Bluetooth. • Information ( ): Display information about the current picture, such as File Name, Date, File Size, and Resolution. • Assign ( ): Assign the active picture to either a Picture ID picture or as a Background. Assigning Pictures To assign a picture to a Contacts entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch the picture that you want to use with the Contacts entry. 6. Touch and touch Picture ID. • This option allows the selected picture to be displayed when an incoming call is from the selected Contacts entry. 7. Prepare the selected image for use (by adjusting, cropping, and zooming), and then touch OK. 8. Touch an entry in the Contacts page to complete the picture assignment. To assign a picture to the background display: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album.73 Camera 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch the picture that you want to use as the background. 6. Touch and touch Background. • This option allows the selected picture to be displayed as the background image. 7. Prepare the selected image for use (only resize and rotate are available), and then touch OK. Storing Pictures Even if a microSD™ card is detected, all pictures are automatically stored in the phone’s CAMERA folder. To use the larger storage capacity of an internal microSD™ card, the storage destination must be set differently. To set the storage options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. 4. Touch and touch Storage. 5. Touch Phone or Memory Card. Camera Settings The settings associated with the full-color digital camera allow you to customize how the camera operates when taking pictures. To set a camera option: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. 4. Touch and touch one of the following options: • Self-Timer: Allows you to configure a timer to be Off, 5 sec or 10 sec. • Resolution: Allows you to change the resolution of pictures. Pictures taken at a higher resolution require more memory to save. The available sizes are 1.3M, 0.5M, 0.3M, or 0.1M. • Color Tone: Allows you to set the primary color tone of the picture to None, Mono, Negative, Sepia, Green, or Aqua. • Metering: Allows you to set the metering to be Center or Spot.Camera 74 Camera • Night Mode: Allows you to set the camera to take pictures in low light situations. You can set the option to be On or Off. • Image Quality: Allows you to select between High, Normal, and Economy. These settings reflect the picture quality settings for the pictures. • White Balance: Allows you to set the white balance to Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten, Flourescent, or Manual. • Show Grid: Allows you to set the pictures to be displayed in a grid. You can set the option to be On or Off. • Shutter Sound: Allows you to select between different shutter sounds. The shutter sound is heard when you take a picture. • Storage: Allows you to switch the saved file location between Phone or Memory Card.75 Settings Settings Display You can choose what you see on the display screen when powering on/off and when using the phone. You can also control the brightness of the display screen and keyboard. Background You can set the picture the appears on the display screen when in standby mode and for incoming/outgoing calls. To change the wallpaper: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Background. 5. Touch one of the following options: Take Picture, Preset Images, My Album, or My Downloads. • Take Picture: Use the camera take picture. Touch OK to assign the picture to the background. • Preset Images: Touch a picture from the display of preset images. A larger picture opens. Touch Assign to assign the picture to the background. • My Album: Use a picture from a folder in My Album. Touch the picture and then touch OK to assign it to the background. • My Downloads: Use a picture that you have downloaded from the web. Touch the picture and then touch OK to assign it to the background. Greeting 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Greeting. The phone switches to Landscape mode. 5. Use the keyboard to enter the greeting that you want to display when in standby mode. 6. Touch Save. Note: The Greeting menu does not appear when using the Bell phone interface.Settings 76 Settings Brightness You can change the brightness of the LCD screen, making it brighter or dimmer. To change the brightness setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Use the Brightness slider to adjust the brightness of the display screen. Screen Backlight The backlight setting lets you select how long the display screen is backlit after it has last been touched. To change the backlight setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Dim. 5. Touch one of the following options to set the length of time that the display screen remains lit after last being touched: Never Dim, 30 seconds, 15 seconds, 8 seconds, or Always Dim. • Never Dim: The backlight does not turn off or become darker. • Always Dim: The brightness of the backlight is reduced. Note: Long backlight settings reduce the battery’s talk and standby times. Keypad Backlight The keypad light setting lets you select how long the keyboard light is on after any key press is made. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Keypad Backight. 5. Touch one of the following options: Always On, 1 minute, 30 seconds, or 15 seconds.77 Settings Language Language selection changes all menu settings. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Language. 5. Touch English or French. Volume Adjust your phone’s volume settings to suit your needs and your environment. Ringer Volume To adjust the volume of the ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Volume. 4. In the Ringer Volume area, use the Level slider to adjust the volume level of the ringer. 5. Toggle Always Vibrate to be On or Off. Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume (or the earpiece volume during a call) using the volume buttons on the left side of the phone. System Volume To adjust the system volume: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Volume. 4. In the System Volume area, use the Level slider to adjust the volume level of the system. 5. Toggle Touch Vibrate to be On or Off. 6. Toggle Touch Tone to be On or Off. 7. Toggle Startup/Shutdown to be On or Off.Settings 78 Settings Silence All This option allows you to mute all sounds without turning off your phone. To silence your phone: • Press and hold the volume button on the left side of the phone down until Silence All is displayed onscreen. To deactivate Silence All: • Press and hold the volume button on the left side of the phone up repeatedly to select a new volume level. Ringers & Vibrations Ringer types help you to identify incoming calls and messages. You can assign ringer types to individual Contacts entries, types of calls, and types of messages. The phone provides a variety of ringer options that allow you to customize your ringer and volume settings. These options allow you to identify incoming calls, messages, voicemails, alarms, timers, and calendar entries by their rings. Voice Call To set the voice call ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Voicemail To set the voicemail ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Message To set the message ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use.79 Settings Alarm/Timer/Calendar To set the alarm/timer/calendar ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Voice Notification This feature will call out the phone number instead of using your assigned ringer. To adjust the voice notification: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Toggle Voice Notification to be On or Off. Messaging You can send and receive many different kinds of text messages with your phone without placing a voice call. See "Messaging" on page 34. Messaging settings make text messaging easier by letting you decide how you want to be notified of new messages. • Reminder: Sets the number of times that the message reminder is displayed. Touch Off, Once, or Every 2 min. • Callback #: Sets the default callback number used when sending messages. Touch None, your mobile phone number, or Other (allows you to enter a different number using the keyboard). • Auto-Erase: Touch Yes to have the phone automatically erase old messages when the folders are full. • Draft Alert: Toggle On or Off to have the phone display an alert when a message is saved to the Draft folder. General Phone Information To display the phone’s information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General.Settings 80 Settings 4. Touch Phone Information. 5. The phone displays the phone number, MSID number, Firmware Version, and Advanced information. Memory status To display the phone’s memory status: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Memory status. 5. The phone displays the amount of memory that has been used in both the phone and memory card. Airplane Mode When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information. All incoming calls will be sent directly to your Voicemail box. The Bluetooth interface will be disabled when Airplane Mode is on. To set your phone to Airplane Mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Airplane Mode. (A brief explanation of Airplane Mode will display.) 5. Touch OK to toggle Airplane Mode to be On or Off. Note: While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s standby screen will display “Phone Off”. Location The Location feature allows the network to detect your position. Turning Location off will hide your location from everyone except 911. Note: Even if the Location feature is enabled, no service may use your location information without your expressed permission. To enable your phone’s Location feature: 1. Touch Menu.81 Settings 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Location. (A brief explanation will display. Scroll up or down to read the entire text.) 5. Touch OK. One Hand operation You can configure the Power Search tab to be on the left or right of the display screen. For example, when the Right Handed option is selected, the Power Search tab is located on the right side of the screen and Contacts entries are selected by pressing their field names along the left side of the display screen. To modify one hand operation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch One Hand operation. 5. Touch Right Handed or Left Handed. This places the Power Search tab along the right or left side of the display screen respectively. TTY See "TTY Use With Handset" on page 18 and "Voice Command" on page 25. Ignore with Text Sends an incoming call to your voicemail box and automatically sends the caller a text message at the same time. You can select a preset message to be sent or create a custom message. To use Ignore with Text: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Ignore with Text. 5. Touch to create a custom message. The phone switches to Landscape mode. • You can also touch a preset message in the list. 6. Use the keyboard to enter the text for the message.Settings 82 Settings 7. Touch Save. Touch Sensitivity Your phone’s touchscreen requires a small amount of pressure to operate. The smaller the size of your contact point on the display screen, the less amount of pressure required. The tip of your finger will work better than the pad of your finger and a fingernail will require even less pressure. Initially, your phone’s sensitivity is set to the highest level. When you have discovered your preffered method of operating your touchscreen, you may find that it is too sensitive for some applications. You can adjust how sensitive the phone is to touch actions on the screen. To adjust the touch sensitivity: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Touch Sensitivity. 5. Touch and drag the slider left or right to adjust the sensitivity level. 6. Touch Touch here to gauge the response of the new sensitivity level. Touch Calibration The Touch Calibration feature allows you to re-align the screen’s touch accuracy. Use this feature only when the device does not respond properly when you touch the screen. To adjust the calibration: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Touch Calibration. 5. Touch the center of the target and repeat this step as the target moves around the four corners of the screen. • Touch Restore to restore the target to its original calibration. • Touch Retry to try the calibration again. Note: When touching the screen in Calibration mode, you must touch the center of the cross hair area. 6. When the calibration is completed, touch Yes to accept the calibration.83 Settings 7. A New setting has been saved confirmation message is displayed. Text Entry The Text Entry menu allows you to customize how text functions on your phone. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Text Entry. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Predictive Text: If toggled On, the phone analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word database and creates a suitable word. (The word might change as you type.) Other word suggestions are listed below the text. • Auto Capital: Automatically capitalizes the first word of a sentence. • Auto Space: Automatically adds a space after you select a word. • Dual Language: Displays word options from both the English and French dictionaries if Predictive Text is toggled On. • Personal Dictionary: Allows you to add words to a custom dictionary. • Word Choice List: Toggle On to display the list of predicted words. • Word Prediction: Toggle On to only display possible word candidates after a preset number of characters have been entered. • Use My Words: Allows you to use a custom database of words. • Help: Provides additional information on using Predictive Text (or T9) entry. Web Browser You can quickly clear the background information that is gathered when you use the web browser. To clear the web browser: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Web Browser. 4. Touch one of the following options: Clear Cache, Clear Cookies, or Clear History. 5. Touch Clear to confirm the action.Settings 84 Settings Speech to Action Allows you to configure the verbal Confirmation, activate the training mode (Adaptation), configure the Expert and Prompt modes, or get information about the Speech to Action software that is used with the Voice Command functionality. Confirmation Your phone can be configured to take a specific action prior to initiating any voice command parameter. To change the confirmation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Confirmation. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Automatic: Always provides you with options if there was an issue registering the command, confirm any commands, and then announce any actions. • Always Confirm: Always confirms any command actions before they are done, even if it was properly registered. • Never Confirm: Never confirms any command operations. The phone will always act on what it registers as the current command, even if it is incorrect and without notifying you. Adaptation Allows you to adapt the voice command system to properly recognize your voice. To adapt the system to your voice: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Adaptation. 5. Touch Adapt Voice. 6. Touch Start. 7. Hold the phone so that the microphone is approximately six inches away from your mouth and you can clearly read the onscreen number sequences.85 Settings 8. Repeat either the numbers or words shown onscreen using a normal tone of voice. • If the phone cannot recognize your words, it will continue to display the same information onscreen. 9. Repeat the previous step for the remaining sets of numbers or words. 10. When you have finished with a ful session, Adapting appears on the display screen. 11. Touch OK to save. Note: It is recommended that you perform the complete Adapt Voice session at least once to achive the maximum benefit of this feature. If a partial adaptation is performed, you can always return later and resume the process from the halfway point. Audio Modes You can customize whether the Voice Command feature displays a list of the top Voice Command options or automatically dials the first number without displaying a list of options. To change the audio mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Audio Modes. 5. Select one of the following options: • Expert Mode: Displays both a selectable list of matching entries. If the first entry is not correct, the phone will continue to read out each available option until it detects either a confirmation (Yes) or rejection (No). • Prompt Mode: Displays a selectable list of available dialing options and only reads out the entry name. You are required to touch an onscreen option to activate a command. About Displays information about the software manufacturer and version.Settings 86 Settings Lock When your phone is locked, your screen turns off and neither the display screen or keyboard will accept input. Regaining access requires entering a lock code. To lock your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Lock. 4. Use the onscreen keypad to enter a new Lock Code and touch Done. 5. Use the onscreen keypad to re-enter the new Lock Code and touch Done again. 6. Touch the Lock Off button. 7. Read the onscreen information and touch OK to activate the Lock feature (the button is toggled to On). Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of your Mobile Directory Number or try 0000. If none of these work, call Customer Service at 1-800-Samsung. Reset You can reset your phone to its factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings. Reset Settings Resetting the phone settings only restores all of the factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings. Onboard data, such as Contacts, History, Scheduler, and Messaging are not affected. To reset your phone’s settings: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Reset Settings. 5. Read the disclaimer, write down the lock code, and touch Proceed. 6. Enter the lock code provided in the disclaimer using the onscreen keypad. 7. Touch Done to reset the phone’s settings.87 Settings Delete Contents You can quickly erase selected content that you have created or stored in your phone. To delete your phone’s contents: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Delete Contents. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Delete Contacts: Deletes all Contacts entries. • Delete Downloads: Deletes all downloaded content, such as games, ringers, and images. • Delete Messages: Deletes all recieved text and picture messages. • Delete Calender: Deletes all calendar events. • Delete Speed Dial: Deletes all speed dial entries. 6. Touch a category entry and then touch Delete to confirm the deletion. 7. The onscreen keypad displays. Write down the lock code that is displayed at the top of the screen. 8. Enter the lock code that is displayed at the top of the screen using the onscreen keypad and touch Done. Reset Phone Resetting the phone restores all of the factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings and deletes all content stored on the phone. To reset your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Reset Phone. 5. Read the disclaimer, write down the lock code, and touch Proceed. 6. Enter the lock code provided in the disclaimer using the onscreen keypad. 7. Touch Done to reset the phone’s to its factory default state. Roaming See "Roaming" on page 23.Safety 88 Safety Safety Getting the Most Out of Your Reception Keeping Tabs on Signal Strength The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal strength in your area. Your phone informs you of the current signal strength by displaying a number of bars next to the signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the signal. If you’re inside a building, being near a window may give you better reception. Understanding the Power Save Feature If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it periodically rechecks service availability or you can check it yourself by pressing any key. Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a message displays on the screen. When a signal is found, your phone returns to standby mode. Understanding How Your Phone Operates Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode. Knowing Radio Frequency Safety The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP standards described below. In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP). Maintaining Your Phone’s Peak Performance There are several simple guidelines for operating your phone properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service. • Speak directly into the mouthpiece. • Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery. If it’s inoperable, return it to a dealer store or call Customer Support for service.89 Safety Note: For the best care of your phone, only authorized personnel should service your phone and accessories. Faulty service may void the warranty. Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone Failure to follow the instructions outlined may lead to serious personal injury and possible property damage. Using Your Phone While Driving Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety always comes first. When using your phone in the car: • Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial and re-dial. • When available, use a hands-free device. • Position your phone within easy reach. • Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when stationary or before pulling into traffic. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your attention from the road. • Dial 911 to report serious emergencies. It’s free from your wireless phone. • Use your phone to help others in emergencies. • Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary. Following Safety Guidelines To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or danger. Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment.Safety 90 Safety RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Note: Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before using the phone near medical equipment. Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air. Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off your phone when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating that two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives. Turn off your phone when you are in an area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it is rare, your phone or its accessories could generate sparks. Sparks could cause an explosion or a fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. These areas include: • Fueling areas such as gas stations. • Below deck on boats. • Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities. • Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. • Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s engine.91 Safety Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories. Restricting Children’s Access to your Phone Your phone is not a toy. Children should not be allowed to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the phone, dial 911 by mistake or make calls that increase your phone bill. Warning Regarding Display The display on your handset is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your handset is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. Caring for the Battery Protecting Your Battery The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s performance. • Use only Samsung approved batteries and desktop chargers. These chargers are designed to maximize battery life. Using other batteries or chargers voids your warranty and may cause damage. • In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32º F to 113º F (0º C to 45º C). • Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the bathroom. • Never dispose of the battery by incineration. • Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean. • Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time. • It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. When used correctly, the battery can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing. • Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules: • Less than one month: -4º F to 140º F (-20º C to 60º C) • More than one month: -4º F to 113º F (-20º C to 45º C) Disposal of Lithium Ion (LiIon) Batteries For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest service center.Safety 92 Safety Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. Note: For safety, do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery. Acknowledging Special Precautions and Industry Canada Notice Cautions Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment, and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the phone warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone. Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it. Information to User This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation; if this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient/relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless Phones The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset. The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All phone models are 93 Safety tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone design and other factors. What is important to remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety. All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public. The highest reported SAR values of the SPH-m350 are: CDMA mode (Part 22) - Head: 0.68W/kg; Body-worn: 1.15W/kg PCS mode (Part 24) - Head: 1.08W/kg; Body-worn: 1.31W/kg Owner’s Record The model number, regulatory number and serial number are located on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future. Model: SPH-m350 Serial No.: User Guide Proprietary Notice CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following patents: 4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797 5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501 5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239 5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338 5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569 5,490,165 5,511,073 T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending.Manufacturer’s Warranty 94 Manufacturer’s Warranty STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY What is Covered and For How Long? SAMSUNG Electronics Canada Inc. ("SAMSUNG") warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that SAMSUNG's phones and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date: What is Not Covered? This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress, or modification of any part of Product, including antenna, or cosmetic damage; (b) equipment that has the serial number removed or made illegible; (c) any plastic surfaces or other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal use; (d) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product in conjunction with accessories, products, or ancillary/ peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (e) defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, or adjustment; (f) installation, maintenance, and service of Product; or (g) Product used or purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if: (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified. What are SAMSUNG's Obligations? During the applicable warranty period, SAMSUNG will repair or replace, at SAMSUNG's sole option, without charge to Purchaser, any defective component part of Product. To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by Purchaser's sales receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale showing the date of purchase, the serial number of Product and the sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-800- Samsung. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product or replace Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced leather cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for 90 days, whichever is longer. All replaced parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. What Are the Limits On SAMSUNG's Liability? EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Leather Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days Game Pad 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year95 Manufacturer’s Warranty • THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; • WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT; • DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; • THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR • COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY ARISE BY OPERATION OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE OR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND SHALL BE PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW PERMITS. THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT. THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.Manufacturer’s Warranty 96 This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees, distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and should not be relied upon. Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. ©2010 Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. SAMSUNG is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its related entities. No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. #861826 v2 | 403234297 Index Index A Add Call 17 Airplane Mode 80 Alarm Clock 54 B Battery capacity 6 charging 7 disposal 91 installing 6 protecting 91 removing 7 Bluetooth 63–67 device information 64 device name 64 disconnecting pairing 65 enabling 63 my info 66 pairing 65 send data 66 trusted devices 64 visibility 63 C Calendar 51 Call Waiting 17 Caller ID 16 Calls 61 answering 12 disconnecting 13 making 12 Camera 70–74 assigning pictures 72 my album 71 settings 73 storing pictures 73 taking pictures 70 Contacts 45 adding new 45 editing existing 46 finding 46 save a phone number 45 D Display 75 background 75 brightness 76 greeting 75 keypad backlight 76 language 77 screen backlight 76 Display Screen Symbols 3 Displaying Your Phone Number 11 Draft Alert 42 E Emergency Numbers 13 End-of-Call Options 14 Entering Text T9 text input 20 I Icon Glossary 3 Ignore with Text 81 In-Call Options 13 Incoming Call answering 12 Indicator signal strength 3 K Keyboard 20 L Landscape Mode 3 keyboard 20 Location 80 Lock Phone 86Index 98 M Memory Card 9 installing 9 Memory Status 80 Menu accessing 11 layout 30 Message Alert 41 Messaging 34 alert setup 44 auto-erase 42 email 37 instant messaging 37 picture message settings 43 picture messaging 35 settings 39 text message settings 42 text messaging 34 voicemail 37 microSD 9 installing 9 Missed Call Notification 13 My Album 71 options 71 My Downloads 68–69 assigning downloaded ringers 68 assigning downloaded wallpaper 69 downloading applications 68 downloading games 68 downloading ringers 68 downloading wallpaper 68 launching applications 69 playing games 69 N Name Lookup 27 O One Hand Operation 81 P Phone Information 79 Phone Number 11 dialing with pauses 16 displaying tour phone number 11 finding 15 saving 15 Phone Numbers speed dialing 16 Portrait Mode 1 Predictive Text 20 Preset Messages 40 R Recent Calls 61 options 62 Reset Phone 86 Ringer alarm 79 calendar 79 message 78 timer 79 voice call 78 voice notification 79 voicemail 78 Roaming 23 other digital networks 23 setting 23 update PRL 24 S Safety 88 Save in Outbox 42 Settings 75 display 75 general 79 lock 86 messaging 79 reset 86 ringers & vibrations 78 speech to action 84 touch calibration 82 volume 77 web browser 83 Speed Dialing 1699 Index T T9 Text Input 20 Text edit 22 entering 20 numbers 21 punctuation 21 symbols 21 text 21 text entry settings 83 using the keyboard 21 Text Entry Settings 83 Three-Way Calling 17 Tools 48 alarm clock 54 calculator 49 calendar 51 daylight saving time 57 music 58 notes 50 self serve 48 stopwatch 56 timer 55 tip calculator 49 unit convertor 49 update phone 58 voice command 48 voice memo 58 world clock 56 Touch Calibration 82 Touch Sensitivity 82 Travel Adapter 8 TTY 18, 81 Turning Your Phone On and Off 5 U Using the Travel Adapter 8 V Voice Command 25 activate 25 adaptation 84 audio mode 85 call 25 changing audio guidance mode 29 check 27 confirmation 84 customizing 28 go to 27 lookup 27 send text 26 Voicemail 37 clearing 38 notification 38 retrieving 38 Volume 77 ringer 77 silence all 78 system 77 W Warranty 94 Wireless Web bookmark 32 downloading items 68 launching the browser 31 Navigating 31 navigating 31 navigating menus 33 SPH-m350 P O R T A B L E D u a l - M o d e T E L E P H O N E User Guide Please read this manual before operating your phone, and keep it for future reference. BMC_m350_UG_EN_0716010_D8Intellectual Property All Intellectual Property, as defined below, owned by or which is otherwise the property of Samsung or its respective suppliers relating to the SAMSUNG Phone, including but not limited to, accessories, parts, or software relating thereto (the “Phone System”), is proprietary to Samsung and protected under federal laws, provincial laws, and international treaty provisions. Intellectual Property includes, but is not limited to, inventions (patentable or unpatentable), patents, trade secrets, copyrights, software, computer programs, and related documentation and other works of authorship. You may not infringe or otherwise violate the rights secured by the Intellectual Property. Moreover, you agree that you will not (and will not attempt to) modify, prepare derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to create source code from the software. No title to or ownership in the Intellectual Property is transferred to you. All applicable rights of the Intellectual Property shall remain with SAMSUNG and its suppliers. Copyright © 2010 Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc.. SAMSUNG is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its related entities. Licensed by Qualcomm Incorporated under one or more of the following patents: U.S. Patent No. 4, 901, 307; 5, 056, 109; 5, 099, 204; 5, 101, 501; 5, 103, 459; 5, 107, 225; 5, 109, 390. Openwave ® is a registered Trademark of Openwave, Inc. RSA ® is a registered Trademark of RSA Security, Inc. Post-it ® is a registered Trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company aka 3M CORPORATION DELAWARE. The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.Disclaimer of Warranties; Exclusion of Liability Except as set forth in the express warranty contained on the warranty page enclosed with the product, the purchaser takes the product "as is", and Samsung makes no express or implied warranty of any kind whatsoever with respect to the product, including but not limited to the merchantability of the product or its fitness for any particular purpose or use; the design, condition or quality of the product; the performance of the product; the workmanship of the product or the components contained therein; or compliance of the product with the requirements of any law, rule, specification or contract pertaining thereto. Nothing contained in the instruction manual shall be construed to create an express or implied warranty of any kind whatsoever with respect to the product. In addition, Samsung shall not be liable for any damages of any kind resulting from the purchase or use of the product or arising from the breach of the express warranty, including incidental, special or consequential damages, or loss of anticipated profits or benefits. Privacy The privacy and copyright laws of Canada govern the disclosure, reproduction and distribution of data, media and other content, including music and video content. Certain activities, including downloads or transfer by any means (including, via cable, Bluetooth® or otherwise) of such content may be an infringement of privacy or copyright law. Neither Samsung Electronics Canada Inc. nor any of its affiliates shall be liable or responsible for any data or content disclosed, reproduced, downloaded or distributed by the user of this equipment. Warning Depending on the user interface used in the handset, you may experience slow keypad response when performing tasks in the background. This can impact making phone calls. When there is no activity or change in the icons at the top of the main LCD display, the handset will resume normal operations.Open Source Announcement Some software components of this product incorporate source code covered under the the Mozilla Public License. And this product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/) To obtain the source code covered under the MPL, please visit http://opensource.samsung.com/category/mobile/mobile-phone/. LICENSE ISSUES ============== The OpenSSL toolkit stays under a dual license, i.e. both the conditions of the OpenSSL License and the original SSLeay license apply to the toolkit. See below for the actual license texts. Actually both licenses are BSD-style Open Source licenses. In case of any license issues related to OpenSSL please contact openssl core@openssl.org. OpenSSL License Copyright (c) 1998-2004 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/ or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software Component License OpenSSL OpenSSL License Mozilla Mozilla Public License 1.1developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http:// www.openssl.org/)" 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact opensslcore@openssl.org. 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL" nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written permission of the OpenSSL Project. 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following acknowledgment: "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Original SSLeay License Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com) All rights reserved. This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com). The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL. This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as the following conditions are adheared to. The following conditions apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in the code are not to be removed. If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution as the author of the parts of the library used. This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/ or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: "This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young(eay@cryptsoft.com)" The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library being used are not cryptographic related:-). 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement: "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)" THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The license and distribution terms for any publically available version or derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be copied and put under another distribution license [including the GNU Public Licence.]Mozilla Public License 1.1 (MPL 1.1) 1. Definitions. 1.0.1. "Commercial Use" means distribution or otherwise making the Covered Code available to a third party. 1.1. ''Contributor'' means each entity that creates or contributes to the creation of Modifications. 1.2. ''Contributor Version'' means the combination of the Original Code, prior Modifications used by a Contributor, and the Modifications made by that particular Contributor. 1.3. ''Covered Code'' means the Original Code or Modifications or the combination of the Original Code and Modifications, in each case including portions thereof. 1.4. ''Electronic Distribution Mechanism'' means a mechanism generally accepted in the software development community for the electronic transfer of data. 1.5. ''Executable'' means Covered Code in any form other than Source Code. 1.6. ''Initial Developer'' means the individual or entity identified as the Initial Developer in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A. 1.7. ''Larger Work'' means a work which combines Covered Code or portions thereof with code not governed by the terms of this License. 1.8. ''License'' means this document. 1.8.1. "Licensable" means having the right to grant, to the maximum extent possible, whether at the time of the initial grant or subsequently acquired, any and all of the rights conveyed herein. 1.9. ''Modifications'' means any addition to or deletion from the substance or structure of either the Original Code or any previous Modifications. When Covered Code is released as a series of files, a Modification is: A. Any addition to or deletion from the contents of a file containing Original Code or previous Modifications. B. Any new file that contains any part of the Original Code or previous Modifications. 1.10. ''Original Code'' means Source Code of computer software code which is described in the Source Code notice required by Exhibit A as Original Code, and which, at the time of its release under this License is not already Covered Code governed by this License. 1.10.1. "Patent Claims" means any patent claim(s), now owned or hereafter acquired, including without limitation, method, process, and apparatus claims, in any patent Licensable by grantor.1.11. ''Source Code'' means the preferred form of the Covered Code for making modifications to it, including all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, scripts used to control compilation and installation of an Executable, or source code differential comparisons against either the Original Code or another well known, available Covered Code of the Contributor's choice. The Source Code can be in a compressed or archival form, provided the appropriate decompression or de-archiving software is widely available for no charge. 1.12. "You'' (or "Your") means an individual or a legal entity exercising rights under, and complying with all of the terms of, this License or a future version of this License issued under Section 6.1. For legal entities, "You'' includes any entity which controls, is controlled by, or is under common control with You. For purposes of this definition, "control'' means (a) the power, direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (b) ownership of more than fifty percent (50%) of the outstanding shares or beneficial ownership of such entity. 2. Source Code License. 2.1. The Initial Developer Grant. The Initial Developer hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license, subject to third party intellectual property claims: (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Initial Developer to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Original Code (or portions thereof) with or without Modifications, and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patents Claims infringed by the making, using or selling of Original Code, to make, have made, use, practice, sell, and offer for sale, and/or otherwise dispose of the Original Code (or portions thereof). (c) the licenses granted in this Section 2.1(a) and (b) are effective on the date Initial Developer first distributes Original Code under the terms of this License. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.1(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for code that You delete from the Original Code; 2) separate from the Original Code; or 3) for infringements caused by: i) the modification of the Original Code or ii) the combination of the Original Code with other software or devices.2.2. Contributor Grant. Subject to third party intellectual property claims, each Contributor hereby grants You a world-wide, royalty-free, non-exclusive license (a) under intellectual property rights (other than patent or trademark) Licensable by Contributor, to use, reproduce, modify, display, perform, sublicense and distribute the Modifications created by such Contributor (or portions thereof) either on an unmodified basis, with other Modifications, as Covered Code and/or as part of a Larger Work; and (b) under Patent Claims infringed by the making, using, or selling of Modifications made by that Contributor either alone and/or in combination with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination), to make, use, sell, offer for sale, have made, and/or otherwise dispose of: 1) Modifications made by that Contributor (or portions thereof); and 2) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with its Contributor Version (or portions of such combination). (c) the licenses granted in Sections 2.2(a) and 2.2(b) are effective on the date Contributor first makes Commercial Use of the Covered Code. (d) Notwithstanding Section 2.2(b) above, no patent license is granted: 1) for any code that Contributor has deleted from the Contributor Version; 2) separate from the Contributor Version; 3) for infringements caused by: i) third party modifications of Contributor Version or ii) the combination of Modifications made by that Contributor with other software (except as part of the Contributor Version) or other devices; or 4) under Patent Claims infringed by Covered Code in the absence of Modifications made by that Contributor. 3. Distribution Obligations. 3.1. Application of License. The Modifications which You create or to which You contribute are governed by the terms of this License, including without limitation Section 2.2. The Source Code version of Covered Code may be distributed only under the terms of this License or a future version of this License released under Section 6.1, and You must include a copy of this License with every copy of the Source Code You distribute. You may not offer or impose any terms on any Source Code version that alters or restricts the applicable version of this License or the recipients' rights hereunder. However, You may include an additional document offering the additional rights described in Section 3.5.3.2. Availability of Source Code. Any Modification which You create or to which You contribute must be made available in Source Code form under the terms of this License either on the same media as an Executable version or via an accepted Electronic Distribution Mechanism to anyone to whom you made an Executable version available; and if made available via Electronic Distribution Mechanism, must remain available for at least twelve (12) months after the date it initially became available, or at least six (6) months after a subsequent version of that particular Modification has been made available to such recipients. You are responsible for ensuring that the Source Code version remains available even if the Electronic Distribution Mechanism is maintained by a third party. 3.3. Description of Modifications. You must cause all Covered Code to which You contribute to contain a file documenting the changes You made to create that Covered Code and the date of any change. You must include a prominent statement that the Modification is derived, directly or indirectly, from Original Code provided by the Initial Developer and including the name of the Initial Developer in (a) the Source Code, and (b) in any notice in an Executable version or related documentation in which You describe the origin or ownership of the Covered Code. 3.4. Intellectual Property Matters (a) Third Party Claims. If Contributor has knowledge that a license under a third party's intellectual property rights is required to exercise the rights granted by such Contributor under Sections 2.1 or 2.2, Contributor must include a text file with the Source Code distribution titled "LEGAL'' which describes the claim and the party making the claim in sufficient detail that a recipient will know whom to contact. If Contributor obtains such knowledge after the Modification is made available as described in Section 3.2, Contributor shall promptly modify the LEGAL file in all copies Contributor makes available thereafter and shall take other steps (such as notifying appropriate mailing lists or newsgroups) reasonably calculated to inform those who received the Covered Code that new knowledge has been obtained. (b) Contributor APIs. If Contributor's Modifications include an application programming interface and Contributor has knowledge of patent licenses which are reasonably necessary to implement that API, Contributor must also include this information in the LEGAL file. (c) Representations. Contributor represents that, except as disclosed pursuant to Section 3.4(a) above, Contributor believes that Contributor's Modifications are Contributor's original creation(s) and/or Contributor has sufficient rights to grant the rights conveyed by this License. 3.5. Required Notices. You must duplicate the notice in Exhibit A in each file of the Source Code. If it is not possible to put such notice in a particular Source Code file due to its structure, then You must include such notice in a location (such as a relevant directory) where a user would be likely to look for such a notice. If You created one or more Modification(s) You may add your name as a Contributor to the notice described in Exhibit A. You must also duplicate this License in any documentation for the Source Code where You describe recipients' rights or ownership rights relating to Covered Code. You may choose to offer, and to charge a fee for, warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligations to one or more recipients of Covered Code. However, You may do so only on Your own behalf, and not on behalf of the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You must make it absolutely clear than any such warranty, support, indemnity or liability obligation is offered by You alone, and You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of warranty, support, indemnity or liability terms You offer. 3.6. Distribution of Executable Versions. You may distribute Covered Code in Executable form only if the requirements of Section 3.1-3.5 have been met for that Covered Code, and if You include a notice stating that the Source Code version of the Covered Code is available under the terms of this License, including a description of how and where You have fulfilled the obligations of Section 3.2. The notice must be conspicuously included in any notice in an Executable version, related documentation or collateral in which You describe recipients' rights relating to the Covered Code. You may distribute the Executable version of Covered Code or ownership rights under a license of Your choice, which may contain terms different from this License, provided that You are in compliance with the terms of this License and that the license for the Executable version does not attempt to limit or alter the recipient's rights in the Source Code version from the rights set forth in this License.If You distribute the Executable version under a different license You must make it absolutely clear that any terms which differ from this License are offered by You alone, not by the Initial Developer or any Contributor. You hereby agree to indemnify the Initial Developer and every Contributor for any liability incurred by the Initial Developer or such Contributor as a result of any such terms You offer. 3.7. Larger Works. You may create a Larger Work by combining Covered Code with other code not governed by the terms of this License and distribute the Larger Work as a single product. In such a case, You must make sure the requirements of this License are fulfilled for the Covered Code. 4. Inability to Comply Due to Statute or Regulation. If it is impossible for You to comply with any of the terms of this License with respect to some or all of the Covered Code due to statute, judicial order, or regulation then You must: (a) comply with the terms of this License to the maximum extent possible; and (b) describe the limitations and the code they affect. Such description must be included in the LEGAL file described in Section 3.4 and must be included with all distributions of the Source Code. Except to the extent prohibited by statute or regulation, such description must be sufficiently detailed for a recipient of ordinary skill to be able to understand it. 5. Application of this License. This License applies to code to which the Initial Developer has attached the notice in Exhibit A and to related Covered Code. 6. Versions of the License. 6.1. New Versions. Netscape Communications Corporation (''Netscape'') may publish revised and/or new versions of the License from time to time. Each version will be given a distinguishing version number. 6.2. Effect of New Versions. Once Covered Code has been published under a particular version of the License, You may always continue to use it under the terms of that version. You may also choose to use such Covered Code under the terms of any subsequent version of the License published by Netscape. No one other than Netscape has the right to modify the terms applicable to Covered Code created under this License.6.3. Derivative Works. If You create or use a modified version of this License (which you may only do in order to apply it to code which is not already Covered Code governed by this License), You must (a) rename Your license so that the phrases ''Mozilla'', ''MOZILLAPL'', ''MOZPL'', ''Netscape'', "MPL", ''NPL'' or any confusingly similar phrase do not appear in your license (except to note that your license differs from this License) and (b) otherwise make it clear that Your version of the license contains terms which differ from the Mozilla Public License and Netscape Public License. (Filling in the name of the Initial Developer, Original Code or Contributor in the notice described in Exhibit A shall not of themselves be deemed to be modifications of this License.) 7. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY. COVERED CODE IS PROVIDED UNDER THIS LICENSE ON AN "AS IS'' BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, WARRANTIES THAT THE COVERED CODE IS FREE OF DEFECTS, MERCHANTABLE, FIT FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NONINFRINGING. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE COVERED CODE IS WITH YOU. SHOULD ANY COVERED CODE PROVE DEFECTIVE IN ANY RESPECT, YOU (NOT THE INITIAL DEVELOPER OR ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR) ASSUME THE COST OF ANY NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY CONSTITUTES AN ESSENTIAL PART OF THIS LICENSE. NO USE OF ANY COVERED CODE IS AUTHORIZED HEREUNDER EXCEPT UNDER THIS DISCLAIMER. 8. TERMINATION. 8.1. This License and the rights granted hereunder will terminate automatically if You fail to comply with terms herein and fail to cure such breach within 30 days of becoming aware of the breach. All sublicenses to the Covered Code which are properly granted shall survive any termination of this License. Provisions which, by their nature, must remain in effect beyond the termination of this License shall survive. 8.2. If You initiate litigation by asserting a patent infringement claim (excluding declatory judgment actions) against Initial Developer or a Contributor (the Initial Developer or Contributor against whom You file such action is referred to as "Participant") alleging that: (a) such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any and all rights granted by such Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 of this License shall, upon 60 days notice from Participant terminate prospectively, unless if within 60 days after receipt of notice You either: (i) agree in writing to pay Participant a mutually agreeable reasonable royalty for Your past and future use of Modifications made by such Participant, or (ii) withdraw Your litigation claim with respect to the Contributor Version against such Participant. If within 60 days of notice, a reasonable royalty and payment arrangement are not mutually agreed upon in writing by the parties or the litigation claim is not withdrawn, the rights granted by Participant to You under Sections 2.1 and/or 2.2 automatically terminate at the expiration of the 60 day notice period specified above. (b) any software, hardware, or device, other than such Participant's Contributor Version, directly or indirectly infringes any patent, then any rights granted to You by such Participant under Sections 2.1(b) and 2.2(b) are revoked effective as of the date You first made, used, sold, distributed, or had made, Modifications made by that Participant. 8.3. If You assert a patent infringement claim against Participant alleging that such Participant's Contributor Version directly or indirectly infringes any patent where such claim is resolved (such as by license or settlement) prior to the initiation of patent infringement litigation, then the reasonable value of the licenses granted by such Participant under Sections 2.1 or 2.2 shall be taken into account in determining the amount or value of any payment or license. 8.4. In the event of termination under Sections 8.1 or 8.2 above, all end user license agreements (excluding distributors and resellers) which have been validly granted by You or any distributor hereunder prior to termination shall survive termination. 9. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES AND UNDER NO LEGAL THEORY, WHETHER TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), CONTRACT, OR OTHERWISE, SHALL YOU, THE INITIAL DEVELOPER, ANY OTHER CONTRIBUTOR, OR ANY DISTRIBUTOR OF COVERED CODE, OR ANY SUPPLIER OF ANY OF SUCH PARTIES, BE LIABLE TO ANY PERSON FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY CHARACTER INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF GOODWILL, WORK STOPPAGE, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, OR ANY AND ALL OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, EVEN IF SUCH PARTY SHALL HAVE BEEN INFORMED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SHALL NOT APPLY TO LIABILITY FOR DEATH OR PERSONAL INJURY RESULTING FROM SUCH PARTY'S NEGLIGENCE TO THE EXTENT APPLICABLE LAW PROHIBITS SUCH LIMITATION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THIS EXCLUSION AND LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. 10. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS. The Covered Code is a ''commercial item,'' as that term is defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101 (Oct. 1995), consisting of ''commercial computer software'' and ''commercial computer software documentation,'' as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212 (Sept. 1995). Consistent with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R. 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4 (June 1995), all U.S. Government End Users acquire Covered Code with only those rights set forth herein. 11. MISCELLANEOUS. This License represents the complete agreement concerning subject matter hereof. If any provision of this License is held to be unenforceable, such provision shall be reformed only to the extent necessary to make it enforceable. This License shall be governed by California law provisions (except to the extent applicable law, if any, provides otherwise), excluding its conflict-of-law provisions. With respect to disputes in which at least one party is a citizen of, or an entity chartered or registered to do business in the United States of America, any litigation relating to this License shall be subject to the jurisdiction of the Federal Courts of the Northern District of California, with venue lying in Santa Clara County, California, with the losing party responsible for costs, including without limitation, court costs and reasonable attorneys' fees and expenses. The application of the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods is expressly excluded. Any law or regulation which provides that the language of a contract shall be construed against the drafter shall not apply to this License. 12. RESPONSIBILITY FOR CLAIMS. As between Initial Developer and the Contributors, each party is responsible for claims and damages arising, directly or indirectly, out of its utilization of rights under this License and You agree to work with Initial Developer and Contributors to distribute such responsibility on an equitable basis. Nothing herein is intended or shall be deemed to constitute any admission of liability. 13. MULTIPLE-LICENSED CODE. Initial Developer may designate portions of the Covered Code as Multiple-Licensed. Multiple-Licensed means that the Initial Developer permits you to utilize portions of the Covered Code under Your choice of the MPL or the alternative licenses, if any, specified by the Initial Developer in the file described in Exhibit A. EXHIBIT A -Mozilla Public License.``The contents of this file are subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the "License"); you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/ Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations under the License. The Original Code is ______________________________________. The Initial Developer of the Original Code is ________________________. Portions created by ______________________ are Copyright (C) ______ _______________________. All Rights Reserved. Contributor(s): ______________________________________. Alternatively, the contents of this file may be used under the terms of the _____ license (the [___] License), in which case the provisions of [______] License are applicable instead of those above. If you wish to allow use of your version of this file only under the terms of the [____] License and not to allow others to use your version of this file under the MPL, indicate your decision by deleting the provisions above and replace them with the notice and other provisions required by the [___] License. If you do not delete the provisions above, a recipient may use your version of this file under either the MPL or the [___] License." [NOTE: The text of this Exhibit A may differ slightly from the text of the notices in the Source Code files of the Original Code. You should use the text of this Exhibit A rather than the text found in the Original Code Source Code for Your Modifications.]Table of Contents Getting Started..............................................................................................1 Portrait Mode Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Landscape Mode Phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Viewing the Display Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Turning Your Phone On and Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Using Your Phone’s Battery and Charger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Using the Travel Adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Using a microSDTM Memory Card in Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Phone Basics..............................................................................................11 Accessing Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Displaying Your Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Making and Answering Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Caller ID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Responding to Call Waiting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Making a Three-Way Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 TTY Use With Handset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Entering Text ..............................................................................................20 Predictive Text Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Using the Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Roaming .....................................................................................................23 Setting Your Roaming Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 Update PRL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Voice Command .........................................................................................25 Customizing Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Main Menu ..................................................................................................30 User Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Menu Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 Web ............................................................................................................31 Navigating the Web . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Creating a Bookmark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Using the Menu to Navigate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Messaging ..................................................................................................34 Text Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Picture Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Instant Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Voicemail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Text Message Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Picture Message Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Alert Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Contacts......................................................................................................45 Adding a New Contact. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Saving a Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Finding Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Editing an Existing Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Tools ...........................................................................................................48 Self Serve. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Calculator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Music . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Update Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Voice Memo. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Calls............................................................................................................61 Recent Calls Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Bluetooth.....................................................................................................63 Enabling Bluetooth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Trusted Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Device Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Device Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Pairing Bluetooth Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Sending Items Via Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66 My Downloads ............................................................................................68 Downloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Assigning Ringers and Wallpaper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Playing Games. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Launching Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 Camera .......................................................................................................70 Taking Pictures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 My Album . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Camera Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Settings.......................................................................................................75 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Volume. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Ringers & Vibrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78Messaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Web Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Speech to Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Roaming. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Safety..........................................................................................................88 Getting the Most Out of Your Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 Caring for the Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Acknowledging Special Precautions and Industry Canada Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Owner’s Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 User Guide Proprietary Notice. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Manufacturer’s Warranty.............................................................................94 Index ...........................................................................................................971 Getting Started Getting Started Portrait Mode Phone Features 1. Earpiece: The Earpiece lets you hear the other caller and automated prompts. 2. Signal Strength Indicator: This shows the signal strength by displaying bars. The more bars displayed, the better the signal strength. 3. Display Screen: The Display Screen shows indicators for signal and battery strength, time, day, and date. It also displays incoming calls or messages. 9. Volume Button 4. Back Key 3. Display Screen 13. Accessories/ Power Cable Jack 7. Camera Lens 11. Microphone 10. microSD Slot 2. Signal Strength Indicator 1. Earpiece 1. Earpiece 12. Camera Button 14. Power/Lock Button 15. Front Indicator Light (LED) 5. Talk Key 6. End Key 16. Headset Jack 8. SpeakerGetting Started 2 Getting Started 4. Back Key: Press to return to the previous menu or screen when navigating features on your phone. 5. Talk Key: Press to answer an incoming call. 6. End Key: Press to end a call. 7. Camera Lens: Allows you to take pictures with the integrated digital camera. 8. Speaker: Allows you to hear a caller’s voice in speakerphone mode, and to hear ringtones and sounds. 9. Volume Button: Allows you to adjust the ringer volume in idle mode or to adjust the voice volume during a call. It can also be used to scroll up or down in various menus to access the options. 10. MicroSD™ Slot: This expansion slot allows you to insert a microSD™ memory card to add additional memory and storage capacity 11. Microphone: The Microphone allows the other caller to hear you clearly when you are speaking to them. 12. Camera Button: This key is used to launch the integrated digital camera. 13. Accessories/Power Cable Jack: The power/accessory interface connector is used to plug in the charging accessories and to connect any available accessory cables to your phone. 14. Power/Lock Button: Allows you to turn on or off, or lock or unlock the phone. In a menu, it returns the phone to the unlock screen and cancels any input. 15. Front Indicator Light (LED): Displays the phone’s connection status. 16. Headset Jack: Allows you to plug in a headset for safe, convenient conversations.3 Getting Started Landscape Mode Phone Features 17. QWERTY Keyboard: A retractable alphnumeric character keyboard layout. 18. Fn Key: Allows you to access the blue numbers/symbols on the QWERTY keyboard. 19. Shift Key: Toggles the alpha characters between mixed case, uppercase, and lowercase. Case remains selected until Shift key is pressed again. 20. Symbol Key: Allows you to access symbol characters. 21. Space Key: Allows you to add spaces between words and characters. 22. Enter/OK Key: Press to select the function highlighted in the current menu or to enter additional lines of text. 23. Back Key: Deletes characters from the display when you are in text entry mode and also returns to the previous menu or previous web page when in a menu or web mode. Viewing the Display Screen The following list identifies the icons you’ll see on your phone’s display screens: Signal Strength: Displays your current signal strength. When you are receiving maximum signal strength, six bars are shown. No Service: Means there is no service because your phone cannot find a signal. Roaming: Indicates that your phone is roaming. 22. Enter/OK Key 19. Shift Key 18. Fn Key 20. Symbol Key 17. QWERTY Keyboard 21. Space Key 23. Back KeyGetting Started 4 Getting Started Data Service Status: Indicates that your 1X connection is active. Incoming voice calls go directly to Voicemail. Outgoing voice calls can be made, but the connection will terminate. Data Service Transmitting/Receiving: Indicates that data is being transferred over the 1X network. The arrow direction indicates whether the handset is sending or receiving data. Data Service Unavailable: Indicates that your 1X connection is unavailable or dormant. Battery Strength: Displays your current battery charge level. Battery Strength Low: Displays your current battery strength at 20% charge remaining. Battery Strength Critical: Displays your current battery strength at 3% charge remaining. Ringers: Indicates that the ringer is turned on. Beep: Indicates that the ringer is set to 1-Beep. Vibrate All: Indicates that your phone is in vibrate all mode. Silence All: Indicates that the phone is set to Silence. Alarm: Indicates that an alarm has been scheduled. Bluetooth Active: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is enabled. Bluetooth Searching: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is searching for available (visible) Bluetooth devices.. Bluetooth Connected: Indicates that Bluetooth technology is connected to a wireless headset. Missed Indicator: Indicates that you have new text messages. It also indicates that you have missed a call, voicemail message, Calendar event, Alarm, Email, Picture Mail, or Text Message.5 Getting Started Turning Your Phone On and Off To turn your phone on: • Press and hold to turn your phone on. Once your phone is On, it displays “Entering SVC area” which indicates that your phone is searching for a signal. When your phone finds a signal, it automatically enters standby mode – the phone’s idle state. At this point, you are ready to begin making and receiving calls. If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically activated. When a signal is found, your phone automatically returns to standby mode. In Power Save mode, your phone searches for a signal periodically without your intervention. You can also initiate a search for service by pressing any key (when your phone is turned On). Tip: The Power Save feature helps to conserve your battery power when you are in an area where there is no signal. To turn your phone off: • Press for two or more seconds until you see the powering down animation on the display screen. Your screen remains blank while your phone is off (unless the battery is charging).Getting Started 6 Getting Started Using Your Phone’s Battery and Charger Battery Capacity Your phone is equipped with a Lithium Ion (LiIon) battery. It allows you to recharge your battery before it is fully drained. When the battery is at 20% charge capacity, is displayed to remind you to recharge the battery. At 3% charge capacity, is displayed and blinks, an audible alert sounds, and the phone powers down. Note: Long backlight settings, low signal strength, searching for service, vibrate mode, playing games, or browser use affect the battery’s talk and standby times. Tip: Be sure to watch your phone’s battery level indicator and charge the battery before it runs out of power. Installing the Battery To install the LiIon battery: 1. Press the top of the battery cover and slide the it in the direction of the arrow to release it. Lift the cover up by the bottom corners to remove it.7 Getting Started 2. Insert the bottom end of the battery into the phone housing in the direction of the arrow printed on the battery. The gold contacts on the bottom of the battery should match those on the phone. 3. Push the top end of the battery down until it snaps into place. 4. Insert the top end of the battery cover into the grooves of the phone. Snap the lid into place. Removing the Battery Note: Make sure the power is off so that you don’t lose any stored numbers or messages. To remove your battery: • Use your finger to lift the battery (top end first) up and away from the phone. Charging the Battery Your phone’s LiIon battery is rechargeable and should be charged as soon as possible so you can begin using your phone. Keeping track of your battery’s charge is important. If your battery level becomes too low, your phone automatically turns off and you will lose all the information you were just working on. For a quick check of your phone’s battery level, glance at the battery charge  Getting Started 8 Getting Started indicator located in the upper-right corner of either of your phone’s display screens. indicates that the battery is full. If the battery charge is getting too low, the battery icon blinks and the phone sounds a warning tone and shuts off. Always use a Samsung-approved desktop charger, travel adapter, or vehicle power adapter to charge your battery. WARNING! FOR CONNECTION TO AN ELECTRICAL SUPPLY NOT LOCATED IN NORTH AMERICA, YOU MUST USE AN ADAPTER OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE POWER OUTLET. USE OF THE WRONG ADAPTER COULD DAMAGE YOUR PHONE AND VOID YOUR WARRANTY. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS. THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION. Note: You must unplug the adapter before removing the battery from the phone during charging to avoid damage. Using the Travel Adapter 1. Locate the interface connector on the side of the phone and pull out and turn the plastic cover. 2. Plug the flat end of the charger into the phone’s charger jack. 3. Plug the other end into an electrical outlet. Correct Incorrect9 Getting Started 4. An animated battery icon is displayed on the main screen and the screen is locked. The icon indicates the battery’s charge state and percent of charge. Note: It takes approximately 4 hours to fully recharge a completely drained standard battery. With the Samsung approved LiIon battery, you can recharge the battery before it drains completely. Using a microSD TM Memory Card in Your Phone Your phone is capable of supporting a memory storage media known as a microSD TM memory card. This card is the newest standard of flash memory specifically designed for use with ultra-small mobile phones and other devices. It is ideal for storing media-rich files, such as music and photographs in your phone. The maximum storage size for this media card is 32 GB. Note: Compatibility with all high capacity microSD TM memory cards is not guaranteed. Using non-recommended microSD TM cards could cause data loss and damage your phone. Installing the microSD TM Memory Card Your phone has a memory card slot on the lower left side. You can install a microSD TM card to provide additional memory for storing files (such as sound files and photos) in your phone. To install the card: 1. Locate the memory slot on the left side of the phone and pull out and turn the plastic cover.Getting Started 10 Getting Started 2. Make sure the microSD TM card’s gold contacts are facing down. 3. Carefully insert the microSD TM card into the opening and firmly push it in until you hear a click, indicating that the card is now securely installed. 4. With the card now securely installed, resecure the plastic cover over the microSD TM slot on the phone. Note: To remove the card once it has been inserted, firmly push the end of the card further into the phone and release—the card should pop out of the memory card slot. If this does not work, repeat the process again. Note: The microSD TM card can be easily damaged by improper operation. Please be careful when inserting, removing, or handling the card. Note: DO NOT remove the microSD TM card while files are being accessed or transferred. Doing so will result in loss or damage of data. Make sure your battery is fully charged before using the microSD TM card. Your data may become damaged or unusable if the battery runs out while using the microSD TM card.11 Phone Basics Phone Basics Your handset supports a flexible user interface that allows you to modify the user interface via downloadable themes. The availability of a custom user interface is subject to your carrier. The following description of the basic capabilities of the phone is a general description and not specific to a particular user interface. However, there are some general principles that govern the handset's user interface. For each user interface, you can access a main menu that provides access and control for most of the phone's capability. Accessing Menus When the phone is locked and is pressed, the unlock screen displays. To access the menu functions you must first drag the screen to unlock the phone (drag up from the blue arrow tab at the bottom left of the unlock screen). Note: You can also slide open the keyboard to unlock the phone. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch the menu items to open them. Displaying Your Phone Number 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Phone Information.Phone Basics 12 Phone Basics Making and Answering Calls To make a call: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter a phone number using the onscreen dialpad. (If you make a mistake while dialing, press to erase one digit at a time. Press and hold to erase the entire number.) 3. The phone number appears in the button as you type. Touch to call the number, the press . 4. Press when you are finished. Tip: To redial your last recent call, press twice. Tip: Some networks support + dialing. + dialing automatically indicates to the network that you are dialing an international call and adds the international dialing prefix (typically ‘011’) to the call automatically. To use + dialing, press and hold the 0 key (until the + appears) before entering the phone number. To answer an incoming call: 1. Make sure your phone is on. (If your phone is off, incoming calls go to Voicemail.) 2. Press to answer the call. Your phone notifies you of incoming calls in the following ways: • The phone rings or vibrates (unless set to Silence All). • The backlight illuminates. • The screen displays an incoming call message. • The is displayed at the top of the display screen. If the incoming call is from a number stored in your Contacts, the Contacts entry’s name is displayed. The caller’s phone number may also be displayed, if available. The following options are also available to handle an incoming call: • Press to end the call and send the caller to Voicemail. You can press the volume key on the side of the phone to quiet the ringer. TALK Talk13 Phone Basics • Touch or press and hold the volume key to send the incoming call to your Voicemail box immediately. • Touch to send the call to your Voicemail box and immediately send the caller a text message. To disconnect a call when you are finished: • Press . Missed Call Notification When an incoming call is not answered, a Missed Call message is displayed on your screen. • To dial a missed call back, press . Calling Emergency Numbers You can place calls to 911 (dial 911 and press ), even if your phone is locked or your account is restricted. Warning: After initiating a 911 call, you must end the call by pressing * and # on your keypad. This notifies the phone that the 911 call was terminated intentionally by the user. No other calls can be made prior to terminating the emergency call. In-Call Options During a call, touch an option on the screen to Mute or UnMute your phone or use the speakerphone. • Mute On or Mute Off: Drag the keys left or right to toggle the phone’s microphone on/off. • Speaker On or Speaker Off: Drag the keys left or right to activate or deactivate the speakerphone. • Add Call: Allows you to talk to two different people at the same time. (For more information, see "Making a Three-Way Call" on page 17.) • Dialpad: Displays the onscreen dialpad where you can Save or Pause the current number or End Call. • Options: Allows you to access other functions during the call: • Contacts: Accesses the Contacts menu options. • Recent Calls: Checks your call log for Missed, Outgoing, Incoming and Recent calls. You can also erase the logs from this menu. • Messaging: Allows you to check notifications and access the contents of voice or text messages. Ignore Ignore + TXTPhone Basics 14 Phone Basics • Notes: Allows you to type notes. • Calendar: Allows you to open the Calendar. • Clock: Allows you to display the Clock. • Calculator: Allow you to use the Calculator. • Phone Info: Displays the phone number, hardware/software version, and advanced information. WARNING! Because of higher volume levels, do not place the device near your ear during speakerphone use. End-of-Call Options After receiving a call from or making a call to a phone number that is not in your Contacts, the phone number and the duration of the call are displayed. Touch Save to save the new number in your Contacts. (See "Saving a Phone Number" on page 15” below for more information.) Touch Redial to redial the number. Touch Done to exit the end-of-call screen. Saving a Phone Number from the End-of-Call Screen After you have received or made a call, the phone displays end-of-call options. 1. Press to end the current call. 2. Touch Save. 3. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact. 4. Touch a label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others). The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. Note: Step 3 does not appear when your Contacts list is empty. 5. Touch the Enter Name field and use the keyboard to enter the new contact name. See "Using the Keyboard" on page 21 6. Touch Done (onscreen) to store the name and save the new entry. Note: If the current number has already been stored in your Contacts, Save is replaced with Contacts.15 Phone Basics Note: The End-of-Call options are not displayed for calls identified as Unknown ID or Restricted Number. Saving a Phone Number You can store up to 600 phone numbers in the Contacts list. (For more information, see "Adding a New Contact" on page 45.) 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter a number and touch Save. 3. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact. 4. Touch a label (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others). The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. Note: Step 3 does not appear when your Contacts list is empty. 5. Touch the Enter Name field and use the keyboard to enter the new contact name. See Entering Text 6. Enter information into the other field as needed using the keyboard. 7. Touch Done (onscreen) to store the name and save the new entry. Finding a Phone Number 1. In the Main menu, touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Scroll down through your list of contacts to highlight the name. Touch the name to select it and then touch the phone number to make the call. Tip: To search through your list more quickly, switch to landscape mode and enter the first few letters in the Name box. The display will move down the list to the first entry that matches the text in the Name box. Tip: If the entry contains more than one phone number, scroll up or down to highlight the number you want to call and then touch the number to make the call.Phone Basics 16 Phone Basics Dialing and Saving Phone Numbers With Pauses You can dial or save phone numbers with pauses for use with automated systems, such as Voicemail or credit card billing numbers. • Pause: Sends the next set of numbers when you press . Note: You can have multiple pauses in a phone number. To dial or save phone numbers with pauses: 1. Touch Phone and enter a phone number. 2. Touch Pause. A P is displayed at the end of the phone number. 3. Enter additional numbers. 4. Press or touch to dial the number. — or— Touch Save to save the number in your Contacts. Using Speed Dialing You can store up to 8 numbers in your phone’s speed dial memory to make it easy to contact friends and family. With this feature, you can dial Speed Dial entries by touching one of the numbers on the screen. To use Speed Dialing: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Speed Dial. 3. Touch a speed dial number to call the number. Note: Speed dialing is not available when you are roaming. When roaming you must always dial the number using eleven digits (1 + area code + number). Caller ID Caller ID allows people to identify a caller before answering the phone by displaying the number of the incoming call. You can block your number from being displayed when you make a call. To block Caller ID: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter *67 + Phone Number.17 Phone Basics 3. Press or touch . To permanently block your number, call your service provider. Responding to Call Waiting When you’re on a call, Call Waiting alerts you of incoming calls by sounding two beeps. Your phone’s screen informs you that another call is coming in and displays the caller’s phone number (if it is available and you are in digital mode). To respond to an incoming call while you’re on a call: • Press . (This puts the first caller on hold and answers the second call.) To switch back to the first caller: • Touch the caller entry to re-activate the first call and place the second caller on hold. Making a Three-Way Call With three-way calling, you can talk to two people at the same time. When using this feature, the normal airtime rates will be charged for each of the two calls. To use Add Call: 1. Touch Phone. 2. Enter the number you want to call and press or touch . 3. Once you have established the connection, touch Add Call. 4. Select Speed Dial, Contacts, History, or Dialpad. 5. Touch an entry, use the dialpad to enter the second number, or touch Talk to connect to the second caller. 6. When the second call is connected, touch to begin your three-way call. If one of the people you called hangs up during your call, you and the remaining caller stay connected. If you initiated the call and are the first to hang up, all three callers are disconnected. Tip: You can also begin a three-way call by displaying a phone number stored in your Contacts, Recent History, or Messaging. To call the third party, press . Once disconnected, a redial screen appears to provide you with the opportunity to call back any of the individual callers from the recent three-way call.Phone Basics 18 Phone Basics To use Redial: 1. Touch Redial for the first caller. 2. Repeat steps 4-5 in "To use Add Call:" on page 17. 3. When the second call is connected, touch to begin your three-way call. TTY Use With Handset A TTY (also known as a TDD or Text Telephone), is a telecommunications device that allows people who are deaf or hard of hearing, or who have speech or language disabilities, to communicate by telephone. Your phone is compatible with selected TTY devices. Please check with the manufacturer of your TTY device to ensure that it supports digital wireless transmission. Your phone and TTY device will connect via a special cable that plugs into your phone's headset jack. If this cable was not provided with your TTY device, contact your TTY device manufacturer to purchase the connector cable. Note: Not all service providers support TTY. Consult your service provider for more information. To turn TTY Mode on or off: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch TTY. (A brief explanation of TTY will display.) 5. Touch OK to continue. 6. Touch TTY On or TTY Off. Note: In TTY Mode, your phone will display the TTY access icon. If TTY mode is enabled, the audio quality of non-TTY devices connected to the headset jack my be impaired.19 Phone Basics IMPORTANT Note for 911 Emergency Calling: We recommend that TTY users make emergency calls by other means, including Telecommunications Relay Services (TRS), analog cellular, and land line communications. Wireless TTY calls to 911 may be corrupted when received by public safety answering points (PSAPs) rendering some communications unintelligible. The problem encountered appears related to TTY equipment or software used by PSAPs. The wireless industry and PSAP community are currently working to resolve this.Entering Text 20 Entering Text Entering Text The phone includes a built-in QWERTY keyboard, which is located beneath the display screen and is accessed by sliding it open. This orients the phone’s display to landscape (widescreen) mode. Using the QWERTY keyboard, you can type letters, numbers, punctuation, and other special characters into text entry fields or other applications. To open the phone and access the keyboard: 1. Rotate the phone 90 degrees counter-clockwise. 2. Slide the top section of the phone up to open the keyboard. The display screen rotates to the landscape viewing mode. Your phone’s keyboard provides a convenient way of entering letters, numbers, and symbols when you are prompted to enter text. Using your phone’s keyboard is like using a standard computer keyboard, except that each key had a primary character in white on the bottom (usually letters) and a secondary character in red on the top (numbers and punctuation). Predictive Text Input Predicitve Text (XT9) Input analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word database and creates a suitable word. (The word may change as you type.) Other possible words appear in a list below your text. • To choose a word displayed in the list, scroll up and down using the up and down navigation keys. • To accept a word, press . • To accept a word and insert a space, press . • Press to erase a single character. Press and hold to delete an entire entry. Function: Allows you to enter the numbers or characters displayed in blue at the top of the QWERTY keys. (Press twice to turn Fn lock on.) Shift: Toggles the text input mode between Upper Case, Lower Case, and Mixed Case. (Press twice to turn Shift lock on.) Sym: Launches the Symbols page. Select from onscreen symbols by using their associated numbers. Space: Inserts an empty space. Enter: Accepts a change or option. While entering text, moves the insertion point to the next line in a message. Back: Deletes the previous character.21 Entering Text • To enter a period, press the “.” key. To enter other special characters, press and press the key for the required character. If the required character does not display, press . • To insert a number, press and press the key for the required number. Note: To use the keyboard, the phone must be in Landscape mode. You can only enter text using the keyboard. To enter text using Predictive Text: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Text Entry. 5. Turn Predictive Text on. Using the Keyboard To enter text: • Press the required letter keys to enter words • Press once to capitalize the next letter. • Press twice to turn on Shift (Caps) lock. • Press to erase the previous letter. • Press and hold to erase all previous text. To enter numbers and punctuation: • Press and then press the key displaying the required character. • To enter only the top row of characters, press twice to fix all consecutive characters. Note: In some applications, certain fields may default to entering numbers (such as the phone number fields in Contacts). In others, you will need to use to enter numbers. Symbols Symbols are entered by accessing onscreen menus and touching the required item. To enter symbols: 1. Press .Entering Text 22 Entering Text 2. Touch the numeric key corresponding to the required symbol. Note: You can exit from the Symbols page by pressing any keyboard key or . To edit specific text by touching the screen: • Touch a location in your text message to move the cursor to that location. To edit specific text using the onscreen navigation keys: • Use the navigation keys to move your cursor to the required location. • If you make a mistake, press to reveal the keyboard and press to erase a single character. • Press and hold to erase an entire word or all entered characters.23 Roaming Roaming Recognizing Icons on the Display Screen Your phone’s display screen always lets you know when you’re off the network. If you are roaming on a digital system, the roaming icon will be displayed along with the text Roaming. Note: You might pay a higher per-minute rate for roaming calls. Roaming on Other Digital Networks When you’re roaming, you may not be able to access certain features, such as web services. Note: If you’re on a call when you leave the network and enter an area where roaming is available, your call is dropped. If your call is dropped in an area where you think service is available, turn your phone off and on again to reconnect to the network. Setting Your Roaming Mode By using the Roaming menu option, you can determine which signals your phone accepts. Choose from three different settings on your phone to control your roaming experience: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Roaming. 4. Touch Roaming Mode. 5. Highlight an option: • Automatic: This setting seeks service. When service is unavailable, the phone searches for an alternate system. • Home Only: This setting allows you to access the home network only and prevents roaming on other networks. Roaming Indicator Other Digital NetworksRoaming 24 Roaming Update PRL You can manually update your PRL (Preferred Roaming List) to access additional networks provided by new roaming partners of your service provider, or by new systems that have been enabled. This typically results in either a better signal or expanded coverage. This is not a frequent activity and does not require constant checking. Access this feature if you know you will be traveling outside of your service provider’s network to ensure that you always have the best coverage possible. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Roaming. 4. Touch Update PRL. 5. Follow the onscreen instructions.25 Voice Command Voice Command Voice recognition allows you to say commands to perform common functions supported by your phone. To activate voice recognition: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. (The phone prompts you to say a voice command.) 4. Wait for the beep and then say one of the following commands: Call You can dial any valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number. You can also dial by pronouncing a name stored in your Contacts. Tips for using Call : • Voice Service works best in quieter environments. • When saying a number, speak at a normal speed and say each digit clearly. There is no need to pause between digits. • The phone recognizes the digits one, two, three, four, five, six, seven, eight, nine, zero, and oh. The phone does not recognize numbers such as "one eight hundred" for "1-800." Instead, say "one-eight-zero-zero." • The phone recognizes only valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone numbers. • If your phone does not usually recognize you correctly when you are using Voice Service, try adapting Voice Service to your voice, which can significantly improve accuracy for some speakers. To place a call using Call : 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. • Call • Go To • Send Text • Check • Lookup Voice Command 26 Voice Command 4. When the phone says, "Say a command", say “Call” followed by either a name stored in your Contacts or a valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number naturally and clearly. • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by the correct number, say Yes. (You can also select the correct number from those displayed on the screen by touching the correct number. The phone will then dial the number.) • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by an incorrect number, say No. (If there are other alternatives, the phone will prompt you with the next one. You can also press the navigation key up or down to select the correct number from the Choice List, and then touch the correct number to dial it.) 5. Alternatively, you can call a person in your Contacts by saying the name of the person, exactly as it is entered in your Contacts. (The phone plays the name through the earpiece and displays it on the screen.) If you said a name listed in your Contacts that has more than one number associated with it, the phone displays the different locations (Home, Work, Mobile, Pager, Others) and asks you which one to dial. Say one of the location names and the phone will dial the number for the location you specified. Send Text To compose a text message using Voice Service: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, "Say a command", say “Send Text” followed by either a name stored in your Contacts or a valid 7, 10 or 11 digit North American phone number. • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by the correct number, say Yes. (You can also touch the correct number from those displayed on the screen.) • If the phone asks you, "Did You Say" followed by an incorrect number, say No. (If there are other alternatives, the phone will prompt you with the next one. You can also touch the correct number in the Choice List.) 5. Compose your text message and touch Send to deliver it. For more information, see "To send a text message:" on page 34.27 Voice Command Lookup You can retrieve contact information for any person in your Contacts by saying the full name of the person. To retrieve information using Lookup : 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Lookup” followed by the name of the person, exactly as it is entered in your Contacts. (The phone will play the name it recognized through the speaker, and then open the contact information for that name.) If the phone says, “Did You Say” followed by an incorrect name, say “No”. The phone then prompts you with the next name, if there is one. If there are no more names, the phone will say "Sorry, No Match Found". Go To You can open an application or access a menu by saying “Go To” followed immediately by the “destination”, either an application or menu. To see a list of possible destinations: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Go To”. A list of valid destinations is displayed and the phone prompts you with “Which shortcut”. If the list is too long to fit on one screen, the screen displays “Next Menu”. You can say the name of a destination, or say “Next Menu” to view the next screen. 5. Say the name of the application that you want the phone to activate. Check The voice recognition Status option gives you an update on your phone's service, signal strength, and battery level. To retrieve your phone's status information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools.Voice Command 28 Voice Command 3. Touch Voice Command. 4. When the phone says, “Say a command”, say “Check” followed by one of the following items: • Status: Plays back and displays ALL status information. • Time: Plays back and displays current date and time information. • Signal Strength: Plays back and displays current signal strength. • Network: Plays back and displays the type of network coverage. • Battery: Plays back and displays the current level of battery charge. • My Phone Number: Plays back and displays your phone number. Customizing Voice Command Configuring Confirmation You can configure your phone’s confirmation setting for voice-based commands. To configure confirmation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Confirmation. 5. Highlight one of the following options: Automatic, Always Confirm, or Never Confirm. Configuring Voice Adaptation You can configure your phone to adapt to your voice when using voice-based commands. To configure voice adaptation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Adaptation. 5. Touch Adapt Voice. 6. Touch Start. 7. You will be prompted to record a series of commands. 8. When you have finished the session an Adapting message is displayed. 9. Touch OK to save.29 Voice Command Note: It is recommended that you perform the complete Adapt Voice session at least once to achieve the maximum benefit of this feature. If a partial adaptation is performed, you can return later and resume the process from the halfway point. Tip: To reset the voice, touch Reset Voice in the Adaptation menu. Changing Audio Guidance Mode By default, your phone is set to prompt mode and provides audio prompts such as “Please say a command”. To change the audio guidance mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Audio Modes. 5. Touch one of the following: • Expert Mode: Displays a selectable list of matching entries. If the first entry is not correct, the phone continues to read each available option until it detects a confirmation (Yes) or rejection (No). • Prompt Mode: Displays a selectable list of available dialing options and only reads out the entry name. You have to touch an option to activate a command.Main Menu 30 Main Menu Main Menu User Interface Your phone is equipped with the capability to provide multiple user interfaces that can provide a different look and feel, and be customized to user preference. The availability of a customized user interface is subject to your service provider. Below the idle screen, all user interfaces provide a main menu to support the operation and configuration of the handset's feature. This user guide focuses on describing the functions and features of the main menu. For other ways of accessing the main menu, please see the additional printed material that comes with your phone or talk to your service provider's customer support. Menu Layout The main menu consists of the following sub-menus: • Web: Access the internet to browse pages customized for mobile devices. Please see "Web" on page 31 for more information. • Messaging: Stay in touch with others via messaging. Please see "Messaging" on page 34 for more information. • Contacts: Manage your phone book. Please see "Contacts" on page 45 for detail description. • Tools: Access productivity tools to help manage your daily work. Please see "Tools" on page 48 for more information. • Calls: Manage incoming, outgoing, missed, and recent calls. Please see "Calls" on page 61 for more information. • Bluetooth: Enable and use Bluetooth. Please see ‘Bluetooth” on page 63 for more information. • My Downloads: Download contents like screen savers, ringers, games, and applications to personalize your phone. Please see "My Downloads" on page 68 for more information. • Camera: Use the Camera and Camcorder features. Please see "Camera" on page 70 for more information. • Settings: Configure the phone to your preferences and network environment. Please see "Settings" on page 75 for more information.31 Web Web When you launch the browser, the phone will connect to the Internet and the service indicator icon will display. Launching the Web Browser • Touch Menu and then touch Web. The first time you use the Web Browser, you will be prompted to go through a setup process that takes approximately three minutes. If you had a previous web connection, the last page you visited will be displayed. Navigating the Web By default both the Address Bar (top of display screen) and Navigation toolbar (bottom of display screen) are displayed when the browser is launched. They can be toggled on to reveal more features and functions. • Touch FULL SCR to switch the display from URL Mode to Full Screen mode in which the Address Bar is hidden. • Touch MENU to reveal additional Browser menu options. • Slide your finger up or down the display screen to scroll through the web page. • Touch and drag in any direction to move around a web page. • Touch an onscreen item or hyperlink to select it. Links are displayed as underlined text and allow you to jump to web pages, select special functions, and place phone calls. • Touch an onscreen text field or Search field to display the text input screen and then enter text into the field. See ‘Using the Keyboard” on page 21. • Press to go back one web page. This button is also used to delete text when you are entering it into a text field. • If the items on a page are numbered, you can use the number keys on your keyboard to select an item. Tip: The tenth item in a numbered list can be selected by pressing the 0 key on the keyboard, even though the number 0 doesn’t appear on the screen.Web 32 Web Creating a Bookmark Bookmarks allow you to store the addresses of websites so that you can easily access them again later. To create a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Go to the web page that you want to bookmark. 4. Touch MENU. 5. Touch My Favorites. 6. Touch Add this page to favorites. 7. Touch Add. 8. Touch OK. The new bookmark is added to the top of the list of bookmarks. Note: Bookmarking a page does not store the page contents, just its address. Some pages cannot be bookmarked. Whether a web page can be bookmarked or not is controlled by its creator. To access a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Touch MENU. 4. Touch My Favorites. 5. Touch an entry in the list to launch the bookmark’s web page. To delete a bookmark: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Web. 3. Touch MENU. 4. Touch My Favorites. 5. Touch an entry in the list and touch OPTIONS. 6. Touch Delete this Favorite. 7. Touch REMOVE to confirm the deletion. 8. Touch OK.33 Web Using the Menu to Navigate Touch MENU to display a list of options for navigating between web pages. The Browser Menu can be opened when a data session is active and from any web page. It contains the following options: • Back: Move back by one web page (if you have not accessed more than one web page, this option is greyed out). • Forward: Move forward by one web page (if you have not returned from a previous web page, this option is greyed out). • Home: Returns to your service provider’s home page. • My Favorites: Displays your list of Bookmarks. • Search: Takes you to a search engine. • Settings: Displays the following options: • Font Size: Allows you to use a slider to adjust the current text size displayed in the browser. Touch Save to save your settings. • Send this page to...: Copies the current web address and attaches it to an outgoing text message. • Clear private data: Allows you to delete the current browsing history, browser cache, cookies, and stored passwords. • Advanced: Allows you to access additional Browser Menu options, such as: Page info, Images on/off, Reset browser, Turn on error logging, Send referrer, Redirect prompt, Reset browser settings, and About browser.Messaging 34 Messaging Messaging You can send and recieve email messages and text messages, and participlate in webbased chat rooms right from your phone. After you access the Messaging menu, you will see the following options: • Send Message: Allows you to send text and picture messages. • Text & Picture Message: Allows you to view text and picture messages that you have received, sent, and saved. • IM: Allows you to send instant messages. • Email: Allows you to send email messages. • Web Alert: Allows you to receive an alert that a new web message is available. • Voicemail: Allows you to listen to any voice messages saved on the voice mail server. • Settings: Allows you to configure the messaging options. Text Messaging To send a text message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Send Message. 3. The list of recipients of recently sent messages is displayed. Touch one of the names or touch one of the following options: • Recent List: Select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages. • Contacts: Select a recipient from your Contacts (the Contacts entry must contain a wireless phone number or an email address). • Manual Entry: Use the keyboard to manually enter a recipient by selecting either: • Enter phone number: Use the keyboard or onscreen dialpad to enter a wireless phone number. Touch Done to continue. • Enter email address: Use the keyboard to enter the recipient’s email address. 4. Enter your message using the keyboard. If you want to change your text message options, touch OPTIONS and select one of the following: • Preview: Displays a preview of the message as it will be displayed on the recipient’s phone. • Add Item: Allows you to add a picture or voice memo to the message.35 Messaging • Sending Options: Allows you to set the message priority and callback number. • Save as Draft: Stores a copy of the text message in your Drafts folder. • Save Text: Stores a copy of the text message in the Preset Messages folder. • Message Details: Displays the recipient’s number or email address, message priority, and message size. • Preset Messages: Allows you to select from a list of preset messages. 5. Touch Send to send the message. To reply to the text message: 1. While the message is open, touch Reply. 2. Compose your reply or use a pre-composed message. • To type a message, use your keyboard to enter the text. • To use pre-written messages, touch OPTIONS and touch Preset Messages. Touch the preset message to add it to the reply message. 3. Touch Send. To erase messages: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Text & Picture Message. 3. Touch Inbox. 4. Touch to open the Delete menu. 5. Touch the message(s) that you want to delete or touch to select all of the messages. Selected messages are highlighted in blue. 6. Touch Delete selected to delete the selected messages. 7. Touch Delete to confirm the deletion. Picture Messages Your phone lets you take pictures, view them using the phone's display, and instantly send them to your friends and family. To send a Picture Message from your Phone 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Send Message.Messaging 36 Messaging 3. The list of recipients of recently sent messages is displayed. Touch one of the names or touch one of the following options: • Recent List: Select a recipient from a list of recently sent messages. • Contacts: Select a recipient from your Contacts (the Contacts entry must contain a wireless phone number or an email address). • Manual Entry: Use the keyboard to manually enter a recipient by selecting either: • Enter phone number: Use the keyboard or onscreen dialpad to enter a wireless phone number. Touch Done to continue. • Enter email address: Use the keyboard to enter the recipient’s email address. 4. Scroll up and touch Picture. 5. Touch My Album to select an existing picture, touch one or more thumbnail images, and touch OK. • You can also touch Take New Picture to take a new picture and then touch to attach it to the message. 6. Enter your message using the keyboard. If you want to change your text message options, touch OPTIONS and touch one of the following options: • Preview: Displays a preview of the message as it will be displayed on the recipient’s phone. • Add Item: Allows you to add a picture or voice memo to the message. • Erase Item: Allows you to remove a picture or voice memo from the message. • Priority: Allows you to set the message priority. • Save as Draft: Stores a copy of the text message in your Drafts folder. • Save Text: Stores a copy of the text message in the Preset Messages folder. • Message Details: Displays the recipient’s number or email address, message priority, and message size. • Preset Messages: Allows you to select from a list of preset messages. 7. Scroll up and use Voice Memo to record and attach a voice memo, if needed. 8. Touch Send to send the message.37 Messaging Note: If you have not registered and configured this feature, you will be prompted to do so. Follow the instructions on screen, then continue with this procedure. Instant Messaging You can use your phone to access popular instant messaging clients and have online chats. To access Instant Messaging: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch IM. 3. Select an IM program and follow the on-screen instructions. Email Your phone can access online emails using the preloaded Email application. To access the online e-mail service: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Email. 3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Voicemail All unanswered calls to your phone are automatically transferred to your Voicemail, even if your phone is in use or turned off. However, you are only notified of new messages when your phone is turned on and you are in a Service Area. To set up your Voicemail: 1. Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keyboard. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) 2. Follow the system prompts to create your passcode, record your greeting, and record your name announcement. To call your Voicemail: • Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keyboard. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) • Touch at the top of the display screen to open an onscreen popup. Touch New Voicemail.Messaging 38 Messaging To display your Missed Calls: • Touch Menu and then touch Calls. The Recent Calls list is displayed. • From the While you were out screen, touch a number or Contacts entry in the list. Important: When you are roaming off the network, you might not receive notification of new Voicemail messages. It is recommended that you periodically check your Voicemail by dialing 1 + area code + your Phone Number. When your Voicemail answers, enter your passcode. You will be charged roaming rates when accessing Voicemail while roaming off the network. Voicemail Notification Your phone alerts you to new messages in several ways: • By displaying a message on the display screen. • By the LED blinking red. • By sounding the assigned ringer type. • By displaying at the top of the display screen. When you have missed a call or recieve a new message (such as a Voicemail or Text), your phone alerts you and displays a While you were out icon ( ). Retrieving Your Voicemail Messages You can review your messages directly from your phone or from any other touch-tone phone. To dial from your phone, you can either speed dial your Voicemail or use the menu keys. To Use One-Touch Message Access • Press and hold 1 on your phone’s keypad. (Your phone will automatically dial your voicemail box.) Follow the system prompts. To Use the Menu Keys on Your Phone to Access Your Messages 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Call Voicemail to call the Voicemail server. Clearing the Message Icon Your phone may temporarily continue to display the message icon after you have checked your voicemail, text messages, missed events, email, etc. To clear the icon from the display screen: 1. Touch at the top of the display screen.39 Messaging 2. Touch a voicemail, text message, or missed call entry. When the messages have been reviewed, is no longer displayed. Voicemail # This menu allows you to change your voice mail number. To change your voice mail number: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Voicemail #. 4. Touch Other. 5. Use the keyboard to enter the new voice mail # . 6. Touch Save. To change your voice mail back to the default voice mail: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Voicemail. 3. Touch Voicemail #. 4. Touch the default number. Settings Several options are associated with voicemail and text messaging. The Settings menu allows you to customize the options to fit your preferences. To access the Settings menu: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Select General, Text Message, Picture Message, or Alert Setup. General General settings affect voicemail and text messages. • Preset Messages: Allows you add or delete preset messages. • Message Alert: Allows you to configure the default ringer for messages, voicemail, and reminder alerts. • Auto-Erase: Sets the phone to automatically delete old messages from the mail boxes when they become full. This allows new messages to be added to a full mail box without having to manually delete old messages to free up space first.Messaging 40 Messaging • Save in Outbox: Sets the phone to automatically save the message in the Outbox folder, to prompt you before saving the message, or to not save the message. • Draft Alert: Sets the phone to automatically display an alert when the message is saved to the Draft folder. You can also turn the alert off. Preset Messages A preset message can be selected and automatically entered into the current message. To add a preset message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Touch . 6. Touch Add New. 7. Enter your message using the keyboard. 8. Touch Save when finished to add your message to the list. To edit a quick message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Scroll up or down and touch the message that you want to edit. 6. Edit the message using the keyboard. Press and hold to erase the message. Enter your new message or edit the existing one and touch Save. To delete a preset message: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Preset Messages. 5. Touch . 6. Touch Delete. 7. Scroll up or down and touch the message that you want to delete.41 Messaging 8. Touch Delete Selected. 9. Touch Yes to confirm the deletion. Note: When you send a message using Preset Messages, the last message selected automatically displays as the first choice when sending a new message. Message Alert The Message Alert menu allows you to configure the default Message Ringer, Voicemail Ringer, and Reminder settings for your messages. To set the Message Ringer: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Message Ringer. 6. Select a ringer from the list. To set the Volume Ringer: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Voicemail Ringer. 6. Select a ringer from the list. To set the Reminder: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Message Alert. 5. Touch Reminder. 6. Set the required duration to Off, Once, or Every 2 min.Messaging 42 Messaging Auto-Erase This option allows you to automatically delete old messages when the memory becomes full. This prevents new messages from being rejected due to the Inbox being full. To turn this option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Select Auto-Erase. 5. Touch Yes or No. Save in Outbox Save In Outbox allows you to save a copy of the outgoing text message in the outbox. To turn the Save in Outbox option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Save in Outbox. 5. Touch Auto Save, Prompt, or Do not Save. Draft Alert Allows you set your phone to display a prompt to save a text message in the Draft folder. To turn the Draft Alert option On or Off: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Draft Alert. 5. Touch On, or Off. Text Message Settings Text Message settings only affect text messages. • Priority: Allows you to configure the default priority level for your text message. • Callback #: Allows you to change the default callback number for text messages. To set the Priority level: 1. Touch Messaging.43 Messaging 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Text Message. 4. Touch Priority. 5. Touch Normal or Urgent. To change the Callback #: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Text Message. 4. Touch Callback #. 5. Touch None, your mobile directory number, or Other for a different phone number. 6. For Other, enter the number using the keyboard and touch Save. Picture Message Settings Picture Message settings only affect text messages. • Priority: Allows you to configure the default priority level for your picture message. • Auto Download: Allows you to toggle the Auto Download option on or off . To set the Priority level: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Picture Message. 4. Touch Priority. 5. Touch High, Normal, or Low. To change the Auto Download setting: 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Picture Message. 4. Toggle Auto Download to be On or Off.Messaging 44 Messaging Alert Setup This menu allows you to set your phone to automatically connect to the Internet to receive Web Alerts. 1. Touch Messaging. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Alert Setup. 4. Touch On or Off.45 Contacts Contacts Adding a New Contact Your phone can store up to 600 phone numbers. Each contact entry can store up to a total of seven phone numbers, three email addresses, one URL, one memo, and each entry’s name can contain up to 64 characters. To add a new contact: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. In the upper left corner of the display screen, touch to create a new Contacts entry. The screen is re-oriented to display in Landscape mode. 4. Touch the Enter Name field and enter a name using the keyboard. 5. Touch the Add Number field and enter a number using the keyboard. 6. Use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. The Select Number Type menu opens. Scroll up or down and touch Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. 7. Enter information into any of the other fields using the keyboard. 8. Touch Done to save the Contacts entry. Once saved, the new Contacts entry is displayed within the Contacts page. Tip: ICE - In Case Of Emergency. To make it easier for emergency personnel to identify important contacts, you can list your local emergency contacts under “ICE” in your phone’s contact list. Saving a Phone Number You can save the phone number from your call history. To save a phone number from your call history: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch the arrow to the right of the number that you want to save. 4. Touch Save. 5. Touch New Contact or Existing Contact.Contacts 46 Contacts 6. Touch an option for the number type: Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. The screen changes to the Landscape orientation. 7. Touch the Enter Name field and enter a name for the Contact. 8. Enter information into any of the other fields using the keyboard. 9. Touch Done to store the name and save the new entry. Finding Contacts 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the Search field and use the keyboard to type the letters of the Contact’s name. The display changes to display all names starting with those letters. Touch the required name to make the call. 4. You can also scroll down through your list of contacts and touch the name to make the call. Editing an Existing Contact To add a number to an existing entry: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Scroll up to the Add Number box. Enter the phone number using the keyboard and use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. 5. The Select Number Type menu opens. Scroll up or down and touch Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, or Others. 6. When you are finished, touch Done. To edit an entry’s phone number: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Select the phone number to be edited. 5. Press and hold to erase the entire number or press once to erase the last digit.47 Contacts 6. Enter the phone number using the keyboard and then use the navigation keys or touch an empty white area to the left of the newly entered number. 7. Select the number type (Mobile, Home, Work, Pager, Fax, or Others). 8. Touch Done. To select a ringer type for an entry: 1. Touch Contacts. 2. Touch Contacts again. 3. Touch the entry that you want to edit and touch . 4. Touch the Set Ringer field. 5. Scroll up or down and touch the required Ringer. 6. Touch Done.Tools 48 Tools Tools After you access Tools menu, you will see the following options: • Self Serve: Allows you to access your service provider’s customer service area where you can check your account balance, service plan details, etc. • Voice Command: Allows you to use voice recognition to perform common functions that are supported by your phone. • Calculator: Allows you to use your phone’s built-in calculator. • Notes: Allows you to compose and store reminders and notes to help keep you organized. • Calendar: Helps you to organize your time and reminds you of important events. • Clock: Displays the time in different time zones around the world together with one or more major cities, states, regions, or countries in a time zone. • Music: Allows you to download and store music on a memory card in your phone. • Update Phone: Allows you to automatically download and update the software in your phone. Only the internal software is updated. No contact entries or other information saved to your phone will be deleted. • Voice Memo: Allows you to record brief memos to remind you of important events, phone numbers, or other items. Self Serve Launches the web browser and opens your service provider’s self service page in which you can access your account balance, etc. To use self serve: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Self Serve. 4. The web browser launches and your service provider’s self serve page opens. Follow the onscreen instructions. Voice Command For information on Voice Command, see "Voice Command" on page 25. Calculator Your phone comes with three built-in calculators. • Calculator: Your phone comes with a built-in calculator. This application becomes the default until another calculator option is selected.49 Tools • Tip Calculator: The tip calculator calculates the tip on a meal or service and splits the bill between the number of people paying. • Unit Convertor: Your phone comes with a built-in conversion application. To use the calculator: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Calculator again. 5. Enter a number with onscreen keypad. 6. Touch the appropriate icons to select add, subtract, multiply, and divide. 7. Enter the next number using the onscreen keypad. Repeat steps 5 and 6 as needed. 8. Touch the Equals (=) icon to view the results. To use the tip calculator: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Tip Calculator. 5. Use the onscreen keypad to enter the total bill amount and touch Done. The tip amount is then displayed at the default percentage (default is 15%). 6. Touch the Tip Rate field and use the onscreen keypad to enter a new tip percentage value. Touch Done. The correct tip will be calcualted instantly. 7. If you’re splitting the check, touch the Split field and enter the number of people in your party. Touch Done. 8. Touch Reset to delete all values. To use the unit convertor: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calculator. 4. Touch Unit Convertor.Tools 50 Tools 5. Select a type of unit to convert from: Distance, Temperature, Speed, Volume, Weight, and Area. 6. Touch the unit fields to select the initial and target units. 7. Use the onscreen keypad to enter a value for the initial unit. (The converted value is instantly calculated.) 8. Touch Reset to delete all of the numbers. Notes Your phone comes with a notepad that you can use to compose and store reminders and notes to help keep you organized. To compose a note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. In the upper left corner of the display screen, touch to add a new note. 5. Use the keyboard to type your note. 6. Touch Save. To read a saved note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch a note in the list. To delete saved notes: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch an hold a note in the list until it detaches from the page, drag the selected note to and release it by lifting your finger off the display screen. 5. You can also touch , touch the note you want to delete, touch Delete Selected and touch Delete.51 Tools To send a saved note: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Notes. 4. Touch the note that you want to send. 5. Edit the note if needed. 6. Touch Send. For more information on sending messages, see ‘Messaging” on page 34. Calendar Your Calendar helps you organize your time and reminds you of important events. Event Alert Menu When your phone is turned on and you have an event alarm scheduled, your phone alerts you and displays the event summary. By default, the alarm will sound 10 minutes before the event, and then again on the event. Your phone alerts you to scheduled events by playing the assigned ringer type or illuminating the backlight. To silence the alarm and reset the schedule, touch and drag the Dismiss button. You can also silence the alaem by pressing the side volume button. To view additional options, use the appropriate onscreen slider: • View: Silences the alarm and displays the details of the current event. • Dismiss: Silences the alarm and replays it again at the time of the event. • Snooze: Silences the alarm and schedules it to replay again later. To add an event to the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day to which you want to add an event by either: • Touching a day on the calendar. • Use the and navigation arrows to view a different month and then touch the required day. 5. Touch to open the New Event window. 6. Switch to Landscape mode and use the keyboard to enter the event description. See ‘Using the Keyboard” on page 21.Tools 52 Tools 7. Select a start and end time for the event by touching the corresponding Start and End fields. 8. Assign an hour and minute by either: • Scrolling through both reels (Hours and Minutes) by sliding your finger up and down on the display screen. • Touching the arrows above/below each field. Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. • Touch either am or pm. • When you have finished setting the times, touch Done. Note: If you need to adjust the end date for an event, touch the Date field and select a new end date by touching a day in the onscreen calendar. 9. Select an alert time for the event by touching the Alert field and touching one of the following options: On Time, 5 minutes before, 10 minutes before, 15 minutes before, 30 minutes before, 1 hour before, 3 hours before, 5 hours before, 1 day before. 10. Select a ringer type for the alarm by touching Set Ringer and then selecting a ringer. • Touch to play a sound sample for a selected ringer. • If a ringer has been previously selected, scroll through the list of available ringers and touch a ringer name to assign it. 11. Select a reminder status for the event by touching the Reminder field and then touching one of the following options: Off, Every 2 minutes, and Every 15 minutes. 12. Touch Save to save the new event. Note: If the end time and date fall before the start time and date, an onscreen warning message is displayed and you can edit the values onscreen.53 Tools To view an event in the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day for which you want to view events by touching it. (If you have events scheduled for the selected day, they will be listed in chronological order.) Tip: In the calendar view, days with events scheduled are underlined in blue. 5. To display an event’s details, touch the event entry from the selected day’s listing. To delete an event from the calendar: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day from which you want to erase the event. 5. Touch an event to display its details page. 6. Touch and touch Delete to erase the event. To delete all or multiple scheduled events: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Calendar. 4. Touch the day from which you want to erase the event. 5. Touch . 6. Touch the events that you want to delete to select them. • You can also touch to select all events in the list. 7. Touch Delete selected and then touch Delete to erase the selected events.Tools 54 Tools Clock Your phone comes with a clock that allows you use it as an alarm clock, timer, and stopwatch, and to display the time in different world locations. Alarm Clock Your phone comes with a built-in alarm clock that has multiple alarm capabilities. To use the alarm clock: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Alarm. 5. Touch to create a new alarm. 6. Touch the alarm activation button to turn the alarm On or Off. 7. Select a time for the alarm by touching the time field. • Assign an hour and minute by either scrolling through both reels (Hours and Minutes) or by touching the up and down arrows above/below each field. Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. • Touch either am or pm. • When you have finished setting the times, touch Done. 8. Select a reminder status for the event by touching Repeat and selecting an option: Once, Mon to Fri, Sat & Sun, Daily, or Set days. 9. Select a ringer type for the alarm by touching the RInger field and selecting a ringer type. • Touch to play a sound sample for a selected ringer. • If a ringer has been previously selected, scroll through a list of available ringer sounds and touch a ringer name to assign it. 10. Select a snooze status for the alarm by touching the Snooze field and selecting an option: 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 15 minutes, or 20 minutes. 11. Touch Save to save the new alar,55 Tools Note: Any stored alarms will appear on the Alarm page in the order in which they were created. To turn off an alarm (when sounding): 1. With the alarm sounding an alert, touch either: • Stop Alarm: Permanently deactivates the alarm notification. • Snooze: Temporarily deactivates the alarm for a few minutes until the new notification. To delete alarm events: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Alarm. 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch to select all alarms in the list. Selected events are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected alarms. Timer Use the timer to count down to an event based on a preset time length (hours, minutes, and seconds). To use the timer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Timer. 5. Select the countdown time length for the alert by setting the Hours, Minutes, and Seconds values. • Assign the time by scrolling through the reesl or touching the up or down arrows above/below each field.Tools 56 Tools Tip: Touching and holding down the arrows (up or down) increases the speed at which the numbers scroll through each reel. 6. Touch Start to start the countdown. 7. Touch Stop to stop the countdown and touch Restart to start it again. 8. Touch Reset to set the timer back to 00. 9. Press to return to the previous screen. Stopwatch To use the stopwatch: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch Stopwatch. 5. Touch Start to turn on the timer. 6. Touch Lap to place a marker in the list. This helps you to keep track of specific time segments. 7. Touch Stop to stop the stopwatch. 8. Touch Restart to continue the stopwatch from its last paused time marker or touch Reset to stop the process and set the counter back to zero. 9. Press to return to the previous screen. World Clock To add a world clock entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. 5. Touch to begin using the world map. 6. Touch Canada or Other Countries. An alphabetical list of the available cities available in that category is displayed. • Touch Canada to display all available major cities within Canada.57 Tools • Touch Other Countries to display countries and in some cases, cities and their corresponding countries. Note: Dark clocks indicate that the selected time zone is currently in its evening (nightime) hour. 7. Touch a city in the list. 8. Repeat the process to add other cities. To delete a world clock entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch the location(s) you want to delete. Selected entries are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected entries. To assign daylight saving time: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Clock. 4. Touch World Clock. Stored locations indicate the Daylight Saving Time icon at the bottom-right of each onscreen clock. • indicates that Daylight Saving Time is on. • indicates the Daylight Saving Time is off. 5. Touch a location containing to turn Daylight Saving Time off or touch a location containing to turn Daylight Saving Time on.Tools 58 Tools Music You can download and store music to your phone. Music requires that a microSD™ card be installed in the phone. To access the music player: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Music. 4. Navigate through the library option and select a song to launch the music player. 5. Use the onscreen control buttons to play, pause, forward to the next song in your playlist or return to the previous song. Update Phone Update Phone allows you to automatically download and update the software on your phone. Only the internal software is updated. No Contacts entries or other information saved on your phone will be deleted. To access the Update Phone setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Update Phone. 4. Touch Update Firmware. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to update your phone. Voice Memo A total of 10 minutes in 10 separate memos can be recorded and saved. Individual memos can record up to 60 seconds of audio. To record a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Record. (The phone prompts you to start recording after the beep.) 5. Wait for the beep and then start speaking.59 Tools • Touch Pause to pause the recording of the memo. (When a memo is paused, touch Resume to start recording again.) 6. Touch Finish to stop the recording and save it to the phone. To play a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voice memos.) 5. Touch a memo to play it. • Touch Pause to pause the recording of the memo. (When a memo is paused, touch Resume to start recording again.) To erase a voice memo: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voice memos.) 5. Touch to open the Delete menu. 6. Touch the voice memo(s) that you want to delete. Selected entries are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Delete Selected. 8. Touch Delete to delete the selected voice memos. To erase all voice memos: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Erase All. 5. Touch Delete to delete all of the voice memos in the list. To edit a voice memo caption: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools.Tools 60 Tools 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voicememos.) 5. Touch beside the voice memo you want to edit. 6. Touch Edit Caption. 7. The phone switches to Landscape mode. Use the keyboard to edit the caption. 8. Touch Save to save the caption. To view voice memo information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Tools. 3. Touch Voice Memo. 4. Touch Review. (The phone displays a list of saved voicememos.) 5. Touch beside the voice memo you want to edit. 6. Touch Info. 7. View the voice memo’s information (Title, Recorded Date, and Length). 8. Press to return to the previous screen.61 Calls Calls Your phone displays your call history, which includes incoming, outgoing, and missed calls. Recent Calls makes redialing a number fast and easy. The list of your call history is continually updated as new numbers are added to the beginning of the list and the oldest entries are removed from the bottom of the list. When you place, accept, or miss a call, a record of the call is saved in the Recent Calls list. When you view the numbers in this list, the phone icon to the left of the number indicates the call type: • Received: Indicates any received calls that were answered. • Missed: Indicates any missed calls. • Dialed: Indicates all outgoing calls made from your phone. Each entry contains a phone number (if available) and Contacts entry name (if the phone number is in your Contacts). Duplicate calls (same number and type of call) might only appear once in the list. To call an entry in the Recent Calls list: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch an entry’s phone number to dial it. Tip: You can also access your list of recent calls by pressing . Note: You cannot make calls from within the Recent Calls list that are identified as No Caller ID or Restricted. Note: Recent Calls only records calls that occur while the phone is turned on. If a call is received while your phone is turned off, it will not be included in the phone’s call history. SMS conversation histories are also saved. If you return a call from the voicemail menu, it will not be included in your phone’s history.Calls 62 Calls Recent Calls Options To display the Recent Calls options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Calls. 3. Touch to display the entry’s options. Tip: An unknown entry only displays a contact number. A known entry (found in the Contacts list) displays the entry’s name and contact number. 4. If the entry is not currently part of your Contacts list, touching displays the following options: • Save: To store the entry in your Contacts list. • Call: To dial the phone number for the currently selected entry. • Message: To send the current history entry a new text message. 5. If the entry has previously been entered into your Contacts list, touching displays the Contacts entry page and the following options: • Caller’s name: Displays if the number is already in your Contacts. • Edit Entry ( ): To either edit the existing number (if already in your Contacts list) or create a new entry. • Send New Text Message ( ): To send a text message to the current recent call entry. • Send Contact: Delivers the current recent call entry information to an available user via a wireless connection. See ‘Bluetooth” on page 63.63 Bluetooth Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range communications technology that allows you to connect wirelessly to a number of Bluetooth devices, such as headsets, hands-free car kits, and Bluetooth-enabled handhelds, computers, printers, and wireless phones. The Bluetooth communication range is usually up to approximately 10 meters (30 feet). Note: There are many Bluetooth devices in the market whose compatibility with the SPHm350 cannot be guaranteed. Enabling Bluetooth By default, your device’s Bluetooth functionality is turned off. Turning Bluetooth on makes your phone “discoverable” to other in-range Bluetooth devices. To turn Bluetooth on or off: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch the Bluetooth button to toggle it On or Off. (The page refreshes to display new functionality and options.) Bluetooth Status Indicators The following icons show your Bluetooth connection status at a glance: • Bluetooth is active and visible. • Bluetooth is paired and connected to a device. • Bluetooth is active, visible and searching for a compatible device. Visibility The Visibility setting allows you to manage your availability to other Bluetooth devices. To configure your phone’s visibility (discoverability): 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Visibility. 4. Select a Visibility setting: • Always visible: Allows other Bluetooth devices to detect and identify your phone.Bluetooth 64 Bluetooth • Visible for 3min: Allows other devices to detect and identify your phone for three minutes before changing your status to hidden. • Hidden: Prevents other Bluetooth devices from detecting and identifying your phone. Trusted Devices Displays a list of trusted connections between your phone and other Bluetooth devices. To display the list of trusted devices: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. The phone searches for the other devices with which it has a trusted connection and displays them in a list. Device Info Displays your phone’s Bluetooth profiles and address. To view the device information for your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Device Info. Device Name Your phone’s Bluetooth name will appear to other in-range Bluetooth devices, depending on your Visibility settings. To change your Bluetooth name for your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Device name. 4. The phone switches to Landscape mode. Use the keyboard to edit the current name. See "Using the Keyboard" on page 21. Tip: Give your handset an easily recognized name so other people can select your handset quickly in environments in which multiple Bluetooth devices are visible.65 Bluetooth Pairing Bluetooth Devices Paired Devices The Bluetooth pairing process allows you to establish trusted connections between your phone and another Bluetooth device. When devices are paired, a passkey is shared between devices, allowing for fast, secure connections while bypassing the discovery and authentication process. Note: To pair Bluetooth devices with your phone it must be visible to other devices. See "Visibility" on page 63. To pair your phone with another Bluetooth device: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. Your phone searches for and then displays a list of discovered, in-range Bluetooth devices. 4. Scroll down the list and touch a device name to begin the pairing process. 5. If necessary, enter the passkey (PIN) for the external device and touch Pair. 6. Once the recipient enters the passkey the pairing will be complete. Note: Due to different specifications and features of other Bluetooth-compatible devices, display and operations may be different, and functions such as transfer or exchange may not be possible with all Bluetooth-compatible devices. To disconnect your paired device: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. Your phone searches for and then displays a list of discovered, in-range Bluetooth devices. 4. Touch an entry’s name in the Trusted Devices list to begin the disconnection process.Bluetooth 66 Bluetooth Sending Items Via Bluetooth You can send data saved on your phone to another bluetooth device. To send contact information via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch Contacts to begin searching in your available Contacts (Transfer Contacts list). 6. Select a Contacts entry from the Transfer contacts page. Selected Contacts are highlighted in blue. 7. Touch Send. 8. Touch Send again to confirm the transfer. 9. The recipient must accept the incoming Contact card. Accepting places a copy of the incoming entry into the recipient’s Contacts list. To send My Info via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices. 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch My Info to send your contact information to the recipient. • If you have not created a My Info card, use the keypad to enter your personal information in the required fields, such as your name, phone numbers, email addresses, url, etc. Touch Done, touch the target Bluetooth device in the list, and touch My Info. 6. The recipient must accept the incoming My Info data. Accepting places a copy of the information on the recipient’s phone. To send pictures via Bluetooth 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Bluetooth. 3. Touch Trusted devices.67 Bluetooth 4. Touch the target Bluetooth device in the list. 5. Touch My Album to begin searching for an available image. 6. Touch a folder and touch a picture to send. You can select multiple pictures, which are then highlighted in blue. • To deselect a picture, touch it again so that it is no longer highlighted. 7. Touch OK to accept the image selection and begin transferring the image(s). 8. The recipient must either accept or decline the incoming image file.My Downloads 68 My Downloads My Downloads You can download the following types of items to your phone: • Ringers: Allows you to download and assign ringer types to voice calls. • Wallpaper: Allows you to download and assign wallpaper to your phone. • Games: Allows you to download and play games. You can also play pre-installed demo games. • Applications: Allows you to download and run applications on your phone. Downloading To download items to your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Ringers, Wallpaper, Games, or Applications. 4. Touch Get New... The browser will launch and take you to the specified download menu. 5. Highlight and select the item that you want to download. (For more information on navigating the Web, see "Navigating the Web" on page 31.) 6. Follow the web page instructions to complete your purchase. Note: You can store a limited number of downloaded applications, ringers, wallpapers, games, and themes on your phone, depending on the file sizes. To check the Memory Status, touch Menu, touch Settings, touch General, and then touch Memory status. Assigning Ringers and Wallpaper Assigning Downloaded Ringers You may assign a ringer to more than one type of call. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Ringers. 4. Touch a ringer to select it. 5. Touch Play. 6. Touch Assign To to assign the ringer to a phone function. 7. Touch Voice Call, Contact ID, Voicemail, Message, Alarm/Timer/Calendar.69 My Downloads Assigning Downloaded Wallpaper You can assign a Wallpaper to more than one task. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Wallpaper. 4. Touch an image from the list. 5. Touch Assign. 6. Touch Background. Note: Wallpaper for Contacts and Incoming/Outgoing Calls can also be set. Playing Games 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Games. 4. Touch the game you want to play. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the game. When you are finished, touch Exit (or Quit). Launching Applications 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch My Downloads. 3. Touch Applications. 4. Touch the application you want to launch. 5. Follow the on-screen instructions to launch the application. When you are finished, select Exit (or Quit). Note: Your phone comes equipped with preloaded tools such as Backup Manager. To activate these services, please contact your service provider.Camera 70 Camera Camera You can take pictures with your phone’s built-in camera. Taking Pictures To take a picture: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. Tip: To activate Camera mode, you can also press and hold the side camera button (see "Portrait Mode Phone Features” on page 1). 4. Using the phone’s display screen as a viewfinder, aim the camera lens at your subject. 5. Press until the shutter sounds. (Make sure the camera is steady.) The picture is automatically saved in the current default storage location (by default, this is In phone). Note: Pictures can be stored in either the phone’s internal memory or on a microSD™ card (sold separately). Your phone’s internal memory contains 100 MB of storage capacity and the phone can support microSD™ cards of up to 32 GB. 6. Take a few minutes to get familiarized with the layout of the Camera screen. Resolution White Balance Battery Charge Settings Display Image Saved Location View My Photos Folder71 Camera My Album Pictures are stored on the phone and accessed through My Album. Using My Album To use My Album: 1. When the picture has been taken, touch to open the display screen, displaying the current picture. • You can also touch Menu, touch Camera, and touch My Album. 2. Touch a CAMERA folder on either the phone or microSD™ card. 3. Select a picture file. To use the My Album options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch one of the options: • Slideshow ( ): Display a slideshow sequence of the pictures in the current folder. • Send ( ): Send the picture via Messaging or Bluetooth. • Delete ( ): Delete the active file. To use the Picture options: 1. Touch Menu. Picture Launch Slideshow Send Delete Grid ViewCamera 72 Camera 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch an picture and select one of the following options: • Delete ( ): Delete the active file. • Bluetooth ( ): Send the picture via Bluetooth. • Slideshow ( ): Display a slideshow sequence of the pictures in the current folder. • Zoom ( ): Increase/decrease the magnification of the currently active file. • Send ( ): Send the picture via Messaging or Bluetooth. • Information ( ): Display information about the current picture, such as File Name, Date, File Size, and Resolution. • Assign ( ): Assign the active picture to either a Picture ID picture or as a Background. Assigning Pictures To assign a picture to a Contacts entry: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album. 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch the picture that you want to use with the Contacts entry. 6. Touch and touch Picture ID. • This option allows the selected picture to be displayed when an incoming call is from the selected Contacts entry. 7. Prepare the selected image for use (by adjusting, cropping, and zooming), and then touch OK. 8. Touch an entry in the Contacts page to complete the picture assignment. To assign a picture to the background display: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch My Album.73 Camera 4. Touch a CAMERA location (phone or microSD™ card). 5. Touch the picture that you want to use as the background. 6. Touch and touch Background. • This option allows the selected picture to be displayed as the background image. 7. Prepare the selected image for use (only resize and rotate are available), and then touch OK. Storing Pictures Even if a microSD™ card is detected, all pictures are automatically stored in the phone’s CAMERA folder. To use the larger storage capacity of an internal microSD™ card, the storage destination must be set differently. To set the storage options: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. 4. Touch and touch Storage. 5. Touch Phone or Memory Card. Camera Settings The settings associated with the full-color digital camera allow you to customize how the camera operates when taking pictures. To set a camera option: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Camera. 3. Touch Camera again. 4. Touch and touch one of the following options: • Self-Timer: Allows you to configure a timer to be Off, 5 sec or 10 sec. • Resolution: Allows you to change the resolution of pictures. Pictures taken at a higher resolution require more memory to save. The available sizes are 1.3M, 0.5M, 0.3M, or 0.1M. • Color Tone: Allows you to set the primary color tone of the picture to None, Mono, Negative, Sepia, Green, or Aqua. • Metering: Allows you to set the metering to be Center or Spot.Camera 74 Camera • Night Mode: Allows you to set the camera to take pictures in low light situations. You can set the option to be On or Off. • Image Quality: Allows you to select between High, Normal, and Economy. These settings reflect the picture quality settings for the pictures. • White Balance: Allows you to set the white balance to Auto, Sunny, Cloudy, Tungsten, Flourescent, or Manual. • Show Grid: Allows you to set the pictures to be displayed in a grid. You can set the option to be On or Off. • Shutter Sound: Allows you to select between different shutter sounds. The shutter sound is heard when you take a picture. • Storage: Allows you to switch the saved file location between Phone or Memory Card.75 Settings Settings Display You can choose what you see on the display screen when powering on/off and when using the phone. You can also control the brightness of the display screen and keyboard. Background You can set the picture the appears on the display screen when in standby mode and for incoming/outgoing calls. To change the wallpaper: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Background. 5. Touch one of the following options: Take Picture, Preset Images, My Album, or My Downloads. • Take Picture: Use the camera take picture. Touch OK to assign the picture to the background. • Preset Images: Touch a picture from the display of preset images. A larger picture opens. Touch Assign to assign the picture to the background. • My Album: Use a picture from a folder in My Album. Touch the picture and then touch OK to assign it to the background. • My Downloads: Use a picture that you have downloaded from the web. Touch the picture and then touch OK to assign it to the background. Greeting 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Greeting. The phone switches to Landscape mode. 5. Use the keyboard to enter the greeting that you want to display when in standby mode. 6. Touch Save. Note: The Greeting menu does not appear when using the Bell phone interface.Settings 76 Settings Brightness You can change the brightness of the LCD screen, making it brighter or dimmer. To change the brightness setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Use the Brightness slider to adjust the brightness of the display screen. Screen Backlight The backlight setting lets you select how long the display screen is backlit after it has last been touched. To change the backlight setting: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Dim. 5. Touch one of the following options to set the length of time that the display screen remains lit after last being touched: Never Dim, 30 seconds, 15 seconds, 8 seconds, or Always Dim. • Never Dim: The backlight does not turn off or become darker. • Always Dim: The brightness of the backlight is reduced. Note: Long backlight settings reduce the battery’s talk and standby times. Keypad Backlight The keypad light setting lets you select how long the keyboard light is on after any key press is made. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Keypad Backight. 5. Touch one of the following options: Always On, 1 minute, 30 seconds, or 15 seconds.77 Settings Language Language selection changes all menu settings. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Display. 4. Touch Language. 5. Touch English or French. Volume Adjust your phone’s volume settings to suit your needs and your environment. Ringer Volume To adjust the volume of the ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Volume. 4. In the Ringer Volume area, use the Level slider to adjust the volume level of the ringer. 5. Toggle Always Vibrate to be On or Off. Tip: You can adjust the ringer volume (or the earpiece volume during a call) using the volume buttons on the left side of the phone. System Volume To adjust the system volume: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Volume. 4. In the System Volume area, use the Level slider to adjust the volume level of the system. 5. Toggle Touch Vibrate to be On or Off. 6. Toggle Touch Tone to be On or Off. 7. Toggle Startup/Shutdown to be On or Off.Settings 78 Settings Silence All This option allows you to mute all sounds without turning off your phone. To silence your phone: • Press and hold the volume button on the left side of the phone down until Silence All is displayed onscreen. To deactivate Silence All: • Press and hold the volume button on the left side of the phone up repeatedly to select a new volume level. Ringers & Vibrations Ringer types help you to identify incoming calls and messages. You can assign ringer types to individual Contacts entries, types of calls, and types of messages. The phone provides a variety of ringer options that allow you to customize your ringer and volume settings. These options allow you to identify incoming calls, messages, voicemails, alarms, timers, and calendar entries by their rings. Voice Call To set the voice call ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Voicemail To set the voicemail ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Message To set the message ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use.79 Settings Alarm/Timer/Calendar To set the alarm/timer/calendar ringer: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Scroll up and down the list of ringers and touch the one that you want to use. Voice Notification This feature will call out the phone number instead of using your assigned ringer. To adjust the voice notification: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Ringers & Vibrations. 4. Toggle Voice Notification to be On or Off. Messaging You can send and receive many different kinds of text messages with your phone without placing a voice call. See "Messaging" on page 34. Messaging settings make text messaging easier by letting you decide how you want to be notified of new messages. • Reminder: Sets the number of times that the message reminder is displayed. Touch Off, Once, or Every 2 min. • Callback #: Sets the default callback number used when sending messages. Touch None, your mobile phone number, or Other (allows you to enter a different number using the keyboard). • Auto-Erase: Touch Yes to have the phone automatically erase old messages when the folders are full. • Draft Alert: Toggle On or Off to have the phone display an alert when a message is saved to the Draft folder. General Phone Information To display the phone’s information: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General.Settings 80 Settings 4. Touch Phone Information. 5. The phone displays the phone number, MSID number, Firmware Version, and Advanced information. Memory status To display the phone’s memory status: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Memory status. 5. The phone displays the amount of memory that has been used in both the phone and memory card. Airplane Mode When your phone is in Airplane Mode, it cannot send or receive any calls or access online information. All incoming calls will be sent directly to your Voicemail box. The Bluetooth interface will be disabled when Airplane Mode is on. To set your phone to Airplane Mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Airplane Mode. (A brief explanation of Airplane Mode will display.) 5. Touch OK to toggle Airplane Mode to be On or Off. Note: While in Airplane Mode, your phone’s standby screen will display “Phone Off”. Location The Location feature allows the network to detect your position. Turning Location off will hide your location from everyone except 911. Note: Even if the Location feature is enabled, no service may use your location information without your expressed permission. To enable your phone’s Location feature: 1. Touch Menu.81 Settings 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Location. (A brief explanation will display. Scroll up or down to read the entire text.) 5. Touch OK. One Hand operation You can configure the Power Search tab to be on the left or right of the display screen. For example, when the Right Handed option is selected, the Power Search tab is located on the right side of the screen and Contacts entries are selected by pressing their field names along the left side of the display screen. To modify one hand operation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch One Hand operation. 5. Touch Right Handed or Left Handed. This places the Power Search tab along the right or left side of the display screen respectively. TTY See "TTY Use With Handset" on page 18 and "Voice Command" on page 25. Ignore with Text Sends an incoming call to your voicemail box and automatically sends the caller a text message at the same time. You can select a preset message to be sent or create a custom message. To use Ignore with Text: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Ignore with Text. 5. Touch to create a custom message. The phone switches to Landscape mode. • You can also touch a preset message in the list. 6. Use the keyboard to enter the text for the message.Settings 82 Settings 7. Touch Save. Touch Sensitivity Your phone’s touchscreen requires a small amount of pressure to operate. The smaller the size of your contact point on the display screen, the less amount of pressure required. The tip of your finger will work better than the pad of your finger and a fingernail will require even less pressure. Initially, your phone’s sensitivity is set to the highest level. When you have discovered your preffered method of operating your touchscreen, you may find that it is too sensitive for some applications. You can adjust how sensitive the phone is to touch actions on the screen. To adjust the touch sensitivity: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Touch Sensitivity. 5. Touch and drag the slider left or right to adjust the sensitivity level. 6. Touch Touch here to gauge the response of the new sensitivity level. Touch Calibration The Touch Calibration feature allows you to re-align the screen’s touch accuracy. Use this feature only when the device does not respond properly when you touch the screen. To adjust the calibration: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Touch Calibration. 5. Touch the center of the target and repeat this step as the target moves around the four corners of the screen. • Touch Restore to restore the target to its original calibration. • Touch Retry to try the calibration again. Note: When touching the screen in Calibration mode, you must touch the center of the cross hair area. 6. When the calibration is completed, touch Yes to accept the calibration.83 Settings 7. A New setting has been saved confirmation message is displayed. Text Entry The Text Entry menu allows you to customize how text functions on your phone. 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch General. 4. Touch Text Entry. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Predictive Text: If toggled On, the phone analyzes the letters you enter using an intuitive word database and creates a suitable word. (The word might change as you type.) Other word suggestions are listed below the text. • Auto Capital: Automatically capitalizes the first word of a sentence. • Auto Space: Automatically adds a space after you select a word. • Dual Language: Displays word options from both the English and French dictionaries if Predictive Text is toggled On. • Personal Dictionary: Allows you to add words to a custom dictionary. • Word Choice List: Toggle On to display the list of predicted words. • Word Prediction: Toggle On to only display possible word candidates after a preset number of characters have been entered. • Use My Words: Allows you to use a custom database of words. • Help: Provides additional information on using Predictive Text (or T9) entry. Web Browser You can quickly clear the background information that is gathered when you use the web browser. To clear the web browser: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Web Browser. 4. Touch one of the following options: Clear Cache, Clear Cookies, or Clear History. 5. Touch Clear to confirm the action.Settings 84 Settings Speech to Action Allows you to configure the verbal Confirmation, activate the training mode (Adaptation), configure the Expert and Prompt modes, or get information about the Speech to Action software that is used with the Voice Command functionality. Confirmation Your phone can be configured to take a specific action prior to initiating any voice command parameter. To change the confirmation: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Confirmation. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Automatic: Always provides you with options if there was an issue registering the command, confirm any commands, and then announce any actions. • Always Confirm: Always confirms any command actions before they are done, even if it was properly registered. • Never Confirm: Never confirms any command operations. The phone will always act on what it registers as the current command, even if it is incorrect and without notifying you. Adaptation Allows you to adapt the voice command system to properly recognize your voice. To adapt the system to your voice: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Adaptation. 5. Touch Adapt Voice. 6. Touch Start. 7. Hold the phone so that the microphone is approximately six inches away from your mouth and you can clearly read the onscreen number sequences.85 Settings 8. Repeat either the numbers or words shown onscreen using a normal tone of voice. • If the phone cannot recognize your words, it will continue to display the same information onscreen. 9. Repeat the previous step for the remaining sets of numbers or words. 10. When you have finished with a ful session, Adapting appears on the display screen. 11. Touch OK to save. Note: It is recommended that you perform the complete Adapt Voice session at least once to achive the maximum benefit of this feature. If a partial adaptation is performed, you can always return later and resume the process from the halfway point. Audio Modes You can customize whether the Voice Command feature displays a list of the top Voice Command options or automatically dials the first number without displaying a list of options. To change the audio mode: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Speech to Action. 4. Touch Audio Modes. 5. Select one of the following options: • Expert Mode: Displays both a selectable list of matching entries. If the first entry is not correct, the phone will continue to read out each available option until it detects either a confirmation (Yes) or rejection (No). • Prompt Mode: Displays a selectable list of available dialing options and only reads out the entry name. You are required to touch an onscreen option to activate a command. About Displays information about the software manufacturer and version.Settings 86 Settings Lock When your phone is locked, your screen turns off and neither the display screen or keyboard will accept input. Regaining access requires entering a lock code. To lock your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Lock. 4. Use the onscreen keypad to enter a new Lock Code and touch Done. 5. Use the onscreen keypad to re-enter the new Lock Code and touch Done again. 6. Touch the Lock Off button. 7. Read the onscreen information and touch OK to activate the Lock feature (the button is toggled to On). Tip: If you can’t recall your lock code, try using the last four digits of your Mobile Directory Number or try 0000. If none of these work, call Customer Service at 1-800-Samsung. Reset You can reset your phone to its factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings. Reset Settings Resetting the phone settings only restores all of the factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings. Onboard data, such as Contacts, History, Scheduler, and Messaging are not affected. To reset your phone’s settings: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Reset Settings. 5. Read the disclaimer, write down the lock code, and touch Proceed. 6. Enter the lock code provided in the disclaimer using the onscreen keypad. 7. Touch Done to reset the phone’s settings.87 Settings Delete Contents You can quickly erase selected content that you have created or stored in your phone. To delete your phone’s contents: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Delete Contents. 5. Touch one of the following options: • Delete Contacts: Deletes all Contacts entries. • Delete Downloads: Deletes all downloaded content, such as games, ringers, and images. • Delete Messages: Deletes all recieved text and picture messages. • Delete Calender: Deletes all calendar events. • Delete Speed Dial: Deletes all speed dial entries. 6. Touch a category entry and then touch Delete to confirm the deletion. 7. The onscreen keypad displays. Write down the lock code that is displayed at the top of the screen. 8. Enter the lock code that is displayed at the top of the screen using the onscreen keypad and touch Done. Reset Phone Resetting the phone restores all of the factory defaults, including the ringer types and display settings and deletes all content stored on the phone. To reset your phone: 1. Touch Menu. 2. Touch Settings. 3. Touch Reset. 4. Touch Reset Phone. 5. Read the disclaimer, write down the lock code, and touch Proceed. 6. Enter the lock code provided in the disclaimer using the onscreen keypad. 7. Touch Done to reset the phone’s to its factory default state. Roaming See "Roaming" on page 23.Safety 88 Safety Safety Getting the Most Out of Your Reception Keeping Tabs on Signal Strength The quality of each call you make or receive depends on the signal strength in your area. Your phone informs you of the current signal strength by displaying a number of bars next to the signal strength icon. The more bars displayed, the stronger the signal. If you’re inside a building, being near a window may give you better reception. Understanding the Power Save Feature If your phone is unable to find a signal after 15 minutes of searching, a Power Save feature is automatically activated. If your phone is active, it periodically rechecks service availability or you can check it yourself by pressing any key. Anytime the Power Save feature is activated, a message displays on the screen. When a signal is found, your phone returns to standby mode. Understanding How Your Phone Operates Your phone is basically a radio transmitter and receiver. When it’s turned on, it receives and transmits radio frequency (RF) signals. When you use your phone, the system handling your call controls the power level. This power can range from 0.006 watts to 0.2 watts in digital mode. Knowing Radio Frequency Safety The design of your phone complies with updated NCRP standards described below. In 1991-92, the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) and the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) joined in updating ANSI’s 1982 standard for safety levels with respect to human exposure to RF signals. More than 120 scientists, engineers and physicians from universities, government health agencies and industries developed this updated standard after reviewing the available body of research. In 1993, the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) adopted this updated standard in a regulation. In August 1996, the FCC adopted hybrid standard consisting of the existing ANSI/IEEE standard and the guidelines published by the National Council of Radiation Protection and Measurements (NCRP). Maintaining Your Phone’s Peak Performance There are several simple guidelines for operating your phone properly and maintaining safe, satisfactory service. • Speak directly into the mouthpiece. • Avoid exposing your phone and accessories to rain or liquid spills. If your phone does get wet, immediately turn the power off and remove the battery. If it’s inoperable, return it to a dealer store or call Customer Support for service.89 Safety Note: For the best care of your phone, only authorized personnel should service your phone and accessories. Faulty service may void the warranty. Maintaining Safe Use of and Access to Your Phone Failure to follow the instructions outlined may lead to serious personal injury and possible property damage. Using Your Phone While Driving Talking on your phone while driving (or operating the phone without a hands-free device) is prohibited in some jurisdictions. Laws vary as to specific restrictions. Remember that safety always comes first. When using your phone in the car: • Get to know your phone and its features, such as speed dial and re-dial. • When available, use a hands-free device. • Position your phone within easy reach. • Let the person you are speaking to know you are driving; if necessary, suspend the call in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers while driving. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic; if possible, place calls when stationary or before pulling into traffic. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may divert your attention from the road. • Dial 911 to report serious emergencies. It’s free from your wireless phone. • Use your phone to help others in emergencies. • Call roadside assistance or a special non-emergency wireless number when necessary. Following Safety Guidelines To operate your phone safely and efficiently, always follow any special regulations in a given area. Turn your phone off in areas where use is forbidden or when it may cause interference or danger. Using Your Phone Near Other Electronic Devices Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from radio frequency (RF) signals. However, RF signals from wireless phones may affect inadequately shielded electronic equipment.Safety 90 Safety RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately shielded electronic operating systems and/or entertainment systems in motor vehicles. Check with the manufacturer or their representative to determine if these systems are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Also check with the manufacturer regarding any equipment that has been added to your vehicle. Consult the manufacturer of any personal medical devices, such as pacemakers and hearing aids, to determine if they are adequately shielded from external RF signals. Note: Always turn off the phone in health care facilities and request permission before using the phone near medical equipment. Turning Off Your Phone Before Flying Turn off your phone before boarding any aircraft. To prevent possible interference with aircraft systems, the U.S. Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) regulations require you to have permission from a crew member to use your phone while the plane is on the ground. To prevent any risk of interference, FCC regulations prohibit using your phone while the plane is in the air. Turning Off Your Phone in Dangerous Areas To avoid interfering with blasting operations, turn off your phone when in a blasting area or in other areas with signs indicating that two-way radios should be turned off. Construction crews often use remote-control RF devices to set off explosives. Turn off your phone when you are in an area with a potentially explosive atmosphere. Although it is rare, your phone or its accessories could generate sparks. Sparks could cause an explosion or a fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. These areas are often, but not always, clearly marked. These areas include: • Fueling areas such as gas stations. • Below deck on boats. • Fuel or chemical transfer or storage facilities. • Areas where the air contains chemicals or particles such as grain, dust or metal powders. • Any other area where you would normally be advised to turn off your vehicle’s engine.91 Safety Note: Never transport or store flammable gas, liquid or explosives in the compartment of your vehicle that contains your phone or accessories. Restricting Children’s Access to your Phone Your phone is not a toy. Children should not be allowed to play with it because they could hurt themselves and others, damage the phone, dial 911 by mistake or make calls that increase your phone bill. Warning Regarding Display The display on your handset is made of glass or acrylic and could break if your handset is dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause injury to you. Caring for the Battery Protecting Your Battery The guidelines listed below help you get the most out of your battery’s performance. • Use only Samsung approved batteries and desktop chargers. These chargers are designed to maximize battery life. Using other batteries or chargers voids your warranty and may cause damage. • In order to avoid damage, charge the battery only in temperatures that range from 32º F to 113º F (0º C to 45º C). • Don’t use the battery charger in direct sunlight or in high humidity areas, such as the bathroom. • Never dispose of the battery by incineration. • Keep the metal contacts on top of the battery clean. • Don’t attempt to disassemble or short-circuit the battery. • The battery may need recharging if it has not been used for a long period of time. • It’s best to replace the battery when it no longer provides acceptable performance. When used correctly, the battery can be recharged hundreds of times before it needs replacing. • Don’t store the battery in high temperature areas for long periods of time. It’s best to follow these storage rules: • Less than one month: -4º F to 140º F (-20º C to 60º C) • More than one month: -4º F to 113º F (-20º C to 45º C) Disposal of Lithium Ion (LiIon) Batteries For safe disposal options of your LiIon batteries, contact your nearest service center.Safety 92 Safety Special Note: Be sure to dispose of your battery properly. In some areas, the disposal of batteries in household or business trash may be prohibited. Note: For safety, do not handle a damaged or leaking LiIon battery. Acknowledging Special Precautions and Industry Canada Notice Cautions Any changes or modifications to your phone not expressly approved in this document could void your warranty for this equipment, and void your authority to operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries, antennas and chargers. The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous and void the phone warranty if said accessories cause damage or a defect to the phone. Although your phone is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting, bending or sitting on it. Information to User This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation; if this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: • Reorient/relocate the receiving antenna. • Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. • Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Specific Absorption Rates (SAR) for Wireless Phones The SAR is a value that corresponds to the relative amount of RF energy absorbed in the head of a user of a wireless handset. The SAR value of a phone is the result of an extensive testing, measuring and calculation process. It does not represent how much RF the phone emits. All phone models are 93 Safety tested at their highest value in strict laboratory settings. But when in operation, the SAR of a phone can be substantially less than the level reported to the FCC. This is because of a variety of factors including its proximity to a base station antenna, phone design and other factors. What is important to remember is that each phone meets strict federal guidelines. Variations in SARs do not represent a variation in safety. All phones must meet the federal standard, which incorporates a substantial margin of safety. As stated above, variations in SAR values between different model phones do not mean variations in safety. SAR values at or below the federal standard of 1.6 W/kg are considered safe for use by the public. The highest reported SAR values of the SPH-m350 are: CDMA mode (Part 22) - Head: 0.68W/kg; Body-worn: 1.15W/kg PCS mode (Part 24) - Head: 1.08W/kg; Body-worn: 1.31W/kg Owner’s Record The model number, regulatory number and serial number are located on a nameplate inside the battery compartment. Record the serial number in the space provided below. This will be helpful if you need to contact us about your phone in the future. Model: SPH-m350 Serial No.: User Guide Proprietary Notice CDMA Technology is licensed by QUALCOMM Incorporated under one or more of the following patents: 4,901,307 5,109,390 5,267,262 5,416,797 5,506,865 5,544,196 5,657,420 5,101,501 5,267,261 5,414,796 5,504,773 5,535,239 5,600,754 5,778,338 5,228,054 5,337,338 5,710,784 5,056,109 5,568,483 5,659,569 5,490,165 5,511,073 T9 Text Input is licensed by Tegic Communications and is covered by U.S. Pat. 5,818,437, U.S. Pat. 5,953,541, U.S. Pat. 6,011,554 and other patents pending.Manufacturer’s Warranty 94 Manufacturer’s Warranty STANDARD LIMITED WARRANTY What is Covered and For How Long? SAMSUNG Electronics Canada Inc. ("SAMSUNG") warrants to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that SAMSUNG's phones and accessories ("Products") are free from defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for the period commencing upon the date of purchase and continuing for the following specified period of time after that date: What is Not Covered? This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of Product by Purchaser. This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage resulting from accident, misuse, abuse, neglect, unusual physical, electrical or electromechanical stress, or modification of any part of Product, including antenna, or cosmetic damage; (b) equipment that has the serial number removed or made illegible; (c) any plastic surfaces or other externally exposed parts that are scratched or damaged due to normal use; (d) malfunctions resulting from the use of Product in conjunction with accessories, products, or ancillary/ peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG; (e) defects or damage from improper testing, operation, maintenance, installation, or adjustment; (f) installation, maintenance, and service of Product; or (g) Product used or purchased outside Canada. This Limited Warranty covers batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does not cover any battery if: (i) the battery has been charged by a battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG phone for which it is specified. What are SAMSUNG's Obligations? During the applicable warranty period, SAMSUNG will repair or replace, at SAMSUNG's sole option, without charge to Purchaser, any defective component part of Product. To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must return Product to an authorized phone service facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied by Purchaser's sales receipt or comparable substitute proof of sale showing the date of purchase, the serial number of Product and the sellers' name and address. To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, call Samsung Customer Care at 1-800- Samsung. Upon receipt, SAMSUNG will promptly repair or replace the defective Product. SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt, reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing any Product or replace Product with a rebuilt, reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced leather cases, pouches and holsters will be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other repaired/replaced Product will be warranted for a period equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on the original Product or for 90 days, whichever is longer. All replaced parts, components, boards and equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. If SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping, and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product. What Are the Limits On SAMSUNG's Liability? EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE EXPRESS WARRANTY CONTAINED HEREIN, PURCHASER TAKES THE PRODUCT "AS IS," AND SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO: Phone 1 Year Batteries 1 Year Leather Case/Pouch/Holster 90 Days Game Pad 90 Days Other Phone Accessories 1 Year95 Manufacturer’s Warranty • THE MERCHANTABILITY OF THE PRODUCT OR ITS FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR USE; • WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT; • DESIGN, CONDITION, QUALITY, OR PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCT; • THE WORKMANSHIP OF THE PRODUCT OR THE COMPONENTS CONTAINED THEREIN; OR • COMPLIANCE OF THE PRODUCT WITH THE REQUIREMENTS OF ANY LAW, RULE, SPECIFICATION OR CONTRACT PERTAINING THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS THAT MAY ARISE BY OPERATION OF LAW, INCLUDING IF APPLICABLE THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE HEREBY LIMITED TO THE SAME DURATION OF TIME AS THE EXPRESS WRITTEN WARRANTY STATED HEREIN. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE, USE, OR MISUSE OF, OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR ARISING DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM THE USE OR LOSS OF USE OF THE PRODUCT OR FROM THE BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR SIMILAR DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS OR BENEFITS, OR FOR DAMAGES ARISING FROM ANY TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR GROSS NEGLIGENCE) OR FAULT COMMITTED BY SAMSUNG, ITS AGENTS OR EMPLOYEES, OR FOR ANY BREACH OF CONTRACT OR FOR ANY CLAIM BROUGHT AGAINST PURCHASER BY ANY OTHER PARTY. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, AND YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER RIGHTS, WHICH VARY FROM PROVINCE TO PROVINCE. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SHALL NOT EXTEND TO ANYONE OTHER THAN THE ORIGINAL PURCHASER OF THIS PRODUCT AND SHALL BE PURCHASER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY. IF ANY PORTION OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY IS HELD ILLEGAL OR UNENFORCEABLE BY REASON OF ANY LAW, SUCH PARTIAL ILLEGALITY OR UNENFORCEABILITY SHALL NOT AFFECT THE ENFORCEABILITY FOR THE REMAINDER OF THIS LIMITED WARRANTY WHICH PURCHASER ACKNOWLEDGES IS AND WILL ALWAYS BE CONSTRUED TO BE LIMITED BY ITS TERMS OR AS LIMITED AS THE LAW PERMITS. THE PARTIES UNDERSTAND THAT THE PURCHASER MAY USE THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT. SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND THERE ARE NO CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT. THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY SUCH THIRDPARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT LIE SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR, OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT, AS THE CASE MAY BE.Manufacturer’s Warranty 96 This Limited Warranty allocates risk of Product failure between Purchaser and SAMSUNG, and SAMSUNG's Product pricing reflects this allocation of risk and the limitations of liability contained in this Limited Warranty. The agents, employees, distributors, and dealers of SAMSUNG are not authorized to make modifications to this Limited Warranty, or make additional warranties binding on SAMSUNG. Accordingly, additional statements such as dealer advertising or presentation, whether oral or written, do not constitute warranties by SAMSUNG and should not be relied upon. Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. ©2010 Samsung Electronics Canada, Inc. SAMSUNG is a registered trademark of Samsung Electronics Co., Ltd. and its related entities. No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior written approval. Specifications and availability subject to change without notice. #861826 v2 | 403234297 Index Index A Add Call 17 Airplane Mode 80 Alarm Clock 54 B Battery capacity 6 charging 7 disposal 91 installing 6 protecting 91 removing 7 Bluetooth 63–67 device information 64 device name 64 disconnecting pairing 65 enabling 63 my info 66 pairing 65 send data 66 trusted devices 64 visibility 63 C Calendar 51 Call Waiting 17 Caller ID 16 Calls 61 answering 12 disconnecting 13 making 12 Camera 70–74 assigning pictures 72 my album 71 settings 73 storing pictures 73 taking pictures 70 Contacts 45 adding new 45 editing existing 46 finding 46 save a phone number 45 D Display 75 background 75 brightness 76 greeting 75 keypad backlight 76 language 77 screen backlight 76 Display Screen Symbols 3 Displaying Your Phone Number 11 Draft Alert 42 E Emergency Numbers 13 End-of-Call Options 14 Entering Text T9 text input 20 I Icon Glossary 3 Ignore with Text 81 In-Call Options 13 Incoming Call answering 12 Indicator signal strength 3 K Keyboard 20 L Landscape Mode 3 keyboard 20 Location 80 Lock Phone 86Index 98 M Memory Card 9 installing 9 Memory Status 80 Menu accessing 11 layout 30 Message Alert 41 Messaging 34 alert setup 44 auto-erase 42 email 37 instant messaging 37 picture message settings 43 picture messaging 35 settings 39 text message settings 42 text messaging 34 voicemail 37 microSD 9 installing 9 Missed Call Notification 13 My Album 71 options 71 My Downloads 68–69 assigning downloaded ringers 68 assigning downloaded wallpaper 69 downloading applications 68 downloading games 68 downloading ringers 68 downloading wallpaper 68 launching applications 69 playing games 69 N Name Lookup 27 O One Hand Operation 81 P Phone Information 79 Phone Number 11 dialing with pauses 16 displaying tour phone number 11 finding 15 saving 15 Phone Numbers speed dialing 16 Portrait Mode 1 Predictive Text 20 Preset Messages 40 R Recent Calls 61 options 62 Reset Phone 86 Ringer alarm 79 calendar 79 message 78 timer 79 voice call 78 voice notification 79 voicemail 78 Roaming 23 other digital networks 23 setting 23 update PRL 24 S Safety 88 Save in Outbox 42 Settings 75 display 75 general 79 lock 86 messaging 79 reset 86 ringers & vibrations 78 speech to action 84 touch calibration 82 volume 77 web browser 83 Speed Dialing 1699 Index T T9 Text Input 20 Text edit 22 entering 20 numbers 21 punctuation 21 symbols 21 text 21 text entry settings 83 using the keyboard 21 Text Entry Settings 83 Three-Way Calling 17 Tools 48 alarm clock 54 calculator 49 calendar 51 daylight saving time 57 music 58 notes 50 self serve 48 stopwatch 56 timer 55 tip calculator 49 unit convertor 49 update phone 58 voice command 48 voice memo 58 world clock 56 Touch Calibration 82 Touch Sensitivity 82 Travel Adapter 8 TTY 18, 81 Turning Your Phone On and Off 5 U Using the Travel Adapter 8 V Voice Command 25 activate 25 adaptation 84 audio mode 85 call 25 changing audio guidance mode 29 check 27 confirmation 84 customizing 28 go to 27 lookup 27 send text 26 Voicemail 37 clearing 38 notification 38 retrieving 38 Volume 77 ringer 77 silence all 78 system 77 W Warranty 94 Wireless Web bookmark 32 downloading items 68 launching the browser 31 Navigating 31 navigating 31 navigating menus 33 GT-S6102 Mode d'emploiUtilisation de ce mode d’emploi 2 www.sar-tick.com Cet appareil mobile respecte les limites DAS nationales fixées à une valeur maximale de 2,0 W/kg. Les valeurs DAS maximales sont indiquées à la section Informations sur la certification DAS de ce mode d'emploi. Lorsque vous transportez cet appareil ou lorsque vous l’utilisez près du corps, utilisez un accessoire approuvé tel qu’un étui ou portez-le à une distance d’au moins 1,5 cm de votre corps afin de respecter les exigences en matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Notez que cet appareil peut émettre des radiofréquences même lorsqu'aucun appel téléphonique n’est en cours. Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi Merci d’avoir fait l’acquisition de cet appareil mobile Samsung. Cet appareil vous permettra de communiquer et d’accéder à des divertissements de haute qualité, basés sur les critères de qualité et la technologie de Samsung. Ce mode d’emploi a été spécialement conçu pour vous permettre de découvrir les fonctions et les caractéristiques de votre appareil. À lire avant toute utilisation ● Veuillez lire attentivement ce mode d’emploi et toutes les précautions qui y sont indiquées avant d’utiliser votre appareil, afin de pouvoir l’utiliser correctement et en toute sécurité. ● Les instructions et descriptions mentionnées dans ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur les paramètres par défaut de votre appareil. Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 3 ● Les images et les captures d’écran utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi peuvent différer par rapport à l’aspect réel du produit. ● Le contenu de ce mode d’emploi peut différer par rapport au produit ou à la version logicielle fournie par votre opérateur, et faire l’objet de modifications sans préavis. Pour obtenir la version la plus récente de ce mode d’emploi, connectez-vous sur le site www.samsung.com. ● Les fonctions disponibles et les services supplémentaires peuvent varier en fonction de l’appareil, de la version logicielle ou de votre opérateur. ● La mise en forme et la distribution de ce mode d’emploi sont basées sur le système d’exploitation Google Android et peuvent varier en fonction du système d’exploitation de l’utilisateur. ● Les applications et leurs fonctions peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou des caractéristiques du matériel. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance relatifs aux applications fournies par des tiers. ● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des problèmes de performance ou des incompatibilités découlant de la modification des paramètres de registre par l’utilisateur. Toute tentative de personnalisation du système d’exploitation peut entrainer des problèmes de fonctionnement de votre appareil ou de ses applications. ● Vous pouvez améliorer le logiciel de votre appareil mobile en visitant le site www.samsung.com. ● Les logiciels, sons, fonds d’écran, images ainsi que les autres contenus fournis avec cet appareil sont concédés sous licence et leur usage est restreint à une utilisation entre Samsung et leurs propriétaires respectifs. L’extraction et l’utilisation de ce matériel à des fins commerciales ou autres constituent une infraction au regard des lois sur les droits d’auteurs. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable des infractions sur les droits d’auteurs commises par l’utilisateur. ● Veuillez conserver ce mode d’emploi pour pouvoir le consulter ultérieurement.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 4 Icônes Avant de mettre votre appareil en service, familiarisez-vous avec les icônes utilisées dans ce mode d’emploi. Avertissement: situations susceptibles de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes Attention : situations susceptibles d’endommager votre appareil ou d’autres équipements Remarque : remarques, conseils d’utilisation ou informations complémentaires ► Référence : pages contenant plus d’informations. Exemple : ► p. 12 (signifie « reportez-vous à la page 12 ») → Suivi de : séquence d’options ou de menus à sélectionner pour effectuer une étape. Exemple : depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→A propos du téléphone (signifie que vous devez d’abord appuyer sur Paramètres, puis sur A propos du téléphone) [ ] Crochets : touches de l’appareil. Exemple : [ ] (symbolise la touche Menu) Droits d’auteur Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics Ce mode d’emploi est protégé par les lois internationales sur les droits d’auteur. Il est interdit de reproduire, distribuer, traduire ou transmettre sous quelque forme et par quelque moyen que ce soit, électronique ou mécanique, notamment par photocopie, enregistrement ou stockage dans un système de stockage et de recherche documentaire, tout ou partie de ce document sans le consentement préalable écrit de Samsung Electronics.Utilisation de ce mode d’emploi 5 Marques ● SAMSUNG et le logo SAMSUNG sont des marques déposées de Samsung Electronics. ● Les logos Android, Google Search™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Android Market™ et Google Talk™ sont des marques de Google, Inc. ● et sont des marques de SRS Labs, Inc. Les technologies CS Headphone et WOW HD sont fournies sous licence de SRS Labs, Inc. ● Bluetooth® est une marque déposée de Bluetooth SIG, Inc. ● Oracle et Java sont des marques déposées de Oracle et/ou de ses filiales. Les autres marques sont déposées et demeurent la propriété de leurs détenteurs respectifs. ● Wi-Fi ®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™ et le logo Wi-Fi sont des marques déposées de Wi-Fi Alliance. ● Toutes les autres marques et droits d’auteur demeurent la propriété de leurs propriétaires respectifs.Sommaire 6 Assemblage ............................................................ 10 Contenu du coffret ............................................................... 10 Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie ................... 10 Recharger la batterie ........................................................... 12 Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) ........................... 15 Fixer une dragonne (en option) ........................................ 17 Démarrage .............................................................. 18 Allumer/Éteindre l’appareil ................................................ 18 Présentation de l’appareil .................................................. 19 Utiliser l’écran tactile ........................................................... 23 Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches ................................................................................... 24 Présentation de l’écran d’accueil ...................................... 25 Accéder aux applications ................................................... 27 Personnaliser l’appareil ...................................................... 29 Changer de carte SIM ou USIM ......................................... 34 Saisir du texte ........................................................................ 35 Télécharger des applications depuis Android Market ..................................................................................... 39 Télécharger des fichiers depuis le Web ........................... 40 Synchroniser des données ................................................. 40 Communication ..................................................... 42 Appels ..................................................................................... 42 SMS et MMS ........................................................................... 46 Google Mail ............................................................................ 49 E-mail ....................................................................................... 51 SommaireSommaire 7 Talk ........................................................................................... 53 Social Hub .............................................................................. 54 Divertissements ..................................................... 55 Appareil photo ...................................................................... 55 Galerie ..................................................................................... 62 Musique .................................................................................. 65 Radio FM ................................................................................. 68 Informations personnelles ................................... 72 Contacts .................................................................................. 72 Calendrier ............................................................................... 76 Mémo ...................................................................................... 78 Mémo vocal ........................................................................... 78 Web .......................................................................... 80 Internet ................................................................................... 80 Cartes ...................................................................................... 83 Latitude ................................................................................... 85 Adresses .................................................................................. 85 Navigation .............................................................................. 86 YouTube .................................................................................. 87 Samsung Apps ...................................................................... 88 Market ..................................................................................... 89 Actualités et météo .............................................................. 90 Connectivité ........................................................... 91 Bluetooth ................................................................................ 91 Wi-Fi ......................................................................................... 93 Partage d’une connexion de données ............................ 95Sommaire 8 GPS ........................................................................................... 97 Connexions PC ...................................................................... 98 Connexions VPN ................................................................... 99 Outils ...................................................................... 102 Horloge ................................................................................. 102 Calculatrice .......................................................................... 103 Téléchargements ................................................................ 103 Recherche ............................................................................. 104 Mes fichiers .......................................................................... 104 Polaris Viewer ...................................................................... 105 Outils SIM ............................................................................. 106 Gestion de tâches ............................................................... 106 Recherche vocale ................................................................ 107 Paramètres ............................................................ 108 Accéder au menu Paramètres ......................................... 108 Gestionnaire de carte SIM ................................................ 108 Sans fil et réseaux ............................................................... 108 Appel ..................................................................................... 110 Son ......................................................................................... 111 Affichage .............................................................................. 112 Localisation et sécurité ..................................................... 112 Applications ......................................................................... 114 Comptes et synchro. .......................................................... 115 Confidentialité .................................................................... 115 Carte SD et mémoire ......................................................... 115Sommaire 9 Paramètres de langue ....................................................... 116 Entrée et sortie voix ........................................................... 118 Accessibilité ......................................................................... 119 Date & heure ........................................................................ 119 A propos du téléphone ..................................................... 119 Dépannage ........................................................... 120 Consignes de sécurité ......................................... 125Assemblage 10 Assemblage Contenu du coffret Vérifiez le contenu du coffret et assurez-vous que tous les éléments suivants sont présents: ● Appareil mobile ● Batterie ● Guide de prise en main rapide Utilisez exclusivement des logiciels homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de logiciels piratés ou illégaux peut occasionner des dommages ou des dysfonctionnements qui ne sont pas couverts par la garantie du fabricant. ● Les éléments fournis avec votre appareil et les accessoires disponibles peuvent varier en fonction de votre zone géographique ou votre opérateur. ● Vous pouvez acquérir d’autres accessoires auprès de votre revendeur Samsung. ● Les accessoires fournis sont spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. ● Il est possible que certains accessoires, autres que ceux fournis, ne soient pas compatibles avec votre appareil. Installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie Lorsque vous vous abonnez à un service de téléphonie mobile, une carte SIM (Subscriber Identity Module) vous est remise. Elle permet de vous identifier et contient tous les détails de votre abonnement (code PIN, services en option, etc.). Pour bénéficier des services 3 G ou 3 G+, vous devez disposer d’une carte USIM (Universal Subscriber Identity Module). Pour installer la carte SIM ou USIM et la batterie : 1 Si l’appareil est allumé, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Éteindre→OK pour l’éteindre.Assemblage 11 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. Veillez à ne pas abîmer vos ongles en retirant le cache de la batterie. 3 Insérez la carte SIM ou USIM, puce orientée vers le bas. Votre appareil est doté de deux compartiments pour carte SIM afin de vous permettre d’utiliser deux cartes SIM ou USIM et d’activer l’une ou l’autre. Utilisez le compartiment de gauche pour y insérer votre principale carte SIM ou USIM. Utilisez le compartiment de droite pour y insérer une deuxième carte SIM ou USIM. Carte SIM 1 Carte SIM 2 L’antenne se trouve dans la partie supérieure à l’arrière de l’appareil. Ne retirez pas le ruban de protection recouvrant l’antenne, car cela pourrait l’endommager. Lorsque vous insérez deux cartes USIM dans votre appareil, la deuxième carte sera utilisée pour un réseau GPRS.Assemblage 12 4 Insérez la batterie. 5 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. Recharger la batterie Vous devez recharger la batterie avant d’utiliser l’appareil pour la première fois. Vous pouvez recharger l’appareil à l’aide d’un chargeur ou en le branchant sur un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC. Utilisez uniquement des chargeurs et des câbles de connexion PC homologués par Samsung. L’utilisation de chargeurs ou de câbles de connexion PC non homologués peut provoquer l’explosion de la batterie ou endommager votre appareil.Assemblage 13 ● Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible, l’appareil émet un signal sonore et affiche un message d’avertissement. L’icône de batterie est alors vide. Lorsque le niveau de charge de la batterie est vraiment insuffisant, l’appareil s’éteint automatiquement. Rechargez la batterie pour remettre l’appareil en marche. ● Si la batterie est complètement déchargée, vous ne pouvez pas allumer l’appareil, même si le chargeur est branché. Rechargez la batterie pendant quelques minutes avant de tenter d’allumer l’appareil. › Charger la batterie avec un chargeur 1 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du chargeur sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil. Un branchement incorrect du chargeur peut sérieusement endommager l’appareil. Les dégâts résultant d’une mauvaise utilisation ne sont pas couverts par la garantie.Assemblage 14 2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du chargeur sur une prise de courant. ● Vous pouvez utiliser l’appareil lorsqu’il est en cours de chargement. Dans ce cas, il est possible que le rechargement complet de la batterie prenne plus de temps. ● Lorsque l’appareil est en cours de chargement, il est possible que l’écran tactile ne fonctionne pas en raison de l’instabilité de l’alimentation électrique. Dans ce cas, débranchez le chargeur de l’appareil. ● Il est possible que l’appareil chauffe lorsqu’il est en cours de rechargement. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances de l’appareil. ● Si l’appareil ne se charge pas correctement, apportez-le, accompagné de son chargeur, dans un centre de service après-vente Samsung. 3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée, débranchez d’abord le chargeur de l’appareil, puis de la prise de courant. Ne retirez jamais la batterie avant d’avoir débranché le chargeur. Ceci pourrait endommager l’appareil. Pour économiser l'énergie, débranchez le chargeur lorsque vous ne l'utilisez pas. Le chargeur n'étant pas muni d'un bouton marche/arrêt, vous devez le débrancher de la prise de courant pour couper l'alimentation. Lorsqu'il est utilisé, le chargeur doit rester à proximité de la prise. › Recharger l’appareil avec un câble de connexion PC Avant de recharger l’appareil, assurez-vous que votre ordinateur est allumé. 1 Branchez la fiche micro-USB du câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de l’appareil.Assemblage 15 2 Branchez l’autre extrémité du câble de connexion PC sur un port USB de l’ordinateur. En fonction du type de câble de connexion PC que vous utilisez, il est possible que le rechargement tarde à démarrer. 3 Lorsque la batterie est entièrement chargée, débranchez d’abord le câble de connexion PC de l’appareil, puis de l’ordinateur. Insérer une carte mémoire (en option) Pour stocker des fichiers multimédia supplémentaires, vous devez utiliser une carte mémoire. L’appareil est compatible avec les cartes mémoire microSD™ ou microSDHC™ d’une capacité pouvant atteindre 32 Go (en fonction du fabricant et du modèle de carte mémoire). Samsung utilise des normes industrielles standardisées pour les cartes mémoire. Néanmoins, il est possible que certaines marques de cartes mémoire ne soient pas entièrement compatibles avec votre appareil. L’utilisation d’une carte mémoire incompatible peut endommager votre appareil ou la carte mémoire elle-même et corrompre les données qui y sont stockées. ● Seule la structure de fichiers FAT est compatible avec les cartes mémoire de votre appareil. Lorsque vous insérez une carte formatée avec une autre structure de fichiers, votre appareil vous invite à la reformater entièrement. ● Une trop grande fréquence des opérations d’effacement et d’écriture réduit la durée de vie des cartes mémoire. ● Lorsque vous insérez une carte mémoire dans votre appareil, le répertoire des fichiers de la carte mémoire apparaît dans le dossier sdcard du menu Mes fichiers.Assemblage 16 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Insérez la carte en orientant la puce vers le bas. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. › Retirer une carte mémoire Avant de retirer une carte mémoire, vous devez au préalable la désactiver pour pouvoir la retirer en toute sécurité. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur →Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→Démonter la carte SD→OK. 2 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 3 Retirez la carte mémoire. 4 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place. Ne retirez jamais la carte mémoire lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou lit des informations. Vous risqueriez de perdre des données et d’endommager la carte mémoire ou l’appareil lui-même.Assemblage 17 › Formater une carte mémoire Formater une carte mémoire sur un ordinateur peut entraîner des problèmes de compatibilité avec votre appareil. Formatez la carte mémoire uniquement dans l’appareil. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur →Paramètres→ Carte SD et mémoire→Démonter la carte SD→OK→Formater la carte SD →Formater la carte SD → Supprimer tout. Avant de formater la carte mémoire, n’oubliez pas d’effectuer des copies de sauvegarde de toutes les données importantes stockées dans l’appareil. La garantie du fabricant ne couvre pas la perte de données résultant des manipulations de l’utilisateur. Fixer une dragonne (en option) 1 Retirez le cache de la batterie. 2 Faites-passer une dragonne à travers la fente et accrochez-la au point d’attache. 3 Remettez le cache de la batterie en place.Démarrage 18 Démarrage Allumer/Éteindre l’appareil Pour allumer votre appareil, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. Si vous allumez votre appareil pour la première fois, suivez les instructions affichées à l’écran pour procéder à la configuration. Pour l’éteindre, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée, puis appuyez sur Éteindre→OK. ● Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et directives formulées par le personnel compétent dans les lieux où l’utilisation d’appareils mobiles est interdite, comme par exemple dans les avions et les hôpitaux. ● Pour utiliser uniquement les services hors-réseau de votre appareil, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth, activez le Mode Hors-ligne. Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Mode Hors-ligne. Démarrage 19 Présentation de l’appareil › Composants de l’appareil 1. Ne touchez et ne couvrez pas la zone de l’antenne avec les mains ou tout autre objet lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions sans fil. Touche Accueil Écouteur Écran tactile Touche Retour Microphone Touche de volume Touche Menu Connecteur à fonctions multiples Capteur de proximité Objectif photo Prise audio 3,5 mm Touche Marche/ Arrêt/Réinitialisation/ Verrouillage Antenne principale Cache de la batterie Haut-parleur Antenne GPS 1Démarrage 20 › Touches Touche Fonction Marche/Arrêt/ Réinitialisation 1 / Verrouillage Allumer l’appareil (maintenir enfoncée). Accéder aux menus rapides (maintenir enfoncée). Réinitialiser l’appareil (maintenir la touche enfoncée pendant 8 à 10 secondes, puis la relâcher). Verrouiller l’écran tactile. Menu Afficher à l’écran la liste des options disponibles. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrir l’application de recherche Google (maintenir enfoncée). Ouvrir la fenêtre de recherche tout en utilisant d’autres applications (maintenir enfoncée). Accueil Revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Ouvrir la liste des applications récentes (maintenir enfoncée). Retour Revenir à l’écran précédent. Volume Régler le volume de l’appareil. 1. Si votre appareil est sujet à des erreurs fatales ou s’il ne répond plus ou mal, vous pouvez le réinitialiser pour qu’il retrouve un fonctionnement normal.Démarrage 21 ›Icônes d’information Les icônes qui peuvent apparaître à l’écran varient en fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. Icône Signification Aucun signal Puissance du signal / Type de carte SIM ou USIM activée Réseau GPRS connecté Réseau EDGE connecté Réseau 3G connecté Réseau 3G+ connecté Ouvrir les points d’accès Wi-Fi disponibles Point d’accès Wi-Fi connecté Bluetooth activé Casque Bluetooth connecté GPS activé Appel en cours Appel en attente Haut-parleur activé Appel manqué Synchronisation avec le Web 1. Selon les paramètres de votre carte SIM, cette icône peut être différente. 1Démarrage 22 Icône Signification Chargement de données Téléchargement de données Renvoi d’appel activé Connecté à un ordinateur Modem USB activé Modem Wi-Fi activé Pas de carte SIM/USIM Nouveau SMS ou MMS Nouvel e-mail Nouveau Google Mail Nouveau message vocal Alarme activée Notification d’événement Itinérance (hors de la zone de service locale) Profil Discret activé Vibreur activé Mode Hors-ligne activé Lecture audio en cours Lecture audio en pauseDémarrage 23 Icône Signification Écoute en arrière-plan de la radio FM Une erreur s’est produite ou votre attention est nécessaire Niveau de charge de la batterie 10:00 Heure Utiliser l’écran tactile L’écran tactile de votre appareil vous permet de sélectionner des éléments et des fonctions en toute facilité. Découvrez les manipulations de base relatives à l’utilisation de l’écran tactile. ● N’utilisez pas d’objets pointus afin de ne pas rayer l’écran. ● Évitez tout contact de l’écran tactile avec d’autres appareils électriques. Les décharges électrostatiques peuvent provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. ● Évitez de mettre l’écran tactile en contact avec de l’eau. L’humidité ou le contact avec l’eau peut provoquer des dysfonctionnements de l’écran tactile. ● Pour une utilisation optimale de l’écran tactile, retirez le film de protection avant d’utiliser l’appareil. ● L’écran tactile comporte une couche qui détecte les petites charges électriques émises par le corps humain. Pour de meilleures performances, appuyez sur l’écran tactile du bout du doigt. L’écran tactile ne réagit pas si vous utilisez des objets pointus, tels qu’un stylet ou un stylo. Démarrage 24 Contrôlez le fonctionnement de l’écran tactile à l’aide des manipulations suivantes: ● Appuyer : appuyez une fois sur l’écran tactile avec le doigt pour sélectionner ou lancer un menu, une option ou une application. ● Maintenir enfoncé : pour ouvrir une liste d’options, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément pendant plus de 2 secondes. ● Faire glisser : posez le doigt sur l’écran et faites-le glisser vers le bas, le haut, la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre les éléments des différentes listes. ● Glisser/Déposer : maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément, puis faites-le glisser pour déplacer l’élément. ● Appuyer deux fois: appuyez brièvement à deux reprises sur l’écran tactile avec le doigt pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière sur les photos ou les pages Web que vous visionnez. ● Passé un certain délai d’inactivité, votre appareil désactive l’écran tactile automatiquement. Pour allumer l’écran tactile, appuyez sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil. ● Vous pouvez également régler la durée du rétroéclairage de l’écran. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→ Mise en veille de l’écran. Verrouiller ou déverrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile et les touches pour empêcher toute opération accidentelle de l’appareil. Pour le verrouiller, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée. Pour le déverrouiller, allumez l’écran en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt ou sur la touche Accueil, puis effleurez la fenêtre avec le doigt. Vous pouvez activer la fonction de verrouillage d’écran afin d’empêcher toute personne d’utiliser ou de consulter les données et informations personnelles enregistrées dans votre appareil. ► p. 31Démarrage 25 Présentation de l’écran d’accueil Lorsque l’appareil est en mode veille, l’écran d’accueil apparaît. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, vous pouvez visualiser les icônes d’information et accéder aux widgets ou aux applications, etc. L’écran d’accueil comprend plusieurs volets. Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre l’un des volets de l’écran d’accueil. › Ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez personnaliser l’écran d’accueil en lui ajoutant des raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des widgets ou des dossiers. Pour ajouter des éléments à l’écran d’accueil : 1 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter ou maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une zone vide de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Sélectionnez la catégorie d’éléments → un élément : ● Widgets : ajouter des widgets. Les widgets sont de petites applications qui permettent d’accéder à des fonctions et des informations pratiques sur votre écran d’accueil. ● Raccourcis : ajouter des raccourcis pour accéder à des applications, des favoris et des contacts, par exemple. ● Dossiers : créer un nouveau dossier ou ajouter des dossiers pour vos contacts. ● Fonds d’écran : définir une image d’arrière-plan. ›Déplacer les éléments sur l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément. 2 Faites-le glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité.Démarrage 26 › Supprimer des éléments de l’écran d’accueil 1 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un élément. La corbeille apparaît au bas de l’écran d’accueil. 2 Faites glisser l’élément jusqu’à la corbeille. 3 Lorsque l’élément apparaît en rouge, relâchez-le. ›Utiliser le volet des raccourcis Depuis l’écran d’accueil ou lorsque vous utilisez une application, appuyez sur la zone des icônes d’information et faites glisser le doigt vers le bas pour ouvrir le volet des raccourcis. Vous pouvez activer ou désactiver les fonctions de connexion sans fil et accéder à la liste des raccourcis (messages reçus, appels manqués, événements ou aux états en cours). Vous pouvez également passer d’une carte SIM ou USIM à l’autre. Pour masquer le volet, faites glisser le doigt de bas en haut. Depuis le volet des raccourcis, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● WiFi : activer ou désactiver la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 94 ● B/T : activer ou désactiver la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ► p. 91 ● GPS : activer ou désactiver la fonction GPS. ● Son/Vibreur: activer ou désactiver le son et/ou le vibreur. ● Rotation auto : activer ou désactiver la rotation automatique de l’écran. La disponibilité de certaines options dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.Démarrage 27 › Ajouter ou supprimer des volets sur l’écran d’accueil Vous pouvez ajouter de nouveaux volets à l’écran d’accueil ou bien en supprimer de façon à organiser les widgets selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier. 2 Ajoutez ou supprimez des volets en effectuant les opérations suivantes: ● Pour supprimer un volet, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la miniature correspondante et faites-la glisser dans la corbeille en bas de l’écran. ● Pour ajouter un nouveau volet, appuyez sur . ● Pour changer l’ordre des volets, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur la miniature, puis faites-la glisser à l’endroit souhaité. 3 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ]. Accéder aux applications Pour accéder aux applications de l’appareil : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur pour accéder à la liste des applications. 2 Faites défiler l’écran vers la gauche ou la droite pour atteindre un écran de menus. Vous pouvez également sélectionner un point en haut de l’écran pour accéder directement à l’écran correspondant. 3 Sélectionnez une application. ● Lorsque vous utilisez des applications fournies par Google, vous devez disposer d’un compte Google. Si vous n’en disposez pas d’un, inscrivez-vous à ce service gratuit. ● Vous pouvez ajouter un raccourci à une application en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur l’icône de l’application dans la liste des applications. Vous pouvez ensuite déplacer l’icône vers l’emplacement de votre choix sur l’écran d’accueil.Démarrage 28 4 Appuyez sur [ ] pour revenir à l’écran précédent ou appuyez sur la touche Accueil pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil. Si vous faites pivoter l’appareil lorsque vous utilisez certaines fonctions, l’interface bascule automatiquement. Afin de conserver l’orientation initiale de l’écran, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur Rotation auto. › Organiser les applications Vous pouvez réorganiser les applications de la liste en modifiant leur ordre ou en les regroupant par catégories, selon vos préférences et vos besoins. 1 Dans la liste des applications, appuyez sur [ ] →Modifier. 2 Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une icône d’application. 3 Faites-la ensuite glisser jusqu’à l’emplacement souhaité. Vous pouvez également déplacer l’icône d’une application vers un autre écran. Vous pouvez aussi déplacer les applications les plus utilisées sous l’icône . 4 Appuyez sur [ ] →Enreg. › Accéder aux applications récentes 1 Maintenez la touche Accueil enfoncée pour afficher la liste des applications récemment utilisées. 2 Sélectionnez une application.Démarrage 29 ›Utiliser le gestionnaire de tâches Votre appareil est un appareil multitâche. Il peut exécuter plusieurs applications à la fois. Toutefois, le mode multitâche peut provoquer des blocages, des problèmes de mémoire ou entraîner une consommation supplémentaire d’énergie. Pour éviter ces problèmes, arrêtez les applications inutiles en utilisant le gestionnaire de tâches. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestion de tâche...→Applications actives. La liste de toutes les applications en cours d’exécution sur votre appareil s’affiche. 2 Pour fermer une application, appuyez sur Fin. Pour fermer toutes les applications actives, appuyez sur Fin. Personnaliser l’appareil Tirez le meilleur de votre appareil en le personnalisant pour qu’il réponde à vos envies et vos préférences. › Régler la date et l’heure 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Date & heure. 2 Réglez la date et l’heure, et modifiez d’autres options. › Activer ou désactiver la tonalité des touches Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Sélection sonore.Démarrage 30 › Régler le volume de la sonnerie Appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour régler le niveau de la sonnerie. › Activer le profil Discret Pour activer ou désactiver le profil Discret de votre appareil, procédez de l’une des façons suivantes: ● Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis situé en haut de l’écran et appuyez sur Son. ● Maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée et appuyez sur Profil Discret. Vous pouvez configurer l’appareil afin qu’il vous notifie différents événements lorsque le profil Discret est activé. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Vibreur→Toujours ou En mode Discret. Lorsque le profil Discret est activé, remplace . › Changer de sonnerie 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Son→Sonnerie. 2 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM, puis appuyez sur → Sonnerie du téléphone. 3 Choisissez une sonnerie dans la liste, puis appuyez sur OK. › Activer une animation en basculant d’une fenêtre à l’autre Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→Animation →Certaines animations ou Toutes les animations. › Sélectionner un fond d’écran d’accueil 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] → Fond d’écran → une option. 2 Sélectionnez une image.Démarrage 31 3 Appuyez sur Enreg. ou Définirfond d’écran → une carte SIM ou USIM. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de l’utilisation des images ou des fonds d’écran fournis par défaut avec votre appareil. › Régler la luminosité de l’écran 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Affichage→Luminosité. 2 Pour régler la luminosité, faites glisser le curseur. 3 Appuyez sur OK. Le niveau de luminosité de l’écran influe sur la vitesse de déchargement de la batterie. › Verrouiller l’écran Vous pouvez verrouiller l’écran tactile en activant la fonction de verrouillage de l’écran. Vous devez alors dessiner un modèle de déverrouillage, saisir un code PIN ou un mot de passe chaque fois que vous allumez l’appareil, ou activez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile. ● Si vous oubliez votre code de déverrouillage, confiez votre appareil à un centre de service après-vente Samsung pour le réinitialiser. ● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable en cas de perte de codes de sécurité, d’informations confidentielles ou d’autres dommages résultant de l’utilisation de logiciels illégaux. Définir un modèle de verrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage →Modèle. 2 Prenez connaissance des instructions affichées et des exemples de modèles, puis appuyez sur Suivant.Démarrage 32 3 Dessinez un modèle en faisant glisser le doigt sur l’écran pour relier au moins 4 points, puis appuyez sur Continuer. 4 Dessinez à nouveau le modèle, puis appuyez sur Confirmer. Définir un code PIN de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage →Code PIN. 2 Saisissez un code PIN (numérique) de déverrouillage d’écran et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur OK. Définir un mot de passe de déverrouillage 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité→ Définir verrouillage →Mot de passe. 2 Saisissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) de déverrouillage d’écran et appuyez sur Continuer. 3 Confirmez le mot de passe, puis appuyez sur OK. › Verrouiller la carte SIM ou USIM Vous pouvez verrouiller votre appareil en activant le code PIN fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité→ Configurer blocage SIM. 2 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM, puis appuyez sur → Verrouiller carte SIM. 3 Saisissez votre code PIN et appuyez sur OK.Démarrage 33 Lorsque le verrouillage PIN est activé, vous devez saisir votre code PIN chaque fois que vous allumez votre appareil. ● Si vous saisissez un code PIN erroné à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM se bloque. Vous devez alors saisir le code PIN de déverrouillage (PUK) afin de débloquer la carte SIM ou USIM. ● Si vous bloquez votre carte SIM ou USIM en saisissant un code PUK erroné, apportez-la chez votre revendeur pour la faire débloquer. › Activer la fonction Traçage du mobile Lorsque quelqu’un introduit une autre carte SIM/USIM que la vôtre dans votre appareil, la fonction de traçage du mobile envoie automatiquement le nouveau numéro de téléphone aux destinataires spécifiés, afin de vous aider à le localiser et à le récupérer. Pour utiliser cette fonction et contrôler l’appareil à distance sur le Web, vous avez besoin d’un compte Samsung. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité → Traçage du mobile. 2 Lisez les conditions générales, cochez la case J’accepte toutes les conditions cidessus, puis appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Appuyez sur Connexion, saisissez l’adresse e-mail et le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Pour créer un compte Samsung, appuyez sur Créer. 4 Appuyez sur Destinataires. 5 Saisissez une nouvelle fois le mot de passe de votre compte Samsung, puis appuyez sur OK. 6 Saisissez un numéro de téléphone précédé de l’indicatif du pays (à l’aide du symbole +). 7 Rédigez le message à envoyer aux destinataires. 8 Appuyez sur OK.Démarrage 34 Changer de carte SIM ou USIM Si vous avez inséré deux cartes SIM ou USIM, vous pouvez passer de l’une à l’autre aisément. Pour changer de carte SIM ou USIM, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’icône d’une carte SIM, sauf en cours d’envoi ou de réception de messages ou de données du réseau. Votre appareil permet d’installer deux cartes afin de disposer de deux numéros ou de deux opérateurs sur le même appareil. Toutefois, vous ne pouvez pas utiliser les deux réseaux simultanément. › Activer la carte SIM ou USIM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Gestionnaire de carte SIM. 2 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM, puis cochez la case ON. ›Modifier les noms et icônes des cartes SIM ou USIM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Gestionnaire de carte SIM. 2 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM → le nom de la carte SIM ou USIM. 3 Appuyez sur Sélectionner icône→ une icône. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer le nom, modifiez le nom de la carte SIM ou USIM, puis appuyez sur OK.Démarrage 35 ›Modifier les paramètres de la carte SIM ou USIM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Gestionnaire de carte SIM. 2 Modifiez les options suivantes: Option Fonction Recevoir appels entrants Indiquer si les appels entrants en provenance de l’autre carte SIM ou USIM sont autorisés alors qu’une connexion de données est en cours sur la première carte SIM ou USIM. Vous pouvez recevoir des appels uniquement lorsque la carte SIM ou USIM n’est pas utilisée pour des services de données et qu’elle est configurée pour se connecter à un réseau GPRS. Réseau service de données Sélectionner une carte SIM ou USIM pour les services de données. Saisir du texte Vous pouvez saisir du texte en utilisant les caractères du clavier virtuel ou en utilisant l’option d’écriture manuscrite. Dans certaines langues, la saisie de texte est impossible. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une langue prise en charge. ► p. 116 ›Modifier le type de clavier Vous pouvez modifier le type de clavier. Maintenez le doigt appuyé sur le champ de saisie, puis appuyez sur Mode de saisie→ un type de clavier (clavier Samsung ou Swype).Démarrage 36 › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung 1 Appuyez sur →Types de clavier, puis choisissez un mode de saisie. Vous avez le choix entre un clavier AZERTY, un clavier traditionnel ou l’écriture manuscrite. 2 Saisissez le texte en appuyant sur les touches alphanumériques ou en écrivant sur l’écran. Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et ABC. 3 Saisir du texte oralement. Cette icône n’est disponible que si vous avez activé la fonction de saisie vocale du clavier Samsung. Selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. 4 Effacer la saisie. 5 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 6 Accéder aux paramètres du clavier. Modifier le type de clavier (maintenir la touche enfoncée).Démarrage 37 Numéro Fonction 7 Insérer un espace. Les fonctions de cette touche peuvent varier selon votre opérateur. › Saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype 1 Appuyez sur le premier caractère d’un mot et faites glisser le doigt vers le second caractère en le maintenant appuyé sur l’écran. 2 Continuez ainsi jusqu’à la fin du mot. 3 Soulevez le doigt après le dernier caractère. 4 Lorsque le mot souhaité apparaît, appuyez sur pour insérer un espace. Si le mot souhaité ne s’affiche pas, choisissez un autre mot dans la liste qui apparaît. 5 Répétez les étapes 1 à 4 pour rédiger tout votre texte. ● Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches pour saisir du texte. ● Vous pouvez également maintenir une touche enfoncée pour saisir les caractères affichés sur la moitié supérieure de la touche. Pour saisir des caractères spéciaux et des symboles, maintenez la touche enfoncée jusqu’à ce que la liste de caractères s’affiche.Démarrage 38 Vous pouvez également utiliser les touches suivantes: 1 4 3 5 2 6 7 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier la casse. 2 Accepter le mot recommandé ou en ajouter un nouveau dans le dictionnaire. Accéder aux conseils d’utilisation du clavier Swype (maintenir la touche enfoncée). 3 Basculer entre les modes Symbole/Numérique et ABC/Numérique. 4 Insérer un espace. 5 Effacer la saisie. 6 Effectuer un retour à la ligne. 7 Dicter du texte. Selon la langue de saisie sélectionnée, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. › Copier et coller du texte Lorsque vous saisissez du texte, vous pouvez exploiter la fonction copier-coller pour utiliser le même texte dans d’autres applications. 1 Placez le curseur sur le texte que vous souhaitez copier. 2 Appuyez sur . 3 Appuyez sur Sélect. mot ou Sélect. tout.Démarrage 39 4 Faites glisser l’icône ou pour sélectionner le texte souhaité. 5 Appuyez sur Copier pour copier ou Couper pour couper le texte et l’insérer dans le presse-papier. 6 Dans une autre application, placez le curseur où vous souhaitez coller le texte. 7 Appuyez sur →Coller pour insérer le texte du pressepapiers dans le champ de saisie. Télécharger des applications depuis Android Market Les fonctionnalités de votre appareil peuvent être enrichies en installant des applications supplémentaires provenant de la plateforme Android. Android Market vous permet d’acquérir facilement et rapidement des applications et des jeux pour mobiles. ● La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. ● Votre appareil enregistre les fichiers utilisateur des applications téléchargées dans la mémoire interne. ›Installer une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Market. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement.Démarrage 40 ›Désinstaller une application 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil d’Android Market, appuyez sur [ ] → Mes applications. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur Désinstaller→OK. Télécharger des fichiers depuis le Web Les fichiers téléchargés sur le Web peuvent contenir des virus potentiellement dangereux pour l’appareil. Pour réduire les risques, téléchargez uniquement des fichiers provenant de sources fiables. Certains fichiers multimédia intègrent le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM) visant à protéger les droits d’auteur. Cette protection peut empêcher le téléchargement, la copie, la modification ou le transfert de certains fichiers. Pour télécharger des fichiers depuis le Web : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Recherchez un fichier ou une application, puis lancez le téléchargement. Pour installer des applications téléchargées à partir de sites Web autres qu’Android Market, appuyez sur Paramètres→ Applications→Sources inconnues→ OK. Synchroniser des données Vous pouvez synchroniser des données avec différents serveurs Web et les sauvegarder ou les restaurer. Une fois la synchronisation terminée, l’appareil reste connecté au Web. Si les données ont été modifiées, les informations mises à jour sont automatiquement synchronisées entre l’appareil et le serveur Web.Démarrage 41 La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Paramétrer un compte de serveur 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Ajouter cpte→ un type de compte. 3 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran pour effectuer la configuration du compte. › Activer la synchronisation automatique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Appuyez sur Synchronisation auto. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. 4 Sélectionnez les applications à synchroniser. Pour exclure des applications de la synchronisation automatique, décochez les cases situées à côté des applications concernées. › Synchroniser des données manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Comptes et synchro. 2 Sélectionnez un compte. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Sync. maintenant. Votre appareil commence à synchroniser les données que vous avez sélectionnées.Communication 42 Communication Appels Découvrez comment utiliser les fonctions d’appel de votre appareil : passer un appel, répondre à un appel, utiliser les options disponibles en cours d’appel ou personnaliser les autres fonctions. › Appeler un correspondant ou répondre à un appel Vous pouvez utiliser les touches physiques de l’appareil ou celles de l’écran tactile pour passer, accepter, refuser ou terminer un appel. ● Pour empêcher toute saisie accidentelle, le capteur de proximité verrouille automatiquement l’écran d’accueil lorsque vous approchez l’appareil de votre visage. ► p. 111 ● L’électricité statique du corps ou des vêtements peut interférer avec le capteur de proximité au cours d’un appel. Passer un appel 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Clavier, puis composez le numéro de téléphone à appeler précédé de son indicatif régional. 2 Pour passer un appel, appuyez sur . 3 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. ● Utilisez le répertoire pour enregistrer les numéros que vous composez fréquemment. ► p. 72 ● Pour accéder rapidement au journal d’appels et composer les numéros récemment utilisés, appuyez sur → Journal.Communication 43 Répondre à un appel 1 Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l’icône dans n’importe quelle direction jusqu’à ce qu’elle atteigne le bord du cercle. Pour désactiver la sonnerie lorsque l’appareil sonne, appuyez sur la touche de volume. 2 Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur Fin. Rejeter un appel Lorsque vous recevez un appel, faites glisser l’icône dans n’importe quelle direction jusqu’à ce qu’elle atteigne le bord du cercle. Appeler un numéro à l’étranger 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 0 enfoncée pour insérer le caractère +. 2 Composez le numéro de téléphone en entier (indicatif du pays, indicatif régional et numéro de téléphone), puis appuyez sur pour appeler. ›Utiliser un casque ou un kit piéton En branchant un casque ou un kit piéton sur l’appareil, vous pouvez répondre aux appels et les contrôler en gardant les mains libres: ● Pour répondre à un appel, appuyez sur la touche du casque. ● Pour rejeter un appel, maintenez la touche du casque enfoncée. ● Pour mettre un appel en attente ou récupérer un appel mis en attente, maintenez la touche du casque enfoncée. ● Pour raccrocher, appuyez sur la touche du casque.Communication 44 ›Utiliser les options en cours d’appel En cours d’appel, vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour régler le niveau sonore de l’appel, appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas. ● Pour placer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . Pour récupérer un appel en attente, appuyez sur . ● Pour passer un appel alors qu’un autre est déjà en cours, appuyez sur Ajouter et composez le nouveau numéro. ● Pour répondre à un second appel lorsqu’un signal d’appel retentit, faites glisser l’icône dans n’importe quelle direction jusqu’à ce qu’elle atteigne le bord du cercle. Il vous est alors demandé si vous souhaitez mettre fin au premier appel ou le mettre en attente. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de mise en attente des appels. ● Pour ouvrir l’écran de numérotation, appuyez sur Clavier. ● Pour activer le haut-parleur, appuyez sur HP. Dans un environnement bruyant, il vous sera difficile d’entendre clairement votre correspondant avec la fonction haut-parleur. Utilisez le mode combiné classique pour une meilleure qualité sonore. ● Pour désactiver le microphone afin que votre correspondant ne vous entende pas, appuyez sur Muet. ● Pour discuter avec votre correspondant via un casque Bluetooth, appuyez sur Bluetooth. ● Pour basculer d’un appel à l’autre, appuyez sur Permuter. ● Pour organiser une conférence téléphonique, composez un second numéro ou répondez à un autre appel, puis appuyez sur Fusionner lorsque vous êtes en liaison avec le deuxième correspondant. Répétez cette même procédure pour ajouter d’autres correspondants. Pour utiliser cette fonction, vous devez d’abord souscrire au service de conférence téléphonique.Communication 45 › Afficher les appels manqués et rappeler les numéros correspondants Votre appareil affiche les appels manqués à l’écran. Pour composer le numéro d’un appel manqué, ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur l’appel manqué. ›Utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires Vous pouvez utiliser de nombreuses autres fonctions d’appel comme le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN) ou le renvoi d’appel. Configurer le mode de numérotation fixe (FDN) En mode FDN, votre appareil restreint l’émission d’appels qui n’est alors possible que pour les numéros enregistrés dans la liste FDN. Pour activer le mode FDN : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appel → Numérotation fixe → Activer FDN. 2 Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM et appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur Liste FDN et ajoutez les contacts à utiliser en mode FDN. Configurer le transfert d’appel Le transfert d’appel est une fonction réseau qui permet de transférer les appels entrants vers un autre numéro prédéfini. Vous pouvez configurer le transfert d’appel en fonction de différentes situations, par exemple lorsque vous ne pouvez pas répondre aux appels, lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne ou lorsque le réseau ne couvre pas la zone dans laquelle vous vous trouvez. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appel → Transfert d’appel → une carte SIM ou USIM. 2 Sélectionnez une condition. 3 Composez le numéro de téléphone vers lequel vos appels doivent être transférés et appuyez sur Activer. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau.Communication 46 Configurer le signal d’appel Le signal d’appel est une fonction réseau vous permettant d’être averti de l’arrivée d’un second appel lorsque vous êtes déjà en ligne. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Appel → Paramètres supplémentaires → une carte SIM ou USIM→ Signal d’appel. Vos paramètres sont envoyés au réseau. › Afficher le journal d’appels Vous pouvez afficher le journal d’appels en effectuant un tri par catégorie. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Journal. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Afficher par→ une carte SIM ou USIM → une option pour trier le journal d’appels. À partir du journal d’appels, vous pouvez appeler un contact ou lui envoyer un message directement en faisant glisser le doigt horizontalement sur son nom. 3 Sélectionnez l’une des entrées pour en afficher les détails. À partir des détails de l’appel, vous pouvez rappeler le numéro, lui envoyer un message ou l’ajouter au répertoire. SMS et MMS Découvrez comment rédiger et envoyer des messages texte (SMS) ou multimédia (MMS), et comment afficher ou gérer les messages envoyés ou reçus. L’envoi ou la réception de messages en dehors de la zone couverte par votre opérateur peut occasionner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre à laquelle vous avez souscrite. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur.Communication 47 › Envoyer un SMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur Nouveau message. 3 Ajoutez des destinataires. ● Saisissez manuellement les numéros de téléphone, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone, à partir du journal d’appels ou de votre liste de contacts, en appuyant sur l’une des options sous le champ du destinataire. 4 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez le texte de votre message. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer smiley. 5 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Envoyer un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur Nouveau message. 3 Ajoutez des destinataires. ● Entrez manuellement les numéros de téléphone ou les adresses e-mail, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les numéros de téléphone ou les adresses e-mail, à partir du journal d’appels ou de votre liste de contacts, en appuyant sur l’une des options sous le champ du destinataire. Lorsque vous saisissez une adresse e-mail, l’appareil convertit le message en MMS. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un objet et ajoutez l’objet du message.Communication 48 5 Appuyez sur Entrer le message ici et saisissez le texte de votre message. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Insérer smiley. 6 Appuyez sur et ajoutez un élément. Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des fichiers, prendre une photo, enregistrer une vidéo ou un mémo vocal. 7 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. › Afficher un SMS ou un MMS 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . Vos messages sont regroupés sous forme de fils de discussion par contact comme pour une messagerie instantanée. 2 Sélectionnez un contact. 3 Pour un MMS, sélectionnez un message pour en afficher les détails. › Écouter la messagerie vocale Si vous avez configuré l’appareil pour que les appels auxquels vous ne pouvez pas répondre soient redirigés vers votre boîte vocale, vos correspondants pourront vous laisser un message vocal. Pour accéder à votre messagerie vocale et écouter vos messages: 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur → Clavier, puis maintenez la touche 1 enfoncée. 2 Suivez les instructions du serveur de messagerie vocale. Pour pouvoir accéder au serveur de messagerie vocale, vous devez d’abord enregistrer son numéro. Contactez votre opérateur qui vous fournira ce numéro, si celui-ci n’est pas prédéfini.Communication 49 Google Mail Vous pouvez récupérer les nouveaux e-mails directement dans votre boîte de réception à partir de Google Mail™. Lorsque vous accédez à cette application, la boîte de réception s’affiche. Le nombre total de messages non lus s’affiche dans la barre de titre et les messages non lus apparaissent en gras. ● La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. ● Le menu Google Mail peut s’intituler différemment en fonction de votre opérateur téléphonique. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gmail. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur OK. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Nouveau message. 4 Saisissez un nom ou une adresse dans le champ du destinataire. 5 Saisissez l’objet, ainsi que le contenu du message. 6 Pour joindre un fichier image, appuyez sur [ ] →Pièce jointe → un fichier. 7 Appuyez sur pour envoyer l’e-mail. › Afficher un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gmail. 2 Sélectionnez un e-mail.Communication 50 Sur l’écran d’affichage de l’e-mail, les options suivantes vous sont proposées: ● Pour répondre à l’e-mail, appuyez sur . ● Pour répondre à tous les destinataires, appuyez sur → Rép. à tous. ● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur → Transférer. ● Pour effectuer le suivi du message, appuyez sur . ● Pour afficher une pièce jointe, appuyez sur Aperçu. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre carte mémoire, appuyez sur Télécharger. ● Pour archiver le message, appuyez sur Archiver. ● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur Suppr. ● Pour passer au message suivant ou revenir au message précédent, appuyez sur ou . › Organiser les e-mails par libellé Vous pouvez organiser votre messagerie en affectant un libellé à vos messages. Vous pouvez ainsi les trier en fonction du libellé. Ajouter un libellé à un message 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un message. 2 Appuyez sur Changer de libellés. 3 Sélectionnez un libellé, puis appuyez sur OK. Filtrer les messages 1 Dans l’écran Boîte de réception, appuyez sur [ ] →Ouvrir les libellés. 2 Sélectionnez le libellé des messages à afficher.Communication 51 E-mail Découvrez comment envoyer ou consulter des e-mails via votre compte de messagerie électronique personnel ou professionnel. › Créer un compte e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail. 2 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe. 3 Appuyez sur Suivant (pour des comptes e-mail classiques comme Google Mail ou Yahoo) ou Config. manuelle (pour vos comptes e-mail professionnels). 4 Suivez les instructions qui s’affichent à l’écran. Une fois le compte de messagerie créé, les e-mails sont téléchargés sur votre appareil. Si vous possédez plusieurs comptes, vous pouvez passer d’un compte à l’autre. Pour ce faire, appuyez sur un nom de compte en haut à gauche de l’écran et sélectionnez celui à partir duquel vous voulez récupérer les messages. › Envoyer un e-mail 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail → un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Rédiger. 3 Ajoutez des destinataires. ● Saisissez manuellement les adresses e-mail, en les séparant par un point-virgule ou une virgule. ● Sélectionnez les adresses e-mail, à partir du journal d’appels ou de votre liste de contacts, en appuyant sur l’une des options sous le champ du destinataire.Communication 52 4 Appuyez sur le champ Cc/Cci pour ajouter d’autres destinataires. 5 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’objet et indiquez un objet. 6 Appuyez sur le champ de saisie du texte et rédigez votre e-mail. 7 Appuyez sur Joindre et joignez un fichier. Vous pouvez sélectionner un fichier à partir de la liste des fichiers, prendre une photo, enregistrer une vidéo ou un mémo vocal. Vous ne pouvez pas joindre les fichiers protégés par le système de Gestion des droits numériques (DRM). 8 Appuyez sur Envoyer pour envoyer le message. Si vous êtes hors connexion ou en dehors de votre zone de couverture, le message est conservé dans la boîte d’envoi jusqu’à votre prochaine connexion ou jusqu’à ce que vous vous trouviez de nouveau dans une zone couverte par votre opérateur. › Afficher un e-mail Lorsque vous ouvrez un compte e-mail, vous pouvez afficher hors connexion les e-mails précédemment récupérés ou vous connecter au serveur de messagerie pour consulter vos nouveaux messages. Une fois les messages récupérés, vous pouvez les lire hors connexion. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur E-mail→ un compte e-mail. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] → Actualiser pour mettre à jour la liste des messages. 3 Sélectionnez un e-mail. Sur l’écran d’affichage de l’e-mail, les options suivantes vous sont proposées: ● Pour répondre au message, appuyez sur [ ] →Répondre. ● Pour transférer le message à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] → Transférer.Communication 53 ● Pour supprimer le message, appuyez sur [ ] →Supprimer. ● Pour déplacer le message dans un autre dossier, appuyez sur [ ] → Déplacer dans le dossier. ● Pour charger les images du message, appuyez sur [ ] → Afficher images. ● Pour modifier la taille du texte, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→ Taille du texte. ● Pour ajouter l’adresse e-mail à votre répertoire, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→Ajouter aux contacts. ● Pour enregistrer le message en tant qu’événement, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→Enregistrer dans Calendrier. ● Pour afficher une pièce jointe, sélectionnez l’élément correspondant. Pour l’enregistrer sur votre carte mémoire, appuyez sur . Talk Découvrez comment discuter avec votre famille ou vos amis par l’intermédiaire de Google Talk™. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Ajouter des amis à votre liste d’amis 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. La liste des amis vous permet de voir tous vos contacts Google Talk en un seul coup d’œil. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter un ami. 3 Saisissez l’adresse e-mail d’un ami et appuyez sur Envoyer une invitation. Lorsque votre ami accepte l’invitation, ce dernier est ajouté à votre liste d’amis.Communication 54 ›Démarrer une session de discussion 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Talk. 2 Sélectionnez un nom dans la liste de vos amis. L’écran de discussion s’ouvre. 3 Saisissez votre message et appuyez sur Envoyer. Pour insérer des émoticônes, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→ Insérer une émoticône. 4 Pour passer d’une discussion à une autre, appuyez sur [ ] → Changer de chat. 5 Pour clôturer une session de discussion, appuyez sur [ ] → Arrêter le chat. Social Hub Découvrez comment accéder à Social Hub™, l’application de communication intégrée pour les services de réseaux sociaux, les e-mails, les messages, les contacts ou les agendas. Visitez le site socialhub.samsungapps.com pour obtenir plus d’informations. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Social Hub. 2 Découvrez et exploitez le contenu proposé par Social Hub.Divertissements 55 Divertissements Appareil photo Découvrez comment prendre et visionner des photos et des vidéos. Vous pouvez prendre des photos d’une résolution pouvant atteindre 2 048 x 1 536 pixels (3,2 mégapixels) et des vidéos d’une résolution pouvant atteindre 320 x 240 pixels. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez d’abord insérer une carte mémoire. ● L’interface de l’appareil photo s’affiche uniquement en mode Paysage. ● Appuyez sur l’écran pour afficher ou masquer les icônes qui apparaissent sur l’écran d’aperçu. ● L’appareil photo s’éteint automatiquement lorsque vous ne l’utilisez pas pendant un certain temps. ● Il est possible que les capacités de la mémoire diffèrent en fonction de la scène photographiée ou des conditions de prise de vue.Divertissements 56 › Prendre une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 2 3 4 1 6 5 7 Numéro Fonction 1 Modifier le mode de prise de vue. 2 Modifier le mode de scène. 3 Régler la luminosité. 4 Modifier les paramètres de l’appareil photo. 5 Basculer en mode Caméscope. 6 Prendre une photo. 7 Afficher la dernière photo prise. 3 Appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible lors d’une prise de vue dans une résolution élevée. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo. La photo est enregistrée automatiquement.Divertissements 57 Après avoir pris des photos, appuyez sur pour les visionner. ● Pour afficher davantage de photos, faites défiler horizontalement. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez les doigts. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ou sur , ou bien encore appuyer deux fois sur l’écran. ● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour définir la photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’attribuer à un correspondant, appuyez sur Définir comme. ● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Supprimer. › Prendre une photo à l’aide des options prédéfinies Votre appareil photo propose des paramètres prédéfinis pour différents types de scènes. Il vous suffit de sélectionner le mode approprié aux conditions et aux sujets de vos prises de vue. Par exemple, si vous prenez une photo de nuit, sélectionnez le mode Nuit dont l’exposition est supérieure à celle d’une photo prise de jour. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur → une scène. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre une photo.Divertissements 58 › Prendre une photo en mode Sourire L’appareil photo peut reconnaître les visages des sujets que vous photographiez et vous aider à les prendre en photo dès qu’ils sourient. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez → Sourire. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Pointez l’objectif de l’appareil photo vers le sujet et appuyez sur . L’appareil reconnaît les visages sur une photo et détecte les sourires. Lorsque le sujet sourit, l’appareil déclenche automatiquement la photo. › Prendre une photo en mode Panorama Vous pouvez prendre de larges photos panoramiques à l’aide du mode Panorama. Ce mode est particulièrement adapté aux paysages. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur → Panorama. 3 Procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour prendre la première photo. 5 Déplacez lentement l’appareil dans une direction et alignez le cadre vert avec l’objectif. Lorsque le cadre vert est aligné avec l’objectif, l’appareil photo prend automatiquement la photo suivante. 6 Répétez l’étape 5 pour terminer la photo panoramique.Divertissements 59 › Personnaliser les paramètres de l’appareil photo Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux options suivantes: Option Fonction Retardateur Sélectionner le délai précédant la prise automatique de la photo par l’appareil. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Effets Appliquer un effet spécial. Mesure Sélectionner un type d’indice d’exposition. Qualité d’image Définir le niveau de qualité des photos. Avant de prendre une photo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. Compterendu Régler l’appareil photo pour qu’il affiche la photo que vous venez de prendre.Divertissements 60 Paramètre Fonction GPS Régler l’appareil pour qu’il ajoute les informations de localisation aux photos. ● Pour que les signaux GPS soient meilleurs, évitez de prendre des photos dans des lieux où le signal peut être limité, par exemple entre des bâtiments ou dans des zones de faible altitude, ou encore lorsque les conditions météorologiques sont mauvaises. ● Votre localisation est susceptible d’apparaître sur vos photos au moment où vous les publiez sur le Web. Pour empêcher l’affichage de ces données, désactivez le paramètre d’étiquetage GPS. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des prises de vue. › Enregistrer une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Appareil photo pour allumer l’appareil photo. 2 Appuyez sur pour basculer en mode Caméscope. 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 1 2 3 4 6 5 Divertissements 61 Numéro Fonction 1 Changer de mode d’enregistrement (pour joindre la vidéo à un MMS ou pour l’enregistrer normalement). 2 Régler la luminosité. 3 Modifier les paramètres du caméscope. 4 Basculer en mode Appareil photo. 5 Enregistrer une vidéo. 6 Afficher la dernière vidéo filmée. 4 Appuyez sur la touche de volume Haut ou Bas pour effectuer un zoom avant ou arrière. Il est possible que la fonction Zoom ne soit pas disponible lorsque vous enregistrez une vidéo avec une résolution élevée. 5 Appuyez sur pour commencer à filmer. 6 Appuyez sur pour arrêter de filmer. La vidéo est enregistrée automatiquement. Il est possible que le caméscope ne puisse pas enregistrer les vidéos correctement sur une carte mémoire dont le taux de transfert est lent. Après avoir enregistré des vidéos, appuyez sur pour les visionner. ● Pour afficher davantage de vidéos, faites défiler l’affichage horizontalement. ● Pour envoyer la vidéo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour visionner la vidéo, appuyez sur Lire. ● Pour supprimer la vidéo, appuyez sur Supprimer.Divertissements 62 › Personnaliser les paramètres du caméscope Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux options suivantes: Option Fonction Retardateur Sélectionner le délai précédant l’enregistrement par la caméra. Résolution Modifier l’option de résolution. Balance des blancs Régler la gamme de couleurs en fonction des conditions d’éclairage. Effets Appliquer un effet spécial. Qualité vidéo Définir le niveau de qualité des vidéos. Avant de commencer à enregistrer une vidéo, appuyez sur → pour accéder aux paramètres suivants: Paramètre Fonction Guide Afficher des lignes directrices sur l’écran d’aperçu. Compterendu Régler le caméscope pour qu’il affiche la vidéo que vous venez d’enregistrer. Réinitialiser Réinitialiser les options des menus et des enregistrements. Galerie Découvrez comment afficher les photos et visionner les vidéos enregistrées sur la carte mémoire. Divertissements 63 › Formats de fichiers compatibles Type Format Image Extension : bmp, gif, jpg, png, wbmp Vidéo ● Extension : 3gp, mp4, mkv ● Codec : H.263, H.264, mpeg4 ● En fonction de la version logicielle de votre appareil, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. ● Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la capacité de la mémoire. ● La qualité de la lecture peut varier selon le type de contenu. ● Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus correctement en fonction de leur encodage. › Afficher une photo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier. 3 Pour changer le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur ou en haut à droite de l’écran. 4 Sélectionnez la photo (sans icône de lecture) à afficher. Lorsque vous visionnez une photo, les options suivantes sont disponibles: ● Pour afficher davantage de photos, faites défiler horizontalement. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez les doigts. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ou sur , ou bien encore appuyer deux fois sur l’écran.Divertissements 64 ● Pour démarrer un diaporama en utilisant les photos enregistrées dans le dossier sélectionné, appuyez sur Diaporama. Pour arrêter le diaporama, appuyez sur l’écran. ● Pour envoyer la photo à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Menu →Partag. ● Pour supprimer la photo, appuyez sur Menu→Supprimer. ● Pour utiliser des fonctions supplémentaires, appuyez sur Menu →Plus d’applis, puis utilisez les options suivantes: - Détails : afficher les détails de la photo. - Définir comme : définir une photo en tant que fond d’écran ou l’associer à l’image d’identification d’un contact. - Rogner: redimensionner la photo. - Rotation à gauche : faire pivoter la photo dans le sens contraire des aiguilles d’une montre. - Rotation à droite : faire pivoter la photo dans le sens des aiguilles d’une montre. › Lire une vidéo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Galerie. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo (avec l’icône ). 3 Faites pivoter l’appareil pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture : 2 5 1 4 3 Numéro Fonction 1 Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . 2 Effectuer un retour rapide dans le fichier.Divertissements 65 Numéro Fonction 3 Déplacer le point de lecture dans le fichier en faisant glisser la barre ou en appuyant dessus. 4 Effectuer une avance rapide dans le fichier. 5 Couper un segment de vidéo. Musique Découvrez comment écouter vos morceaux de musique favoris à tout moment grâce au lecteur MP3. Le lecteur MP3 est compatible avec les formats de fichiers suivants: mp3, m4a, 3gp, mp4, ogg (Codec : mp3, vorbis (ogg), aac, aac+, eaac+, amr-nb/wb, wav, midi). Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez d’abord insérer une carte mémoire. ● En fonction de la version logicielle de votre appareil, certains formats ne sont pas compatibles. ● Une erreur peut se produire à l’ouverture d’un fichier si la taille de celui-ci dépasse la capacité de la mémoire. ● La qualité de la lecture peut varier selon le type de contenu. ● Certains fichiers peuvent ne pas être lus correctement en fonction de leur encodage. › Ajouter des fichiers audio sur votre carte mémoire Commencez par transférer des fichiers sur une carte mémoire : ● Téléchargez sur le Web. ► p. 80 ● Téléchargez depuis un ordinateur à l’aide du logiciel Samsung Kies. ► p. 98 ● Recevez des fichiers via Bluetooth. ► p. 93 ● Copiez des fichiers sur une carte mémoire. ► p. 98Divertissements 66 › Écouter de la musique Après avoir transféré des fichiers audio sur votre carte mémoire : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie de musique → un fichier audio. 3 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la lecture : 4 3 1 2 5 6 7 8 Numéro Fonction 1 Activer le son Surround 5.1 lorsqu’un casque est branché. 2 Déplacer le point de lecture dans le fichier en faisant glisser la barre ou en appuyant dessus. 3 Reprendre la lecture depuis le début. Revenir au fichier précédent (appuyer deux fois). Effectuer un retour rapide dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). 4 Interrompre la lecture. Pour la reprendre, appuyez sur . 5 Modifier le mode de répétition (désactivé, répéter la lecture d’un seul ou de tous les fichiers). 6 Activer le mode Aléatoire. 7 Ouvrir la liste de lecture.Divertissements 67 Numéro Fonction 8 Passer au fichier suivant. Effectuer une avance rapide dans le fichier (maintenir la touche enfoncée). ● Vous pouvez contrôler le lecteur MP3 avec un casque. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, maintenez la touche du casque enfoncée pour démarrer le lecteur MP3. Appuyez sur la touche du casque pour démarrer ou interrompre la lecture. ● Le casque SRS CS Headphone™ offre une qualité d’écoute Surround 5.1, bien meilleure que celle des oreillettes ou des casques standard, notamment lorsque vous écoutez du contenu multicanal, tel que des films en DVD. ● La technologie WOW HD™ améliore significativement la qualité audio de la lecture en offrant des divertissements 3D dynamiques et une profondeur de son saisissante, alternant entre basses et hautes fréquences, pour une fidélité encore plus réaliste. ›Utiliser la fonction de lecture aléatoire Lorsque vous activez la fonction de lecture aléatoire, votre appareil sélectionne et lit les fichiers audio au hasard. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Lecture aléatoire. 3 Pour désactiver la fonction de lecture aléatoire, appuyez sur [ ] →Désactiver lecture aléatoire.Divertissements 68 › Personnaliser les paramètres du lecteur MP3 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Musique. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie → un fichier audio. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 4 Pour personnaliser votre lecteur MP3, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Canal 5.1 Définir si le canal virtuel surround 5.1 doit être activé lorsqu’un casque est connecté. Egaliseur Sélectionner un type d’égaliseur par défaut. Radio FM Découvrez comment écouter de la musique et les actualités grâce à la radio FM. Pour écouter la radio FM, vous devez brancher un casque ou des écouteurs qui font office d’antenne radio. › Écouter la radio FM 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles. Lorsque vous utilisez la radio FM pour la première fois, l’appareil lance une recherche automatique des stations.Divertissements 69 3 Les touches suivantes permettent de contrôler la radio FM : 3 4 5 1 3 2 Numéro Fonction 1 Allumer ou éteindre la radio FM. 2 Régler la fréquence. 3 Rechercher une station de radio disponible. 4 Régler le volume. 5 Ajouter la station de radio en cours d’écoute à la liste des favoris. › Enregistrer automatiquement une station de radio 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Analyser→ une option de recherche. La radio FM recherche et mémorise automatiquement les stations disponibles.Divertissements 70 › Ajouter une station à la liste des favoris 1 Branchez un casque ou des écouteurs sur l’appareil. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 3 Sélectionnez la station de radio souhaitée. 4 Pour ajouter la station à la liste des favoris, appuyez sur . Vous pouvez indiquer le nom d’une station radio ou supprimer une station. Dans la liste des favoris, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur une station, puis appuyez sur Suppr. ou Renommer. › Personnaliser les paramètres de la radio FM 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Radio FM. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres. 3 Pour personnaliser votre radio FM, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Région Sélectionner votre région. Lecture en arrière-plan Indiquer si vous souhaitez écouter la radio FM en arrière-plan lorsque vous utilisez d’autres applications. Si cette fonction est activée, vous pouvez contrôler la radio FM depuis le volet des raccourcis.Divertissements 71 Option Fonction Nom de la station Indiquer si le nom de la station doit s’afficher sur l’écran de la radio FM. Ces noms ne sont disponibles que pour les stations de radio qui les fournissent. Fréquence alternative Indiquer si la radio FM doit tenter de changer de fréquence ou non lorsque le signal de la station écoutée est faible. Désactivation auto de la radio FM Régler la radio FM pour qu’elle s’éteigne automatiquement passé un certain délai.Informations personnelles 72 Informations personnelles Contacts Découvrez comment créer et gérer la liste de vos contacts personnels ou professionnels. Pour tous vos contacts, vous pouvez enregistrer des noms, des numéros de téléphone portable ou de poste fixe, des adresses e-mail, des dates d’anniversaire et plus encore. › Ajouter un nouveau contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur → un emplacement mémoire. Si vous disposez de plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 3 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour ajouter le contact dans la mémoire sélectionnée. Vous pouvez également créer un contact à partir de l’écran de numérotation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Clavier. 2 Composez un numéro de téléphone. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter aux contacts→Créer un contact. 4 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous disposez de plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 5 Saisissez les coordonnées du contact. 6 Appuyez sur Enregistrer pour ajouter le contact dans la mémoire sélectionnée.Informations personnelles 73 › Rechercher un contact 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Faites défiler verticalement la liste de contacts. Vous pouvez également faire glisser le doigt sur le curseur situé à droite pour faire défiler rapidement la liste. 3 Sélectionnez un contact. Une fois le contact trouvé, vous pouvez : ● l’appeler en sélectionnant un numéro ; ● lui envoyer un message en appuyant sur Message ; ● lui envoyer un e-mail en sélectionnant une adresse e-mail ; ● modifier ses coordonnées en appuyant sur [ ] →Modifier; ● l’enregistrer dans vos favoris en appuyant sur . ›Définir un numéro d’appel abrégé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→Numérotation rapide. 3 Sélectionnez un numéro d’emplacement → un contact. 4 Sélectionnez un numéro de téléphone (si nécessaire). Depuis l’écran de numérotation, vous pouvez composer rapidement ce numéro en maintenant le doigt appuyé sur le chiffre correspondant. › Créer une carte de visite 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Mon profil.Informations personnelles 74 3 Saisissez vos coordonnées. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. Vous pouvez envoyer votre carte de visite en la joignant à un message ou à un e-mail, ou en la transférant à l’aide de la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. › Récupérer des contacts à partir de vos sites de réseaux sociaux Vous pouvez afficher la liste de vos réseaux sociaux et ajouter un contact de votre réseau au répertoire téléphonique. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Afficher amis. 3 Sélectionnez un compte. 4 Sélectionnez des contacts, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. Vous pouvez ajouter des commentaires aux messages postés par vos contacts et regarder leurs photos partagées. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications ainsi qu’un contact, et appuyez sur → Activités ou Média. › Créer un groupe de contacts En créant des groupes de contacts, vous pouvez gérer plusieurs contacts simultanément et envoyer des messages ou des e-mails à tous les membres d’un groupe. Commencez par créer un groupe. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Groupes. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Créer. 3 Saisissez le nom du groupe, puis sélectionnez la sonnerie associée. 4 Appuyez sur Enregistrer.Informations personnelles 75 › Copier des contacts Pour copier des contacts depuis la carte SIM ou USIM vers l’appareil : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis la carte SIM. 3 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM. 4 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous disposez de plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact. 5 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur Importer. Pour copier des contacts depuis l’appareil vers la carte SIM ou USIM : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers la carte SIM. 3 Sélectionnez une carte SIM ou USIM. 4 Sélectionnez les contacts à copier et appuyez sur Exporter → Oui. ›Importer ou exporter des contacts Pour importer des contacts (au format vcf) depuis une carte mémoire vers l’appareil : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Importer depuis la carte SD. 3 Sélectionnez un emplacement mémoire. Si vous disposez de plusieurs comptes, sélectionnez le compte auquel vous souhaitez ajouter le contact.Informations personnelles 76 4 Indiquez si vous cherchez à importer un seul contact, plusieurs contacts ou l’ensemble des contacts, puis appuyez sur OK. 5 Sélectionnez les contacts à importer, puis appuyez sur OK. Pour exporter des contacts depuis votre appareil vers une carte mémoire : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur . 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Importer/Exporter→Exporter vers la carte SD. 3 Appuyez sur Oui pour confirmer. › Consulter le journal des communications Vous pouvez afficher le journal des communications pour consulter les appels, les messages, les e-mails ou les fils de discussion des sites de réseaux sociaux. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Historique. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à afficher. › Consulter les activités du réseau social Vous pouvez consulter les dernières activités des contacts sur les sites de réseau social tels que Facebook et Twitter. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur →Activités. 2 Sélectionnez l’élément à afficher. Calendrier Découvrez comment créer et gérer les événements quotidiens, hebdomadaires ou mensuels et définir des alarmes pour vous souvenir des événements importants.Informations personnelles 77 › Créer un événement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Créer. 3 Saisissez les détails de l’événement. 4 Appuyez sur Terminé. › Afficher des événements Pour modifier l’affichage du calendrier : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Jour, Hebdo. ou Mois. Pour afficher les événements d’une date spécifique : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calendrier. 2 Sélectionnez une date dans le calendrier. ● Pour passer directement à une certaine date en la saisissant manuellement, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Aller à, saisissez la date en appuyant sur + ou -, puis sur Appliquer. ● Pour sélectionner la date du jour, appuyez sur [ ] → Aujourd’hui. 3 Sélectionnez un événement pour en afficher les détails. › Arrêter l’alarme d’un événement Si vous définissez une alarme pour un événement, l’icône de l’alarme s’affiche à l’heure spécifiée. 1 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis situé en haut de l’écran. 2 Sélectionnez un rappel pour afficher plus de détails sur l’événement. 3 Pour répéter ou annuler le rappel, appuyez sur Répéter tout ou Ignorer tout.Informations personnelles 78 Mémo Découvrez comment enregistrer une information importante pour la consulter ultérieurement. › Créer un mémo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Appuyez sur Nouveau mémo. 3 Saisissez votre mémo. 4 Appuyez sur [ ] → une couleur d’arrière plan. 5 Appuyez sur Enregistrer. › Afficher un mémo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo. 2 Sélectionnez un mémo pour en afficher les détails. ● Pour modifier le mémo, appuyez sur . ● Pour supprimer le mémo, appuyez sur → OK. Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo à d’autres personnes en maintenant le doigt appuyé dessus et en sélectionnant Envoyer via→ une option. Mémo vocal Découvrez comment utiliser un mémo vocal avec votre appareil. Pour utiliser cette fonctionnalité, vous devez d’abord insérer une carte mémoire.Informations personnelles 79 › Enregistrer un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Enreg. pour commencer à enregistrer. 3 Parlez dans le microphone. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Arrêt. Le mémo est enregistré automatiquement. 5 Pour enregistrer d’autres mémos vocaux, appuyez à nouveau sur Enreg. › Écouter un mémo vocal 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mémo vocal. 2 Appuyez sur Liste. 3 Sélectionnez un mémo vocal. Vous pouvez envoyer le mémo vocal à d’autres personnes en appuyant sur [ ] → Partager→ une option.Web 80 Web Les services Web nécessitent une connexion de données. Pour choisir le meilleur forfait de connexion, contactez votre opérateur. Internet Découvrez comment accéder à des pages Web et enregistrer des favoris. ● L’accès au Web et le téléchargement de contenu multimédia peuvent entraîner des frais supplémentaires, en fonction de l’offre souscrite auprès de votre opérateur. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. ● Le menu du navigateur peut s’intituler différemment selon votre opérateur. ● La disponibilité de certaines icônes dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. ›Naviguer dans des pages Web 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet pour ouvrir la page d’accueil. Pour accéder à une page Web spécifique, appuyez sur le champ de saisie de l’adresse (URL), saisissez l’adresse de la page Web, puis appuyez sur . 2 Utilisez les touches suivantes pour naviguer dans les pages Web : 1 2 Numéro Fonction 1 Saisir l’adresse de la page Web à afficher. 2 Ouvrir la liste des favoris enregistrés, des pages fréquemment visitées, ainsi que l’historique Internet récent.Web 81 Lorsque vous naviguez dans une page Web, les options suivantes sont disponibles: ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez les doigts. Vous pouvez également appuyer deux fois sur l’écran. ● Pour ouvrir une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur [ ] →Nouvelle fenêtre. ● Pour afficher les fenêtres actives, appuyez sur [ ] →Fenêtres. Vous pouvez ouvrir plusieurs pages et passer de l’une à l’autre aisément. ● Pour réactualiser une page Web, appuyez sur [ ] →Actualiser. ● Pour accéder à la page suivante de l’historique, appuyez sur [ ] →Page suivante. ● Pour ajouter la page aux favoris, appuyez sur [ ]→Ajouter un favori. ● Pour ajouter un raccourci vers la page affichée sur l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil. ● Pour rechercher du texte dans la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus →Rech. sur page. ● Pour afficher les détails de la page Web, appuyez sur [ ] → Plus →Info page. ● Pour envoyer l’adresse de la page Web (URL) à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Partager page. ● Pour afficher l’historique de téléchargement, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Téléchargements. ● Pour personnaliser les paramètres du navigateur, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus →Paramètres.Web 82 › Rechercher des informations oralement La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Sélectionnez le champ de saisie de l’URL. 3 Appuyez sur et prononcez un mot-clé dans le microphone de l’appareil. L’appareil recherche les informations et les pages Web correspondant au mot-clé. › Ajouter des pages Web à vos favoris Vous pouvez ajouter un favori manuellement si vous connaissez l’adresse de la page Web correspondante. Pour ajouter un favori : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur → Favoris. 3 Appuyez sur Ajouter. 4 Saisissez le titre d’une page Web et son adresse (URL). 5 Appuyez sur OK. Dans la liste des favoris, maintenez le doigt appuyé sur un favori et choisissez parmi les options suivantes: ● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans la fenêtre active, appuyez sur Ouvrir. ● Pour ouvrir la page Web dans une nouvelle fenêtre, appuyez sur Ouvrir nouvelle fenêtre. ● Pour modifier les détails du favori, appuyez sur Modifier le favori. ● Pour ajouter sur l’écran d’accueil un raccourci vers le favori, appuyez sur Ajouter raccourci à l’écran d’accueil. ● Pour envoyer l’adresse (URL) de la page Web à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager le lien. ● Pour copier l’adresse (URL) de la page Web, appuyez sur Copier l’URL du lien.Web 83 ● Pour supprimer le favori, appuyez sur Supprimer le favori. ● Pour utiliser la page Web en tant que page d’accueil du navigateur, appuyez sur Définir comme page d’accueil. › Accès aux pages régulièrement consultées ou à l’historique des dernières visites 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Internet. 2 Appuyez sur →Les plus visités ou Historique. 3 Sélectionnez la page Web à laquelle accéder. Vous pouvez ajouter une page Web à la liste des favoris en appuyant sur . Cartes Découvrez comment utiliser Google Maps™ pour rechercher votre position, parcourir la carte en ligne pour afficher une rue, une ville ou un pays et calculer un itinéraire. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Rechercher un lieu spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur OK. La carte indique votre position. 3 Appuyez sur [ ] →Rechercher. 4 Saisissez un mot clé pour la localisation, puis appuyez sur . Pour effectuer une recherche de localisation oralement, appuyez sur .Web 84 5 Sélectionnez le lieu dont vous souhaitez afficher les détails. ● Pour afficher une liste de l’ensemble des résultats de votre recherche, appuyez sur . ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez les doigts. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur ou . ● Pour ajouter des données à la carte, appuyez sur [ ] → Calques. ● Pour afficher l’endroit où vous vous trouvez, appuyez sur [ ] →Ma position. ● Pour ajouter une étoile à la position, appuyez sur la bulle du nom de la position→ . › Calculer un itinéraire vers une destination spécifique 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Maps. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Itinéraire. 3 Saisissez les adresses du lieu de départ et du lieu d’arrivée. Pour sélectionner une adresse à partir de la votre liste de contacts ou de vos lieux favoris, ou pour indiquer un lieu sur la carte, appuyez sur →Contacts, Point sur la carte ou Mes adresses. 4 Choisissez un mode de déplacement (voiture, bus ou à pied) et appuyez sur Itinéraire. L’itinéraire est indiqué sur la carte. Selon le mode de déplacement sélectionné, vous pouvez visualiser plusieurs itinéraires. Sélectionnez un itinéraire pour afficher les détails de votre déplacement, puis appuyez sur pour afficher l’itinéraire sur la carte. 5 Appuyez sur ou pour afficher seulement une partie de l’itinéraire. 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus → Effacer résultats.Web 85 Latitude Découvrez comment partager votre position avec vos amis et afficher l’endroit où ils se trouvent à l’aide de Google Latitude™. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Latitude. L’appareil se connecte automatiquement sur Google Latitude. 2 Appuyez sur →Sélectionner dans mes contacts ou Ajouter en indiquant l’adresse e-mail. 3 Sélectionnez un ami à ajouter ou saisissez une adresse e-mail, puis appuyez sur Ajouter des amis. 4 Appuyez sur Oui. Lorsque votre ami accepte votre invitation, vous pouvez partager vos positions. 5 Appuyez sur [ ] →Plan. Les positions de vos amis sont marquées avec leurs photos sur la carte. Adresses Découvrez comment rechercher une adresse à proximité de l’endroit où vous vous trouvez. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Adresses. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie. L’appareil recherche des adresses à proximité de votre position actuelle correspondant à la catégorie sélectionnée.Web 86 3 Sélectionnez une adresse pour en afficher les détails. 4 En mode affichage des informations, les options suivantes sont disponibles: ● Pour afficher le lieu sur une carte, appuyez sur Plan. ● Pour afficher l’itinéraire jusqu’à la destination, appuyez sur Itinéraire. ● Pour afficher le numéro de téléphone du lieu, appuyez sur Appel. Navigation Découvrez comment utiliser le système de navigation GPS pour rechercher et afficher votre itinéraire à l’aide d’instructions vocales. ● Les cartes, votre position actuelle et certaines données de navigation peuvent différer des informations de localisation réelles. Soyez attentif aux conditions de la circulation, à l’état de la route et à tous les autres facteurs qui pourraient affecter votre conduite. Respectez le code de la route et les consignes de sécurité en vigueur. ● La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Navigation. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Saisissez votre destination en utilisant l’une des méthodes suivantes: ● Énoncer destination : prononcer le nom de votre destination en disant par exemple « 3 rue Molière, Paris ». ● Saisir destination : saisir la destination à l’aide du clavier virtuel.Web 87 ● Contacts : sélectionner votre destination à partir des adresses de vos contacts. ● Adresses enregistrées : sélectionner votre destination à partir de la liste de vos lieux favoris. YouTube Découvrez comment visionner et partager des vidéos sur YouTube. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Visionner des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo dans la liste. 3 Faites pivoter l’appareil pour passer en mode paysage. 4 Contrôlez la lecture à l’aide des icônes affichées à l’écran. › Partager des vidéos 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Sélectionnez une vidéo. 3 Appuyez sur → une option.Web 88 ›Mettre des vidéos en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur YouTube. 2 Appuyez sur [ ] →Ajouter et sélectionnez une vidéo. Passez à l’étape 7. Si vous souhaitez mettre en ligne de nouvelles vidéos, appuyez sur pour allumer le caméscope. 3 Pointez l’objectif vers le sujet et procédez aux réglages nécessaires. 4 Appuyez sur pour commencer à filmer. 5 Appuyez sur pour arrêter de filmer. 6 Appuyez sur Sauveg. pour mettre en ligne la vidéo que vous venez de filmer. 7 Indiquez votre compte Google s’il est associé à YouTube. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur Ajouter un compte et créer un compte pour vous connecter à YouTube. 8 Saisissez les détails du chargement et appuyez sur Envoyer. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps vous permet de télécharger en toute simplicité une quantité incroyable d’applications directement dans votre appareil. Avec un nombre considérable de jeux et d’innombrables applications diverses et variées (actualités, références, réseaux sociaux, navigation, santé, etc.), Samsung Apps vous offre un accès instantané à un choix pléthorique d’applications. Grâce aux applications parfaitement optimisées de Samsung Apps, votre appareil devient plus intelligent. Découvrez des applications époustouflantes et profitez pleinement de la vie avec un mobile.Web 89 ● En fonction de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur, il est possible que cette fonction ne soit pas disponible. ● Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site www.samsungapps.com. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Samsung Apps. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, lisez les conditions générales et appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Recherchez et téléchargez des applications en fonction de vos besoins. Market Vous pouvez télécharger des jeux, des sonneries ou d’autres applications à partir d’Android Market. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Market. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur Accepter. 3 Localisez un fichier et téléchargez-le sur l’appareil. ► p. 39Web 90 Actualités et météo Découvrez comment afficher la météo et lire toute l’actualité. › Consulter la météo 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Actualités et météo. 2 Appuyez sur Météo en haut de l’écran. Votre appareil recherche votre position actuelle et affiche la météo correspondante. Vous pouvez modifier la position pour afficher la météo dans une autre région. Appuyez sur [ ] →Paramètres → Paramètres de la météo et décochez la case Utiliser ma position. Appuyez ensuite sur une position dans Définir un lieu. › Lire des articles de journaux 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Actualités et météo. 2 Faites défiler vers la gauche pour sélectionner un sujet d’actualité en haut de l’écran. 3 Sélectionnez un article à consulter. Pour ajouter des sujets d’actualité, appuyez sur [ ] → Paramètres →Paramètres de l’actualité→Sélectionner des sujets.Connectivité 91 Connectivité Bluetooth Bluetooth est une technologie de communication sans fil à courte portée, capable d’échanger des informations dans un rayon de 10 mètres sans nécessiter de connexion matérielle. Il est inutile d’aligner les appareils pour envoyer des données via Bluetooth. Si les appareils sont à portée l’un de l’autre, vous pouvez échanger des informations, même si les deux appareils ne sont pas dans la même pièce. ● Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte, de l’interception ou du mauvais usage des données envoyées ou reçues via la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ● Assurez-vous de toujours utiliser des appareils dignes de confiance et correctement protégés avant de partager ou de recevoir des données. La présence d’obstacles entre les deux appareils peut réduire le rayon d’action. ● Il est possible que votre appareil ne fonctionne pas avec certains dispositifs, en particulier ceux qui n’ont pas été testés ou approuvés par Bluetooth SIG. › Activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Bluetooth. 2 Pour activer la fonction sans fil Bluetooth, appuyez sur Bluetooth. Connectivité 92 › Rechercher d’autres appareils Bluetooth et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres Bluetooth→Rechercher des périphériques. 2 Sélectionnez un appareil. 3 Saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth de votre appareil ou celui de l’autre dispositif si celui-ci en possède un, puis appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil. Lorsque l’utilisateur de l’autre appareil saisit le même code PIN ou accepte la connexion, la connexion entre les deux appareils est effective. Lorsque la connexion est correctement établie, l’appareil recherche automatiquement les services disponibles. Il est possible que certains appareils, notamment les casques et les kits mains-libres pour voiture, possèdent un code PIN Bluetooth fixe, par exemple 0000. Si tel est le cas, vous devez saisir ce code. › Envoyer des données par Bluetooth 1 Sélectionnez un fichier ou un élément, par exemple un contact, un mémo ou un fichier multimédia, à partir de l’application correspondante ou de Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez une option d’envoi de données via Bluetooth. La méthode de sélection d’une option peut varier selon le type de données. 3 Recherchez un appareil Bluetooth à associer au vôtre.Connectivité 93 › Recevoir des données par Bluetooth 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres Bluetooth→Identifiable. Votre appareil est visible par les autres appareils Bluetooth pendant 2 minutes. 2 Lorsque vous y êtes invité, saisissez le code PIN Bluetooth et appuyez sur OK. Sinon, appuyez sur Accepter pour que votre code PIN corresponde à celui de l’autre appareil. 3 Appuyez sur Accepter pour confirmer que vous autorisez la réception des données provenant de l’autre appareil. Les données reçues sont enregistrées dans le dossier Bluetooth. Si vous recevez un contact, celui-ci est automatiquement enregistré dans votre répertoire. Wi-Fi Découvrez comment exploiter les capacités de réseau sans fil de votre appareil pour vous connecter à tout réseau local sans fil (WLAN) compatible avec la norme IEEE 802.11 b/g/n. Vous pouvez vous connecter à Internet ou à d’autres appareils réseau dès qu’un point d’accès sans fil est disponible. Votre appareil utilise une fréquence non harmonisée. Il est conçu pour fonctionner dans tous les pays européens. Au sein de l’Union Européenne, le réseau Wi-Fi peut fonctionner sans restriction en intérieur, mais pas en extérieur en France.Connectivité 94 › Activer la fonction Wi-Fi Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux →Paramètres Wi-Fi → Wi-Fi. La fonction Wi-Fi fonctionnant en arrière-plan consomme de l’énergie. Pour économiser votre batterie, activez-la seulement lorsque vous en avez besoin. › Rechercher un point d’accès Wi-Fi et s’y connecter 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. L’appareil recherche automatiquement les points d’accès Wi-Fi disponibles. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau sous Réseaux Wi-Fi. 3 Saisissez un mot de passe pour vous connecter au réseau (si nécessaire). 4 Appuyez sur Connexion. › Ajouter un point d’accès Wi-Fi manuellement 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi→Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi. 2 Saisissez le SSID du réseau et choisissez le type de sécurité. 3 Définissez les paramètres de sécurité en fonction du type de sécurité choisi. 4 Appuyez sur Sauveg.Connectivité 95 › Connecter l’appareil à un point d’accès Wi-Fi via la Configuration Protégée Wi-Fi (WPS) Grâce à WPS, vous pouvez vous connecter à un réseau sécurisé. Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi doté d’une touche WPS : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. 2 Appuyez sur Connexion bouton WPS. 3 Appuyez sur un bouton WPS au niveau du point d’accès dans un délai de 2 minutes. Pour vous connecter à un point d’accès Wi-Fi avec un code PIN WPS : 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux → Paramètres Wi-Fi. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau comportant l’icône WPS, puis appuyez sur PIN WPS. 3 Au niveau du point d’accès, entrez le code PIN, puis appuyez sur le bouton de démarrage. Partage d’une connexion de données Découvrez comment définir votre appareil en tant que modem ou point d’accès sans fil et comment partager sa connexion de données avec des ordinateurs ou d’autres appareils. › Partager la connexion de données de votre appareil via le réseau Wi-Fi 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→Point d’accès et modem. 2 Appuyez sur Point d’accès mobile pour activer la fonction de modem Wi-Fi.Connectivité 96 3 Appuyez sur Paramètres point d’accès→Configurer point d’accès pour configurer les réglages réseau et utiliser votre appareil comme point d’accès. Option Fonction SSID du réseau Afficher et modifier le nom de votre appareil indiqué aux autres dispositifs. Sécurité Sélectionner le type de sécurité. Mot de passe Afficher ou modifier la clé réseau afin d’empêcher l’accès non autorisé au réseau. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Sauveg. 5 À partir d’un autre appareil, recherchez le nom du vôtre dans la liste des connexions disponibles et connectez-vous au réseau. Votre appareil partage sa connexion de données avec l’autre appareil. › Partager la connexion de données de votre appareil via un branchement USB 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 2 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→Point d’accès et modem. 3 Appuyez sur Modem USB pour activer la fonction modem USB. Votre appareil partage la connexion de données avec votre ordinateur. Pour cesser de partager la connexion de données, décochez la case Modem USB. La méthode de partage de la connexion de données peut différer selon le système d’exploitation de l’ordinateur.Connectivité 97 GPS Votre appareil est équipé d’un récepteur GPS (Global Positioning System). Découvrez comment activer les services de localisation. Pour améliorer la qualité de réception GPS, évitez d’utiliser votre appareil dans les conditions suivantes: ● entre des immeubles, dans des tunnels ou des passages souterrains ou à l’intérieur de bâtiments; ● en cas de mauvaises conditions météorologiques; ● à proximité de champs magnétiques intenses ou de lignes à haute tension ; ● dans un véhicule doté d’un film de protection solaire. Ne touchez et ne couvrez pas la zone de l’antenne avec les mains ou tout autre objet lorsque vous utilisez les fonctions sans fil. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. › Activer les services de localisation Pour recevoir des informations relatives à votre position et effectuer une recherche sur la carte, vous devez activer les services de localisation. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Localisation et sécurité. 2 Pour activer les services de localisation, définissez les paramètres suivants: Option Fonction Utiliser réseaux sans fil Configurer l’appareil pour qu’il utilise les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou les connexions de données pour localiser votre position. Utiliser les satellites GPS Configurer l’appareil pour qu’il utilise les satellites GPS afin de localiser votre position.Connectivité 98 Connexions PC Découvrez comment connecter votre appareil à un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC et cela dans divers modes de branchement USB. En connectant l’appareil à un ordinateur, vous pouvez transférer directement des données depuis et vers votre appareil, et utiliser le logiciel Samsung Kies. › Se connecter à Samsung Kies Assurez-vous que le logiciel Samsung Kies est bien installé sur votre ordinateur. Vous pouvez le télécharger à partir du site Web de Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies). 1 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil et reliez-le à un ordinateur. 2 Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur l’ordinateur pour lancer l’application. 3 Transférez ou synchronisez vous données mobiles, telles que vos contacts, calendriers, musiques ou photos, entre Samsung Kies et les appareils connectés. Pour plus d’informations, consultez l’aide de Samsung Kies. › Connecter l’appareil en tant que périphérique de stockage de masse Vous pouvez accéder au répertoire de fichiers en utilisant l’appareil en tant que lecteur de carte mémoire. 1 Insérez une carte mémoire dans l’appareil. 2 Branchez un câble de connexion PC sur le connecteur à fonctions multiples de votre appareil et reliez-le à un ordinateur.Connectivité 99 3 Ouvrez le volet des raccourcis et appuyez sur USB branché→ Connecter le stockage USB → OK. 4 Ouvrez le dossier où se trouvent les fichiers. 5 Copiez les fichiers de l’ordinateur vers la carte mémoire. 6 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur Déconnecter le stockage du PC. Pour déconnecter l’appareil de l’ordinateur, cliquez sur l’icône de périphérique USB dans la barre des tâches Windows, puis sur l’option Retirer le périphérique de stockage de masse en toute sécurité. Débranchez ensuite le câble de connexion PC. Si vous n’effectuez pas cette manipulation, vous risquez de perdre les données stockées sur la carte mémoire ou de l’endommager. Connexions VPN Vous pouvez créer des réseaux virtuels privés (VPN) et vous y connecter de façon sécurisée via un réseau public, par exemple Internet. Votre appareil doit déjà être configuré avec un accès Internet. Vous devez modifier les connexions si vous rencontrez des problèmes d’accès à Internet. Si vous n’êtes pas certain des informations de connexion à saisir, consultez votre opérateur.Connectivité 100 › Paramétrer les connexions VPN 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres VPN →Ajouter VPN. 2 Sélectionnez un type de VPN. 3 Personnalisez le profil de connexion. La disponibilité des options dépend du type de VPN. Option Fonction Nom VPN Saisir un nom pour le serveur VPN. Définir le serveur VPN Saisir l’adresse IP du serveur VPN. Activer Cryptage Paramétrer l’appareil pour crypter les transmissions avec le serveur VPN. Définir la clé prépartagée IPsec Définir la clé prépartagée. Activer Secret L2TP Paramétrer l’appareil pour utiliser le mot de passe secret L2TP. Définir Secret L2TP Saisir le mot de passe secret L2TP. Définir le certificat utilisateur Sélectionner un certificat utilisé par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web.Connectivité 101 Option Fonction Définir le certificat AC Sélectionner une autorité de certification (CA) utilisée par le serveur VPN pour vous identifier. Vous pouvez importer des certificats à partir du serveur VPN ou en télécharger à partir du Web. Domaines de recherche DNS Saisir l’adresse du serveur de noms de domaine (DNS). 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur [ ] →Sauveg. › Se connecter à un réseau privé 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Sans fil et réseaux→ Paramètres VPN. 2 Sélectionnez un réseau privé. 3 Saisissez votre nom d’utilisateur et votre mot de passe, puis appuyez sur Connexion. Outils 102 Outils Horloge Découvrez comment utiliser l’horloge sur l’écran d’accueil et comment régler et contrôler les alarmes pour les événements importants. ›Utiliser l’horloge 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge. 2 Avec l’horloge, vous pouvez également utiliser les fonctions suivantes: ● Pour créer ou supprimer une alarme, appuyez sur . ● Pour lire un diaporama avec les photos de la Galerie, appuyez sur . ● Pour lancer le lecteur MP3, appuyez sur . ● Pour revenir à l’écran d’accueil, appuyez sur . › Créer une nouvelle alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge. 2 Appuyez sur →Ajouter une alarme ou sur [ ] → Ajouter une alarme. 3 Définissez les détails de l’alarme. 4 Lorsque vous avez terminé, appuyez sur OK. › Arrêter une alarme Lorsque l’alarme sonne : ● Pour arrêter l’alarme, appuyez sur Ignorer. ● Pour répéter l’alarme à l’issue de la période spécifiée, appuyez sur Répéter.Outils 103 › Supprimer une alarme 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Horloge → . 2 Sélectionnez l’alarme à supprimer. 3 Appuyez sur Supprimer → OK. Calculatrice Découvrez comment effectuer des calculs mathématiques sur votre appareil, comme avec une calculatrice classique. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Calculatrice. 2 Utilisez les touches de la calculatrice affichées à l’écran pour réaliser des opérations mathématiques de base. Appuyez sur [ ] → Fonctions avancées pour utiliser la calculatrice scientifique. Téléchargements Découvrez comment gérer les historiques des fichiers téléchargés sur des sites Web. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Télécharg. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier de téléchargement. 3 Pour ouvrir un fichier téléchargé, sélectionnez le fichier dans l’historique. Pour supprimer un fichier téléchargé, cochez la case correspondante et appuyez sur Supprimer.Outils 104 Recherche Vous pouvez rechercher des applications et des données enregistrées sur votre appareil, ainsi que des données spécifiques sur le Web. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Recherche. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, indiquez si vous souhaitez afficher ou non l’historique de recherche de votre compte Google. 3 Saisissez un mot ou quelques lettres d’un mot à rechercher. 4 Sélectionnez les données auxquelles vous souhaitez accéder. Mes fichiers Découvrez comment accéder rapidement et facilement à toutes vos images, vidéos, musiques, fichiers audio et autres types de fichiers enregistrés sur une carte mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Mes fichiers. 2 Sélectionnez un dossier. ● Pour revenir au répertoire principal, appuyez sur Accueil. ● Pour accéder au niveau supérieur du répertoire de fichiers, appuyez sur Haut. 3 Sélectionnez un fichier à ouvrir. Dans un dossier, appuyez sur [ ] pour utiliser les options suivantes: ● Pour envoyer le fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur Partager. ● Pour créer un nouveau dossier, appuyez sur Créer dossier. ● Pour supprimer des fichiers ou des dossiers, appuyez sur Supprimer. ● Pour changer le mode d’affichage, appuyez sur Aff. par. ● Pour trier les fichiers ou les dossiers, appuyez sur Lister par. ● Pour déplacer, copier ou renommer un fichier, appuyez sur Plus.Outils 105 Polaris Viewer Découvrez comment consulter les documents Polaris Viewer stockés sur votre carte mémoire. › Ouvrir un document 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Polaris Viewer. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, vous pouvez choisir de vous inscrire en ligne. 3 Sélectionnez un dossier dans Mes fichiers ou Documents récents→ un document. 4 Consultez le document. ● Pour effectuer un zoom avant, placez deux doigts sur l’écran et écartez-les. Pour effectuer un zoom arrière, rapprochez les doigts. Pour rétablir la taille d’origine, appuyez deux fois sur l’écran. Vous pouvez également appuyer sur [ ] →Zoom → une option. ● Pour ajouter la page aux favoris, appuyez sur [ ] → Pressepapiers. ● Pour rechercher du texte dans le document, appuyez sur [ ] →Rechercher. ● Pour personnaliser les paramètres d’affichage ou de gestion des documents, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→Paramètres. ● Pour envoyer un fichier à d’autres personnes, appuyez sur [ ] →Plus→Envoyer le fichier. La disponibilité des options dépend du type de document.Outils 106 ›Gérer des documents en ligne 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Polaris Viewer. 2 Appuyez sur Fichiers web→ un service. 3 Saisissez votre adresse e-mail et votre mot de passe pour accéder à votre compte, puis appuyez sur Ajouter. 4 Affichez et gérez vos documents sur le serveur selon vos besoins. Outils SIM Utilisez les différents services complémentaires proposés par votre opérateur. En fonction de la carte SIM/USIM que vous utilisez, il est possible que ce menu porte un autre nom. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Outils SIM. Gestion de tâches Grâce au gestionnaire de tâches, vous pouvez visualiser les applications en cours d’exécution ainsi que les informations relatives à la mémoire. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Gestion de tâche... 2 Vous pouvez utiliser les options suivantes: ● Applications actives : afficher la liste des applications en cours d’exécution sur l’appareil. ● Télécharg. : afficher l’espace mémoire total utilisé par les applications installées sur votre appareil.Outils 107 ● RAM : vérifier et gérer la mémoire vive de votre appareil. ● Stockage : afficher l’espace mémoire disponible et utilisé sur l’appareil et sur la carte mémoire. ● Aide : afficher des informations d’aide sur l’économie de la batterie et sur le gestionnaire RAM. Recherche vocale Découvrez comment utiliser la commande vocale pour composer un numéro, envoyer un message ou rechercher des itinéraires et des informations. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur. 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Recherche vocale. 2 Si vous lancez cette application pour la première fois, appuyez sur OK ou modifiez la langue. 3 Appuyez sur Parlez mai... (si nécessaire). 4 Prononcez une commande dans le microphone. 5 Sélectionnez le nom de l’élément auquel vous souhaitez accéder (si nécessaire).Paramètres 108 Paramètres Accéder au menu Paramètres 1 Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres. 2 Sélectionnez une catégorie de paramètres, puis une option. Gestionnaire de carte SIM Accédez aux paramètres qui vont permettront de gérer les réglages liés au réseau et aux cartes de votre appareil. ► p. 34 Sans fil et réseaux Modifiez les paramètres des connexions aux réseaux sans fil. ›Mode Hors-ligne Désactivez toutes les fonctions sans fil de votre appareil. Vous pouvez uniquement utiliser les services hors-réseau, c’est-à-dire les fonctions autres que les fonctions d’appel, Wi-Fi et Bluetooth. › Paramètres Wi-Fi ● Wi-Fi : activez ou désactivez la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 94 ● Notification réseau : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous avertisse lorsqu’un réseau ouvert est disponible. ● Connexion bouton WPS : connectez-vous à un point d’accès Wi-Fi à l’aide de la touche de Configuration Protégée Wi-Fi (WPS). ● Ajouter un réseau Wi-Fi : ajoutez manuellement un point d’accès Wi-Fi.Paramètres 109 › Paramètres Bluetooth ● Bluetooth : activez ou désactivez la fonction sans fil Bluetooth. ► p. 91 ● Nom de l’appareil : définissez un nom Bluetooth pour l’appareil. ● Identifiable : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il soit identifiable par d’autres appareils Bluetooth. ● Rechercher des périphériques : recherchez les appareils Bluetooth disponibles. ›Utilitaires USB Connectez votre appareil à un ordinateur comme périphérique de stockage de masse. ► p. 98 › Point d’accès et modem ● Modem USB : activez la fonction modem USB pour partager la connexion de réseau mobile de l’appareil avec les ordinateurs via une connexion USB. Lorsqu’il est connecté à un ordinateur, votre appareil sert de modem sans fil à celui-ci. ► p. 96 ● Point d’accès mobile : activez la fonction de modem Wi-Fi pour partager la connexion de données de l’appareil avec des ordinateurs ou d’autres équipements via la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 95 ● Paramètres point d’accès : - Point d’accès mobile : activez la fonction de modem Wi-Fi pour partager la connexion de données de l’appareil avec des ordinateurs ou d’autres équipements via la fonction Wi-Fi. ► p. 95 - Configurer point d’accès : configurez les paramètre réseau pour utiliser votre appareil en tant que point d’accès. › Paramètres VPN Paramétrez des réseaux privés virtuels (VPN) pour vous y connecter. ► p. 99Paramètres 110 › Réseaux mobiles ● Connexions de données : autorisez les connexions aux réseaux de données à commutation de paquets. ● Itinérance : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il se connecte à un autre réseau lorsque vous changez de zone de couverture ou que votre réseau d’origine n’est pas disponible. ● Nom des points d’accès : définissez des noms de point d’accès (APN). ● Réseaux 2G uniquement: paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il se connecte uniquement aux réseaux 2G. ● Opérateurs réseau : recherchez les réseaux disponibles et sélectionnez un réseau d’itinérance. Appel Personnalisez les paramètres des fonctions d’appel. ›Numérotation fixe ● Activer FDN : activez ou désactivez le mode de numérotation fixe pour limiter les appels aux numéros de la liste FDN. Saisissez le code PIN2 fourni avec votre carte SIM/USIM. ● Changer PIN2 : modifiez le code PIN2, utilisé pour protéger le code PIN principal. Si la carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée, ce menu devient Déverrouiller le code PIN2. ● Liste FDN : définissez la liste des contacts activés pour la numérotation fixe. ›Messagerie vocale ● Service de messagerie vocale: sélectionnez le numéro d’accès au service de messagerie vocale. Vous pouvez également sélectionner d’autres services de messagerie vocale si vous avez téléchargé les applications correspondantes. ● N° de messagerie vocale : saisissez le numéro d’accès au service de messagerie vocale. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir ce numéro. La localisation des ces options selon le type de carte SIM ou USIM insérée.Paramètres 111 › Capteur de proximité Paramétrez l’appareil pour activer le capteur de proximité en cours d’appel. › Transfert d’appel Transférez les appels entrants vers un autre numéro. › Paramètres supplémentaires ● Identitié de l’appelant: présentez votre numéro de téléphone mobile à vos destinataires lorsque vous passez un appel. ● Signal d’appel : activez ou désactivez les alertes en cours d’appel. Son Modifiez les paramètres des différents sons de votre appareil. ● Profil Discret: activez ce profil afin de couper tous les sons, à l’exception des sons multimédia et des sonneries d’alarme. ● Vibreur: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous signale différents événements à l’aide du vibreur. ● Volume : réglez le niveau sonore des sonneries d’appel, d’alarme ou de notifications ainsi que celui des fichiers audio/vidéo et des sons de l’appareil. ● Sonnerie : - Sonnerie du téléphone : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les appels entrants. - Sonnerie de notification : sélectionnez une sonnerie pour les événements, tels que les messages entrants et les appels manqués. ● Son du clavier: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous appuyez sur les touches du clavier. ● Sélection sonore : paramétrez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous sélectionnez une application ou une option sur l’écran tactile. ● Sons verrouillage écran : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il émette un son lorsque vous verrouillez ou déverrouillez l’écran tactile.Paramètres 112 Affichage Modifiez les paramètres d’affichage. ● Affichage écran : - Police : modifiez le type de police pour le texte affiché à l’écran. Vous pouvez télécharger des polices à partir d’Android Market en appuyant sur Obtenir des polices en ligne. - Ecran d’accueil : Fond d’écran : sélectionnez l’image d’arrière-plan de l’écran d’accueil. - Ecran de verrouillage : Fond d’écran : sélectionnez une image à afficher lorsque l’écran est verrouillé. Position de l’horloge : sélectionnez l’endroit où se trouve l’horloge sur l’écran verrouillé. ● Luminosité : réglez la luminosité de l’écran. ● Rotation auto. écran : indiquez si le contenu doit automatiquement pivoter en même temps que l’appareil. ● Animation : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche une animation lorsque vous changez de fenêtre. ● Mise en veille de l’écran : définissez le délai de désactivation automatique du rétroéclairage. Localisation et sécurité Modifiez les paramètres de sécurité de votre appareil, de la carte SIM/USIM et de la fonction GPS. ● Utiliser réseaux sans fil : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise les réseaux Wi-Fi et/ou les connexions de données pour localiser votre position. ● Utiliser les satellites GPS : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise les satellites GPS afin de localiser votre position.Paramètres 113 ● Définir verrouillage : définissez le code de sécurité de déverrouillage de l’écran. Lorsque vous avez défini votre code de déverrouillage, cette option devient Modif. verrouillage écran. - Aucun(e) : désactivez le verrouillage de l’écran. - Modèle : définissez un modèle pour déverrouiller l’écran. - Code PIN : définissez un code PIN (numérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. - Mot de passe : définissez un mot de passe (alphanumérique) pour déverrouiller l’écran. ● Configurer blocage SIM : - Verrouiller carte SIM : activez ou désactivez la fonction de verrouillage PIN de l’appareil pour qu’un mot de passe PIN vous soit demandé lors du démarrage. - Modifier code PIN SIM : modifiez le code PIN utilisé pour accéder aux données de la carte SIM ou USIM. ● Traçage du mobile : activez ou désactivez la fonction Traçage du mobile qui vous aide à localiser votre appareil si vous l’avez perdu ou s’il vous a été volé. ► p. 33 ● Destinataires : ajoutez ou modifiez les destinataires du message d’alerte. ● Contrôle à distance : contrôlez l’appareil égaré via le Web. ● Mots de passe visibles : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche votre mot de passe à mesure que vous le saisissez. ● Administrateur de périphérique : affichez les administrateurs autorisés à appliquer de nouvelles règles à votre appareil. ● Info. d’identification sécurisées : utilisez les certificats et les identifiants pour sécuriser l’utilisation des diverses applications. ● Installer depuis carte SD : installez les certificats cryptés qui sont stockés sur une carte mémoire. ● Définir un mot de passe : créez et confirmez un mot de passe pour accéder aux identifiants de sécurité. ● Supprimer le stockage : effacez les identifiants de sécurité contenus dans l’appareil et réinitialisez le mot de passe.Paramètres 114 Applications Modifiez les paramètres de gestion des applications installées. ● Sources inconnues : sélectionnez cette option pour télécharger des applications à partir de n’importe quelle source. Dans le cas contraire, vous pouvez uniquement télécharger des applications à partir d’Android Market. ● Gérer les applications : accédez à la liste des applications installées dans l’appareil et consultez les informations relatives aux applications. ● Services en cours d’exécution : visualisez les services en cours d’utilisation et gérez les paramètres. ● Utilisation de la mémoire : affichez la quantité de mémoire disponible et utilisée par les applications sur votre appareil. ● Utilisation de la batterie : affichez la quantité d’énergie consommée par votre appareil. ● Développement: - Débogage USB : cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. Lorsque votre appareil est connecté à un ordinateur à l’aide d’un câble de connexion PC, le mode Débogage USB est activé et le logiciel Samsung Kies démarre automatiquement. - Actif en chargement: configurez l’appareil pour que l’écran reste allumé pendant le chargement de la batterie. - Positions fictives : autorisez l’envoi de fausses informations de service et de localisation à un service de Gestionnaire de localisation à des fins de test. Cette option est utilisée pour le développement d’applications. ● Samsung Apps : sélectionnez une connexion réseau (Wi-Fi ou PSN) pour être averti de la sortie de nouvelles applications sur Samsung Apps. La disponibilité de cette fonction dépend de votre zone géographique ou de votre opérateur.Paramètres 115 Comptes et synchro. Modifiez les paramètres de la fonction de synchronisation automatique ou gérez les comptes de synchronisation. ● Données d’arrièreplan : sélectionnez ce paramètre pour utiliser la fonction de synchronisation automatique. La synchronisation automatique fonctionne alors en arrière-plan sans ouvrir les applications et synchronise les données. ● Synchronisation auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il synchronise automatiquement les contacts, le calendrier et les e-mails. Confidentialité Modifiez les paramètres pour gérer vos propres paramètres et données. ● Sauvegarder mes données : sauvegardez les paramètres de votre appareil sur le serveur Google. ● Restaurer automatiquement: configurez l’appareil pour qu’il restaure les données des applications que vous avez sauvegardées lorsqu’elles sont installées sur votre appareil. ● Rétablir param. par défaut: réinitialisez les paramètres et supprimez toutes les données. Carte SD et mémoire Affichez les informations de mémoire relatives à l’appareil et à la carte mémoire. Vous pouvez également formater la carte mémoire. Le formatage d’une carte mémoire supprime définitivement toutes les données qui y sont stockées.Paramètres 116 Paramètres de langue Modifiez les paramètres de saisie de texte. › Sélectionner la langue Sélectionnez une langue d’affichage pour tous les menus et applications. ›Mode de saisie Sélectionnez le type de clavier à utiliser par défaut pour la saisie de texte. › Clavier Swype ● Langue : sélectionnez la langue de saisie. Dans certaines langues, la saisie de texte est impossible. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une langue prise en charge. ● Reconnaissance mots : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il affiche des propositions de mots au fur et à mesure de votre saisie. ● Aide sonore : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il vous avertisse si aucune proposition de mots n’existe pour votre saisie lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur un mot. ● Indicateur d’astuces : configurez l’appareil afin qu’il vous dirige vers une aide rapide via le clignotement de l’indicateur conseils. ● Espacement auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère automatiquement un espace entre les mots. ● Majuscules auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). ● Afficher la trace comp. : définissez la durée d’affichage de la trajectoire de votre déplacement sur l’écran tactile. ● Fenêtre de choix du mot: définissez la fréquence d’affichage de la liste des mots.Paramètres 117 ● Vitesse/précision : définissez le rapport entre vitesse et précision de votre dictionnaire personnel. ● Aide de Swype : accédez aux informations d’aide sur l’utilisation du clavier Swype. ● Tutoriel : découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier Swype. ● Version : affichez les informations de version. › Clavier Samsung Configurez l’appareil pour qu’il utilise le clavier Samsung. ● Types de clavier: sélectionnez le mode de saisie par défaut, par exemple le clavier AZERTY, le clavier traditionnel ou l’écriture manuscrite. ● Langues de saisie : sélectionnez les langues de saisie. Dans certaines langues, la saisie de texte est impossible. Pour saisir du texte, vous devez sélectionner une langue prise en charge. ● XT9 : activez le mode XT9 pour rédiger du texte avec la saisie prédictive. ● Paramètres XT9 avancés : activez les fonctions avancées du mode XT9, par exemple la saisie automatique, la correction ou la substitution automatique et la définition d’une liste de mots personnelle. ● Modification du clavier: activez ou désactivez la fonction de modification du clavier pour le mode de saisie du texte. Vous pouvez sélectionner différents modes de saisie en faisant défiler le clavier vers la gauche ou vers la droite. ● Majuscules auto. : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il mette automatiquement en majuscule la première lettre qui suit un signe de ponctuation final (point, point d’interrogation et point d’exclamation). ● Paramètres de saisie manuscrite : personnalisez la durée de la reconnaissance en mode de saisie manuscrite. ● Entrée voix : activez la fonction de reconnaissance vocale pour saisir du texte oralement avec le clavier Samsung.Paramètres 118 ● Point automatique : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il insère un point lorsque vous appuyez deux fois sur la barre d’espace. ● Didacticiel : découvrez comment saisir du texte avec le clavier Samsung. Entrée et sortie voix Modifiez les paramètres des fonctions de reconnaissance et de synthèse vocale. › Paramètres de reconnaissance vocale ● Langue : sélectionnez la langue de la reconnaissance vocale Google. ● SafeSearch : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il filtre les images ou les textes au contenu explicite dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. ● Termes choquants : configurez l’appareil pour qu’il reconnaisse et bloque les termes choquants dans les résultats de la recherche vocale. › Paramètres de synthèse vocale ● Ecouter un exemple : écoutez un exemple de texte parlé. Installez des données vocales pour l’utilisation de la fonction de synthèse vocale. ● Toujours utiliser mes paramètres : configurez l’appareil pour utiliser la vitesse d’élocution et les paramètres de langue spécifiés au moyen des paramètres sauvegardés dans les applications. ● Moteur par défaut: configurez le moteur de synthèse vocale à utiliser pour le texte parlé. ● Installer les données vocales : téléchargez et installez des données vocales pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. ● Vitesse d’élocution : sélectionnez la vitesse de la fonction de synthèse vocale. ● Langue : sélectionnez la langue pour la fonction de synthèse vocale. ● Moteurs : affichez les moteurs de synthèse vocale installés sur votre appareil.Paramètres 119 Accessibilité ● Accessibilité : activez une application d’accessibilité téléchargée, par exemple Talkback ou Kickback, qui émet un retour vocal, une mélodie ou une vibration. ● Touche Marche pour terminer les appels : configurez l’appareil pour que vous puissiez mettre fin à un appel en appuyant sur la touche Marche/Arrêt. Date & heure Accédez aux paramètres suivants et modifiez-les pour gérer la façon dont l’heure et la date s’affichent sur l’appareil. Si la batterie est entièrement déchargée ou si vous la retirez de l’appareil, la date et l’heure seront réinitialisées. ● Automatique : actualisez automatiquement l’heure de l’appareil lors des changements de fuseau horaire. ● Définir la date : réglez manuellement la date du jour. ● Sélectionner le fuseau horaire : définissez votre fuseau horaire local. ● Définir l’heure : réglez l’heure manuellement. ● Format 24 heures : définissez l’affichage de l’heure au format 24 heures. ● Format de date : sélectionnez un format de date. A propos du téléphone Accédez à des informations concernant votre appareil, vérifiez son état et mettez à jour son système.Dépannage 120 Dépannage Lorsque vous allumez votre téléphone ou lorsqu’il est en cours d’utilisation, un message vous invite à saisir l’un des codes suivants : Code Solution possible : Mot de passe Lorsque la fonction de verrouillage est activée, vous devez saisir le mot de passe que vous avez défini pour le téléphone. PIN Lorsque vous utilisez l'appareil pour la première fois ou lorsque la demande de code PIN est activée, vous devez saisir le code PIN fourni avec la carte SIM ou USIM. Cette fonction peut être désactivée dans le menu Verrouiller carte SIM. PUK Si vous saisissez un code PIN incorrect à plusieurs reprises, votre carte SIM ou USIM est bloquée. Vous devez alors saisir le code PUK fourni par votre opérateur. PIN2 Lorsque vous accédez à un menu nécessitant la saisie du code PIN2, vous devez saisir ce code, fourni avec votre carte SIM ou USIM. Pour en savoir plus, contactez votre opérateur. Votre appareil affiche des messages d’erreur liés au réseau ou au service ● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. ● Certaines options ne sont pas accessibles sans abonnement. Contactez votre opérateur pour obtenir des informations complémentaires.Dépannage 121 Mauvaise réaction ou lenteur de l’écran tactile Si votre téléphone dispose d’un écran tactile et que cet écran réagit de manière erronée, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Retirez les éventuelles protections de l’écran tactile. Les films de protection peuvent empêcher le téléphone de reconnaître vos saisies et ne sont pas recommandés pour les écrans tactiles. ● Vos mains doivent être propres et sèches lorsque vous touchez l’écran tactile. ● Redémarrez votre téléphone afin de mettre fin à d’éventuels dysfonctionnements logiciels temporaires. ● Assurez-vous que le programme de votre téléphone soit mis à jour dans sa dernière version. ● Si l’écran tactile est endommagé ou rayé, apportez votre téléphone dans votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Votre appareil se bloque ou est sujet à des erreurs fatales Si votre appareil se bloque ou ralentit, vous devez peut-être fermer des applications ou réinitialiser l’appareil pour que celui-ci retrouve un fonctionnement normal. Si votre téléphone se bloque et ne répond plus, maintenez la touche Marche/Arrêt enfoncée pendant 8 à 10 secondes, puis la relâcher. L’appareil va forcer la fermeture. Si vous ne parvenez pas à résoudre ce problème à la suite de ces manipulations, procédez à la réinitialisation des paramètres par défaut. Depuis l’écran d’accueil, ouvrez la liste des applications et appuyez sur Paramètres→Confidentialité→Rétablir param. par défaut →Réinitialiser le téléphone→Supprimer tout. Interruption inopinée des appels Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Impossible d’appeler ● Assurez-vous d’avoir appuyé sur la touche d’appel. ● Assurez-vous d’être connecté(e) au réseau cellulaire approprié. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction d’interdiction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone.Dépannage 122 Impossible de recevoir des appels ● Vérifiez que votre téléphone est bien allumé. ● Assurez-vous d’être connecté(e) au réseau cellulaire approprié. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction d’interdiction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone entrant. Problèmes d’écoute de vos interlocuteurs ● Vérifiez que le microphone intégré n’est pas recouvert. ● Le microphone doit être placé suffisamment près de votre bouche. ● Si vous utilisez un kit mains libres ou un casque, vérifiez qu’il est correctement branché. Mauvaise qualité d’écoute ● Assurez-vous que rien n’entrave l’antenne intégrée au téléphone. ● Vous êtes peut-être dans une zone de mauvaise réception. Déplacez-vous et réessayez. Impossible d’appeler des contacts enregistrés ● Vérifiez que le bon numéro a été enregistré dans la liste de contacts. ● Au besoin, saisissez et enregistrez le numéro à nouveau. ● Vérifiez que vous n’avez pas activé la fonction d’interdiction d’appels pour ce numéro de téléphone. Tonalités inopinées et clignotements de l’icône de la batterie Le niveau de charge de la batterie est faible. Rechargez la batterie ou remplacez-la pour continuer à utiliser le téléphone. Problèmes pour recharger la batterie et désactivation du téléphone ● Les fiches de la batterie sont peut-être sales. Nettoyez les fiches dorées à l’aide d’un chiffon doux et propre, puis réessayez de recharger la batterie. ● Si la batterie ne se recharge plus complètement, remplacezla par une neuve et recyclez l’ancienne conformément à la législation en vigueur dans votre pays.Dépannage 123 Echauffement du téléphone Lorsque vous utilisez des applications qui demandent plus d’énergie, ou sur une période prolongée, votre téléphone peut sembler chaud au toucher. Ce phénomène est normal et n’affecte pas la durée de vie ni les performances du téléphone. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de l’appareil photo Pour utiliser l’appareil photo, votre téléphone mobile Samsung doit avoir suffisamment de mémoire disponible et sa batterie doit être suffisamment chargée. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de l’appareil photo, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Chargez la batterie ou remplacez-la par une autre entièrement chargée. ● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers dans un PC ou en en supprimant dans votre téléphone. ● Redémarrez le téléphone. Si les problèmes persistent, contactez votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de la radio FM L’application Radio FM de votre téléphone mobile Samsung utilise le casque comme antenne radio. Si le casque n’est pas branché, la radio FM sera dans l’incapacité de capter les stations. Pour utiliser la radio FM, commencez par vérifier que le casque est branché correctement. Ensuite, recherchez et enregistrez les fréquences des stations disponibles. Si les problèmes persistent après ces manipulations, tentez d’accéder à la station désirée avec un autre récepteur radio. Si vous captez la station avec un autre récepteur, votre téléphone a peut- être besoin d’être réparé. Contactez votre Centre de service aprèsvente Samsung.Dépannage 124 Messages d’erreur à l’ouverture de fichiers audio Certains fichiers audio risquent de ne pas fonctionner sur votre téléphone mobile Samsung pour plusieurs raisons. Si vous obtenez des messages d’erreur lors de l’ouverture de fichiers audio, tentez les manipulations suivantes: ● Libérez de la mémoire en transférant des fichiers dans un PC ou en en supprimant dans votre téléphone. ● Assurez-vous que le fichier audio n’est pas protégé par des droits DRM (Gestion des droits d’auteur). Si c’est le cas, vous devez posséder une licence appropriée ou une clé pour lire le fichier. ● Vérifiez que votre téléphone prend en charge le type du fichier audio. Impossible de localiser un autre appareil Bluetooth ● Vérifiez que la fonction sans fil Bluetooth est activée dans votre téléphone. ● Vérifiez que la fonction Bluetooth est activée également dans l’autre appareil, si nécessaire. ● Vérifiez que les deux appareils Bluetooth sont bien à l’intérieur du rayon d’action Bluetooth (10 mètres maximum). Si le problème persiste après ces manipulations, contactez votre Centre de service après-vente Samsung. Problème de connexion avec un PC ● Assurez-vous que le câble USB utilisé est compatible avec votre appareil. ● Vérifiez que les pilotes nécessaires soient bien installés dans votre PC et mis à jour.Consignes de sécurité 125 Consignes de sécurité Afin d’éviter de blesser votre entourage ou vous-même, ou bien d’endommager votre appareil, veuillez lire toutes les informations suivantes avant d’utiliser votre appareil. Avertissement : évitez les décharges électriques, le feu et les explosions N’utilisez pas de prises et de cordons d’alimentation endommagé(e)s ou de prises électriques mal fixées Ne touchez pas le cordon d’alimentation lorsque vos mains sont mouillées et ne tirez pas sur le chargeur pour le débrancher Ne tordez pas ou n’endommagez pas le cordon d’alimentation N’utilisez et ne touchez pas votre appareil avec les mains mouillées lorsque celui-ci est en cours de chargement Ne provoquez pas de court-circuit avec le chargeur ou la batterie Ne laissez pas tomber le chargeur ou la batterie et ne les exposez pas aux chocs Ne rechargez pas la batterie en utilisant un chargeur non homologué par Samsung N’utilisez pas votre appareil pendant un orage L’appareil peut mal fonctionner et les risques de décharge électrique peuvent augmenter. Ne manipulez pas la batterie Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) lorsque celle-ci coule ou est endommagée Contactez le centre de traitement agréé le plus proche de chez vous afin de vous séparer de vos batteries Li-Ion en toute sécurité.Consignes de sécurité 126 Manipulez et jetez les batteries et les chargeurs avec précaution • N’utilisez que des batteries et des chargeurs homologués par Samsung et spécialement conçus pour votre appareil. L’utilisation de batteries et de chargeurs incompatibles peut provoquer des blessures graves ou endommager votre appareil. • Ne jetez jamais une batterie ou un appareil au feu. Respectez la réglementation en vigueur dans votre pays concernant l’élimination des batteries et des appareils usagé(e)s. • Ne posez jamais une batterie ou un appareil mobile à l’intérieur ou audessus d’appareils chauffants, tels que des fours à micro-ondes, des cuisinières ou des radiateurs. En cas de surchauffe, la batterie peut exploser. • N’écrasez ou ne perforez jamais la batterie. Évitez d’exposer la batterie à une pression externe élevée qui risquerait d’entraîner un court-circuit interne et une surchauffe. Protégez l’appareil, la batterie et le chargeur contre toute détérioration • Évitez d’exposer votre appareil et la batterie à des températures très basses ou très élevées. • Des températures extrêmes peuvent déformer l’appareil et réduire la capacité de chargement, ainsi que sa durée de vie et celle de la batterie. • Évitez tout contact de la batterie avec des objets métalliques, car cela risquerait de provoquer un court-circuit entre les bornes + et – de la batterie et de l’endommager de manière temporaire ou permanente. • N’utilisez jamais une batterie ou un chargeur endommagé(e). Attention : respectez tous les avertissements de sécurité et les réglementations en vigueur lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil dans un endroit où son utilisation est réglementée Éteignez votre appareil lorsque son utilisation est interdite Respectez toutes les réglementations interdisant l’utilisation des appareils mobiles dans certaines zones spécifiques.Consignes de sécurité 127 N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’autres appareils électroniques La plupart des appareils électroniques utilisent des signaux de radiofréquence. Il est possible que votre appareil cause des interférences avec d’autres appareils électroniques. N’utilisez pas votre appareil à proximité d’un stimulateur cardiaque • Maintenez une distance minimale de 15 cm entre votre appareil et un stimulateur cardiaque pour éviter toute interférence. • Il est fortement conseillé, lors d’un appel, de positionner l’appareil sur le côté opposé à l’implant. • Si vous pensez que votre appareil vient perturber le fonctionnement d’un stimulateur cardiaque ou d’un appareil médical, éteignez-le immédiatement et contactez le fabricant du stimulateur ou de l’appareil médical. N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans un hôpital ou à proximité d’équipements médicaux en raison des interférences qu’il pourrait produire Si vous utilisez vous-même des équipements médicaux, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’éviter toute interférence de radiofréquence. Si vous utilisez un appareil auditif, contactez votre fabriquant afin d’obtenir plus d’informations sur les interférences Il est possible que certains appareils auditifs subissent des interférences causées par la radiofréquence de votre appareil. Afin de vous assurer d’une utilisation de votre appareil auditif en toute sécurité, contactez votre fabriquant. Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion • Éteignez l’appareil dans les lieux présentant des risques d’explosion. • Respectez toujours les consignes, les instructions et la signalétique d’utilisation dans un environnement explosif. • N’utilisez pas votre appareil dans une station-service, dans les zones potentiellement explosives ou à proximité de produits combustibles ou chimiques. • Ne transportez et ne stockez jamais de liquides inflammables, de gaz ou de matériaux explosifs dans le même habitacle que l’appareil, ses composants ou ses accessoires.Consignes de sécurité 128 Éteignez votre appareil lorsque vous voyagez en avion Les appareils mobiles peuvent engendrer des interférences avec les équipements aéronautiques. Conformez-vous aux réglementations en vigueur et éteignez votre appareil. Il est possible que les appareils électroniques se trouvant à bord d’un véhicule motorisé subissent des dysfonctionnements provoqués par la radiofréquence de votre propre appareil Respectez toutes les consignes de sécurité et réglementations relatives à l’utilisation de votre appareil lorsque vous vous trouvez au volant d’un véhicule Votre responsabilité principale est avant tout de conduire votre véhicule sans prendre de risques. N’utilisez jamais votre appareil au volant, si cela est interdit par la loi. Pour votre sécurité et celle des autres, faites preuve de bon sens et gardez à l’esprit les conseils suivants : • Utilisez un kit mains-libres. • Apprenez à connaître les fonctions pratiques de votre appareil, comme par exemple la numérotation rapide et la fonction de rappel automatique. Ces fonctions vous permettent de gagner du temps et de rester concentré lorsque vous passez ou recevez des appels sur votre appareil. • Gardez votre appareil à portée de main. Soyez en mesure d’atteindre votre appareil mobile sans quitter la route des yeux. Si vous recevez un appel entrant à un moment inopportun, laissez votre messagerie vocale répondre à votre place. • Informez votre interlocuteur que vous êtes au volant. Interrompez tout appel en cas d’embouteillages ou de conditions météorologiques dangereuses. La pluie, la neige, le verglas et une circulation dense sont des facteurs dangereux. • Ne prenez pas de notes ou ne recherchez pas de numéros de téléphone. Noter une liste de tâches à effectuer ou parcourir votre répertoire détourne votre attention de votre responsabilité principale qui consiste à conduire sans prendre de risques. • Composez des numéros de manière raisonnable et évaluez l’état de la circulation. Passez vos appels lorsque vous êtes immobilisé ou avant de vous insérer dans la circulation. Essayez de passer vos appels de préférence lorsque votre véhicule est stationné. Si vous devez absolument passer un appel, composez les chiffres un à un, regardez la route et dans vos rétroviseurs, puis reprenez la numérotation.Consignes de sécurité 129 • Ne poursuivez pas de conversations stressantes ou émotionnelles qui pourraient vous distraire. Informez vos interlocuteurs que vous êtes au volant et interrompez toute conversation susceptible d’altérer votre attention sur la route. • Utilisez votre appareil pour demander de l’aide. En cas d’incendie, d’accident de la route ou d’urgence médicale, composez le numéro d’urgence local. • Utilisez votre appareil pour aider d’autres personnes en situation d’urgence. Si vous êtes témoin d’un accident, d’une agression ou de toute autre situation d’urgence mettant des vies en jeu, contactez les services d’urgence locaux. • Appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance, si cela s’avère nécessaire. Si vous croisez un véhicule endommagé ne présentant pas de danger immédiat, si vous constatez un feu rouge cassé, un accident de la route sans gravité où personne ne semble blessé ou encore un véhicule que vous savez volé, appelez un service d’assistance dépannage ou un service spécial d’assistance autre que les services d’urgence. Pour entretenir et bien utiliser votre appareil Conservez votre appareil au sec • L’humidité et tous types de liquides peuvent endommager les pièces ou les circuits électroniques de votre appareil. • N’allumez pas votre appareil s’il présente des marques d’humidité. Si votre appareil est déjà allumé, éteignez-le, puis retirez immédiatement la batterie (si vous n’arrivez pas à l’éteindre ou à retirer la batterie, laissez votre appareil tel quel). Essuyez-le ensuite à l’aide d’une serviette et confiez-le à un centre de service après-vente Samsung. • Les liquides modifient la couleur de l’étiquette indiquant que l’intérieur de l’appareil a été endommagé. L’eau peut endommager votre appareil et entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. N’utilisez pas ou ne rangez pas votre appareil dans des endroits poussiéreux ou sales La poussière peut causer des dysfonctionnements de votre appareil. Ne posez pas votre appareil sur des surfaces inclinées Si votre appareil tombe, il peut être endommagé.Consignes de sécurité 130 Ne conservez pas votre appareil dans des endroits chauds ou froids. Utilisez votre appareil à des températures comprises entre -20°C et 50°C • Votre appareil peut exploser si vous le laissez dans un véhicule fermé, la température intérieure pouvant monter jusqu’à 80°C. • N’exposez pas votre appareil à la lumière directe du soleil de manière prolongée (comme par exemple sur le tableau de bord d’une voiture). • Conservez la batterie à des températures allant de 0°C à 40°C. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité d’objets métalliques, comme par exemple des pièces, des clés ou des colliers • Votre appareil pourrait être déformé ou subir des dysfonctionnements. • Les bornes de la batterie peuvent causer des incendies si elles sont mises en contact avec des objets métalliques. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité de champs magnétiques • Lorsqu’il est exposé à des champs magnétiques, votre appareil peut subir des dysfonctionnements ou la batterie peut se décharger. • Les cartes à piste, comme par exemple les cartes de crédit, les cartes de téléphone et les cartes d’embarquement peuvent être endommagées par les champs magnétiques. • N’utilisez pas de housses ou d’accessoires équipés de fermetures aimantées et évitez toute exposition prolongée de votre appareil à des champs magnétiques. Ne conservez pas votre appareil à proximité ou à l’intérieur de radiateurs, de fours à micro-ondes, d’équipements de cuisine chauffants ou de conteneurs à haute pression • La batterie peut couler. • Votre appareil peut surchauffer et causer un incendie. Ne laissez pas tomber votre appareil et ne l’exposez pas aux chocs • L’écran de votre appareil pourrait être endommagé. • Votre appareil peut être endommagé ou certaines pièces peuvent subir des dysfonctionnements si vous le tordez ou le déformez.Consignes de sécurité 131 En cas de surchauffe de l’appareil, n’utilisez pas ce dernier ainsi que ses applications pendant quelques temps Un contact prolongé de votre peau avec un appareil en surchauffe peut entraîner des symptômes de brûlure faible, tels que des points rouges et de pigmentation. Si l’appareil photo de votre appareil possède un flash, ne l’utilisez pas à proximité des yeux des personnes ou des animaux Utiliser un flash à proximité des yeux peut causer des lésions oculaires ou une perte temporaire de la vue. Prenez des précautions lorsque vous êtes exposé aux lumières artificielles • Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, ne laissez pas la pièce dans laquelle vous vous trouvez dans l’obscurité et ne rapprochez pas trop l’écran de vos yeux. • L’exposition à la luminosité de l’écran lors du visionnage prolongé de vidéos ou de jeux peut entraîner des malaises. En cas de sensations d’inconfort, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil. Réduisez les risques de lésions musculaires dus aux mouvements répétitifs Lorsque vous effectuez des actions répétitives, comme taper sur les touches, dessiner des caractères sur un écran tactile ou jouer à des jeux, vous pouvez ressentir une sensation d’inconfort au niveau des mains, de la nuque, des épaules ou de toute autre partie du corps. Si vous utilisez votre appareil sur des périodes prolongées, tenez-le sans trop le serrer, appuyez doucement sur les touches et faites des pauses fréquentes. Si la sensation d’inconfort perdure, cessez d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. Préservez la durée de vie de la batterie et du chargeur • Ne laissez pas la batterie en charge pendant plus d’une semaine, car une surcharge risque de réduire sa durée de vie. • Lorsqu’elle n’est pas utilisée pendant une période prolongée, une batterie pleine se décharge progressivement et doit être rechargée avant utilisation. • Lorsque le chargeur n’est pas utilisé, ne le laissez pas branché à une prise de courant. • Utilisez la batterie pour votre appareil uniquement.Consignes de sécurité 132 N’utilisez que des batteries, chargeurs, accessoires et fournitures homologué(e)s par Samsung • Utiliser des batteries ou des chargeurs génériques peut réduire la durée de vie de votre appareil ou provoquer des dysfonctionnements. • Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la sécurité de l’utilisateur si celuici utilise des accessoires ou des éléments non homologués par Samsung. Ne mordez et ne portez pas à votre bouche l’appareil ou la batterie • Mordre ou porter l’appareil ou la batterie à votre bouche pourrait endommager votre appareil ou provoquer une explosion. • Assurez-vous que les enfants manipulent l’appareil de façon appropriée s’ils doivent l’utiliser. Pour parler dans l’appareil : • Tenez l’appareil droit, comme vous le feriez avec un téléphone traditionnel. • Parlez directement dans le microphone. • Évitez tout contact avec l'antenne interne de votre appareil. Toucher l'antenne peut réduire la qualité d'écoute ou provoquer une émission de radiofréquence plus élevée que nécessaire. Protégez votre ouïe lorsque vous utilisez un casque ou des écouteurs • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé peut endommager votre audition. • Une exposition excessive de votre oreille à un volume élevé lorsque vous êtes au volant peut détourner votre attention et provoquer un accident. • Diminuez toujours le volume avant de connecter des écouteurs à une source audio et réglez le volume minimum nécessaire vous permettant d'entendre votre conversation ou la musique. • Dans les environnements secs, les casques et écouteurs sont propices à la formation d’électricité statique. Évitez alors d’utiliser votre casque ou vos écouteurs et touchez un objet métallique pour vous décharger de toute électricité statique avant de brancher le casque/les écouteurs sur l’appareil. Restez prudent lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil en marchant ou en bougeant Restez toujours conscient de votre environnement afin d’éviter de vous blesser ou de blesser d’autres personnes.Consignes de sécurité 133 Ne placez pas votre appareil dans vos poches arrières ou à votre ceinture Vous pourriez vous blesser ou endommager votre appareil si vous tombiez. Ne démontez pas, ne modifiez pas ou ne réparez pas vous-même votre appareil • Toute modification ou tout changement effectué(e) sur votre appareil peut entraîner l’annulation de la garantie du fabricant. Pour tout besoin de service, confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung. • Ne démontez pas ou ne perforez pas la batterie, car ceci peut causer une explosion ou un incendie. Ne peignez jamais votre appareil et n’y apposez jamais d’autocollants La peinture et les autocollants risquent de bloquer les pièces mobiles de l’appareil et perturber son fonctionnement. Si vous êtes allergique à la peinture ou aux pièces métalliques de l’appareil, vous pouvez souffrir de démangeaisons, d’eczéma ou de toute autre réaction cutanée. Si ces symptômes apparaissent, cessez immédiatement d’utiliser l’appareil et consultez un médecin. Lors du nettoyage de votre appareil : • Essuyez votre appareil ou le chargeur avec un chiffon ou une gomme. • Nettoyez les bornes de la batterie avec un morceau de coton ou un chiffon. • N’utilisez pas de produits chimiques ou de détergents. N’utilisez pas l’appareil si son écran est fissuré ou cassé Le verre ou l’acrylique brisé risque de vous blesser à la main ou au visage. Confiez votre appareil à un service après-vente Samsung afin de le faire réparer. Utilisez votre appareil uniquement pour vous servir des fonctions auxquelles il est destiné Évitez de déranger votre entourage lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil dans un lieu public Ne laissez pas les enfants utiliser votre appareil Votre appareil n’est pas un jouet. Ne laissez pas les enfants jouer avec l’appareil, car ils pourraient se blesser ou blesser d’autre personnes, endommager l’appareil ou passer des appels susceptibles d’augmenter vos frais de communication.Consignes de sécurité 134 Installez l’appareil et ses accessoires avec précaution • Veillez à la bonne fixation de votre appareil mobile et de ses accessoires dans votre véhicule. • Évitez de placer votre appareil ou ses accessoires à proximité de la zone d’ouverture des airbags. Si l’équipement mobile n’est pas installé correctement, le déclenchement de l’airbag risque de provoquer des blessures graves. Toute réparation doit être réalisée par un technicien agréé Le recours aux services d’un technicien non agréé risque d’entraîner des dégâts sur l’appareil et d’annuler la garantie du fabricant. Manipulez les cartes SIM et les cartes mémoire avec soin • Ne retirez pas une carte lorsque l’appareil y enregistre ou y lit des informations, car vous risqueriez de perdre des données et/ou d’endommager la carte ou l’appareil lui-même. • Protégez les cartes contre les chocs violents, les décharges électrostatiques et les interférences émises par d’autres appareils. • Ne touchez pas les contacts dorés de la carte avec vos doigts ou avec des objets métalliques. Si la carte est sale, nettoyez-la avec un chiffon doux. Assurez l’accès aux services d’urgence Dans certaines zones ou dans certaines circonstances, il peut être impossible de joindre les numéros d’urgence avec votre appareil. Avant de vous rendre dans des régions isolées ou non couvertes, prévoyez un autre moyen pour contacter les services d’urgence. Protégez vos données importantes • Lorsque vous utilisez votre appareil, assurez-vous de sauvegarder vos données importantes. Samsung ne peut être tenu responsable de la perte de données. • Lors de la mise au rebut de votre appareil, sauvegardez l’ensemble de vos données, puis réinitialisez votre appareil afin d’éviter tout usage abusif de vos données personnelles. Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur Ne transmettez pas d’éléments protégés par des droits d’auteur que vous avez enregistrés sans la permission des détenteurs de ces droits. Dans le cas contraire, vous seriez en infraction avec la législation sur les droits d’auteur. Le fabricant n’est en aucun cas responsable de l’utilisation frauduleuse des éléments protégés par les droits d’auteur.Consignes de sécurité 135 Informations sur la certification DAS CET APPAREIL MOBILE EST CONFORME AUX DIRECTIVES INTERNATIONALES SUR L’EXPOSITION AUX RADIOFRÉQUENCES Cet appareil mobile est un émetteur-récepteur radio. Il a été conçu pour ne pas dépasser les limites d’exposition aux radiofréquences (RF) recommandées par les directives internationales et en vigueur en France. Ces directives, développées par un organisme scientifique indépendant (ICNIRP), tiennent compte d’une marge importante de sécurité permettant d’assurer la sécurité des personnes, quels que soient leur âge et leur état de santé. La valeur utilisée dans le cadre de ces directives est le DAS, ou débit d’absorption spécifique. Pour les appareils mobiles, la valeur DAS maximale autorisée est de 2,0 watts par kilogramme (W/Kg). Le DAS est mesuré en utilisant l’appareil mobile dans des conditions de fonctionnement standard et en balayant l’ensemble des fréquences. Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle, conformément aux directives ICNIRP : Valeurs DAS maximales pour ce modèle DAS au niveau de la tête 0,693W/Kg DAS au niveau du corps 0,644W/Kg Lorsque l’appareil est en fonctionnement, le niveau de DAS réel de cet appareil est généralement beaucoup plus faible que les valeurs indiquées ci-dessus. En effet, pour des raisons d’efficacité du système et pour réduire les interférences au niveau du réseau, la puissance utile de votre appareil mobile est automatiquement réduite lorsque la transmission du signal ne nécessite pas une pleine puissance. Les essais DAS ont été réalisés à une distance de séparation de 1,5 cm du corps. Pour répondre aux exigences en matière d’exposition aux radiofréquences, vous devez respecter une distance de 1,5 cm entre votre corps et le produit. Cependant, quelques dispositions simples peuvent contribuer à diminuer le niveau d’exposition aux radiofréquences. Ainsi, afin de réduire au maximum la puissance d’émission de votre appareil mobile, veillez à l’utiliser dans des conditions de réception optimales, l’indicateur de puissance du signal affiché à l’écran comportant alors un nombre suffisant de barres. En général, plus vous êtes proche d’un relais, plus la puissance utilisée par l’appareil mobile est faible. Des organismes tels que l’Organisation Mondiale de la Santé et la Food and Drug Administration recommandent aux personnes souhaitant réduire leur exposition aux radiofréquences d’utiliser un kit mains-libres permettant d’éloigner l’appareil mobile de leur tête et de leur corps durant son utilisation, ou de réduire le temps d’utilisation de l’appareil. Pour plus d’informations, visitez le site www.samsung.com/sar et recherchez votre appareil à l’aide du numéro de modèle.Consignes de sécurité 136 Les bons gestes de mise au rebut de ce produit (Déchets d’équipements électriques et électroniques) (Applicable dans les pays de l’Union Européenne et dans d’autres pays européens pratiquant le tri sélectif) Ce symbole sur le produit, ses accessoires ou sa documentation indique que ni le produit, ni ses accessoires électroniques usagés (chargeur, casque audio, câble de connexion, etc.) ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets ménagers. La mise au rebut incontrôlée des déchets présentant des risques environnementaux et de santé publique, veuillez séparer vos produits et accessoires usagés des autres déchets. Vous favoriserez ainsi le recyclage de la matière qui les compose dans le cadre d’un développement durable. Les particuliers sont invités à contacter le magasin leur ayant vendu le produit ou à se renseigner auprès des autorités locales pour connaître les procédures et les points de collecte de ces produits en vue de leur recyclage. Les entreprises et professionnels sont invités à contacter leurs fournisseurs et à consulter les conditions de leur contrat de vente. Ce produit et ses accessoires ne peuvent être jetés avec les autres déchets professionnels et commerciaux. Élimination de la batterie de ce produit (Applicable aux pays de l’Union européenne et aux autres pays européens dans lesquels des systèmes de collecte sélective sont mis en place) Le symbole sur la batterie, le manuel ou l’emballage indique que la batterie de ce produit ne doit pas être éliminée en fin de vie avec les autres déchets ménagers. L’indication éventuelle des symboles chimiques Hg, Cd ou Pb signifie que la batterie contient des quantités de mercure, de cadmium ou de plomb supérieures aux niveaux de référence stipulés dans la directive CE 2006/66. Si la batterie n’est pas correctement éliminée, ces substances peuvent porter préjudice à la santé humaine ou à l’environnement. Afin de protéger les ressources naturelles et d’encourager la réutilisation du matériel, veillez à séparer la batterie des autres types de déchets et à la recycler via votre système local de collecte gratuite des piles et batteries.Consignes de sécurité 137 Limitation de responsabilité Les contenus et les services accessibles par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil appartiennent dans leur intégralité à des tiers et sont protégés par les lois sur les droits d’auteur, les brevets, les marques et/ou d’autres lois sur la propriété intellectuelle. Ces contenus et services sont fournis uniquement pour votre usage personnel et non pour une utilisation commerciale. Vous ne pouvez pas utiliser ces contenus ou services d’une manière qui n’a pas été autorisée par le propriétaire des contenus ou le fournisseur des services. Sans que cela ne limite ce qui précède, sauf autorisation expresse du propriétaire de contenus ou du fournisseur de services concerné, il vous est interdit de modifier, de copier, de republier, de transférer, de diffuser, de transmettre, de traduire, de vendre, d’exploiter ou de distribuer, d’une quelconque manière et sur quelque support que ce soit, des contenus ou des services affichés par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil ou d’en créer des dérivés. LES CONTENUS ET SERVICES DE TIERS SONT FOURNIS " EN L’ÉTAT ". DANS TOUTE LA MESURE PERMISE PAR LA LOI LOCALE, SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS LES CONTENUS OU LES SERVICES AINSI FOURNIS, EXPRESSÉMENT OU IMPLICITEMENT, À QUELQUE FIN QUE CE SOIT. SAMSUNG EXCLUT EXPRESSÉMENT TOUTE GARANTIE IMPLICITE, Y COMPRIS, SANS QUE CELA SOIT LIMITATIF, LES GARANTIES DE QUALITÉ MARCHANDE ET D’ADÉQUATION À UN USAGE PARTICULIER. SAMSUNG NE GARANTIT PAS L’EXACTITUDE, LA VALIDITÉ, L’ACTUALITÉ, LA LÉGALITÉ OU L’EXHAUSTIVITÉ DES CONTENUS OU DES SERVICES FOURNIS PAR L’INTERMÉDIAIRE DE CET APPAREIL, ET SAMSUNG NE SERA RESPONSABLE EN AUCUN CAS, Y COMPRIS EN CAS DE NÉGLIGENCE, QUE CE SOIT AU TITRE DE LA RESPONSABILITÉ CONTRACTUELLE OU DÉLICTUELLE, DES DOMMAGES DIRECTS, INDIRECTS, ACCESSOIRES, SPÉCIAUX OU CONSÉCUTIFS, DES HONORAIRES D’AVOCAT, DES FRAIS OU DE TOUT AUTRE DOMMAGE DÉCOULANT DE L’UTILISATION DE TOUT CONTENU OU SERVICE PAR VOUS-MÊME OU PAR UN TIERS (OU DE TOUTE INFORMATION FIGURANT DANS LEDIT CONTENU OU SERVICE), MÊME SI SAMSUNG A ÉTÉ INFORMÉ DE L’ÉVENTUALITÉ DE TELS DOMMAGES. DANS LA MESURE OÙ CERTAINS PAYS N’AUTORISENT PAS L’EXCLUSION DES GARANTIES IMPLICITES OU LA LIMITATION DES DROITS LÉGAUX DU CONSOMMATEUR, IL EST POSSIBLE QUE CES EXCLUSIONS ET LIMITATIONS NE VOUS SOIENT PAS APPLICABLES. Consignes de sécurité 138 Les services tiers peuvent être suspendus ou interrompus à tout moment, et Samsung ne garantit pas qu’un contenu ou un service restera disponible pendant une certaine période. Les contenus et les services sont transmis par des tiers au moyen de réseaux et d’équipements de transmission qui échappent au contrôle de Samsung. Sans que cela ne limite le caractère général du présent avis, Samsung décline expressément toute responsabilité en cas d’interruption ou de suspension de tout contenu ou service fourni par l’intermédiaire de cet appareil. Samsung n’est pas responsable du service client lié aux contenus et aux services. Toute question ou demande de service portant sur les contenus ou les services doit être adressée directement aux fournisseurs de contenus et de services concernés.Le contenu de ce mode d'emploi peut ne pas correspondre fidèlement à votre téléphone en fonction du logiciel installé ou de votre opérateur. www.samsung.com French (MEA). 02/2012. Rev. 1.0 Pour installer Samsung Kies 1. Téléchargez la dernière version de Kies sur le site web de Samsung (www.samsung.com/kies) et installez le logiciel sur votre PC. 2. Branchez votre téléphone à votre PC à l’aide d’un câble USB. 3. Double-cliquez sur l’icône Samsung Kies sur l’ordinateur pour lancer l’application. Référez-vous à l’aide Kies pour plus d’informations. GT-S6102 user manualUsing this manual 2 www.sar-tick.com This product meets applicable national SAR limits of 2.0W/kg. The specific maximum SAR values can be found in the SAR information section of this manual. When carrying the product or using it while worn on your body, either use an approved accessory such as a holster or otherwise maintain a distance of 1.5 cm from the body to ensure compliance with RF exposure requirements. Note that the product may be transmitting even if you are not making a phone call. Using this manual Thank you for purchasing this Samsung mobile device. This device will provide you with high quality mobile communication and entertainment based on Samsung’s exceptional technology and high standards. This user manual has been specially designed to guide you through the functions and features of your device. Read me first ● Please read all safety precautions and this manual carefully before using your device to ensure safe and proper use. ● The descriptions in this manual are based on the default settings of your device. ● Images and screenshots used in this user manual may differ in appearance from the actual product.Using this manual 3 ● Content in this user manual may differ from the product, or from software provided by service providers or carriers, and is subject to change without prior notice. Refer to www.samsung.com for the latest version of the user manual. ● Available features and additional services may vary by device, software, or service provider. ● Formatting and delivery of this user manual is based on Google Android operating systems and may vary depending on the user’s operating system. ● Applications and their functions may vary by country, region, or hardware specifications. Samsung is not liable for performance issues caused by third-party applications. ● Samsung is not liable for performance issues or incompatibilities caused by edited registry settings or modified operating system software. Attempting to customise the operating system may cause your device or applications to work improperly. ● You may upgrade your mobile device’s software by accessing www.samsung.com. ● Software, sound sources, wallpapers, images, and other contents provided in this device are licenced for limited use between Samsung and their respective owners. Extracting and using these materials for commercial or other purposes is an infringement of copyright laws. Samsung is not liable for such copyright infringement by the user. ● Please keep this manual for future reference. Instructional icons Before you start, familiarise yourself with the icons you will see in this manual: Warning—situations that could cause injury to yourself or othersUsing this manual 4 Caution—situations that could cause damage to your device or other equipment Note—notes, usage tips, or additional information ► Refer to—pages with related information; for example: ► p. 12 (represents “see page 12”) → Followed by—the order of options or menus you must select to perform a step; for example: In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → About phone (represents Settings, followed by About phone) [ ] Square brackets—device keys; for example: [ ] (represents the Menu key) Copyright Copyright © 2012 Samsung Electronics This user manual is protected under international copyright laws. No part of this user manual may be reproduced, distributed, translated, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or storing in any information storage and retrieval system, without the prior written permission of Samsung Electronics.Using this manual 5 Trademarks ● SAMSUNG and the SAMSUNG logo are registered trademarks of Samsung Electronics. ● The Android logo, Google Search™, Google Maps™, Google Mail™, YouTube™, Android Market™, and Google Talk™ are trademarks of Google, Inc. ● and are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. CS Headphone and WOW HD technologies are incorporated under licence from SRS Labs, Inc. ● Bluetooth® is a registered trademark of the Bluetooth SIG, Inc. worldwide. ● Oracle and Java are registered trademarks of Oracle and/ or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. ● Wi-Fi®, Wi-Fi Protected Setup™, Wi-Fi CERTIFIED™, and the Wi-Fi logo are registered trademarks of the Wi-Fi Alliance. ● All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.Contents 6 Assembling ............................................................. 10 Unpack .................................................................................... 10 Install the SIM or USIM card and battery ........................ 10 Charge the battery ............................................................... 12 Insert a memory card (optional) ....................................... 15 Attach a hand strap (optional) .......................................... 17 Getting started ....................................................... 18 Turn your device on and off ............................................... 18 Get to know your device ..................................................... 19 Use the touch screen ........................................................... 23 Lock or unlock the touch screen and keys ..................... 24 Get to know the idle screen ............................................... 25 Access applications .............................................................. 27 Customise your device ........................................................ 29 Switch SIM or USIM cards ................................................... 34 Enter text ................................................................................ 35 Download applications from Android Market .............. 39 Download files from the web ............................................ 40 Synchronise data .................................................................. 40 Communication ..................................................... 42 Calling ..................................................................................... 42 Messaging .............................................................................. 46 Google Mail ............................................................................ 49 Email ........................................................................................ 51 Talk ........................................................................................... 53 Social Hub .............................................................................. 54 ContentsContents 7 Entertainment ........................................................ 55 Camera .................................................................................... 55 Gallery ..................................................................................... 62 Music ....................................................................................... 65 FM radio .................................................................................. 68 Personal information ............................................ 72 Contacts .................................................................................. 72 Calendar ................................................................................. 76 Memo ...................................................................................... 78 Voice recorder ....................................................................... 78 Web .......................................................................... 80 Internet ................................................................................... 80 Maps ........................................................................................ 83 Latitude ................................................................................... 85 Places ....................................................................................... 85 Navigation .............................................................................. 86 YouTube .................................................................................. 87 Samsung Apps ...................................................................... 88 Market ..................................................................................... 89 News & Weather .................................................................... 90 Connectivity ........................................................... 91 Bluetooth ................................................................................ 91 Wi-Fi ......................................................................................... 93 Mobile network sharing ..................................................... 95 GPS ........................................................................................... 97 PC connections ..................................................................... 98 VPN connections .................................................................. 99Contents 8 Tools ....................................................................... 102 Clock ...................................................................................... 102 Calculator ............................................................................. 103 Downloads ........................................................................... 103 Google Search ..................................................................... 104 My files .................................................................................. 104 Polaris Viewer ...................................................................... 105 SIM Toolkit ............................................................................ 106 Task manager ...................................................................... 106 Voice Search ......................................................................... 107 Settings .................................................................. 108 Access the Settings menu ................................................ 108 SIM card manager .............................................................. 108 Wireless and networks ...................................................... 108 Call settings .......................................................................... 110 Sound .................................................................................... 111 Display .................................................................................. 112 Location and security ........................................................ 112 Applications ......................................................................... 114 Accounts and sync .............................................................. 115 Privacy ................................................................................... 115 SD card and phone storage ............................................. 115 Locale and text .................................................................... 116 Voice input and output ..................................................... 118 Accessibility ......................................................................... 119 Date and time ...................................................................... 119 About phone ....................................................................... 119Contents 9 Troubleshooting .................................................. 120 Safety precautions ............................................... 126 Index ...................................................................... 138Assembling 10 Assembling Unpack Check your product box for the following items: ● Mobile device ● Battery ● Quick start guide Use only Samsung-approved software. Pirated or illegal software may cause damage or malfunctions that are not covered by your manufacturer's warranty. ● The items supplied with your device and available accessories may vary depending on your region or service provider. ● You can purchase additional accessories from your local Samsung dealer. ● The supplied accessories perform best for your device. ● Accessories other than the supplied ones may not be compatible with your device. Install the SIM or USIM card and battery When you subscribe to a cellular service, you will receive a Subscriber Identity Module (SIM) card, with subscription details, such as your personal identification number (PIN) and optional services. To use UMTS or HSDPA services, you can purchase a Universal Subscriber Identity Module (USIM) card. To install the SIM or USIM card and battery, 1 If the device is on, press and hold the Power key and select Power off→ OK to turn it off.Assembling 11 2 Remove the back cover. Be careful not to damage your fingernails when you remove the back cover. 3 Insert the SIM or USIM card with the gold-coloured contacts facing down. Your device has two SIM card slots to allow you to use two SIM or USIM cards, and switch between them. Use the left slot for your primary, or most frequently used, SIM or USIM card. Use the right slot for a secondary SIM or USIM card. SIM card 1 SIM card 2 The antenna is located in the upper area on the back of the device. Do not remove the protective tape covering the antenna, as this can damage the antenna. When you insert two USIM cards into your device, the card in the secondary slot will be used for a GPRS network.Assembling 12 4 Insert the battery. 5 Replace the back cover. Charge the battery Before using the device for the first time, you must charge the battery. You can charge the device with a travel adapter or by connecting the device to a PC with a USB cable. Use only Samsung-approved chargers and cables. Unauthorised chargers or cables can cause batteries to explode or damage your device.Assembling 13 ● When your battery is low, the device will emit a warning tone and display a low battery message. The battery icon will also be empty. If the battery level becomes too low, the device will automatically power off. Recharge your battery to continue using your device. ● If the battery is completely discharged, you cannot turn on the device, even with the travel adapter connected. Allow a depleted battery to charge for a few minutes before you try to turn on the device. › Charge with a travel adapter 1 Plug the small end of the travel adapter into the multifunction jack. Connecting the travel adapter improperly may cause serious damage to the device. Any damage caused by misuse is not covered by the warranty.Assembling 14 2 Plug the large end of the travel adapter into a power outlet. ● You can use the device while it is charging, but it may take longer to fully charge the battery. ● While the device is charging, the touch screen may not function due to an unstable power supply. If this happens, unplug the travel adapter from the device. ● While charging, the device may heat up. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. ● If your device is not charging properly, bring your device and the charger to a Samsung Service Centre. 3 When the battery is fully charged, first unplug the travel adapter from the device and then from the power outlet. Do not remove the battery before removing the travel adapter. Doing this may cause damage to the device. To save energy, unplug the travel adapter when not in use. The travel adapter does not have a power switch, so you must unplug the travel adapter from the outlet when not in use to avoid wasting power. The travel adapter should remain close to the socket when in use. › Charge with a USB cable Before charging, ensure that your PC is turned on. 1 Plug one end (micro-USB) of the USB cable into the multifunction jack.Assembling 15 2 Plug the other end of the USB cable into a USB port on a PC. Depending on the type of USB cable you are using, it may take some time before charging begins. 3 When the battery is fully charged, first unplug the USB cable from the device and then from the PC. Insert a memory card (optional) To store additional multimedia files, you must insert a memory card. Your device accepts microSD™ or microSDHC™ memory cards with maximum capacities of 32 GB (depending on memory card manufacturer and type). Samsung uses approved industry standards for memory cards, but some brands may not be fully compatible with your device. Using an incompatible memory card may damage your device or the memory card and can corrupt data stored on the card. ● Your device supports only the FAT file structure for memory cards. If you insert a card formatted with a different file structure, your device will ask you to reformat the memory card. ● Frequent writing and erasing of data will shorten the lifespan of memory cards. ● When you insert a memory card in your device, the file directory of the memory card will appear in the sdcard folder.Assembling 16 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Insert a memory card with the gold-coloured contacts facing down. 3 Replace the back cover. › Remove the memory card Before removing a memory card, first unmount it for safe removal. 1 In Idle mode, select → Settings→ SD card and phone storage→ Unmount SD card→ OK. 2 Remove the back cover. 3 Remove the memory card. 4 Replace the back cover. Do not remove a memory card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data or damage to the memory card or device.Assembling 17 › Format the memory card Formatting your memory card on a PC may cause incompatibilities with your device. Format the memory card only on the device. In Idle mode, select → Settings→ SD card and phone storage→ Unmount SD card→ OK→ Format SD card → Format SD card → Erase everything. Before formatting the memory card, remember to make backup copies of all important data stored on your device. The manufacturer’s warranty does not cover loss of data resulting from user actions. Attach a hand strap (optional) 1 Remove the back cover. 2 Slide a hand strap through the slot and hook it over the small projection. 3 Replace the back cover.Getting started 18 Getting started Turn your device on and off To turn on your device, press and hold the Power key. If you turn on your device for the first time, follow the on-screen instructions to set up your device. To turn off your device, press and hold the Power key and then select Power off→ OK. ● Follow all posted warnings and directions from authorised personnel in areas where the use of wireless devices is restricted, such as aeroplanes and hospitals. ● To use your device's non-network services only, switch to Flight mode. Press and hold the Power key and select Flight mode. Getting started 19 Get to know your device ›Device layout 1. Do not touch or cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects while using the GPS functions. Home key Earpiece Touch screen Back key Mouthpiece Volume key Menu key Multifunction jack Proximity sensor Camera lens Headset jack Power/Reset/Lock key Main antenna Back cover Speaker GPS antenna 1Getting started 20 › Keys Key Function Power/ Reset 1 / Lock Turn on the device (press and hold); Access the quick menus (press and hold); Reset the device (press and hold for 8-10 seconds and release); Lock the touch screen. Menu Open a list of options available on the current screen; In Idle mode, open the Google search application (press and hold); Open the search input window while using some applications (press and hold). Home Return to the idle screen; Open the list of recent applications (press and hold). Back Return to the previous screen. Volume Adjust the device’s volume. 1. If your device has fatal errors or hang-ups, or freezes, you may need to reset the device to regain functionality.Getting started 21 ›Indicator icons Icons shown on the display may vary depending on your region or service provider. Icon Definition No signal Signal strength / Activated SIM or USIM card type GPRS network connected EDGE network connected UMTS network connected HSDPA network connected Open Wi-Fi APs available Wi-Fi AP connected Bluetooth activated Bluetooth headset connected GPS activated Call in progress Call on hold Speakerphone activated Missed call Synchronised with the web 1. This icon may vary depending on your SIM card setting. 1Getting started 22 Icon Definition Uploading data Downloading data Call diverting activated Connected to PC USB tethering activated Wi-Fi tethering activated No SIM or USIM card New text or multimedia message New email message New Google Mail New voice mail message Alarm activated Event notification Roaming (outside of normal service area) Silent mode activated Vibration mode activated Flight mode activated Music playback in progress Music playback pausedGetting started 23 Icon Definition FM radio turned on in the background Error occurred or caution required Battery power level 10:00 Current time Use the touch screen Your device’s touch screen lets you easily select items or perform functions. Learn basic actions to use the touch screen. ● To avoid scratching the touch screen, do not use sharp tools. ● Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with other electrical devices. Electrostatic discharges can cause the touch screen to malfunction. ● Do not allow the touch screen to come into contact with water. The touch screen may malfunction in humid conditions or when exposed to water. ● For optimal use of the touch screen, remove the screen protection film before using your device. ● Your touch screen has a layer that detects small electrical charges emitted by the human body. For best performance, tap the touch screen with your fingertip. The touch screen will not react to touches of sharp tools, such as a stylus or pen. Getting started 24 Control your touch screen with the following actions: ● Tap: Touch once with your finger to select or launch a menu, option, or application. ● Tap and hold: Tap an item and hold it for more than 2 seconds to open a pop-up option list. ● Drag: Tap and drag your finger up, down, left, or right to move to items on lists. ● Drag and drop: Tap and hold your finger on an item, and then drag your finger to move the item. ● Double-tap: Tap twice quickly with your finger to zoom in or out while viewing photos or web pages. ● Your device turns off the touch screen when you do not use the device for a specified period. To turn on the screen, press the Power key or the Home key. ● You can also adjust the backlight time. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Display→ Screen timeout. Lock or unlock the touch screen and keys You can lock the touch screen and keys to prevent any unwanted device operations. To lock, press the Power key. To unlock, turn on the screen by pressing the Power key or the Home key and then flick the window with your finger. You can activate the screen lock feature to prevent others from using or accessing your personal data and information saved in your device. ► p. 31Getting started 25 Get to know the idle screen When the device is in Idle mode, you will see the idle screen. From the idle screen, you can view indicator icons, widgets, shortcuts to applications, and other items. The idle screen has multiple panels. Scroll left or right to a panel of the idle screen. › Add items to the idle screen You can customise the idle screen by adding shortcuts to applications or items in applications, widgets, or folders. To add items to the idle screen, 1 Press [ ] → Add or tap and hold the empty area on the idle screen. 2 Select the item category → an item: ● Widgets: Add widgets. Widgets are small applications that provide convenient functions and information on your idle screen. ● Shortcuts: Add shortcuts to items, such as applications, bookmarks, and contacts. ● Folders: Create a new folder or add folders for your contacts. ● Wallpapers: Set a background image. ›Move items on the idle screen 1 Tap and hold an item to move. 2 Drag the item to the location you want.Getting started 26 › Remove items from the idle screen 1 Tap and hold an item to remove. The trash bin appears at the bottom of the idle screen. 2 Drag the item to the trash bin. 3 When the item turns red, release the item. ›Use the notifications panel In Idle mode or while using an application, tap the indicator icons area and drag your finger down to open the notifications panel. You can activate or deactivate wireless connection features and access a list of notifications, such as messages, calls, events or processing status. Also, you can switch SIM or USIM cards. To hide the panel, drag the bottom of the list up. From the notifications panel, you can use the following options: ● Wi-Fi: Activate or deactivate the Wi-Fi feature. ► p. 94 ● B/T: Activate or deactivate the Bluetooth wireless connection feature. ► p. 91 ● GPS: Activate or deactivate the GPS feature. ● Sound/Vibration: Activate or deactivate Vibration mode. ● Auto rotation: Activate or deactivate the auto rotation. Available options may vary depending on your region or service provider.Getting started 27 › Add or remove panels to the idle screen You can add or remove panels of the idle screen to organise widgets according to your preferences and needs. 1 In Idle mode, press [ ] → Edit. 2 Add or remove panels by using the following features: ● To remove a panel, tap and hold the thumbnail of a panel and drag it to the trash bin at the bottom of the screen. ● To add a new panel, select . ● To change the order of the panels, tap and hold the thumbnail of a panel and drag it to the location you want. 3 When you are finished, press [ ]. Access applications To access your device’s applications, 1 In Idle mode, select to access the application list. 2 Scroll left or right to another screen. You can also select a dot at the top of the screen to move directly to the corresponding screen. 3 Select an application. ● When you use applications provided by Google, you must have a Google account. If you do not have a Google account, sign up for a Google account. ● You can add a shortcut to an application by tapping and holding the application icon from the application list. You can move the icon to the location you want on the idle screen.Getting started 28 4 Press [ ] to return to the previous screen; Press the Home key to return to the idle screen. If you rotate the device while using some features, the interface will automatically rotate as well. To prevent the interface from rotating, open the notifications panel and select Auto rotation. › Organise applications You can reorganise the applications in the application list by changing their order or grouping them into categories to suit your preferences and needs. 1 In the application list, press [ ] → Edit. 2 Tap and hold an application. 3 Drag the application icon to the location you want. You can move an application icon to another screen. You can also move most-used applications under . 4 Press [ ] → Save. › Access recent applications 1 Press and hold the Home key to view the applications you have accessed recently. 2 Select an application to access.Getting started 29 ›Use the task manager Your device is a multitasking device. It can run more than one application at the same time. However, multitasking may cause hang-ups, freezing, memory problems, or additional power consumption. To avoid these problems, end unnecessary programs using the task manager. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Task manager→ Active applications. The list of all the applications currently running on your device appears. 2 To close an application, select End. To close all active applications, select End all. Customise your device Get more from your device by customising it to match your preferences. › Set the current time and date 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Date and time. 2 Set the time and date and change other options. › Turn on or off the touch tone In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Sound→ Audible selection.Getting started 30 › Adjust the volume of the ringtones Press the Volume key up or down to adjust the ringtone volume. › Switch to Silent mode To mute or unmute your device, do one of the following: ● Open the notifications panel from the top of the screen and select Sound. ● Press and hold the Power key and select Silent mode. You can set the device to alert you to various events in Silent mode. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Sound→ Vibrate→ Always or Only in Silent mode. When you switch to Silent mode, will appear in place of . › Change your ringtone 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Sound→ Ringtone. 2 Select a SIM or USIM card → Phone ringtone. 3 Select a ringtone from the list and select OK. › Activate animation for switching windows In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Display→ Animation → Some animations or All animations. › Select a wallpaper for the idle screen 1 In Idle mode, press [ ] → Wallpaper → an option. 2 Select an image.Getting started 31 3 Select Save or Set wallpaper → a SIM or USIM card. Samsung is not responsible for any use of default images or wallpapers provided on your device. › Adjust the brightness of the display 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Display→ Brightness. 2 Drag the slider to adjust the level of brightness. 3 Select OK. The brightness level of the display will affect how quickly the device consumes battery power. › Set a screen lock You can lock the touch screen by activating the screen lock feature. Your device will require the unlock code each time you turn on the device or unlock the touch screen. ● If you forget your unlock code, bring your device to a Samsung Service Centre to reset it. ● Samsung is not responsible for any loss of security codes or private information or other damages caused by illegal software. Set an unlock pattern 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Location and security→ Set screen lock → Pattern. 2 See the on-screen instructions and example patterns and select Next.Getting started 32 3 Draw a pattern by dragging your finger to connect at least 4 dots and select Continue. 4 Draw the pattern again and select Confirm. Set an unlock PIN code 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Location and security→ Set screen lock → PIN. 2 Enter a new PIN (numeric) and select Continue. 3 Enter the PIN again and select OK. Set an unlock password 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Location and security→ Set screen lock → Password. 2 Enter a new password (alphanumeric) and select Continue. 3 Enter the password again and select OK. › Lock your SIM or USIM card You can lock your device by activating the PIN supplied with your SIM or USIM card. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Location and security→ Set up SIM card lock. 2 Select a SIM or USIM card → Lock SIM card. 3 Enter your PIN and select OK.Getting started 33 Once the PIN lock is enabled, you must enter the PIN each time you turn on the device. ● If you enter an incorrect PIN too many times, your SIM or USIM card will be blocked. You must enter a PIN unlock key (PUK) to unblock the SIM or USIM card. ● If you block your SIM or USIM card by entering an incorrect PUK, bring the card to your service provider to unblock it. › Activate the Find my mobile feature When someone inserts a new SIM or USIM card in your device, the Find my mobile feature will automatically send the contact number to specified recipients to help you locate and recover your device. To use this feature, you need a Samsung account for controlling the device from the web remotely. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Location and security → SIM change alert. 2 Read the terms and conditions, select the check box next to I accept all the terms above, and select Accept. 3 Select Sign in, enter your email address and password for your Samsung account, and select Sign in. To create a Samsung account, select Sign up. 4 Select Alert message recipients. 5 Enter the password for your Samsung account again and select OK. 6 Enter a phone number including a country code (with +). 7 Enter the text message to be sent to the recipients. 8 Select Done.Getting started 34 Switch SIM or USIM cards Once you insert two SIM or USIM cards, you can switch back and forth between each card. To switch between SIM or USIM cards, open the notifications panel and select a SIM card icon, except for when the device is sending or receiving messages or data from the network. Your device supports dual standby with two different networks. You cannot make or answer calls on both networks at the same time. › Activate the SIM or USIM card 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → SIM card manager. 2 Select a SIM or USIM card, and then select the check box next to Activate. › Change the names and icons of the SIM or USIM cards 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → SIM card manager. 2 Select a SIM or USIM card, and then select the name of the SIM or USIM card. 3 Select Select icon→ an icon. 4 Select Register name, change the name for the SIM or USIM card, and select OK.Getting started 35 › Change the SIM or USIM card settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → SIM card manager. 2 Change the following options: Option Function Receive incoming calls Set whether or not to allow incoming calls from the other SIM or USIM card while using data services using a SIM or USIM card. You can receive calls only when the other SIM or USIM card which is not for data service is connected to a GPRS network. Data service network Select a SIM or USIM card for data services. Enter text You can enter text by selecting characters on the virtual keypad or by inputting handwriting on the screen. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. ► p. 116 › Change the keyboard type You can change the keyboard type. Tap and hold the text input field and select Input method→ a keyboard type (Samsung keypad or Swype).Getting started 36 › Enter text using the Samsung keypad 1 Select → Portrait keypad types and select a text input method. You can select one of key input methods (QWERTY or traditional keypad) or handwriting input methods. 2 Enter text by selecting alphanumeric keys or writing on the screen. You can also use the following keys: 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 Number Function 1 Change case. 2 Switch between Symbol/Number mode and ABC mode. 3 Enter text by voice; This icon is available only when you activate the voice input feature for the Samsung keypad. This feature may be unavailable depending on the selected input language. 4 Clear your input. 5 Start a new line. 6 Access the keypad settings; Change the keyboard type (tap and hold).Getting started 37 Number Function 7 Insert a space. Functions of this key may vary depending on your service provider. › Enter text using the Swype keyboard 1 Select the first character of a word and drag your finger to the second character without releasing the finger from the screen. 2 Continue until you have finished the word. 3 Release the finger on the last character. 4 When the word displays correctly, select to insert a space. If the correct word does not display, select an alternative word from the list that appears. 5 Repeat steps 1-4 to complete your text. ● You can also tap the keys to enter text. ● You can tap and hold a key to enter characters on the upper half of the key. When you tap and hold a key until the character list appears, you can enter special characters and symbols.Getting started 38 You can also use the following keys: 1 4 3 5 2 6 7 Number Function 1 Change case. 2 Enter the recommended word or add a new word to the dictionary; Access the Swype tip screen (tap and hold). 3 Switch between Symbol/Number mode and ABC/Number mode. 4 Insert a space. 5 Clear your input. 6 Start a new line. 7 Enter text by voice. This feature may be unavailable depending on the selected input language. › Copy and paste text While you are entering text, you can use the copy and paste feature to use text in other applications. 1 Place the cursor on the text you want to copy. 2 Select . 3 Select Select word or Select all.Getting started 39 4 Drag or to select the text you want. 5 Select Copy to copy, or Cut to cut the text onto the clipboard. 6 In another application, place the cursor where you want to paste the text. 7 Select → Paste to insert the text from the clipboard into the text field. Download applications from Android Market Based on the Android platform, your device’s functionality can be extended by installing additional applications. Android Market provides you an easy and quick way to shop for games and mobile applications. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● Your device will save user files from downloaded applications to the internal memory. ›Install an application 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Market. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select Accept. 3 Search for a file or application and download it.Getting started 40 ›Uninstall an application 1 From the Android Market home screen, press [ ] → My Apps. 2 Select the item you want to delete. 3 Select Uninstall→ OK. Download files from the web Files you download from the web can include viruses that will damage your device. To lessen your risk, only download files from sources you trust. Some media files include Digital Rights Management to protect copyrights. This protection may prevent you from downloading, copying, modifying, or transferring some files. To download files from the web, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Search for a file or application and download it. To install applications downloaded from websites other than Android Market, you must select Settings→ Applications → Unknown sources→ OK. Synchronise data You can synchronise data with various web servers and back up or restore your data. Once the synchronisation is completed, your device stays connected to the web. If any change is made on the web, the updated information will appear on your device and will automatically begin synchronisation, and vice versa.Getting started 41 This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Set up a server account 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Accounts and sync. 2 Select Add account→ an account type. 3 Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the account setup. › Activate automatic sync 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Accounts and sync. 2 Select Auto sync. 3 Select an account. 4 Select the applications you want to synchronise. To exclude applications from automatic synchronisation, clear the check boxes next to the applications you want. › Synchronise data manually 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Accounts and sync. 2 Select an account. 3 Press [ ] → Sync now. Your device will start synchronising the data you set for synchronisation.Communication 42 Communication Calling Learn to use calling functions, such as making and answering calls, using options available during a call or customising and using call-related features. ›Make or answer a call You can use the buttons or the touch screen when you make, accept, end or reject calls. ● When you turn on the proximity sensor, your device automatically turns off and locks the touch screen to prevent accidental inputs when you hold the device near your face. ► p. 111 ● Static electricity discharged from your body or clothing may interfere with the proximity sensor during a call. Make a call 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Keypad, and enter an area code and a phone number. 2 Select to make a call. 3 To end the call, select End call. ● Use the phonebook to save numbers you dial frequently. ► p. 72 ● To quickly access the call log to redial the numbers you dialled recently, select → Logs.Communication 43 Answer a call 1 When a call comes in, drag in any direction until it reaches the border of the circle. When the device is ringing, press the Volume key to mute the ringtone. 2 To end the call, select End call. Reject a call When a call comes in, drag in any direction until it reaches the border of the circle. Call an international number 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Keypad, and tap and hold 0 to insert the + character. 2 Enter the complete number you want to dial (country code, area code and phone number), and then select to dial the number. ›Use a headset By plugging a headset into the device, you can answer and control calls hands-free: ● To answer a call, press the headset button. ● To reject a call, press and hold the headset button. ● To place a call on hold or retrieve a held call during a call, press and hold the headset button. ● To end a call, press the headset button.Communication 44 ›Use options during a call You can use the following options while a call is in progress: ● To adjust the voice volume, press the Volume key up or down. ● To place a call on hold, select . To retrieve a held call, select . ● To dial a second call, select Add call and then dial a new number. ● To answer a second call, drag in any direction until it reaches the border of the circle when a call waiting tone sounds. The device asks whether to end or hold the first call. You must subscribe to the call waiting service to use this feature. ● To open the dialling screen, select Dialpad. ● To activate the speakerphone feature, select Speaker. In noisy environments, you may have difficulty hearing some calls while using the speakerphone feature. For better audio performance, use the normal phone mode. ● To turn off the microphone so that the other party cannot hear you, select Mute. ● To listen and talk to the other party via a Bluetooth headset, select Bluetooth. ● To switch between the two calls, select Swap. ● To make a multiparty call (conference call), make or answer a second call and select Merge when connected to the second party. Repeat to add more parties. You must subscribe to the multiparty call service to use this feature.Communication 45 › View and dial missed calls Your device will display calls you have missed on the display. To dial the number of a missed call, open the notifications panel and select the missed call. ›Use additional features You can use various other call-related features, such as Fixed Dialling Number (FDN) mode or call diverting. Use Fixed Dialling Number (FDN) mode In FDN mode, your device will restrict outgoing calls, except for the numbers stored in the FDN list. To activate FDN mode, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Call settings → Fixed Dialling Numbers → Enable FDN. 2 Enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card and select OK. 3 Select FDN list and add contacts to be used in FDN mode. Set call forwarding Call diverting is a network feature to send incoming calls to another number that you specify. You can set this feature separately for several conditions when you are not able to answer calls, such as when you are already on the phone or when you are outside of the service area. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Call settings → Call forwarding →a SIM or USIM card. 2 Select a condition. 3 Enter a number to which calls will be forwarded and select Enable. Your setting will be sent to the network.Communication 46 Set call waiting Call waiting is a network feature to alert you of an incoming call while you are on a previous call. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Call settings → Additional settings →a SIM or USIM card→ Call waiting. Your setting will be sent to the network. › View call logs You can view logs of your calls filtered by their types. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Logs. 2 Press [ ] → View by→ a SIM or USIM card → an option to sort the call logs. From the call logs, you can make a call or send a message directly to a contact by quickly flicking the contact to the left or right. 3 Select a log to view its details. From the detail view, you can dial the number, send a message to the number or add the number to the phonebook. Messaging Learn to create and send text (SMS) or multimedia (MMS) messages, and view or manage messages you have sent or received. You may incur additional charges for sending or receiving messages while outside your home service area. For details, contact your service provider.Communication 47 › Send a text message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Select New message. 3 Add recipients of your message. ● Enter phone numbers manually and separate them by inserting a semicolon or comma. ● Select phone numbers from the lists by selecting options under the recipient field. 4 Select Enter message here and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → Insert smiley. 5 Select Send to send the message. › Send a multimedia message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Select New message. 3 Add recipients of your message. ● Enter phone numbers or email addresses manually and separate them by inserting a semicolon or a comma. ● Select phone numbers or email addresses from the lists by selecting options under the recipient field. When you enter an email address, the device will convert the message as a multimedia message. 4 Press [ ] → Add subject and enter a subject for the message. 5 Select Enter message here and enter your message text. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → Insert smiley.Communication 48 6 Select and add an item. You can select a file from the file list or create a new photo, video, or sound. 7 Select Send to send the message. › View a text or multimedia message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . Your messages are grouped into message threads by contact, like a messenger. 2 Select a contact. 3 For a multimedia message, select a message to view the details. › Listen to voice mail messages If you have set missed calls to be diverted to the voice mail server, callers may leave voice messages when you do not answer incoming calls. To access your voice mail inbox and listen to voice mail messages, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Keypad and then tap and hold 1. 2 Follow the instructions from the voice mail server. You must save the voice mail server number before accessing the server. Your service provider can give you the number.Communication 49 Google Mail You can retrieve new email messages from Google Mail™ to your Inbox. When you access this application, the Inbox screen appears. The total number of unread messages displays in the title bar and unread messages display in bold. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● This Google Mail menu may be labelled differently depending on your service provider. › Send an email message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Mail. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select OK. 3 Press [ ] → Compose. 4 Enter a name or address in the recipient field. 5 Enter a subject and message. 6 To attach an image file, press [ ] → Attach→ a file. 7 Select to send the message. › View email messages 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Mail. 2 Select an email message.Communication 50 From the message view, use the following options: ● To reply to the message, select . ● To reply to the message including all recipients, select → Reply all. ● To forward the message to other people, select → Forward. ● To add a star to the message, select . ● To view an attachment, select Preview. To save it to your memory card, select Download. ● To archive the message, select Archive. ● To delete the message, select Delete. ● To move to the next or previous message, select or . › Organise email by labels You can organise your email by labelling your messages. You can sort messages by label filter. Add a label to a message 1 From the Inbox screen, tap and hold a message. 2 Select Change labels. 3 Select a label to add and select OK. Filter messages 1 From the Inbox screen, press [ ] → Go to labels. 2 Select the label of the messages you want to view.Communication 51 Email Learn to send or view email messages via your personal or company email account. › Set up an email account 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email. 2 Enter your email address and password. 3 Select Next (for general email accounts, such as Google Mail and Yahoo) or Manual setup (for other company email accounts). 4 Follow the on-screen instructions. When you are finished setting up the email account, the email messages are downloaded to your device. If you have created more than two accounts, you can switch between email accounts; Select an account name at the top right of the screen and select one you want to retrieve messages from. › Send an email message 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email → an email account. 2 Press [ ] → Compose. 3 Add recipients of your message. ● Enter email addresses manually and separate them by inserting a semicolon or a comma. ● Select email addresses from the lists by selecting options under the recipient field.Communication 52 4 Select the Cc/Bcc field and add more recipients. 5 Select the subject field and enter a subject. 6 Select the text input field and enter your email text. 7 Select Attach and attach a file. You can select a file from the file list or create a new photo, video, or sound. You cannot attach Digital Rights Management (DRM)- protected files. 8 Select Send to send the message. If you are offline or outside your service area, the message will be held in the outbox until you are online and in your service area. › View an email message When you open an email account, you can view previously retrieved emails offline or connect to the email server to view new messages. After retrieving email messages, you can view them offline. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Email→ an email account. 2 Press [ ] → Refresh to update the message list. 3 Select an email message. From the message view, use the following options: ● To reply to the message, press [ ] → Reply. ● To forward the message to other people, press [ ] → Forward.Communication 53 ● To delete the message, press [ ] → Delete. ● To move the message to another folder, press [ ] → Move to folder. ● To load images from the message, press [ ] → Show pictures. ● To change the text size, press [ ] → More→ Text size. ● To add the email address to the phonebook, press [ ] → More→ Add to Contacts. ● To save the message as an event, press [ ] → More→ Save in Calendar. ● To view an attachment, select the attachment item. To save it to your memory card, select . Talk Learn to chat with friends and family via Google Talk™. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Add friends to your friend list 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Talk. The friend list shows all of your Google Talk contacts at a glance. 2 Press [ ] → Add friend. 3 Enter an email address of the friend and select Send invitation. When your friend accepts the invitation, the friend is added to your friend list.Communication 54 › Start a chat 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Talk. 2 Select a friend from the friend list. The chat screen opens. 3 Enter your message and select Send. To insert emoticons, press [ ] → More→ Insert smiley. 4 To switch between active chats, press [ ] → Switch chats. 5 To end the chat, press [ ] → End chat. Social Hub Learn to access Social Hub™, the integrated communication application for Social Network Service (SNS), email, messages, instant messages, contacts or calendar information. Visit socialhub.samsungapps.com for more details. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Social Hub. 2 Check and use contents delivered from Social Hub.Entertainment 55 Entertainment Camera Learn how to capture and view photos and videos. You can take photos at resolutions up to 2048 x 1536 pixels (3.2 megapixels) and videos at resolutions up to 320 x 240 pixels. To use this feature, you must first insert a memory card. ● The camera interface appears only in the landscape orientation. ● Tap the screen to hide or display icons in the viewfinder. ● The camera automatically turns off when you do not use it for a specified period. ● The memory capacity may differ depending on the shooting scene or shooting conditions.Entertainment 56 › Capture a photo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera to turn on the camera. 2 Aim the lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments. 2 3 4 1 6 5 7 Number Function 1 Change the shooting mode. 2 Change the scene mode. 3 Adjust the brightness. 4 Change the camera settings. 5 Switch to the camcorder. 6 Capture a photo. 7 View the photo you captured last. 3 Press the Volume key to zoom in or out. The zoom function may be unavailable when shooting in the highest resolution. 4 Select to take a photo. The photo is saved automatically.Entertainment 57 After taking photos, select to view the taken photos. ● To view more photos, scroll left or right. ● To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. To zoom out, move your fingers closer together. You can also select or , or double-tap the screen. ● To send a photo to others, select Share. ● To set a photo as wallpaper or a caller ID image for a contact, select Set as. ● To delete a photo, select Delete. › Capture a photo by using preset options for various scenes Your camera provides you with predefined settings for various scenes. You can simply select the proper mode for your shooting conditions and subjects. For example, when you take photos at night, select the night mode that uses an extended exposure. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera to turn on the camera. 2 Select → a scene. 3 Make any necessary adjustments. 4 Select to take a photo.Entertainment 58 › Capture a photo in Smile shot mode Your camera can recognise people’s faces and help you take photos of their smiling faces. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera to turn on the camera. 2 Select → Smile shot. 3 Make any necessary adjustments. 4 Aim the camera lens at your subject and select . Your device recognises people in an image and detects their smiles. When the subject smiles, the device automatically takes a photo. › Capture a panoramic photo You can take wide panoramic photos using Panorama shooting mode. This mode is convenient for photographing landscapes. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera to turn on the camera. 2 Select → Panorama. 3 Make any necessary adjustments. 4 Select to take the first photo. 5 Slowly move the device in any direction and align the green frame with the viewfinder. When you have aligned the green frame and viewfinder, the camera will automatically take the next photo. 6 Repeat step 5 to complete the panoramic photo.Entertainment 59 › Customise camera settings Before taking a photo, select → to access the following options: Option Function Timer Select the length of the delay before the camera takes a photo. Resolution Change the resolution option. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to lighting conditions. Effects Apply a special effect. Metering Select a type of exposure metre. Image quality Set the quality level for your photos. Before taking a photo, select → to access the following settings: Setting Function Guidelines Display the guidelines on the preview screen. Review Set the camera to display the taken image.Entertainment 60 Setting Function GPS Set the camera to include location information for your photos. ● To improve GPS signals, avoid shooting in locations where the signal may be obstructed, such as between buildings or in lowlying areas, or in poor weather conditions. ● Your location may appear on your photos when you upload them to the web. To avoid this, deactivate the GPS tag setting. Reset Reset menus and shooting options. › Record a video 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Camera to turn on the camera. 2 Select to switch to the camcorder. 3 Aim the lens at the subject and make any necessary adjustments. 1 2 3 4 6 5 Entertainment 61 Number Function 1 Change the recording mode (for attaching to a multimedia message or for saving normally). 2 Adjust the brightness. 3 Change the camcorder settings. 4 Switch to the camera. 5 Record a video. 6 View the video you recorded last. 4 Press the Volume key to zoom in or out. The zoom function may be unavailable when recording in the highest resolution. 5 Select to start recording. 6 Select to stop recording. The video is saved automatically. The camcorder may not be able to properly record videos to a memory card with a slow transfer speed. After recording videos, select to view the recorded videos. ● To view more videos, scroll left or right. ● To send a video to others, select Share. ● To play a video, select Play. ● To delete a video, select Delete.Entertainment 62 › Customise camcorder settings Before recording a video, select → to access the following options: Option Function Timer Select the length of the delay before the camera starts recording a video. Resolution Change the resolution option. White balance Adjust the colour balance according to lighting conditions. Effects Apply a special effect. Video quality Set the quality level for your videos. Before recording a video, select → to access the following settings: Setting Function Guidelines Display the guidelines on the preview screen. Review Set the camera to display the recorded video. Reset Reset menus and recording options. Gallery Learn to view photos and play videos saved in your memory card. Entertainment 63 › Supported file formats Type Format Image Extension: bmp, gif, jpg, png, wbmp Video ● Extension: 3gp, mp4, mkv ● Codec: H.263, H.264, mpeg4 ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the software of the device. ● If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. ● Playback quality may vary by content type. ● Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. › View a photo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Gallery. 2 Select a folder. 3 To change the view mode, select or at the top right of the screen. 4 Select a photo (with no icon) to view. While viewing a photo, use the following options: ● To view more photos, scroll left or right. ● To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. To zoom out, move your fingers closer together. You can also select or , or double-tap the screen.Entertainment 64 ● To start a slideshow in the selected folder, select Slideshow. Tap the screen to stop the slideshow. ● To send a photo to others, select Menu→ Share. ● To delete a photo, select Menu→ Delete. ● To use additional features with a photo, select Menu→ More and use the following options: - Details: View photo details. - Set as: Set a photo as wallpaper or a caller ID image for a contact. - Crop: Crop an image from a photo. - Rotate left: Rotate a photo anti-clockwise. - Rotate right: Rotate a photo clockwise. › Play a video 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Gallery. 2 Select a video (with the icon) to play. 3 Rotate the device to landscape view. 4 Control playback with the following keys: 2 5 1 4 3 Number Function 1 Pause playback; Select to resume playback. 2 Scan backward in a file.Entertainment 65 Number Function 3 Move to a point of the file by dragging or tapping the bar. 4 Scan forward in a file. 5 Trim a segment of a video. Music Learn to listen to your favourite music while on the go with the music player. The music player supports the following file formats: mp3, m4a, 3gp, mp4, ogg (Codec: mp3, vorbis (ogg), aac, aac+, eaac+, amr-nb/wb, wav, midi). To use this feature, you must first insert a memory card. ● Some file formats are not supported depending on the software of the device. ● If the file size exceeds the available memory, an error can occur when you open files. ● Playback quality may vary by content type. ● Some files may not play properly depending on how they are encoded. › Add music files to your memory card Start by transferring files to your memory card: ● Download from the wireless web. ► p. 80 ● Download from a PC with Samsung Kies. ► p. 98 ● Receive via Bluetooth. ► p. 93 ● Copy to your memory card. ► p. 98Entertainment 66 › Play music After transferring music files to your memory card, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Select a music category → a music file. 3 Control playback with the following keys: 4 3 1 2 5 6 7 8 Number Function 1 Activate the 5.1 channel surround sound system when a headset is connected. 2 Move to a point of the file by dragging or tapping the bar. 3 Restart playback; Skip backward (doubletap); Scan backward in a file (tap and hold). 4 Pause playback; Select to resume playback. 5 Change the repeat mode (off, repeating one file, or repeating all files). 6 Activate Shuffle mode.Entertainment 67 Number Function 7 Open the playlist. 8 Skip forward; Scan forward in a file (tap and hold). ● You can control the music player with a headset. In Idle mode, press and hold the headset button to launch the music player. Press the headset button to start or pause playback. ● SRS CS Headphone™ delivers a 5.1 surround sound experience over standard headphones or earbuds when listening to multichannel content, such as DVD movies. ● WOW HD™ significantly improves the playback quality of audio, delivering a dynamic 3D entertainment experience with deep, rich bass and high frequency clarity for crisp detail. ›Use the party shuffle feature When you turn on the party shuffle feature, your device selects and plays music files randomly. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Press [ ] → Party shuffle. 3 To turn off the party shuffle feature, press [ ] → Party shuffle off.Entertainment 68 › Customise music player settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Music. 2 Select a category → a music file. 3 Press [ ] → Settings. 4 Adjust the following settings to customise your music player: Option Function 5.1 channel Set whether or not to activate the virtual 5.1 channel surround sound system when a headset is connected. Equaliser Select a default equaliser type. FM radio Learn to listen to music and news on the FM radio. To listen to the FM radio, you must connect a headset, which serves as the radio antenna. › Listen to the FM radio 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM radio. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically. The first time you turn on the FM radio, it will start automatic tuning.Entertainment 69 3 Control the FM radio with the following keys: 3 4 5 1 3 2 Number Function 1 Turn the FM radio off or on. 2 Fine-tune the frequency. 3 Search for an available radio station. 4 Adjust the volume. 5 Add the current radio station to the favourites list. › Save a radio station automatically 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM radio. 3 Press [ ] → Scan→ a scanning option. The FM radio scans and saves available stations automatically.Entertainment 70 › Add a radio station to the favourites list 1 Plug a headset into the device. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM radio. 3 Scroll to the radio station you want. 4 Select to add the radio station to the favourites list. You can add a name for a radio station or remove a radio station; Tap and hold a radio station on the favourites list and select Remove or Rename. › Customise FM radio settings 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select FM radio. 2 Press [ ] → Settings. 3 Adjust the following settings to customise your FM radio: Option Function Region Select your region. Background playing Set whether or not to run the FM radio in the background while using other applications. If this feature is on, you can control the FM radio from the notifications panel.Entertainment 71 Option Function Show station ID Set whether or not to show the station ID on the FM radio screen; Station IDs are available only from radio stations that provide this information. Alternative frequency Set whether or not the FM radio attempts to retune a radio station when the signal is weak. FM radio auto off Set the FM radio to automatically turn off after a specified length of time.Personal information 72 Personal information Contacts Learn to create and manage a list of your personal or business contacts. You can save names, mobile phone numbers, home phone numbers, email addresses, birthdays and more for your contacts. › Create a contact 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Select → a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 3 Enter contact information. 4 Select Save to add the contact to memory. You can also create a contact from the dialling screen. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Keypad. 2 Enter a phone number. 3 Select Add to Contacts→ Create contact. 4 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 5 Enter contact information. 6 Select Save to add the contact to memory.Personal information 73 › Find a contact 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Scroll up or down on the contact list. You can also drag your finger along the index on the right side to quickly scroll through the list. 3 Select a contact’s name. Once you find a contact, you can use the following options: ● To call the contact, select a phone number. ● To send a message, select Message. ● To send an email message, select an email address. ● To edit the contact information, press [ ] → Edit. ● To set the contact as your favourites, select . › Set a speed dial number 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → More→ Speed dial setting. 3 Select a location number → a contact. 4 Select a phone number (if necessary). You can quickly dial this number by tapping and holding the location number from the dialling screen. › Create your namecard 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → My profile.Personal information 74 3 Enter your own personal details. 4 Select Save. You can send your namecard by attaching it to a message or email or transferring it via the Bluetooth wireless feature. › Retrieve contacts from your community accounts You can view the list of community website accounts and select an account to add a contact from the website to your phone contacts. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → View SNS friends. 3 Select an account. 4 Select contacts and select Add. You can add comments to messages uploaded by your contacts and view their shared photos. In Idle mode, open the application list and a contact → Activities or Media. › Create a group of contacts By creating groups of contacts, you can manage multiple contacts and send messages or email to an entire group. Start by creating a group. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Groups. 2 Press [ ] → Create. 3 Enter a name and select a ringtone for the group. 4 Select Save.Personal information 75 › Copy contacts To copy contacts from the SIM or USIM card to your device, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Import from SIM card. 3 Select a SIM or USIM card. 4 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 5 Select contacts to copy and select Import. To copy contacts from your device to the SIM or USIM card, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Export to SIM card. 3 Select a SIM or USIM card. 4 Select contacts to copy and select Export → Yes. ›Import or export contacts To import contact files (in vcf format) from a memory card to your device, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Import from SD card. 3 Select a memory location. If you have more than one account, select an account to which you want to add the contact. 4 Select an option for importing a single contact file, multiple contact files, or all contact files, and select OK. 5 Select contact files to import and select OK.Personal information 76 To export contacts from your device to a memory card, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select . 2 Press [ ] → Import/Export→ Export to SD card. 3 Select Yes to confirm. › View the communication log You can view the communication log of calls, messages, email or SNS threads. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → History. 2 Select an item you want to view. › View social network activities You can view the recent activities of contacts in social network services, such as Facebook and Twitter. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select → Activities. 2 Select an item you want to view. Calendar Learn to create and manage daily, weekly or monthly events, and set alarms to remind yourself of important events. › Create an event 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Press [ ] → More → Create.Personal information 77 3 Enter the details of the event as required. 4 Select Done. › View events To change the calendar view, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Press [ ] → Day, Week, or Month. To view events of a specific date, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calendar. 2 Select a date on the calendar. ● To move to a specific day by entering a date manually, press [ ] → More → Go to, enter the date by selecting + or -, and select Set. ● To select today’s date, press [ ] → Today. 3 Select an event to view its details. › Stop an event alarm If you set an alarm for a calendar event, the event alarm icon will appear at the specified time. 1 Open the notifications panel from the top of the screen. 2 Select a reminder to view more details about the event. 3 To snooze or dismiss the reminder, select Snooze all or Dismiss all.Personal information 78 Memo Learn to record important information to save and view at a later date. › Create a memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Memo. 2 Select Create memo. 3 Enter your memo text. 4 Press [ ] → a colour to change a background colour. 5 Select Save. › View memos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Memo. 2 Select a memo to view its details. ● To edit the memo, select . ● To delete the memo, select → OK. You can send the memo to others by tapping and holding the memo and selecting Send via→ an option. Voice recorder Learn to operate your device’s voice recorder. To use this feature, you must first insert a memory card.Personal information 79 › Record a voice memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice recorder. 2 Select Record to start recording. 3 Speak into the microphone. 4 When you are finished, select Stop. Your memo is saved automatically. 5 To record more voice memos, select Record again. › Play a voice memo 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice recorder. 2 Select List. 3 Select a voice memo to play. You can send the voice memo to others by pressing [ ] → Share→ an option.Web 80 Web Web services require a data connection. Contact your operator to choose the best data plan. Internet Learn to access and bookmark your favourite web pages. ● You may incur additional charges for accessing the web and downloading media files. For details, contact your service provider. ● The web browser menu may be labelled differently depending on your service provider. ● Available icons may vary depending on your region or service provider. › Browse web pages 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet to launch a specified homepage. To access a specific web page, select the URL input field, enter the web address (URL) of the web page, and select . 2 Navigate web pages with the following keys: 1 2 Number Function 1 Enter the web address of a web page to access. 2 Open a list of saved bookmarks, frequently visited pages and recent internet history.Web 81 While browsing the web page, use the following options: ● To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. To zoom out, move your fingers closer together. You can also double-tap the screen. ● To open a new window, press [ ] → New window. ● To view the currently active windows, press [ ] → Windows. You can open multiple pages and switch back and forth between them. ● To reload the current web page, press [ ] → Refresh. ● To go to a next page in history, press [ ] → Forward. ● To bookmark the current web page, press [ ]→ Add bookmark. ● To add a shortcut to the current web page to the idle screen, press [ ] → More → Add shortcut to Home. ● To search for text on the web page, press [ ] → More → Find on page. ● To view the web page details, press [ ] → More → Page info. ● To send the web address (URL) of the web page to others, press [ ] → More → Share page. ● To view the download history, press [ ] → More → Downloads. ● To customise the browser settings, press [ ] → More → Settings.Web 82 › Search for information by voice This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Select the URL input field. 3 Select and say a keyword into your device’s microphone. The device searches for information and web pages related with the keyword. › Bookmark your favourite web pages If you know the web address of the web page, you can manually add a bookmark. To add a bookmark, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Select → Bookmarks. 3 Select Add. 4 Enter a page title and a web address (URL). 5 Select OK. From the bookmark list, tap and hold a bookmark and use the following options: ● To open the web page in the current window, select Open. ● To open the web page in a new window, select Open in new window. ● To edit the bookmark details, select Edit bookmark. ● To add the bookmark shortcut to the idle screen, select Add shortcut to Home.Web 83 ● To send the web address (URL) of the web page to others, select Share link. ● To copy the web address (URL) of the web page, select Copy link URL. ● To delete the bookmark, select Delete bookmark. ● To use the web page as your homepage of the browser, select Set as homepage. › Access the frequently visited pages or the recent history 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Internet. 2 Select → Most visited or History. 3 Select a web page to access. You can add a web page to the bookmark list by selecting . Maps Learn to use Google Maps™ to find your location, search the online map for streets, cities, or countries, and get directions. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Search for a specific location 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Maps. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select OK. The map will display your current location.Web 84 3 Press [ ] → Search. 4 Enter a keyword for the location and select . To search for a location by voice, select . 5 Select the location you want to view details. ● To view a list of all results for your search, select . ● To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. To zoom out, move your fingers closer together. You can also select or . ● To add layers to the map, press [ ] → Layers. ● To view your current location, press [ ] → My Location. ● To add a star to the location, select the balloon of the location name→ . ›Get directions to a specific destination 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Maps. 2 Press [ ] → Directions. 3 Enter the addresses of the starting location and the ending location. To select an address from your contact list or starred places, or point the location on the map, select → Contacts, Point on map, or My Places. 4 Select a travel method (car, bus, or walk) and select Get directions. The route is indicated on the map. Depending on the selected travel method, you may see multiple routes. Select a route to view details of your trip and select to view the route on the map. 5 Select or to view only a single part of the route. 6 When you are finished, press [ ] → More → Clear Map.Web 85 Latitude Learn to share your location with your friends and view friends’ locations via Google Latitude™. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Latitude. The device automatically joins Latitude. 2 Select → Select from Contacts or Add via email address. 3 Select a friend you want to add, or enter an email address and select Add friends. 4 Select Yes. When your friend accepts your invitation, you can share locations. 5 Press [ ] → Map View. Your friends’ locations are marked with their photos on the map. Places Learn to search for a place around you. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Places. 2 Select a category. Your device searches for places around your current location that are related to the category.Web 86 3 Select a place name to view its details. 4 While viewing information, use the following options: ● To view the place on the map, select Map. ● To view the route to the place, select Directions. ● To view the phone number of the place, select Call. Navigation Learn to use the GPS navigation system to find and show your destination with voice guidance. ● Navigation maps, your current location, and other navigational data may differ from actual location information. You should always pay attention to road conditions, traffic, and any other factors that may affect your driving and follow all safety warnings and regulations while driving. ● This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Navigation. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select Accept. 3 Enter your destination by using one of the following methods: ● Speak Destination: Speak your destination such as “Navigate to destination.” ● Type Destination: Enter your destination with the virtual keypad.Web 87 ● Contacts: Select your destination from addresses of your contacts. ● Starred Places: Select your destination from the list of your starred places. YouTube Learn to view and share videos via YouTube. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ›Watch videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Select a video from the list. 3 Rotate the device to landscape view. 4 Control playback with the icons on the screen. › Share videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Select a video. 3 Select More→ Share→ an option.Web 88 ›Upload videos 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select YouTube. 2 Press [ ] → Upload and select a video. Skip to 7. If you want to upload new videos, select to turn on the camera. 3 Aim the lens at the subject and make any adjustments. 4 Select to start recording. 5 Select to stop recording. 6 Select Save to upload the video that you have recorded. 7 Select your Google account if it is linked to YouTube. You can also select Add account and set up an account to sign in YouTube. 8 Enter details of the upload and select Upload. Samsung Apps Samsung Apps allows you to simply and easily download an abundance of applications directly to your device. Featuring a wealth of games, news, reference, social networking, navigation, health related applications and more, Samsung Apps gives you instant access to a huge choice of mobile experience. Your device gets smarter with fully optimised applications from Samsung Apps. Explore amazing applications and make your mobile life even better.Web 89 ● The feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. ● For details, please visit www.samsungapps.com. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Samsung Apps. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, read the terms and conditions and select Accept. 3 Search for and download applications as desired. Market You can download games, ringtones, or other applications from Android Market. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Market. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select Accept. 3 Search for a file and download it to the device. ► p. 39Web 90 News & Weather Learn to view the weather information and read top news and other news articles. › View the weather information 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select News & Weather. 2 Select Weather at the top of the screen. Your device searches for your current location and displays the weather information. You can change the location to view the weather information in another region. Press [ ] → Settings → Weather settings and clear the check box next to Use My Location. Then select a location in Set location. › Read news articles 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select News & Weather. 2 Scroll left to a news topic at the top of the screen. 3 Select an article to open it. To add news topics, press [ ] → Settings → News settings→ Select news topics.Connectivity 91 Connectivity Bluetooth Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications technology capable of exchanging information over a distance of about 10 m without requiring a physical connection. You do not need to line up the devices to beam information with Bluetooth. If the devices are within range of one another, you can exchange information between them even if they are located in different rooms. ● Samsung is not responsible for the loss, interception, or misuse of data sent or received via the Bluetooth wireless feature. ● Always ensure that you share and receive data with devices that are trusted and properly secured. If there are obstacles between the devices, the operating distance may be reduced. ● Some devices, especially those that are not tested or approved by Bluetooth SIG, may be incompatible with your device. › Turn on the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks → Bluetooth settings. 2 Select Bluetooth to turn on the Bluetooth wireless feature. Connectivity 92 › Find and pair with other Bluetooth-enabled devices 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ Bluetooth settings→ Scan devices. 2 Select a device. 3 Enter a PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature or the other device’s Bluetooth PIN, if it has one, and select OK. Alternatively, select Accept to match the PIN between your device and the device. When the owner of the other device enters the same PIN or accepts the connection, pairing is complete. If the pairing is successful, the device will automatically search for available services. Some devices, especially headsets or hands-free car kits, may have a fixed Bluetooth PIN, such as 0000. If the other device has a PIN, you must enter it. › Send data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 Select a file or item, such as a contact, memo, or media file, from an appropriate application or My files. 2 Select an option for sending data via Bluetooth. The method for selecting an option may vary by data type. 3 Search for and pair with a Bluetooth-enabled device.Connectivity 93 › Receive data using the Bluetooth wireless feature 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ Bluetooth settings→ Discoverable. Your device is visible to other Bluetooth devices for 120 seconds. 2 When prompted, enter the PIN for the Bluetooth wireless feature and select OK. Alternatively, select Accept to match the PIN between your device and the device. 3 Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive data from the device. Received data is saved to the bluetooth folder. If you receive a contact, it is automatically saved to the phonebook. Wi-Fi Learn to use your device’s wireless networking capabilities to activate and connect to any wireless local area network (WLAN) compatible with the IEEE 802.11 b/g/n standards. You can connect to the internet or other network devices anywhere an access point or wireless hotspot is available. Your device uses non-harmonised frequency and is intended for use in all European countries. The Wi-Fi can be operated in the EU without restriction indoors, but cannot be operated outdoors in France.Connectivity 94 › Activate the Wi-Fi feature In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Wireless and networks → Wi-Fi settings → Wi-Fi. The Wi-Fi feature running in the background will consume battery power. To preserve battery power, activate the feature only when needed. › Find and connect to a Wi-Fi AP 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks → Wi-Fi settings. The device will automatically search for available Wi-Fi APs. 2 Select a network under Wi-Fi networks. 3 Enter a password for the network (if necessary). 4 Select Connect. › Add a Wi-Fi AP manually 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks → Wi-Fi settings→ Add Wi-Fi network. 2 Enter the SSID for the network and select the security type. 3 Set the security settings depending on the selected security type. 4 Select Save.Connectivity 95 › Connect to a Wi-Fi AP using a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) Using WPS, you can connect to a secured network. To connect to a Wi-Fi AP with a WPS button, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks → Wi-Fi settings. 2 Select WPS button connection. 3 Press a WPS button on the access point within 2 minutes. To connect to a Wi-Fi AP with a WPS PIN, 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks → Wi-Fi settings. 2 Select a network indicated by the WPS icon and select WPS PIN. 3 On the access point, enter the PIN and press the start button. Mobile network sharing Learn to set your device as a wireless modem or wireless access point for PCs or other devices, and share your device’s mobile network connection. › Share your device’s mobile network via Wi-Fi 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ Tethering and portable hotspot. 2 Select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot to activate the Wi-Fi tethering feature.Connectivity 96 3 Select Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings→ Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot to configure network settings to use your device as an access point. Option Function Network SSID View and edit the device name that will be shown to external devices. Security Select the security type. Password View or edit the network key to prevent unauthorised access to the network. 4 When you are finished, select Save. 5 From another device, locate your device’s name in the available connection list and connect to the network. Your device shares the mobile network connection with the other device. › Share your device’s mobile network via USB 1 Using a USB cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC. 2 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ Tethering and portable hotspot. 3 Select USB tethering to activate the USB tethering feature. Your device shares the mobile network connection on your PC. To stop sharing the network connection, clear the check box next to USB tethering. The sharing method for the network connection may differ depending on the PC’s operating system.Connectivity 97 GPS Your device is equipped with a global positioning system (GPS) receiver. Learn to activate location services. To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the following conditions: ● between buildings, in tunnels or underground passages, or inside buildings ● in poor weather ● around high voltage or electromagnetic fields ● in a vehicle with sun protection film Do not touch or cover the antenna area with your hands or other objects while using the GPS functions. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. › Activate location services You must activate location services to receive location information and search the map. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Location and security. 2 Adjust the following settings to activate location services: Option Function Use wireless networks Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding your location. Use GPS satellites Set to use the GPS satellite for finding your location.Connectivity 98 PC connections Learn to connect your device to a PC with a USB cable in USB connection modes. By connecting the device to a PC, you can transfer data to and from your device directly, and use the Samsung Kies program. › Connect with Samsung Kies Ensure that Samsung Kies is installed on your PC. You can download the program from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/kies). 1 Using a USB cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC. 2 Double-click the Samsung Kies icon on your PC to launch Samsung Kies. 3 Transfer or synchronise mobile data, such as contacts, calendars, music, or photos, between Samsung Kies and connected devices. Refer to the Samsung Kies help for more information. › Connect as a mass storage device You can access the file directory of the memory card by using the device as a memory card reader. 1 Insert a memory card into the device. 2 Using a USB cable, connect the multifunction jack on your device to a PC.Connectivity 99 3 Open the notifications panel and select USB connected → Connect USB storage → OK. 4 Open the folder to view files. 5 Copy files from the PC to the memory card. 6 When you are finished, select Disconnect storage from PC. To disconnect the device from the PC, click the USB device icon on the Windows task bar and click the option to safely remove the mass storage device. Then remove the USB cable from the PC. Otherwise, you may lose data stored on the memory card or damage the memory card. VPN connections You can create virtual private networks (VPN) and connect to your private network securely through a public network, such as the internet. Your device should already be configured with internet access. If you have trouble accessing the internet, you need to edit connections. If you are not sure about the connection information to enter, ask your service provider.Connectivity 100 › Set up VPN connections 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ VPN settings → Add VPN. 2 Select a VPN type. 3 Customise the connection information. Available options may vary depending on the VPN type. Option Function VPN name Enter a name of the VPN server. Set VPN server Enter the IP address of the VPN server. Enable Encryption Set to encrypt the VPN server. Set IPsec preshared key Enter a pre-shared key. Enable L2TP secret Set to use the L2TP secret password. Set L2TP secret Enter the L2TP secret password. Set user certificate Select a user certificate that the VPN server uses to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download from the web.Connectivity 101 Option Function Set CA certificate Select a certificate authority (CA) certificate that the VPN server uses to identify you. You can import certificates from the VPN server or download from the web. DNS search domains Enter the domain name server (DNS) address. 4 When you are finished, press [ ] → Save. › Connect to a private network 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings → Wireless and networks→ VPN settings. 2 Select a private network. 3 Enter the user name and password and select Connect. Tools 102 Tools Clock Learn to use the clock display on the Idle screen, and set and control alarms for important events. ›Use the clock display 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock. 2 While using the clock display, use the following features: ● To create or delete an alarm, select . ● To play a slideshow with photos in Gallery, select . ● To launch the music player, select . ● To return to the idle screen, select . › Set a new alarm 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock. 2 Select → Add alarm or press [ ] → Add alarm. 3 Set alarm details. 4 When you are finished, select Done. › Stop an alarm When the alarm sounds, ● Select Dismiss to stop the alarm. ● Select Snooze to repeat the alarm after a specified length of time.Tools 103 ›Delete an alarm 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Clock → . 2 Select an alarm to delete. 3 Select Delete → OK. Calculator Learn to perform mathematical calculations directly on your device like a typical hand-held or desktop calculator. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Calculator. 2 Use the keys that correspond to the calculator display to perform basic mathematical operations. Press [ ] → Advanced panel to use scientific calculator. Downloads Learn to manage logs of files you have downloaded from the web. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Downloads. 2 Select a download folder. 3 To open a downloaded file, select the log. To delete a log, select the check box and then select Delete.Tools 104 Google Search You can search for applications and data in your device and specific data on the web. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Google Search. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, set whether or not to view the search history of your Google account. 3 Enter a letter or a word of the data to search for. 4 Select the item’s name you want to access. My files Learn to quickly and easily access all of your images, videos, music, sound clips, and other types of files stored in your memory card. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select My files. 2 Select a folder. ● To return to the Home directory, select Home. ● To move up one level in the file directory, select Up. 3 Select a file to open. In a folder, press [ ] to use the following options: ● To send a file to others, select Share. ● To create a new folder, select Create folder. ● To delete files or folders, select Delete. ● To change the view mode, select View by. ● To sort files or folders, select List by. ● To use additional features using a file, such as moving, copying or renaming option, select More.Tools 105 Polaris Viewer Learn to view Polaris Viewer documents on your memory card. › Open a document 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Polaris Viewer. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, register as an online user or skip the registration. 3 Select a folder under My files or Recent documents→ a document file. 4 View the document as desired. ● To zoom in, place two fingers on the screen and spread them apart. To zoom out, move your fingers closer together. To return to the original size, double-tap the screen. You can also press [ ] → Zoom→ an option. ● To bookmark the current page, press [ ] → Bookclip. ● To search for text on the document, press [ ] → Find. ● To customise the settings for displaying or managing documents, press [ ] → More→ Settings. ● To send a file to others, press [ ] → More→ Send file. Available options may vary depending on a document type.Tools 106 ›Manage documents online 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Polaris Viewer. 2 Select Web files→ a service. 3 Enter your email address and password to access your account, and then select Add. 4 View and manage your documents on the server as desired. SIM Toolkit Use a variety of additional services offered by your service provider. Depending on your SIM or USIM card, this menu may be available but labelled differently. In Idle mode, open the application list and select SIM Toolkit. Task manager With the task manager, you can view currently running applications and memory information. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Task manager. 2 Use the following options: ● Active applications: View the list of all the applications currently running on your device. ● Downloaded: View the total amount of memory used for applications installed on your device.Tools 107 ● RAM: Check and manage the RAM for your device. ● Storage: View the used and available memory on your device and memory card. ● Help: View help information about extending battery life and RAM manager. Voice Search Learn to use the voice command feature to dial a number, send a message, or search for locations and information by voice. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider. 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Voice Search. 2 If you are launching this application for the first time, select OK or change the language. 3 Select Speak now (if necessary). 4 Say a command into the microphone. 5 Select the item’s name you want to access (if necessary).Settings 108 Settings Access the Settings menu 1 In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings. 2 Select a setting category and select an option. SIM card manager Access and alter the settings to control the network and the card settings for your device. ► p. 34 Wireless and networks Change the settings for wireless network connections. › Flight mode Disable all wireless functions on your device. You can use only non-network services. ›Wi-Fi settings ● Wi-Fi: Turn the Wi-Fi feature on or off. ► p. 94 ● Network notification: Set the device to notify you when an open network is available. ● WPS button connection: Connect to a Wi-Fi AP using a Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS) button. ● Add Wi-Fi network: Add Wi-Fi APs manually.Settings 109 › Bluetooth settings ● Bluetooth: Turn the Bluetooth wireless feature on or off. ► p. 91 ● Device name: Set a Bluetooth name for your device. ● Discoverable: Set your device to be visible to other Bluetooth devices. ● Scan devices: Search for available Bluetooth devices. ›USB utilities Connect your device to a PC as a mass storage. ► p. 98 › Tethering and portable hotspot ● USB tethering: Activate the USB tethering feature to share your device’s mobile network connection with PCs via USB. When connected to a PC, your device is used as a wireless modem for a PC. ► p. 96 ● Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Activate the Wi-Fi tethering feature to share your device’s mobile network connection with PCs or other devices through the Wi-Fi feature. ► p. 95 ● Portable Wi-Fi hotspot settings: - Portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Activate the Wi-Fi tethering feature to share your device’s mobile network connection with PCs or other devices through the Wi-Fi feature. ► p. 95 - Configure portable Wi-Fi hotspot: Configure network settings to use your device as an access point. › VPN settings Set up and connect to virtual private networks (VPNs). ► p. 99Settings 110 ›Mobile networks ● Use packet data: Set to allow packet switched data networks for network services. ● Data roaming: Set the device to connect to another network when you are roaming or your home network is not available. ● Access Point Names: Set up access point names (APNs). ● Use only 2G networks: Set the device to connect only to a 2G network. ● Network operators: Search for available networks and select a network for roaming. Call settings Customise the settings for calling features. › Fixed Dialling Numbers ● Enable FDN: Activate or deactivate FDN mode to restrict calls to numbers in the FDN list. You must enter the PIN2 supplied with your SIM or USIM card. ● Change PIN2: Change the PIN2, which is used to protect the primary PIN. If the SIM or USIM card is locked, this menu changes to Unblock PIN2. ● FDN list: Set up a list of contacts for fixed dialling. › Voicemail ● Voicemail service: Select your service provider’s voice mail service. You can also select other voice mail services if you downloaded applications that support them. ● Voicemail number: Enter the number to access the voice mail service. You can obtain this number from your service provider. The location of these options differs when you insert one SIM or USIM card.Settings 111 › Turn on proximity sensor Set to turn on the proximity sensor during a call. › Call forwarding Divert incoming calls to another number. › Additional settings ● Caller ID: Display your caller ID to other parties for outgoing calls. ● Call waiting: Allow incoming call alerts when a call is in progress. Sound Change the settings for various sounds on your device. ● Silent mode: Activate Silent mode to mute all sounds except media sounds and alarm ringtones. ● Vibrate: Set when the device will vibrate for various events. ● Volume: Adjust the volume level for call ringtones, music and videos, alarm ringtones, system sound, and notification ringtones. ● Ringtone: - Phone ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to incoming calls. - Notification ringtone: Select a ringtone to alert you to events, such as incoming messages and missed calls. ● Audible touch tones: Set the device to sound when you touch the keys on the dialling screen. ● Audible selection: Set the device to sound when you select an application or option on the touch screen. ● Screen lock sounds: Set the device to sound when you lock or unlock the touch screen.Settings 112 Display Change the settings for the display. ● Screen display: - Font style: Change the font type for the display text. You can download fonts from Android Market by selecting Get fonts online. - Home screen: Wallpaper: Select a background image for the idle screen. - Lock screen: Wallpaper: Select an image to display when the screen is locked. Clock position: Select the location of the clock on the locked screen. ● Brightness: Set the brightness of the display. ● Auto-rotate screen: Set whether or not to rotate the content automatically when the device is rotated. ● Animation: Set the device to display animation when you switch between windows. ● Screen timeout: Set the length of time the device waits before turning off the display’s backlight. Location and security Change the settings for securing your device and the SIM or USIM card, and GPS functionality. ● Use wireless networks: Set to use Wi-Fi and/or mobile networks for finding your location. ● Use GPS satellites: Set to use the GPS satellite for finding your location.Settings 113 ● Set screen lock: Set the unlock security code. When you have set your security code, this option changes to Change screen lock. - None: Disable the screen lock. - Pattern: Set an unlock pattern to unlock the screen. - PIN: Set a PIN (numeric) to unlock the screen. - Password: Set a password (alphanumeric) to unlock the screen. ● Set up SIM card lock: - Lock SIM card: Activate or deactivate the PIN lock feature to require the PIN before using the device. - Change SIM PIN: Change the PIN used to access SIM or USIM data. ● SIM change alert: Activate or deactivate the Find my mobile feature which helps you locate your device when it is lost or stolen. ► p. 33 ● Alert message recipients: Add or edit recipients for the alert message. ● Remote controls: Set to control a lost device remotely via the web. ● Visible passwords: Set the device to display your password as you enter. ● Select device administrators: View device administrators installed on your device. You can activate device administrators to apply new policies to your device. ● Use secure credentials: Use certificates and credentials to ensure secure use of various applications. ● Install from SD card: Install encrypted certificates that are stored on a memory card. ● Set password: Create and confirm a password for accessing credentials. ● Clear storage: Erase the credential contents from the device and reset the password.Settings 114 Applications Change the settings for managing installed applications. ● Unknown sources: Select to download applications from any source. If you do not select this option, you can download applications only from Android Market. ● Manage applications: Access the list of the applications installed on the device and check the application information. ● Running services: View the services you are using and access them to manage. ● Memory usage: View available memory and the memory used by applications on your device. ● Battery use: View the amount of power consumed by your device. ● Development: - USB debugging: This is for application development. When your device is connected to a PC with a USB cable, the USB debugging mode will be activated and Samsung Kies will launch automatically. - Stay awake: Set the device’s screen to stay on while charging the battery. - Allow mock locations: Allow mock locations and service information to be sent to a Location Manager service for testing. This is for application development. ● Samsung Apps: Select a network connection (Wi-Fi or packet switched data network) to get notifications for new applications from Samsung Apps. This feature may be unavailable depending on your region or service provider.Settings 115 Accounts and sync Change the settings for the auto sync feature or manage accounts for synchronisation. ● Background data: Select this setting to use the auto sync feature. The auto sync will run in the background without opening applications and synchronise data. ● Auto sync: Set the device to synchronise contact, calendar, and email data automatically. Privacy Change the settings for managing your settings and data. ● Back up my data: Back up your device’s settings to the Google server. ● Automatic restore: Set the device to restore applications’ data you backed up when they are installed in your device. ● Factory data reset: Reset your settings to the factory default values and delete all your data. SD card and phone storage View memory information for your device and memory card. You can also format the memory card. Formatting a memory card will permanently delete all data from the memory card.Settings 116 Locale and text Change the settings for text input. › Select language Select a display language for all menus and applications. › Select input method Select a default keypad type for text input. › Swype ● Language: Select a language for text input. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. ● Word prediction: Set the device to predict words according to your input and display word suggestions. ● Audio feedback: Set to alert you when there are no alternative words for your input if you double-tap a word. ● Enable tip indicator: Set to alert you to quick help by blinking the tip indicator. ● Auto-spacing: Set the device to automatically insert a space between words. ● Auto-capitalization: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first letter after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. ● Show complete trace: Set to display the trace of your dragging on the keyboard. ● Word choice window: Set how often the word list will display.Settings 117 ● Speed vs. accuracy: Set the balance for the speed and accuracy. ● Swype help: Access help information for using the Swype keyboard. ● Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Swype keyboard. ● Version: View version information. › Samsung keypad Set the device to use the Samsung keypad. ● Portrait keypad types: Select the default input method, such as the QWERTY keyboard, traditional keypad, or handwriting screen. ● Input languages: Select languages for text input. You cannot enter text in some languages. To enter text, you should change the writing language to one of the supported languages. ● XT9: Activate XT9 mode to enter text using Predictive input mode. ● XT9 advanced settings: Activate the advanced features of XT9 mode, such as auto completion, auto correction, or auto substitution, and set up your own word list. ● Keypad sweeping: Enable or disable the keypad sweeping feature for the text input mode. You can switch between input modes by scrolling left or right on the keypad. ● Auto-capitalization: Set the device to automatically capitalise the first letter after a final punctuation mark, such as a full stop, question mark, or exclamation mark. ● Handwriting settings: Customise the recognition time in Handwriting mode. ● Voice input: Activate the voice input feature to enter text by voice on the Samsung keypad.Settings 118 ● Auto-full stop: Set the device to insert a full stop when you double-tap the space bar. ● Tutorial: Learn how to enter text with the Samsung keypad. Voice input and output Change the settings for the voice recogniser and the text-tospeech feature. › Voice recognition settings ● Language: Select a language for the Google voice recognition. ● SafeSearch: Set the device to filter explicit text and/or images from voice search results. ● Block offensive words: Hide offensive words your device recognised from voice search results. › Text-to-speech settings ● Listen to an example: Listen to the spoken text for an example. Install voice data for using the text-to-speech feature. ● Always use my settings: Set to use the speech rate and language settings you specify over the settings saved in applications. ● Default engine: Set the speech synthesis engine to be used for spoken text. ● Install voice data: Download and install voice data for the text-to-speech feature. ● Speech rate: Select a speed for the text-to-speech feature. ● Language: Select a language for the text-to-speech feature. ● Engines: View the text-to-speech engines in your device.Settings 119 Accessibility ● Accessibility: Activate an accessibility application you have downloaded, such as Talkback or Kickback, which provide voice, melody, or vibration feedback. ● The power key ends calls: Set the device to end a call when you press the Power key. Date and time Access and alter the following settings to control how time and date are displayed on your device. If the battery remains fully discharged or removed from the device, the time and date will be reset. ● Automatic: Automatically update the time when you move across time zones. ● Set date: Set the current date manually. ● Select time zone: Set your home time zone. ● Set time: Set the current time manually. ● Use 24-hour format: Set to the time to be displayed in 24-hour format. ● Select date format: Select a date format. About phone Access information about your device, check the device’s status, and update the device system.Troubleshooting 120 Troubleshooting When you turn on your device or while you are using the device, it prompts you to enter one of the following codes: Code Try this to solve the problem: Password When the device lock feature is enabled, you must enter the password you set for the device. PIN When using the device for the first time or when the PIN requirement is enabled, you must enter the PIN supplied with the SIM or USIM card. You can disable this feature by using the Lock SIM card menu. PUK Your SIM or USIM card is blocked, usually as a result of entering your PIN incorrectly several times. You must enter the PUK supplied by your service provider. PIN2 When you access a menu requiring the PIN2, you must enter the PIN2 supplied with the SIM or USIM card. For details, contact your service provider. Your device displays network or service error messages ● When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. ● You cannot access some options without a subscription. Contact your service provider for more details.Troubleshooting 121 The touch screen responds slowly or improperly If your device has a touch screen and the touch screen is not responding properly, try the following: ● Remove any protective covers from the touch screen. Protective covers may prevent the device from recognising your inputs and are not recommended for touch screen devices. ● Ensure that your hands are clean and dry when tapping the touch screen. ● Restart your device to clear any temporary software bugs. ● Ensure that your device software is upgraded to the latest version. ● If the touch screen is scratched or damaged, take it to your local Samsung Service Centre. Your device freezes or has fatal errors If your device freezes or hangs, you may need to close programs or reset the device to regain functionality. If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the Power key for 8-10 seconds and release. The device will reboot automatically. If this does not solve the problem, perform a factory data reset. In Idle mode, open the application list and select Settings→ Privacy→ Factory data reset→ Reset phone → Erase everything. Calls are being dropped When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose your connection to the network. Move to another area and try again.Troubleshooting 122 Outgoing calls are not connected ● Ensure that you have pressed the Dial key. ● Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the phone number you are dialling. Incoming calls are not connected ● Ensure that your device is turned on. ● Ensure that you have accessed the right cellular network. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the incoming phone number. Others cannot hear you speaking on a call ● Ensure that you are not covering the built-in microphone. ● Ensure that the microphone is close to your mouth. ● If using a headset, ensure that it is properly connected. Audio quality is poor ● Ensure that you are not blocking the device’s internal antenna. ● When you are in areas with weak signals or poor reception, you may lose reception. Move to another area and try again. When dialling from contacts, the call is not connected ● Ensure that the correct number is stored in the contact list. ● Re-enter and save the number, if necessary. ● Ensure that you have not set call barring for the contact’s phone number. The device beeps and the battery icon flashes Your battery is low. Recharge or replace the battery to continue using the device.Troubleshooting 123 The battery does not charge properly or the device turns off ● The battery terminals may be dirty. Wipe both goldcoloured contacts with a clean, soft cloth and try charging the battery again. ● If the battery will no longer charge completely, dispose of the old battery properly and replace it with a new battery (refer to your local ordinances for proper disposal instructions). Your device is hot to the touch When you use applications that require more power or use applications on your device for an extended period of time, your device may feel hot to the touch. This is normal and should not affect your device’s lifespan or performance. Error messages appear when launching the camera Your Samsung mobile device must have sufficient available memory and battery power to operate the camera application. If you receive error messages when launching the camera, try the following: ● Charge the battery or replace it with a battery that is fully charged. ● Free some memory by transferring files to a PC or deleting files from your device. ● Restart the device. If you are still having trouble with the camera application after trying these tips, contact a Samsung Service Centre.Troubleshooting 124 Error messages appear when launching the FM radio The FM radio application on your Samsung mobile device uses the headset cable as an antenna. Without a headset connected, the FM radio will be unable to receive radio stations. To use the FM radio, first ensure that the headset is properly connected. Next, scan for and save the available radio stations. If you still cannot use the FM radio after performing these steps, try accessing your desired station with another radio receiver. If you can hear the station with another receiver, your device may require service. Contact a Samsung Service Centre. Error messages appear when opening music files Some music files may not play on your Samsung mobile device for a variety of reasons. If you receive error messages when opening music files on your device, try the following: ● Free some memory by transferring files to a PC or deleting files from your device. ● Ensure that the music file is not Digital Rights Management (DRM)-protected. If the file is DRM-protected, ensure that you have the appropriate licence or key to play the file. ● Ensure that your device supports the file type.Troubleshooting 125 Another Bluetooth device is not located ● Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on your device. ● Ensure that the Bluetooth wireless feature is activated on the device you wish to connect to, if necessary. ● Ensure that your device and the other Bluetooth device are within the maximum Bluetooth range (10 m). If the tips above do not solve the problem, contact a Samsung Service Centre. A connection is not established when you connect the device to a PC ● Ensure that the USB cable you are using is compatible with your device. ● Ensure that you have the proper drivers installed and updated on your PC.Safety precautions 126 Safety precautions To prevent injury to yourself and others or damage to your device, read all of the following information before using your device. Warning: Prevent electric shock, fire, and explosion Do not use damaged power cords or plugs, or loose electrical sockets Do not touch the power cord with wet hands, or disconnect the charger by pulling on the cord Do not bend or damage the power cord Do not use your device while charging or touch your device with wet hands Do not short-circuit the charger or the battery Do not drop or cause an impact to the charger or the battery Do not charge the battery with chargers that are not approved by the manufacturer Do not use your device during a thunderstorm Your device may malfunction and your risk of electric shock is increased. Do not handle a damaged or leaking Lithium Ion (Li-Ion) battery For safe disposal of your Li-Ion batteries, contact your nearest authorised service centre. Handle and dispose of batteries and chargers with care • Use only Samsung-approved batteries and chargers specifically designed for your device. Incompatible batteries and chargers can cause serious injuries or damage to your device. • Never dispose of batteries or devices in a fire. Follow all local regulations when disposing of used batteries or devices.Safety precautions 127 • Never place batteries or devices on or in heating devices, such as microwave ovens, stoves, or radiators. Batteries may explode when overheated. • Never crush or puncture the battery. Avoid exposing the battery to high external pressure, which can lead to an internal short circuit and overheating. Protect the device, batteries, and chargers from damage • Avoid exposing your device and batteries to very cold or very hot temperatures. • Extreme temperatures can cause the deformation of the device and reduce the charging capacity and life of your device and batteries. • Prevent batteries from contacting metal objects, as this can create a connection between the + and – terminals of your batteries and lead to temporary or permanent battery damage. • Never use a damaged charger or battery. Caution: Follow all safety warnings and regulations when using your device in restricted areas Turn off your device where prohibited Comply with all regulations that restrict the use of a mobile device in a particular area. Do not use your device near other electronic devices Most electronic devices use radio frequency signals. Your device may interfere with other electronic devices. Do not use your device near a pacemaker • Avoid using your device within a 15 cm range of a pacemaker if possible, as your device can interfere with the pacemaker. • If you must use your device, keep it at least 15 cm away from the pacemaker. • To minimise the possible interference with a pacemaker, use your device on the opposite side of your body from the pacemaker. Do not use your device in a hospital or near medical equipment that can be interfered with by radio frequency If you personally use any medical equipment, contact the manufacturer of the equipment to ensure the safety of your equipment from radio frequency.Safety precautions 128 If you are using a hearing aid, contact the manufacturer for information about radio interference Some hearing aids may be interfered with by the radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer to ensure the safety of your hearing aid. Turn off the device in potentially explosive environments • Turn off your device in potentially explosive environments instead of removing the battery. • Always comply with regulations, instructions and signs in potentially explosive environments. • Do not use your device at refuelling points (service stations), near fuels or chemicals, and at blasting areas. • Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive materials in the same compartment as the device, its parts, or accessories. Turn off your device when in an aircraft Using your device in an aircraft is illegal. Your device may interfere with the electronic navigation instruments of the aircraft. Electronic devices in a motor vehicle may malfunction due to the radio frequency of your device Electronic devices in your car may malfunction due to radio frequency of your device. Contact the manufacturer for more information. Comply with all safety warnings and regulations regarding mobile device usage while operating a vehicle While driving, safely operating the vehicle is your first responsibility. Never use your mobile device while driving, if it is prohibited by law. For your safety and the safety of others, practice good common sense and remember the following tips: • Use a hands-free device. • Get to know your device and its convenience features, such as speed dial and redial. These features help you reduce the time needed to place or receive calls on your mobile device. • Position your device within easy reach. Be able to access your wireless device without removing your eyes from the road. If you receive an incoming call at an inconvenient time, let your voice mail answer it for you.Safety precautions 129 • Let the person you are speaking with know you are driving. Suspend calls in heavy traffic or hazardous weather conditions. Rain, sleet, snow, ice, and heavy traffic can be hazardous. • Do not take notes or look up phone numbers. Jotting down a “to do” list or flipping through your address book takes attention away from your primary responsibility of driving safely. • Dial sensibly and assess the traffic. Place calls when you are not moving or before pulling into traffic. Try to plan calls when your car will be stationary. If you need to make a call, dial only a few numbers, check the road and your mirrors, then continue. • Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations that may be distracting. Make people you are talking with aware you are driving and suspend conversations that have the potential to divert your attention from the road. • Use your device to call for help. Dial a local emergency number in the case of fire, traffic accident, or medical emergencies. • Use your device to help others in emergencies. If you see an auto accident, a crime in progress, or a serious emergency where lives are in danger, call a local emergency number. • Call roadside assistance or a special, non-emergency assistance number when necessary. If you see a broken-down vehicle posing no serious hazard, a broken traffic signal, a minor traffic accident where no one appears injured, or a vehicle you know to be stolen, call roadside assistance or another special, non-emergency number. Proper care and use of your mobile device Keep your device dry • Humidity and all types of liquids may damage device parts or electronic circuits. • Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery, leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it to a service centre. • Liquids will change the colour of the label that indicates water damage inside the device. Water damage to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty.Safety precautions 130 Do not use or store your device in dusty, dirty areas Dust can cause your device to malfunction. Do not store your device on slopes If your device falls, it can be damaged. Do not store your device in hot or cold areas. Use your device at -20 °C to 50 °C • Your device can explode if left inside a closed vehicle, as the inside temperature can reach up to 80 °C. • Do not expose your device to direct sunlight for extended periods of time (such as on the dashboard of a car). • Store the battery at 0 °C to 40 °C. Do not store your device with such metal objects as coins, keys and necklaces • Your device may become deformed or malfunction. • If the battery terminals are in contact with metal objects, it may cause a fire. Do not store your device near magnetic fields • Your device may malfunction or the battery may discharge from exposure to magnetic fields. • Magnetic stripe cards, including credit cards, phone cards, passbooks, and boarding passes, may be damaged by magnetic fields. • Do not use carrying cases or accessories with magnetic closures or allow your device to come in contact with magnetic fields for extended periods of time. Do not store your device near or in heaters, microwaves, hot cooking equipment, or high pressure containers • The battery may leak. • Your device may overheat and cause a fire. Do not drop your device or cause impacts to your device • The screen of your device may be damaged. • If bent or deformed, your device may be damaged or parts may malfunction.Safety precautions 131 Do not use your device or applications for a while if the device is overheated Prolonged exposure of your skin to an overheated device may cause low temperature burn symptoms, such as red spots and pigmentation. If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use a flash close to the eyes of people or pets Using a flash close to the eyes may cause temporary loss of vision or damage to the eyes. Use caution when exposed to flashing lights • While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do not hold the screen too close to your eyes. • Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing lights while watching videos or playing Flash-based games for extended periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device immediately. Reduce the risk of repetitive motion injuries When you repetitively perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders, or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly, and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort during or after such use, stop use and see a physician. Ensure maximum battery and charger life • Avoid charging batteries for more than a week, as overcharging may shorten battery life. • Over time, unused batteries will discharge and must be recharged before use. • Disconnect chargers from power sources when not in use. • Use batteries only for their intended purposes. Use manufacturer-approved batteries, chargers, accessories and supplies • Using generic batteries or chargers may shorten the life of your device or cause the device to malfunction. • Samsung cannot be responsible for the user’s safety when using accessories or supplies that are not approved by Samsung.Safety precautions 132 Do not bite or suck on the device or the battery • Doing so may damage the device or cause explosion. • If children use the device, make sure that they use the device properly. When speaking on the device: • Hold the device upright, as you would with a traditional phone. • Speak directly into the mouthpiece. • Avoid contact with your device’s internal antenna. Touching the antenna may reduce the call quality or cause the device to transmit more radio frequency than necessary. Protect your hearing and ears when using a headset • Excessive exposure to loud sounds can cause hearing damage. • Exposure to loud sounds while driving may distract your attention and cause an accident. • Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into an audio source and use only the minimum volume setting necessary to hear your conversation or music. • In dry environments, static electricity can build up in the headset. Avoid using headsets in dry environments or touch a metal object to discharge static electricity before connecting a headset to the device. Use caution when using the device while walking or moving Always be aware of your surroundings to avoid injury to yourself or others. Do not carry your device in your back pockets or around your waist You can be injured or damage the device if you fall. Do not disassemble, modify, or repair your device • Any changes or modifications to your device can void your manufacturer’s warranty. For service, take your device to a Samsung Service Centre. • Do not disassemble or puncture the battery, as this can cause explosion or fire. Do not paint or put stickers on your device Paint and stickers can clog moving parts and prevent proper operation. If you are allergic to paint or metal parts of the product, you may experience itching, eczema, or swelling of the skin. When this happens, stop using the product and consult your physician.Safety precautions 133 When cleaning your device: • Wipe your device or charger with a towel or an eraser. • Clean the terminals of the battery with a cotton ball or a towel. • Do not use chemicals or detergents. Do not use the device if the screen is cracked or broken Broken glass or acrylic could cause injury to your hands and face. Take the device to a Samsung Service Centre to have it repaired. Do not use the device for anything other than its intended use Avoid disturbing others when using the device in public Do not allow children to use your device Your device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play with it as they could hurt themselves and others, damage the device, or make calls that increase your charges. Install mobile devices and equipment with caution • Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment installed in your vehicle are securely mounted. • Avoid placing your device and accessories near or in an air bag deployment area. Improperly installed wireless equipment can cause serious injury when air bags inflate rapidly. Allow only qualified personnel to service your device Allowing unqualified personnel to service your device may result in damage to your device and will void your manufacturer’s warranty. Handle SIM cards or memory cards with care • Do not remove a card while the device is transferring or accessing information, as this could result in loss of data and/or damage to the card or device. • Protect cards from strong shocks, static electricity, and electrical noise from other devices. • Do not touch gold-coloured contacts or terminals with your fingers or metal objects. If dirty, wipe the card with a soft cloth. Ensure access to emergency services Emergency calls from your device may not be possible in some areas or circumstances. Before travelling in remote or undeveloped areas, plan an alternative method of contacting emergency services personnel.Safety precautions 134 Keep your personal and important data safe • While using your device, be sure to back up important data. Samsung is not responsible for data loss. • When disposing of your device, back up all data and then reset your device to prevent misuse of your personal information. Do not distribute copyright-protected material Do not distribute copyright-protected material that you have recorded to others without the permission of the content owners. Doing this may violate copyright laws. The manufacturer is not liable for any legal issues caused by the user’s illegal use of copyrighted material. Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) certification information THIS DEVICE MEETS INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES Your mobile device is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed not to exceed the limits for exposure to radio waves (radio frequency electromagnetic fields) recommended by international guidelines. The guidelines were developed by an independent scientific organisation (ICNIRP) and include a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health. The radio wave exposure guidelines use a unit of measurement known as the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit for mobile devices is 2.0W/kg. Tests for SAR are conducted using standard operating positions with the device transmitting at its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands. The highest SAR values under the ICNIRP guidelines for this device model are: Maximum SAR for this model and conditions under which it was recorded Head SAR 0.733W/kg Body-worn SAR 0.319W/kg During use, the actual SAR values for this device are usually well below the values stated above. This is because, for purposes of system efficiency and to minimise interference on the network, the operating power of your mobile device is automatically decreased when full power is not needed for the call. The lower the power output of the device, the lower its SAR value.Safety precautions 135 A body-worn SAR test has been performed on this device with an approved accessory or at a separation distance of 1.5 cm. To meet RF exposure guidelines during body-worn operation, the device must be used with the approved accessory or positioned at least 1.5 cm away from the body. If you use an unapproved accessory, ensure that the accessory does not contain any metal components and that it positions the device at least 1.5 cm away from the body. Organisations such as the World Health Organisation and the US Food and Drug Administration have suggested that if people are concerned and want to reduce their exposure, they could use a hands-free accessory to keep the wireless device away from the head and body during use, or reduce the amount of time spent using the device. For more information, visit www.samsung.com/sar and search for your device with the model number. Correct disposal of this product (Waste Electrical & Electronic Equipment) (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate collection systems) This marking on the product, accessories or literature indicates that the product and its electronic accessories (e.g. charger, headset, USB cable) should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. To prevent possible harm to the environment or human health from uncontrolled waste disposal, please separate these items from other types of waste and recycle them responsibly to promote the sustainable reuse of material resources. Household users should contact either the retailer where they purchased this product, or their local government office, for details of where and how they can take these items for environmentally safe recycling. Business users should contact their supplier and check the terms and conditions of the purchase contract. This product and its electronic accessories should not be mixed with other commercial wastes for disposal. This EEE is compliant with RoHS.Safety precautions 136 Correct disposal of batteries in this product (Applicable in the European Union and other European countries with separate battery return systems) This marking on the battery, manual or packaging indicates that the batteries in this product should not be disposed of with other household waste at the end of their working life. Where marked, the chemical symbols Hg, Cd or Pb indicate that the battery contains mercury, cadmium or lead above the reference levels in EC Directive 2006/66. If batteries are not properly disposed of, these substances can cause harm to human health or the environment. To protect natural resources and to promote material reuse, please separate batteries from other types of waste and recycle them through your local, free battery return system. Disclaimer Some content and services accessible through this device belong to third parties and are protected by copyright, patent, trademark and/or other intellectual property laws. Such content and services are provided solely for your personal noncommercial use. You may not use any content or services in a manner that has not been authorised by the content owner or service provider. Without limiting the foregoing, unless expressly authorised by the applicable content owner or service provider, you may not modify, copy, republish, upload, post, transmit, translate, sell, create derivative works, exploit, or distribute in any manner or medium any content or services displayed through this device. “THIRD PARTY CONTENT AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED “AS IS.” SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT CONTENT OR SERVICES SO PROVIDED, EITHER EXPRESSLY OR IMPLIEDLY, FOR ANY PURPOSE. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. SAMSUNG DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE ACCURACY, VALIDITY, TIMELINESS, LEGALITY, OR COMPLETENESS OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE MADE AVAILABLE THROUGH THIS DEVICE AND UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES, INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE, SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE, WHETHER IN CONTRACT OR TORT, FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, ATTORNEY FEES, EXPENSES, OR ANY OTHER DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF, OR IN CONNECTION WITH, ANY INFORMATION CONTAINED IN, OR AS A RESULT OF THE USE OF ANY CONTENT OR SERVICE BY YOU OR ANY THIRD PARTY, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.” Safety precautions 137 Third party services may be terminated or interrupted at any time, and Samsung makes no representation or warranty that any content or service will remain available for any period of time. Content and services are transmitted by third parties by means of networks and transmission facilities over which Samsung has no control. Without limiting the generality of this disclaimer, Samsung expressly disclaims any responsibility or liability for any interruption or suspension of any content or service made available through this device. Samsung is neither responsible nor liable for customer service related to the content and services. Any question or request for service relating to the content or services should be made directly to the respective content and service providers.Index 138 access codes 120 alarms creating 102 deleting 103 stopping 102 battery charging 12 installing 10 Bluetooth activating 91 finding and pairing with devices 92 receiving data 93 sending data 92 brightness, display 31 calculator 103 calendar creating events 76 viewing events 77 call forwarding 45 call log 46 calls answering 43 forwarding 45 international numbers 43 making 42 multiparty 44 rejecting 43 using headset 43 using options 44 viewing missed 45 waiting 46 call waiting 46 camera capturing photos 56 customising camcorder 62 customising camera 59 recording videos 60 connections Bluetooth 91 PC 98 VPN 99 Wi-Fi 93 contacts copying 75 creating 72 finding 73 importing or exporting 75 setting speed dial 73 device customising 29 indicator icons 21 keys 20 layout 19 notifications panel 26 settings 108 turning on or off 18 display language 116 downloads applications 39 files 40 managing 103 email sending 51 setting accounts 51 IndexIndex 139 removing 16 memos creating 78 viewing 78 menu screen accessing 27 organising applications 28 messages accessing voice mail 48 sending email 51 sending multimedia 47 sending text 47 setting email accounts 51 multimedia messages sending 47 viewing 48 music player adding files 65 playing music 66 news & weather 90 PC connections mass storage 98 Samsung Kies 98 phonebook creating contacts 72 creating groups 74 creating your namecard 73 finding contacts 73 photos capturing 56 capturing by scene 57 capturing in smile shot 58 capturing panoramic 58 viewing 63 viewing 52 file manager 104 find my mobile 33 fixed dialling number mode 45 flight mode 18 FM radio listening to 68 saving stations 69 gallery file formats 63 playing videos 64 viewing photos 63 Google Mail 49 Google Maps 83 Google Search 104 Google Talk 53 idle screen adding items 25 adding panels 27 internet see web browser map getting directions 84 searching for locations 83 searching for nearby places 85 sharing locations with friends 85 using navigation 86 memory card formatting 17 inserting 15Index 140 text messages sending 47 viewing 48 time and date, set 29 touch screen locking 24 using 23 unpack 10 USIM card installing 10 locking 32 video player 64 videos playing 64 recording 60 voice mail 48 voice memos playing 79 recording 79 voice search 107 VPN connections connecting to 101 creating 100 web browser adding bookmarks 82 browsing web pages 80 Wi-Fi activating 94 finding and connecting to networks 94 YouTube uploading videos 88 watching videos 87 PIN lock 32 Polaris Viewer 105 Samsung Apps 88 Samsung Kies 98 settings about phone 119 accessibility 119 accounts and sync 115 applications 114 call settings 110 date and time 119 display 112 locale and text 116 location and security 112 privacy 115 SD card and phone storage 115 SIM card management 108 sound 111 voice input and output 118 wireless and networks 108 silent mode 30 SIM card installing 10 locking 32 switching 34 SIM card manager 108 Social Hub 54 synchronisation with web accounts 40 task manager 106 text input 35 text memos 78Declaration of Conformity (R&TTE) We, Samsung Electronics declare under our sole responsibility that the product GSM WCDMA BT/Wi-Fi Mobile Phone : GT-S6102 to which this declaration relates, is in conformity with the following standards and/or other normative documents. SAFETY EN 60950-1 : 2006 + A1:2010 SAR EN 50360 : 2001 / AC 2006 EN 62209-1 : 2006 EN 62209-2 : 2010 EN 62479 : 2010 EN 62311 : 2008 EMC EN 301 489-01 V1.8.1 (04-2008) EN 301 489-07 V1.3.1 (11-2005) EN 301 489-17 V2.1.1 (05-2009) EN 301 489-24 V1.5.1 (10-2010) RADIO EN 301 511 V9.0.2 (03-2003) EN 301 908-1 V4.2.1 (03-2010) EN 301 908-2 V4.2.1 (03-2010) EN 300 328 V1.7.1 (10-2006) We hereby declare that [all essential radio test suites have been carried out and that] the above named product is in conformity to all the essential requirements of Directive 1999/5/EC. The conformity assessment procedure referred to in Article 10 and detailed in Annex[IV] of Directive 1999/5/EC has been followed with the involvement of the following Notified Body(ies): BABT, Forsyth House, Churchfield Road, Walton-on-Thames, Surrey, KT12 2TD, UK* Identification mark: 0168 The technical documentation kept at : Samsung Electronics QA Lab. which will be made available upon request. (Representative in the EU) Samsung Electronics Euro QA Lab. Blackbushe Business Park, Saxony Way, Yateley, Hampshire, GU46 6GG, UK* 2012.02.08 Joong-Hoon Choi / Lab Manager (place and date of issue) (name and signature of authorised person) * It is not the address of Samsung Service Centre. For the address or the phone number of Samsung Service Centre, see the warranty card or contact the retailer where you purchased your product.Some of the contents in this manual may differ from your device depending on the software of the device or your service provider. www.samsung.com English (EU). 02/2012. Rev. 2.0 To install Kies (PC Sync) 1. Download the latest version of Kies from the Samsung website (www.samsung.com/kies) and install it on your PC. 2. Using a USB cable, connect your device to your PC. 3. Double-click the Samsung Kies icon on your PC to launch Samsung Kies. Refer to the Kies help for more information. GT-S6102 دليل المستخدماستخدام هذا الدليل 2 www.sar-tick.com هذا المنتج يتوافق مع حدود SAR المحلية المطبقة التي تبلغ 2,٠ وات/كجم. يمكن التعرف على قيم SAR القصوى في القسم معلومات اعتماد معدل االمتصاص المحدد )SAR( من هذا الدليل. عند حمل منتج أو استخدامه أثناء وضعه بجانب الجسم، يمكنك إما استخدام ملحق معتمد مثل حافظة، أو يمكنك الحفاظ على مسافة ال تقل عن 1,٥ سم من الجسم، وذلك لضمان التوافق مع متطلبات حد التعرض لـ RF. الحظ أنه يمكن أن يصدر عن المنتج تردد السلكي حتى في حالة عدم إجراء مكالمة هاتفية. استخدام هذا الدليل نشكرك على شراء جهاز سامسونج المحمول. سوف يقوم هذا الجهاز بإمدادك باتصال جوال عالي الجودة ومتعة فائقة وفقاً لتكنولوجيا ساموسونج االستثنائية والمعايير العالية. لقد صُ مم دليل المستخدم هذا ليطلعك خصيصاً على الوظائف والميزات المتوفرة في جهازك. للقراءة أوالً ● يرجى قراءة جميع احتياطات السالمة وهذا الدليل بعناية قبل استخدام الجهاز لضمان االستخدام اآلمن والسليم. ● تعتمد األوصاف الموجودة في هذا الدليل على اإلعدادات االفتراضية لجهازك. ● الصور والصور المستخدمة في دليل المستخدم هذا قد تختلف في المظهر عن المنتج الفعلي.استخدام هذا الدليل 3 ● المحتوى الموجود في دليل المستخدم هذا قد يختلف عن المنتج، أو عن البرامج التي يقدمها مزودو الخدمات، ويخضع للتغيير دون إشعار مسبق. يرجى الرجوع إلى www.samsung.com للحصول على أحدث نسخة من دليل المستخدم. ● قد تتنوع الخصائص المتاحة واإلضافية حسب الجهاز أو البرمجيات أو مزود الخدمة. ● تنسيق وتقديم دليل المستخدم هذا يبنى على أنظمة تشغيل Google Android وفقاً لنظام تشغيل المستخدم. ● تتفاوت الوظائف واألجهزة حسب البلد أو المنطقة أو مواصفات األجهزة. سامسونج ليست مسؤولة عن مشكالت األداء التي تكون بفعل استخدامات الطرف الثالث. ● سامسونج غير مسؤولة عن مشكالت األداء أو حاالت عدم التوافق التي تحدث بسبب التعديل في ضبط السجل أو التغيير في برنامج نظام التشغيل. قد تؤدي محاولة تخصيص نظام التشغيل إلى تشغيل جهازك أو التطبيقات بطريقة غير صحيحة. ● يمكنك ترقية برنامج جهاز المحمول الخاص بك عن طريق الحصول على www.samsung.com. ● البرامج، ومصادر الصوت والخلفيات والصور والمحتويات األخرى المتاحة في هذا الجهاز مرخصة لالستخدام المحدود بين سامسونج وأصحابها. استخراج واستخدام هذه المواد ألغراض تجارية أو غيرها يعد انتهاكاً لقوانين حقوق التأليف والنشر. سامسونج ليست مسؤولة عن التعدي على حق المؤلف من قبل المستخدم. ● يُرجى الحفاظ على هذا الدليل كمرجع إضافي. الرموز اإلرشادية قبل البدء، تعرف على الرموز التي ستراها في هذ الدليل: تحذير—الحاالت التي قد تؤدي إلى إصابتك أنت أو اآلخريناستخدام هذا الدليل 4 تنبيه—الحاالت التي قد تتسبب في تلف جهازك أو أي جهاز آخر مالحظة—مالحظات، أو توجيهات لالستخدام، أو أي معلومات إضافية ◄ ارجع إلى—الصفحات التي تحوي معلومات ذات صلة؛ على سبيل المثال: ◄ ص. 12 )تمثل ”انظر الصفحة رقم 12“( ← يتبعه—ترتيب الخيارات أو القوائم الالزم تحديدها لتنفيذ خطوة معينة؛ على سبيل المثال: في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← حول الهاتف )يمثل الضبط، متبوعً ا بـ حول الهاتف( ] [ قوسين مربعين—مفاتيح الجهاز؛ على سبيل المثال: ] [ )تمثل مفتاح القائمة( حقوق الطبع والنسخ حقوق الطبع والنسخ © 2٠12 سامسونج لاللكترونيات حماية دليل المستخدم هذا بموجب قوانين حقوق النشر الدولية. ال يجوز نسخ أي جزء من دليل المستخدم هذا أو توزيعه أو ترجمته أو نقله بأي شكل أو بأي وسيلة، إلكترونية أو ميكانيكية، بما في ذلك التصوير والتسجيل، أو تخزينه أي من معلومات بأي نظام تخزين أو استرجاع، دون الحصول على إذن خطي مسبق من Samsung Electronics.استخدام هذا الدليل ٥ العالمات التجارية ● سامسونج وشعار شركة سامسونج عبارة عن عالمات تجارية مسجلة لشركة سامسونج لإللكترونيات. ● يُعد شعار Google Maps™ ،Google Search™ ،Android، ™Android Market™ ،YouTube™ ،Google Mail، ™Google Talk عالمات تجارية خاصة بشركة .Google, Inc. ● و هي عالمات تجارية لشركة SRS Labs, Inc. تقنيات CS Headphone و WOW HD مشمولة ضمن ترخيص من شركة .SRS Labs, Inc. ● Bluetooth هي عالمة تجارية مسجلة لشركة ® .Bluetooth SIG, Inc في جميع أنحاء العالم. ● Oracle وJava عبارة عن عالمات تجارية مسجلة خاصة بشركة Oracle و/أو الشركات التابعة لها. قد تكون األسماء األخرى عالمات تجارية لمالكيها. ● Wi-Fi Protected Setup™ ،Wi-Fi، ® ™Wi-Fi CERTIFIED و شعار Wi-Fi هي عالمات تجارية مسجلة خاصة بـ Wi-Fi Alliance. ● جميع العالمات التجارية األخرى وحقوق التأليف والنشر هي ملك ألصحابها.المحتويات 6 المحتويات التجميع ......................................................... 10 إخراج المحتويات ......................................................... 10 تركيب بطاقة SIM أو USIM والبطارية ............................. 10 شحن البطارية ............................................................ 12 إدخال بطاقة الذاكرة )اختياريًا( .......................................... 15 إلحاق حزام يدوي )اختياري( ............................................ 17 بدء التشغيل .................................................... 18 تشغيل جهازك وإيقافه .................................................... 18 تعرَّف على جهازك ....................................................... 19 استخدام شاشة اللمس .................................................... 23 قفل أو إلغاء قفل شاشة اللمس والمفاتيح .............................. 24 تعرف على شاشة الجاهزية ............................................. 25 الوصول إلى التطبيقات ................................................... 27 تخصيص جهازك ......................................................... 29 التبديل بين بطاقة SIM أو 34 .................................... USIM إدخال نص ................................................................ 35 تنزيل التطبيقات من 39 ........................... Android Market تنزيل الملفات من الويب ................................................. 40 مزامنة البيانات ........................................................... 40 االتصاالت ....................................................... 42 االتصال .................................................................... 42 الرسائل .................................................................... 46 49 ........................................................ Google Mail بريد إلكتروني ............................................................. 51المحتويات 7 53 ...................................................................... Talk 54 .......................................................... Social Hub الترفيه .......................................................... 55 تصميم ..................................................................... 55 األستديو ................................................................... 62 الموسيقى .................................................................. 65 راديو 68 ................................................................ FM المعلومات الشخصية .......................................... 72 األسماء .................................................................... 72 التقويم ..................................................................... 76 المذكرة .................................................................... 78 مسجل الصوت ............................................................ 78 الويب ........................................................... 80 الويب ...................................................................... 80 83 ................................................................... Maps خط العرض ................................................................ 85 85 ................................................................. Places التنقل ...................................................................... 86 87 .............................................................. YouTube 88 ................................................... Samsung Apps 89 ................................................................. Market األخبار والطقس .......................................................... 90 التوصيل ........................................................ 91 البلوتوث ................................................................... 91 93 .................................................................... Wi-Fiالمحتويات 8 مشاركة شبكة المحمول .................................................. 95 97 ..................................................................... GPS توصيالت الحاسوب ...................................................... 98 اتصاالت 99 ........................................................... VPN األدوات ....................................................... 102 الساعة ................................................................... 102 الحاسبة .................................................................. 103 تنزيالت .................................................................. 103 104 ................................................. Google Search ملفاتي ................................................................... 104 105 .................................................. Polaris Viewer مجموعة أدوات 106 .................................................. SIM مدير المهام ............................................................. 106 البحث الصوتي .......................................................... 107 الضبط ......................................................... 108 الوصول إلى قائمة الضبط .............................................. 108 إدارة بطاقة 108 ...................................................... SIM الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ............................................ 108 ضبط المكالمة ........................................................... 110 صوت .................................................................... 111 الشاشة .................................................................. 112 الموقع واألمان .......................................................... 112 التطبيقات ................................................................ 114 الحسابات والمزامنة .................................................... 115 الخصوصية ............................................................. 115 تخزين الهاتف ويطاقة 115 ............................................ SDالمحتويات 9 اإلعدادات المحلية والنص ............................................. 116 دخل وخرج الصوت .................................................... 118 إمكانية الوصول ........................................................ 119 التاريخ والوقت ......................................................... 119 حول الهاتف ............................................................. 119 حل المشكالت ................................................. 120 احتياطات السالمة ............................................ 126التجميع 1٠ التجميع إخراج المحتويات تحقق من وجود األشياء التالية داخل علبة المنتج: ● جهاز الهاتف المحمول ● البطارية ● دليل التشغيل السريع يجب استخدام البرامج المعتمدة من سامسونج فقط. قد يتسبب استخدام البرامج المزيفة أو غير القانونية في تلف أو إلحاق أضرار ال يغطيها الضمان المقدم من الشركة المصنعة للجهاز. ● قد تختلف العناصر المرفقة بجهازك والملحقات المتوفرة حسب منطقتك ومزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ● يمكنك شراء كماليات إضافية من موزع سامسونج المحلي. ● تؤدي الملحقات المرفقة وظائفها على أفضل نحو ممكن بالنسبة لجهازك. ● قد تكون الملحقات بخالف المرفقة مع جهازك غير متوافقة معه. تركيب بطاقة SIM أو USIM والبطارية عند االشتراك في خدمة الهاتف الخلوي، سوف تتلقى بطاقة وحدة تعريف المشترك )SIM( مع تفاصيل االشتراك، مثل رقم التعريف الشخصي )PIN( والخدمات االختيارية. الستخدام خدمات UMTS أو HSDPA، يمكنك شراء بطاقة وحدة تعريف المشترك العالمي )USIM(. لتركيب بطاقة SIM أو USIM والبطارية، 1 إذا كان الجهاز قيد التشغيل، فاضغط مطوالً على مفتاح التشغيل وحدد إيقاف تشغيل ← موافق إليقاف تشغيله.التجميع 11 2 أزل الغطاء الخلفي. توخى الحرص في عدم إلحاق الضرر بأظفارك عند إزالة الغطاء الخلفي. 3 أدخل بطاقة SIM أو USIM بحيث تكون األطراف الملونة بالذهبي متجهة ألسفل. الجهاز لديك مزود بفتحتيّ بطاقة SIM لكي تتيح لك إمكانية استخدام بطاقة SIM أو USIM، والتبديل بينهما. استخدم الفتحة اليسرى الستخدام بطاقة SIM أو USIM األساسية األكثر استخدامًا. استخدم الفتحة اليمنى لبطاقة SIM أو USIM الثانوية. بطاقة SIM رقم 1 بطاقة SIM رقم 2 يوجد الهوائي في المنطقة العليا في الجزء الخلفي من الجهاز. ال تقم بإزالة الشريط الواقي الذي يغطي الهوائي، حيث إن ذلك يتلف الهوائي. عندما تقوم بإدخال بطاقات USIM داخل جهازك، فسيتم استخدام البطاقة الموجودة في الفتحة الثانوية لشبكة GPRS.التجميع 12 4 أدخل البطارية. 1 2 5 أعد وضع الغطاء الخلفي إلى مكانه. شحن البطارية قبل استخدام الجهاز للمرة األولى، يجب عليك شحن البطارية. يمكنك شحن الجهاز باستخدام شاحن سفر أو عن طريق توصيل الجهاز بالكمبيوتر باستخدام كبل USB. يجب استخدام الشواحن والكبالت المعتمدة من سامسونج فقط. يمكن للشواحن أو الكبالت غير المرخص بها أن تتسبب في انفجار البطاريات أو تلحق أضرارًا بجهازك.التجميع 13 ● عندما ينخفض مستوى بطاريتك، سيصدر الجهاز نغمة تحذيرية ورسالة تفيد بانخفاض مستوى البطارية. ستكون رمز البطارية فارغة أيضً ا. إذا انخفض مستوى البطارية بدرجة كبيرة، فسيتم إيقاف تشغيل الجهاز تلقائيًا. أعد شحن بطاريتك لمتابعة استخدام جهازك. ● إذا كانت البطارية فارغة بالكامل، فلن تتمكن من تشغيل الجهاز، حتى مع توصيل شاحن السفر. اترك البطارية المفرغة حتى تشحن بالكامل لبضعة دقائق قبل محاولة تشغيل الجهاز. ‹ الشحن باستخدام شاحن سفر 1 وصل الطرف الصغير من الشاحن داخل المقبس متعدد األغراض. إن توصيل الشاحن بطريقة غير صحيحة قد يتسبب في إلحاق تلفيات خطيرة بالجهاز. ال يغطي الضمان أية أضرار تنتج عن سوء االستخدام.التجميع 14 2 وصِّ ل الطرف الكبير للشاحن بمصدر التيار. ● يمكنك استخدام الجهاز أثناء الشحن، ولكن قد يستغرق وقتًا أطول لشحن البطارية بالكامل. ● أثناء شحن الجهاز، قد ال تعمل شاشة اللمس بسبب عدم استقرار مصدر اإلمداد بالطاقة. في حالة حدوث ذلك، افصل شاحن السفر عن الجهاز. ● أثناء الشحن، قد يسخن الجهاز. وهذا يعد أمرًا طبيعيًا، وينبغي أال يؤثر على عمر الجهاز أو على أدائه. ● إذا لم يتم شحن جهازك بطريقة صحيحة، فأحضر جهازك والشاحن إلى مركز خدمة سامسونج. 3 عندما تكون البطارية مشحونة بالكامل، افصل مهايئ السفر عن الجهاز، ثم افصله عن منفذ التيار. ال تخرج البطارية قبل فصل الشاحن. فقد يؤدي القيام بهذا إلى تلف الجهاز. لتوفير الطاقة، افصل شاحن السفر في حالة عدم استخدامه. ال يتوفر لدى شاحن السفر زر لتشغيل التيار، لذا، يجب عليك فصل شاحن السفر من منفذ التيار بالحائط لفصل مصدر التيار. ينبغي أن يظل شاحن السفر قريبًا من المأخذ عند استخدامه. ‹ الشحن باستخدام كبل USB قبل الشحن، تأكد من تشغيل الكمبيوتر. 1 قم بتوصيل أحد طرفي كبل USB( USB مصغر( بالمقبس متعدد الوظائف.التجميع 1٥ 2 قم بتوصيل الطرف اآلخر لكبل USB بمنفذ USB على الكمبيوتر. حسب نوع كبل USB الذي تستخدمه، فقد يستغرق األمر بعض الوقت قبل أن يبدأ الشحن. 3 عندما تكون البطارية مشحونة بالكامل، افصل كبل USB من الجهاز، ثم افصله من الكمبيوتر. إدخال بطاقة الذاكرة )اختياريًا( لحفظ ملفات وسائط متعددة إضافية، يلزمك إدخال بطاقة الذاكرة. يقبل جهازك إدخال بطاقات ذاكرة نوعية ™microSD أو ™microSDHC حتى أقصى سعة 32 جيجابايت )حسب الشركة المصنعة لبطاقة الذاكرة ونوعها(. تستخدم سامسونج مقاييس الصناعة المعتمدة الخاصة ببطاقات الذاكرة، ولكن بعض العالمات التجارية قد ال تكون متوافقة شكل كامل مع جهازك. استخدام بطاقة الذاكرة غير المتوافقة قد يتلف جهازك أو بطاقة الذاكرة ومن الممكن أن يتلف البيانات المخزنة على البطاقة. ● يدعم جهازك هيكل ملفات FAT الخاص ببطاقات الذاكرة. إذا قمت بإدخال بطاقة مهيأة بهيكل ملف مختلف، فسيطلب منك جهازك إعادة تهيئة بطاقة الذاكرة. ● ستؤدي عمليات النسخ والمسح المتكررة للبيانات إلى تقصير عمر بطاقات الذاكرة. ● عند إدخال بطاقة ذاكرة في جهازك، يظهر دليل الملفات الخاص ببطاقة الذاكرة في المجلد sdcard.التجميع 16 1 أزل الغطاء الخلفي. 2 أدخل بطاقة ذاكرة بحيث تكون األجزاء الذهبية في اتجاه األسفل. 3 أعد وضع الغطاء الخلفي إلى مكانه. ‹ إخراج بطاقة الذاكرة قبل إخراج بطاقة ذاكرة، قم أوالً بإزالة تركيبها للحصول على إخراج آمن. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، حدد ← الضبط ← تخزين الهاتف وبطاقة SD ← إلغاء تحميل البطاقة SD ← موافق. 2 أزل الغطاء الخلفي. 3 قم بإخراج بطاقة الذاكرة. 4 أعد وضع الغطاء الخلفي إلى مكانه. ال تقم بنزع بطاقة الذاكرة إثناء قيام الجهاز بنقل المعلومات أو الوصول إليها، ألن ذلك قد يؤدي إلى فقدان البيانات و/أو تلف بطاقة الذاكرة أو الجهاز.التجميع 17 ‹ تهيئة بطاقة الذاكرة قد يؤدي تنسيق بطاقة الذاكرة على جهاز كمبيوتر إلى حالة من عدم التوافق مع جهازك. ال تقم بتنسيق بطاقة الذاكرة إال على الجهاز فحسب. في وضع الجاهزية، حدد ← الضبط ← تخزين الهاتف وبطاقة SD ← إلغاء تحميل البطاقة SD ← موافق ← تنسيق بطاقة SD ← تنسيق بطاقة SD ← مسح الكل. قبل تنسيق بطاقة الذاكرة، تذكر عمل نسخ احتياطية من كل البيانات الهامة المحفوظة على جهازك. ال يغطي ضمان الشركة المصنعة أي فقد للبيانات ينتج عن عبث المستخدمين. إلحاق حزام يدوي )اختياري( 1 أزل الغطاء الخلفي. 2 أدخل الحزام اليدوي داخل المنفذ وثبته فوق البروز الصغير. 3 أعد وضع الغطاء الخلفي إلى مكانه.بدء التشغيل 18 بدء التشغيل تشغيل جهازك وإيقافه لتشغيل جهازك، اضغط مع االستمرار على مفتاح التشغيل. في حالة قيامك بتشغيل الجهاز ألول مرة، اتبع اإلرشادات التي تظهر على الشاشة إلعداد جهازك. إليقاف تشغيل جهازك، اضغط مطوالً على مفتاح التشغيل ثم حدد إيقاف تشغيل ← موافق. ● اتبع كل التحذيرات والتعليمات المنشورة من الموظفين المعتمدين عندما تكون في مناطق يحظر فيها استخدام األجهزة الالسلكية، مثل الطائرات والمستشفيات. ● الستخدام الخدمات غير الشبكية لجهازك فقط، حوِّل إلى وضع الطيران. اضغط مطوالً على مفتاح التشغيل وحدد نمط الطيران. بدء التشغيل 19 تعرَّف على جهازك ‹ تصميم الجهاز 1. ال تلمس أو تغطي منطقة الهوائي بيديك أو أي أشياء أخرى أثناء استخدام وظائف GPS. مفتاح الصفحة الرئيسية سماعة الهاتف شاشة اللمس مفتاح الرجوع الميكروفون مفتاح مستوى الصوت مفتاح القائمة منفذ متعدد األغراض مستشعر التقارب عدسة الكاميرا منفذ سماعة الرأس التشغيل/إعادة التشغيل/ القفل الهوائي الرئيسي الغالف الخلفي مخرج الصوت 1 هوائي GPSبدء التشغيل 2٠ ‹ المفاتيح المفتاح الوظيفة التشغيل/ / 1 إعادة التشغيل القفل قم بتشغيل الجهاز )اضغط بشكل مطول(؛ وادخل إلى القوائم السريعة )اضغط بشكل مطول(؛ وأعد تعيين الجهاز )اضغط مطوالً لمدة 1٠ - 8 ثوان ثم حرره(؛ واقفل شاشة اللمس. القائمة افتح قائمة الخيارات المتاحة على الشاشة الحالية؛ في وضع الجاهزية، وافتح تطبيق Google search )اضغط بشكل مطول(؛ افتح نافذة إدخال البحث أثناء استخدام بعض التطبيقات )اضغط بشكل مطول(. صفحة البدء العودة إلى شاشة الجاهزية؛ افتح قائمة بالتطبيقات الحديثة )اضغط بشكل مطول(. رجوع عودة إلى الشاشة السابقة. درجة الصوت اضبط مستوى صوت الجهاز. 1. في حالة حدوث أعطال شديدة، أو توقفات، أو تجمد في جهازك، فقد تحتاج إلى إعادة تعيين الجهاز الستعادة القدرات الوظيفية للجهاز.بدء التشغيل 21 ‹ رموز المؤشر قد تختلف الرموز المعروضة على الشاشة حسب منطقتك أو مزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. الرمز المعنى ال توجد إشارة قوة اإلشارة / USIM SIM النشطة أو نوع بطاقة شبكة GPRS متصلة شبكة EDGE متصلة شبكة UMTS متصلة شبكة HSDPA متصلة افتح Wi-Fi AP المتاحة Wi-Fi AP متصلة: البلوتوث فعال سماعة رأس البلوتوث متصلة GPS منشط مكالمة جارية مكالمة معلقة مكبر الصوت مفعل مكالمة فائتة متزامن مع الويب 1 1. قد تختلف هذه األيقونه حسب ضبط بطاقة SIM لديك.بدء التشغيل 22 الرمز المعنى تحميل البيانات تنزيل البيانات تحويل المكالمات فعال متصل بالكمبيوتر تم تنشيط ضبط نطاق USB ربط Wi-Fi نشط ال توجد بطاقة SIM أو USIM نص جديد أو رسالة وسائط رسالة بريد إلكتروني جديدة Google Mail الجديد رسالة بريد صوتي جديدة المنبه فعال تبليغ بالحدث التجوال )خارج منطقة الخدمة العادية( الوضع الصامت فعال تم تنشيط وضع االهتزاز تم تنشيط نمط الطيران جاري تشغيل مقطع موسيقى مقطع موسيقى تم إيقافه مؤقتاًبدء التشغيل 23 الرمز المعنى راديو FM مشغل في الخلفية حدث خطأ أو مطلوب اتخاذ حذر مستوى شحن البطارية 10:00 الوقت الحالي استخدام شاشة اللمس تتيح لك شاشة اللمس الموجودة بجهازك سهولة تحديد العناصر أو إجراء الوظائف. تعلم اإلجراءات األساسية الستخدام شاشة اللمس. ● لتفادي خدش شاشة اللمس، تجنب استخدام األدوات الحادة. ● تجنب اتصال شاشة اللمس بأجهزة كهربائية أخرى. تفريغ الكهرباء الساكنة يمكن أن يسبب قصورًا في عمل شاشة اللمس. ● تجنب اتصال شاشة اللمس بالمياه. يمكن تعطل شاشة اللمس في حال وجود الرطوبة أو عند تعرضها للمياه. ● للحصول على أفضل استخدام لشاشة اللمس، قم بإزالة ملصق حماية الشاشة قبل استخدام جهازك. ● تحتوي شاشة اللمس على طبقة تكشف الشحنات الكهربائية الصغيرة التي تنبعث من الجسم البشري. للحصول على أفضل أداء، انقر فوق شاشة اللمس بأطراف أصابعك. ولن تستجيب شاشة اللمس إلى لمسات األدوات الحادة، مثل اإلبرة أو القلم. بدء التشغيل 24 تحكم في شاشة اللمس من خالل اإلجراءات التالية: ● اللمس: المس مرة واحدة بإصبعك لتحديد قائمة، أو خيار، أو تطبيق، أو تشغيلهم. ● اضغط مع االستمرار على: اضغط على عنصر معين بشكل مطول ألكثر من ثانيتين لفتح قائمة الخيارات المنبثقة. ● اسحب: اضغط واسحب بإصبعك ألعلى، ألسفل، لليسار، لليمين للتنقل إلى العناصر الموجودة على القوائم. ● أدرج وأسقط: اضغط مع االستمرار بإصبعك على عنصر، ثم اسحب إصبعك لنقل العنصر. ● اضغط مرتين: اضغط مرتين بسرعة بإصبعك للتقريب أو للتبعيد أثناء عرض الصور أو صفحات الويب. ● يقوم جهازك بإيقاف تشغيل شاشة اللمس في حالة عدم استخدام الجهاز لفترة زمنية محددة. لتشغيل الشاشة، اضغط على مفتاح التشغيل أو مفتاح الشاشة الرئيسية. ● يمكنك أيضً ا ضبط وقت الضوء الخلفي. في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشاشة ← زمن توقف الشاشة. قفل أو إلغاء قفل شاشة اللمس والمفاتيح يمكنك قفل شاشة اللمس والمفاتيح لمنع حدوث أي عمليات غير مرغوب فيها على الجهاز. لقفل الهاتف، اضغط على مفتاح التشغيل. إللغاء القفل، قم بتشغيل الشاشة عن طريق الضغط على مفتاح التشغيل أو مفتاح الشاشة الرئيسية، ثم انقر فوق اإلطار بإصبعك. يمكنك تنشيط ميزة قفل الشاشة لمنع اآلخرين من استخدام بياناتك الشخصية أو الوصول إليها والمعلومات المحفوظة على جهازك. ◄ ص. 31بدء التشغيل 2٥ تعرف على شاشة الجاهزية عندما يكون الجهاز في وضع الجاهزية، سترى شاشة الجاهزية. من شاشة الجاهزية، يمكنك عرض رموز المؤشرات، والتطبيقات المصغرة، واالختصارات إلى التطبيقات، والعناصر األخرى. تحتوي شاشة الجاهزية على لوحات عديدة. تنقل إلى اليسار أو اليمين وصوالً إلى لوحة شاشة الجاهزية. ‹ إضافة عناصر إلى شاشة الجاهزية يمكنك تخصيص شاشة الجاهزية من خالل إضافة اختصارات إلى التطبيقات أو العناصر الموجودة في التطبيقات، األدوات، أو المجلدات. إلضافة عناصر إلى شاشة الجاهزية، 1 اضغط على ] [ ← إضافة أو اضغط مطوالً على المنطقة الفارغة الموجودة على شاشة الجاهزية. 2 حدد فئة العنصر ← عنصر: ● التطبيقات المصغرة: قم بإضافة تطبيقات مصغرة. التطبيقات المصغرة عبارة عن تطبيقات صغيرة توفر وظائف ومعلومات مناسبة على شاشة الجاهزية الخاصة بك. ● االختصارات: قم بإضافة اختصارات إلى العناصر، مثل التطبيقات، العالمات المرجعية، واألسماء. ● المجلدات: قم بإنشاء مجلد جديد أو إضافة مجلدات خاصة باألسماء خاصتك. ● خلفيات الشاشة: قم بضبط صورة للخلفية. ‹ نقل العناصر على شاشة الجاهزية 1 اضغط بشكل مطول على عنصر معين لنقله. 2 اسحب رمز العنصر إلى الموقع الذي تريده.بدء التشغيل 26 ‹ إزالة العناصر من شاشة الجاهزية 1 اضغط بشكل مطول على عنصر معين إلزالته. تظهر سلة المهمالت في الجزء السفلي من شاشة الجاهزية. 2 اسحب العنصر إلى سلة المهمالت. 3 عندما يتحول لون العنصر إلى األحمر، حرر العنصر. ‹ استخدام لوحة اإلشعارات في وضع الجاهزية أو أثناء استخدام تطبيق ما، اضغط على رموز المؤشر واسحب إصبعك ألسفل لفتح لوحة اإلشعارات. يمكنك تنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط ميزات االتصال الالسلكي والوصول إلى قائمة التبليغات، مثل الرسائل، أو المكالمات، أو األحداث أو حالة المعالجة. أيضً ا، يمكنك التبديل بين بطاقتيّ SIM أو USIM. إلخفاء اللوحة، اسحب الجزء السفلي من القائمة ألعلى. من لوحة اإلشعارات، يمكنك استخدام الخيارات التالية: ● WiFi: تنشيط ميزة Wi-Fi أو إلغاء تنشيطها. ◄ ص. 94 ● B/T: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط ميزة اتصال البلوتوث الالسلكي. ◄ ص. 91 ● GPS: تنشيط ميزة GPS أو إلغاء تنشيطها. ● الصوت/اهتزاز: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط وضع االهتزاز. ● تدوير تلقائي: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط االلتفاف التلقائي. قد تختلف الخيارات المتاحة حسب منطقتك أو مزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك.بدء التشغيل 27 ‹ إضافة أو إزالة اللوحات بشاشة الجاهزية يمكنك إضافة أو إزالة لوحات شاشة الجاهزية للتعرف على األدوات حسب تفضيالتك واحتياجاتك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، اضغط على ] [ ← تعديل. 2 قم بإضافة اللوحات أو إزالتها باستخدام الميزات التالية: ● إلزالة إحدى اللوحات، اضغط مطوالً على الصورة المصغرة للوحة، واسحبها إلى سلة المهمالت الموجودة في الجزء السفلي من الشاشة. ● إلضافة لوحة جديدة، حدد . ● لتغيير ترتيب اللوحات، اضغط مطوالً على الصورة المصغرة للوحة واسحبها إلى الموقع الذي تريده. 3 عند االنتهاء، اضغط على ] [. الوصول إلى التطبيقات للوصول إلى تطبيقات جهازك، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، حدد للوصول إلى قائمة التطبيقات. 2 تنقل لليسار أو اليمين وصوالً إلى شاشة أخرى. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد نقطة في الجزء العلوي من الشاشة لالنتقال إلى الشاشة المقابلة مباشرة. 3 حدد تطبيقاً. ● عندما تستخدم التطبيقات المقدمة من Google، يجب أن يكون لديك حساب Google. إذا لم يكن لديك حساب Google، قم بتسجيل حساب Google. ● يمكنك إضافة اختصار إلى تطبيق عن طريق الضغط بشكل مطول على رمز التطبيق من قائمة التطبيقات. يمكنك نقل الرمز إلى الموقع الذي تريده على شاشة الجاهزية.بدء التشغيل 28 4 اضغط على ] [ للعودة إلى الشاشة السابقة؛ اضغط على مفتاح الشاشة الرئيسية للعودة إلى شاشة الجاهزية. إذا قمت بتدوير الجهاز أثناء استخدام بعض الميزات، ستدور الواجهة تلقائيًا أيضً ا. لكي تمنع تدوير الواجهة، افتح لوحة اإلشعارات وحدد تدوير تلقائي. ‹ ترتيب التطبيقات يمكنك التعرف على التطبيقات الموجودة في قائمة التطبيقات عن طريق تغيير ترتيبها أو تجميعها في فئات لكي تناسب تفضيالتك واحتياجاتك. 1 في قائمة التطبيقات، اضغط على ] [ ← تعديل. 2 اضغط بشكل مطول على أي تطبيق. 3 اسحب رمز التطبيق إلى الموقع الذي تريده. يمكنك نقل رمز تطبيق إلى شاشة أخرى. يمكنك أيضاً نقل التطبيقات األكثر استخداماً ضمن . 4 اضغط على ] [ ← حفظ. ‹ الوصول إلى التطبيقات الحديثة 1 اضغط بشكل مطول على مفتاح الصفحة الرئيسية لعرض التطبيقات التي وصلت إليها مؤخرًا. 2 حدد تطبيقاً معيناً للوصول إليه.بدء التشغيل 29 ‹ استخدام مدير المهام جهازك متعدد المهام. يمكنه تشغيل أكثر من تطبيق في نفس الوقت. في حين، قد يؤدي تشغيل عدم مهام إلى تعليق الهاتف، أو تجميد القوائم، أو مشكالت في الذاكرة، أو استهالك إضافي للطاقة. لكي تتجنب حدوث هذه المشكالت، قم بإيقاف تشغيل البرامج غير الضرورية باستخدام مدير المهام. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد مدير المهام ← التطبيقات النشطة. تظهر قائمة تضم جميع التطبيقات التي يتم تشغيلها حاليًا على جهازك. 2 إلغالق تطبيق، حدد إنهاء. إلغالق جميع التطبيقات النشطة، حدد إلغاء الكل. تخصيص جهازك احصل على المزيد من جهازك عن طريق تخصيصه لكي يتوافق مع تفضيالتك. ‹ ضبط الوقت والتاريخ الحاليين 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← التاريخ والوقت. 2 اضبط التاريخ والوقت وقم بتغيير الخيارات األخرى. ‹ تشغيل أو إيقاف تشغيل نغمة اللمس في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← صوت ← تحديد مسموع.بدء التشغيل 3٠ ‹ ضبط مستوى صوت نغمات الرنين اضغط على مفتاح مستوى الصوت ألعلى أو أسفل لضبط مستوى صوت نغمة الرنين. ‹ االنتقال إلى الوضع الصامت لكتم الصوت أو إلغاء كتم الصوت لجهازك، قم بأي من اإلجراءات التالية: ● افتح لوحة اإلشعارات من أعلى الشاشة وحدد الصوت. ● اضغط مطوالً على مفتاح التشغيل وحدد نمط الصمت. يمكنك تعيين الجهاز لكي ينبهك بأحداث عديدة في الوضع ”الصامت“. في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← صوت ← اهتزاز ← دائما أو في الوضع صامت فقط. عندما تنتقل إلى الوضع الصامت، سيظهر بدالً من . ‹ تغيير نغمة الرنين الخاصة بك 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← صوت ← نغمة الرنين. 2 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM ← نغمة رنين الهاتف. 3 حدد نغمة رنين من القائمة وحدد موافق. ‹ تنشيط الحركة لتبديل النوافذ في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشاشة ← رسوم متحركة ← بعض تأثيرات الحركة أو كل تأثيرات الحركة. ‹ حدد خلفية لشاشة الجاهزية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، اضغط على ] [ ← خلفية الشاشة ← خيار. 2 حدد صورة.بدء التشغيل 31 3 حدد حفظ أو تعيين الخلفية ← بطاقة SIM أو USIM. ال تعد شركة سامسونج مسؤولة عن أي استخدام لصور أو خلفيات افتراضية يعرضها الجهاز. ‹ ضبط سطوع الشاشة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشاشة ← السطوع. 2 اسحب أداة التمرير لضبط مستوى السطوع. 3 حدد موافق. سيؤثر مستوى سطوع الشاشة على مدى سرعة الجهاز في استهالك طاقة البطارية. ‹ تعيين قفل الشاشة يمكنك قفل شاشة اللمس بواسطة تنشيط ميزة قفل الشاشة. سيحتاج جهازك إلى إدخال رمز القفل في كل مرة تقوم فيها بتشغيل الجهاز أو إلغاء قفل شاشة اللمس. ● إذا نسيت رمز إلغاء القفل، فأحضر الجهاز إلى ”مركز خدمة سامسونج“ إلعادة تعيينه. ● ال تعد شركة سامسونج مسؤولة عن أي فقد لرموز األمان أو المعلومات الخاصة أو أي تلفيات أخرى تنتج عن استخدام برامج غير قانونية. ضبط نمط إلغاء القفل 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان ← تعيين قفل الشاشة ← النمط. 2 اطلع على اإلرشادات وأنماط األمثلة التي تظهر على الشاشة وحدد التالي.بدء التشغيل 32 3 ارسم نمطاً من خالل سحب إصبعك لتوصيل 4 نقاط على األقل وحدد متابعة. 4 ارسم نمطاً مرة أخرى وحدد تأكيد. تعيين رمز PIN إللغاء القفل 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان ← تعيين قفل الشاشة ← PIN. 2 أدخل رمز PIN جديد )رقمي( وحدد متابعة. 3 أدخل رمز PIN مرة أخرى وحدد موافق. ضبط كلمة مرور إلغاء القفل 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان ← تعيين قفل الشاشة ← كلمة المرور. 2 أدخل كلمة مرور جديدة )أبجدية رقمية( وحدد متابعة. 3 أدخل كلمة المرور مرة أخرى وحدد موافق. ‹ قفل بطاقة SIM أو USIM يمكنك قفل جهازك بتنشيط رمز PIN المرفق مع بطاقة SIM أو USIM. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان ← إعداد قفل بطاقة SIM. 2 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM ← قفل بطاقة SIM. 3 أدخل رمز PIN وحدد موافق.بدء التشغيل 33 بمجرد تمكين قفل PIN، يجب عليك إدخال رمز PIN في كل مرة تقوم فيها بتشغيل الجهاز. ● إذا قمت بإدخال رمز PIN غير صحيح عدة مرات، سيتم قفل بطاقة SIM أو USIM. يجب عليك إدخال مفتاح إلغاء قفل PIN أي ما يُعرف بـ )PUK( لفتح بطاقة SIM أو USIM. ● إذا قمت بقفل بطاقة SIM أو USIM بإدخال رمز PUK غير صحيح، فأحضر البطاقة إلى مزود الخدمة لفتحها. ‹ تنشيط ميزة إيجاد موبايلي عندما يُدخل شخص ما بطاقة SIM أو USIM جديدة في جهازك، ستقوم ميزة Find my mobile تلقائيًا بإرسال رقم االسم إلى مستقبلين محددين لمساعدتك على تحديد موقع جهازك واستعادته. الستخدام هذه الميزة، تحتاج لحساب سامسونج حتى يمكنك التحكم في الجهاز من الويب عن بُعد. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان ← تنبيه تغيير بطاقة SIM. 2 اقرأ البنود والشروط، وحدد خانة االختيار المجاورة لـ أقبل جميع البنود الواردة أعاله وحدد قبول. 3 حدد تسجيل الدخول، وأدخل بريدك اإللكتروني وكلمة المرور الخاصة بحساب سامسونج الخاص بك ثم اختر تسجيل الدخول. إلنشاء حساب سامسونج، حدد إنشاء حساب. 4 حدد تنبيه مستلمي الرسالة. 5 أدخل كلمة المرور الخاصة بحساب سامسونج مرة أخرى وحدد موافق. 6 أدخل رقم هاتف يتضمن رمز بلد )مع +(. 7 أدخل الرسالة النصية المراد إرسالها إلى المستقبلين. 8 حدد تم.بدء التشغيل 34 التبديل بين بطاقة SIM أو USIM بمجرد إدخال بطاقة SIM أو USIM، يمكنك التبديل ذهابًا ورجوعً ا بين كل بطاقة. للتبديل بين بطاقة SIM أو USIM، افتح لوحة اإلشعارات وحدد رمز بطاقة SIM، باستثناء عندما يقوم الجهاز بإرسال الرسائل أو تلقيها، أو البيانات من الشبكة. يدعم جهازك االستعداد المزدوج بشبكتين مختلفتين. ال يمكنك إجراء مكالمات أو الرد عليها على الشبكتين في نفس الوقت. ‹ تنشيط بطاقة SIM أو USIM 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← إدارة بطاقة SIM. 2 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM، ثم حدد خانة االختيار المجاورة لـ تفعيل. ‹ قم بتغيير أسماء ورموز بطاقة SIM أو USIM 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← إدارة بطاقة SIM. 2 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM، ثم حدد، أو اسم بطاقة SIM أو USIM. 3 حدد تحديد رمز ← رمز. 4 حدد تسجيل االسم، قم بتغيير اسم بطاقة SIM أو USIM، وحدد موافق.بدء التشغيل 3٥ ‹ قم بتغيير ضبط بطاقة SIM أو USIM 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← إدارة بطاقة SIM. 2 قم بتغيير الخيارات التالية: الخيار الوظيفة تلقي المكالمات الواردة قم بتعيين إما السماح بتلقي المكالمات الواردة أو عدم السماح بتلقيها من بطاقة SIM أو USIM مع استخدام خدمات البيانات باستخدام بطاقة SIM أو USIM. يمكنك تلقي المكالمات فقط في حالة ما إذا كانت بطاقة SIM أو USIM األخرى غير المخصصة لخدمة البيانات متصلة بشبكة GPRS. شبكة خدمة البيانات حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM لخدمات البيانات. إدخال نص يمكنك إدخال نص عن طريق تحديد حروف على لوحة المفاتيح االفتراضية أو بإدخال كتابة يدوية على الشاشة. ال يمكنك إدخال نص ببعض اللغات. إلدخال نص، يتعين عليك تغيير لغة الكتابة إلى إحدى اللغات المدعمة. ◄ ص. 116 ‹ تغيير نوع لوحة المفاتيح يمكنك تغيير نوع لوحة المفاتيح. اضغط مطوالً على حقل إدخال النصوص وحدد طريقة اإلدخال ← نوع لوحة المفاتيح )لوحة مفاتيح سامسونج أو Swype(.بدء التشغيل 36 ‹ إدخال نص باستخدام لوحة مفاتيح سامسونج 1 حدد ← أنواع لوحة المفاتيح وحدد طريقة إدخال النصوص. يمكنك تحديد إحدى طرق إدخال النصوص )لوحة مفاتيح QWERTY أو لوحة مفاتيح تقليدية( أو طرق إدخال الكتابة اليدوية. 2 أدخل النص عن طريق تحديد المفاتيح الرقمية الهجائية أو الكتابة على الشاشة. يمكنك أيضً ا استخدام المفاتيح التالية: 1 2 3 5 4 6 7 الرقم الوظيفة 1 قم بتغيير الحالة. 2 قم بالتبديل بين وضع الرقم/الرمز ووضع ABC. 3 أدخل النص صوتيًا، حيث تتوفر هذه الرمز فقط عندما تقوم بتنشيط ميزة اإلدخال الصوتي للوحة مفاتيح سامسونج. قد ال تتوف هذه الميزة حسب لغة اإلدخال المحددة. 4 مسح إدخالك. 5 أبدأ سطر جديد. 6 أدخل ضبط لوحة المفاتيح؛ وقم بتغيير نوع لوحة المفاتيح )اضغط مطوالً(.بدء التشغيل 37 الرقم الوظيفة 7 إدخال مسافة. قد تختلف مهام هذا المفتاح حسب مزود الخدمة. ‹ إدخال نص باستخدام لوحة المفاتيح Swype 1 حدد الحرف األول من كلمة واسحب إصبعك إلى الحرف الثاني بدون تحرير اإلصبع من الشاشة. 2 تابع حتى تنتهي من الكلمة. 3 حرر اإلصبع الموجود على الحرف األخير. 4 عند عرض الكلمة بطريقة صحيحة، حدد إلدخال مسافة. إذا لم تظهر الكلمة الصحيحة، حدد كلمة بديلة من الالئحة التي تظهر. 5 كرر الخطوات من 1 إلى 4 إلتمام النص الخاص بك. ● يمكنك أيضً ا الضغط على المفاتيح إلدخال النص. ● يمكنك أيضً ا الضغط مطوالً على أحد المفاتيح إلدخال حروف موجودة على النصف العلوي من المفتاح. عندما تقوم بالضغط مطوالً على أحد المفاتيح حتى تظهر قائمة الحروف، يمكنك إدخال حروف خاصة ورموز.بدء التشغيل 38 يمكنك أيضً ا استخدام المفاتيح التالية: 1 4 3 5 2 6 7 الرقم الوظيفة 1 قم بتغيير الحالة. 2 أدخل الكلمة المطلوبة أو أضف كلمة جديدة إلى القاموس، ادخل إلى شاشة تلميح Swype )اضغط مطوالً(. 3 قم بالتبديل بين وضع الرموز/األرقام ووضع ABC/ األرقام. 4 إدخال مسافة. 5 مسح إدخالك. 6 أبدأ سطر جديد. 7 أدخل النص صوتيًا. قد ال تتوف هذه الميزة حسب لغة اإلدخال المحددة. ‹ نسخ نص ولصقه أثناء إدخالك للنص، يمكنك استخدام ميزة النسخ واللصق الستخدام النص في تطبيقات أخرى. 1 ضع المؤشر على النص الذي تريد نسخه. 2 حدد . 3 حدد تحديد كلمة أو اختيار الكل.بدء التشغيل 39 4 اسحب أو لتحديد النص الذي تريده. 5 حدد نسخ للنسخ، أوقص لقص النص داخل الحافظة. 6 في تطبيق آخر، ضع المؤشر في المكان الذي تريد لصق النص فيه. 7 حدد ← لصق إلدخال النص من الحافظة إلى حقل النص. تنزيل التطبيقات من Android Market بناءً على منصة Android، يمكن توسيع نطاق وظائف جهازك من خالل تثبيت تطبيقات إضافية. يوفر Android Market طريقة سهلة وسريعة للتسوق للحصول على األلعاب وتطبيقات الهاتف المحمول. ● قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ● سيقوم جهازك بحفظ ملفات المستخدم من التطبيقات المنزلة على الذاكرة الداخلية. ‹ تثبيت تطبيق 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Market. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد قبول. 3 ابحث عن ملف أو تطبيق وقم بتنزيله.بدء التشغيل 4٠ ‹ إلغاء تثبيت تطبيق 1 من الشاشة الرئيسية لـ Android Market، اضغط على ] [ ← تطبيقاتي. 2 حدد العنصر الذي تريد حذفه. 3 حدد إزالة ← موافق. تنزيل الملفات من الويب يمكن للملفات التي تقوم بتنزيلها من الويب أن تشتمل على فيروسات قد تتلف جهازك. لتقليل المخاطر التي تتعرض لها، قم بتنزيل الملفات من المصادر التي تثق بها فقط. تشتمل بعض ملفات الوسائط على إدارة حقوق رقمية لحماية حقوق الطبع والنشر. قد تؤدي هذه الحماية إلى منعك من تنزيل، نسخ، تعديل، أو نقل بعض الملفات. لتنزيل ملفات من الويب، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد اإلنترنت. 2 ابحث عن ملف أو تطبيق وقم بتنزيله. لتثبيت التطبيقات المنزلة من مواقع الويب األخرى بخالف Android Market، يجب عليك تحديد الضبط ← التطبيقات ← مصادر غير معروفة ← موافق. مزامنة البيانات يمكنك مزامنة البيانات مع ملقمات الويب المختلفة وأخذ نسخ احتياطية أو استرجاع بياناتك. بمجرد إتمام المزامنة، يبقى جهازك متصالً بالويب. إذا تم إجراء أي تغيير على الويب، ستظهر المعلومات المحدثة على جهازك وستبدأ المزامنة تلقائياً، والعكس بالعكس.بدء التشغيل 41 قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ إعداد حساب ملقم 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الحسابات والمزامنة. 2 حدد إضافة حساب ← نوع حساب. 3 اتبع اإلرشادات التي تظهر على الشاشة وأكمل إعداد الحساب. ‹ تنشيط المزامنة التلقائية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الحسابات والمزامنة. 2 حدد مزامنة تلقائية. 3 حدد حسابًا. 4 حدد التطبيقات التي تريد مزامنتها. الستثناء التطبيقات من المزامنة التلقائية، امسح خانات االختيار بجوار التطبيقات التي تريدها. ‹ مزامنة البيانات يدوياً 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الحسابات والمزامنة. 2 حدد حسابًا. 3 اضغط على ] [ ← المزامنة اآلن. سيبدأ جهازك في مزامنة البيانات التي تقوم بضبطها للمزامنة.االتصاالت 42 االتصاالت االتصال تعلم كيفية استخدام وظائف االتصال، مثل إجراء المكالمات والرد عليها، باستخدام الخيارات المتوفرة أثناء المكالمة أو تخصيص ميزات مرتبطة بالمكالمة واستخدامها. ‹ إجراء مكالمة أو الرد عليها يمكنك استخدام األزرار أو شاشة اللمس عند إجراء المكالمات، أو قبولها، أو إنهائها، أو رفضها. ● عندما تقوم بتشغيل مستشعر االقتراب، يتوقف تشغيل الجهاز تلقائيًا، ويقفل شاشة اللمس لكي تحول دون حدوث أي إدخال غير مقصود عندما تضع الجهاز بالقرب من وجهك. ◄ ص. 111 ● قد تتداخل الشحنات الكهربية الساكنة الصادرة من جسدك أو من مالبسك مع مستشعر االقتراب أثناء االتصال. إجراء مكالمة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← لوحة المفاتيح، وأدخل رمز منطقة ورقم هاتف. 2 حدد إلجراء مكالمة. 3 إلنهاء المكالمة، حدد إنهاء المكالمة. ● استخدم دليل الهاتف لحفظ األرقام التي تتصل بها بشكل متكرر. ◄ ص. 72 ● للوصول بسرعة إلى سجل المكالمات إلعادة االتصال باألرقام التي اتصلت بها مؤخراً، حدد ← السجالت.االتصاالت 43 الرد على مكالمة 1 عند ورود مكالمة، اسحب في أي اتجاه حتى تصل إلى حد الدائرة. عندما يرن الجهاز، اضغط على مفتاح الصوت لكتم صوت نغمة الرنين. 2 إلنهاء المكالمة، حدد إنهاء المكالمة. رفض مكالمة عند ورود مكالمة، اسحب في أي اتجاه حتى تصل إلى حد الدائرة. االتصال برقم دولي 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← لوحة المفاتيح، واضغط مطوالً على 0 إلدخال +. 2 أدخل الرقم الكامل الذي تريد االتصال به )كود الدولة، وكود المنطقة، ورقم الهاتف(، ثم حدد لالتصال بالرقم. ‹ استخدام سماعة رأس بواسطة توصيل السماعة المرفقة بالجهاز، يمكنك الرد على مكالمات والتحكم فيها دون استخدام األيدي: ● للرد على مكالمة، اضغط على زر السماعة. ● لرفض مكالمة، اضغط بشكل مطول على زر السماعة. ● لتعليق مكالمة أو استرجاع مكالمة معلقة أثناء المكالمة، اضغط بشكل مطول على زر سماعة الرأس. ● إلنهاء مكالمة، اضغط على زر السماعة.االتصاالت 44 ‹ استخدام الخيارات أثناء مكالمة يمكنك استخدام الخيارات التالية أثناء المكالمة: ● لتعديل مستوى الصوت، اضغط على مفتاح درجة الصوت إلى األعلى أو األسفل. ● لتعليق مكالمة، حدد . السترجاع مكالمة، حدد . ● لالتصال بالمكالمة الثانية، حدد إضافة مكالمة ثم اتصل برقم جديد. ● للرد على مكالمة ثانية، اسحب في أي اتجاه حتى تصل إلى حد الدائرة عند سماع صوت نغمة االنتظار. يسأل الجهاز ما إذا كنت تريد إنهاء المكالمة األولى أو تعليقها. يجب عليك االشتراك في خدمة انتظار المكالمات الستخدام هذه الميزة. ● لفتح شاشة االتصال، حدد لوحة الطلب. ● لتنشيط ميزة مكبر الصوت، حدد مكبر الصوت. في البيئات الصاخبة، قد تجد صعوبة في سماع بعض المكالمات أثناء استخدام ميزة السماعة. للحصول على أداء صوتي أفضل، استخدم وضع الهاتف العادي. ● إليقاف تشغيل الميكروفون حتى ال يسمعك الطرف اآلخر، حدد كتم. ● لالستماع والتحدث إلى الطرف اآلخر بواسطة سماعة رأس البلوتوث، حدد بلوتوث. ● للتبديل بين المكالمتين، حدد انتقال. ● إلجراء مكالمة متعددة األطراف )مكالمة مؤتمر(، قم بإجراء أو الرد على مكالمة ثانية وحدد ضم المكالمات عند االتصال بالطرف الثاني. كرر الخطوات إلضافة المزيد من األطراف. يجب عليك االشتراك في خدمة المكالمة متعددة األطراف الستخدام هذه الميزة.االتصاالت 4٥ ‹ عرض المكالمات التي لم يتم الرد عليها واالتصال بها سيعرض جهازك المكالمات التي لم يتم الرد عليها على شاشة العرض. لالتصال برقم المكالمة الفائتة، افتح لوحة اإلشعارات وحدد المكالمة الفائتة. ‹ استخدام الميزات اإلضافية يمكنك استخدام ميزات أخرى متنوعة ذات صلة بالمكالمة، مثل وضع رقم االتصال الثابت )FDN(، أو تحويل المكالمات. استخدام وضع رقم االتصال الثابت )FDN( في وضع FDN، سيقوم جهازك بحظر المكالمات الصادرة، باستثناء األرقام المخزنة في الئحة FDN. لتنشيط نمط االتصال الثابت )FDN(، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← ضبط المكالمة ← أرقام االتصال الثابتة ← تفعيل FDN. 2 أدخل رمز PIN2 المرفق مع بطاقة SIM أو USIM وحدد موافق. 3 حدد قائمة FDN وأضف األسماء المراد استخدامها في وضع FDN. ضبط تحويل المكالمات تحويل المكالمات عبارة عن ميزة شبكية تفيد في إرسال المكالمات الواردة إلى رقم آخر تحدده أنت. يمكنك ضبط هذه الميزة بشكل منفصل لظروف عدة عندما ال يكون بمقدورك الرد على المكالمات، مثل عندما تكون على الهاتف فعالً أو عندما تكون خارج منطقة الخدمة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← ضبط المكالمة ← تحويل المكالمة ← بطاقة SIM أو USIM. 2 حدد حالة. 3 أدخل رقم ليتم تحويل المكالمات إليه وحدد تفعيل. سيتم إرسال الضبط الخاص بك إلى الشبكة.االتصاالت 46 ضبط انتظار المكالمات انتظار المكالمات عبارة عن ميزة شبكية لتنبيهك بوجود مكالمة واردة أثناء إجرائك لمكالمة سابقة. في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← ضبط المكالمة ← إعدادات إضافية ← بطاقة SIM أو USIM ← انتظار المكالمات. سيتم إرسال الضبط الخاص بك إلى الشبكة. ‹ عرض سجالت المكالمات يمكنك عرض سجالت المكالمات المرشحة حسب أنواعها. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← السجالت. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← عرض بواسطة ← بطاقة SIM أو USIM ← خيار لفرز سجالت المكالمات. من سجالت المكالمات، يمكنك إجراء مكالمة أو إرسال رسالة مباشرة إلى اسم معين عن طريق النقر بسرعة على االسم على اليسار أو اليمين. 3 حدد سجالً لعرض تفاصيله. من عرض التفاصيل، يمكنك االتصال بالرقم، أو إرسال رسالة إلى الرقم، أو إضافة الرقم إلى دليل الهاتف. الرسائل تعلم كيفية إنشاء الرسائل النصية )SMS(، أو رسائل الوسائط المتعددة )MMS(، وإرسالها، باإلضافة إلى عرض الرسائل التي قمت بإرسالها أو استقبالها أو إدارتها. يمكنك أن تتحمل مصاريف إضافية إلرسال الرسائل أو استقبالها أثناء وجودك خارج منطقة الخدمة الرئيسية. لمعرفة التفاصيل، يُرجى االتصال بمزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك.االتصاالت 47 ‹ إرسال رسالة نصية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 حدد رسالة جديدة. 3 قم بإضافة مستلمي الرسالة. ● قم بإدخال أرقام الهواتف يدويًا وافصل بينها بفاصلة منقوطة أو فاصلة. ● حدد أرقام الهواتف من القوائم بواسطة تحديد خيارات ضمن حقل المستلمين. 4 حدد أدخل الرسالة هنا وأدخل نص الرسالة. إلدخال تعبيرات، اضغط على ] [ ← إدخال ابتسامة. 5 حدد إرسال إلرسال الرسالة. ‹ إرسال رسالة وسائط متعددة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 حدد رسالة جديدة. 3 قم بإضافة مستلمي الرسالة. ● أدخل أرقام الهواتف أو عناوين البريد اإللكتروني يدويًا، مع الفصل بينها بفاصلة منقوطة أو فاصلة. ● حدد أرقام الهواتف أو عناوين البريد اإللكتروني من القوائم بواسطة تحديد خيارات ضمن حقل المستلمين. عند إدخال عنوان بريد إلكتروني، سيقوم الجهاز بتحويل الرسالة لتكون بمثابة رسالة وسائط متعددة. 4 اضغط على ] [ ← إضافة موضوع وأدخل عنوان الرسالة. 5 حدد أدخل الرسالة هنا وأدخل نص الرسالة. إلدخال تعبيرات، اضغط على ] [ ← إدخال ابتسامة.االتصاالت 48 6 حدد وأضف عنصراً. يمكنك تحديد ملف من قائمة الملفات أو إنشاء صورة أو فيديو أو صوت جديد. 7 حدد إرسال إلرسال الرسالة. ‹ عرض رسالة نصية أو رسالة وسائط متعددة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . يتم تجميع رسائلك في مؤشرات ترابط الرسائل حسب االسم، مثل messenger. 2 حدد اسمًا. 3 بالنسبة لرسالة الوسائط المتعددة، حدد رسالة لعرض تفاصيلها. ‹ االستماع إلى رسائل البريد الصوتي إذا قمت بضبط المكالمات الفائتة المراد تحويلها إلى خادم البريد الصوتي، فقد يترك المتصلون رسائل صوتية في حالة عدم ردك على المكالمات الواردة. للنفاذ إلى واردة البريد الصوتي واالستماع إلى رسائل البريد الصوتي، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← لوحة المفاتيح ثم اضغط مطوالً على 1. 2 اتبع التعليمات الواردة من خادم البريد الصوتي. يجب عليك حفظ رقم خادم البريد الصوتي قبل النفاذ إلى الخادم. يمكن لمزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك إمدادك بالرقم.االتصاالت 49 Google Mail يمكنك استئناف رسائل البريد اإللكتروني الجديدة من ™Google Mail إلى البريد الوارد الخاص بك. عندما تصل إلى هذا التطبيق، تظهر شاشة البريد الوارد. يظهر العدد اإلجمالي للرسائل غير المقروءة في شريط العنوان وتظهر الرسائل غير المقروءة بخط عريض. ● قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ● قد يتم تعليم قائمة Google Mail بشكل مختلف حسب مزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ إرسال رسالة بريد إلكتروني 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Gmail. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد موافق. 3 اضغط على ] [ ← إنشاء. 4 أدخل اسماً أو عنواناً في حقل المستقبلين. 5 أدخل موضوعاً ورسالة. 6 إلرفاق ملف صورة، اضغط على ] [ ← إرفاق ← ملف. 7 حدد إلرسال الرسالة. ‹ عرض رسائل البريد اإللكتروني 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Gmail. 2 حدد رسالة بريد إلكتروني.االتصاالت ٥٠ من عرض الرسالة، استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● للرد على الرسالة، حدد . ● للرد على الرسالة متضمنة كل المستقبلين، حدد ← الرد على الكل. ● لتحويل الرسالة إلى أشخاص آخرين، حدد ← إعادة توجيه. ● إلضافة نجمة إلى الرسالة، حدد . ● لعرض مرفق، حدد معاينة. لحفظه على جهازك، حدد تنزيل. ● لحفظ الرسالة، حدد وضع في األرشيف. ● لحذف الرسالة، حدد حذف. ● لالنتقال إلى الرسالة التالية أو السابقة، حدد أو . ‹ تنظيم البريد اإللكتروني حسب العالمات يمكنك تنظيم البريد اإللكتروني بواسطة وضع عالمة على الرسائل. يمكنك فرز الرسائل حسب مرشح العالمات. إضافة عالمة إلى رسالة 1 من شاشة البريد الوارد، اضغط على رسالة معينة بشكل مطول. 2 حدد تغيير التصنيفات. 3 حدد عالمة إلضافتها وحدد موافق. رسائل المرشح 1 من شاشة البريد الوارد، اضغط على ] [ ← االنتقال إلى التصنيفات. 2 حدد عالمة الرسائل التي تريد عرضها.االتصاالت ٥1 بريد إلكتروني تعلم كيفية إرسال رسائل بريد إلكتروني أو عرضها بواسطة حساب البريد اإللكتروني الشخصي أو الخاص بالشركة. ‹ ضبط حساب بريد إلكتروني 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد بريد إلكتروني. 2 أدخل عنوان بريدك اإللكتروني وكلمة المرور الخاصة بك. 3 حدد التالي )بخصوص حسابات البريد اإللكتروني العامة، مثل Google Mail وYahoo( أو إعداد يدوي )بخصوص حسابات البريد اإللكتروني للشركة األخرى(. 4 اتبع اإلرشادات التي تظهر على الشاشة. عند االنتهاء من إعداد حساب بريد إلكتروني، يتم تنزيل رسائل البريد اإللكتروني على جهازك. إذا قمت بإنشاء أكثر من حسابين، يمكنك التبديل بين حسابات البريد اإللكتروني؛ وحدد اسم حساب في الجزء العلوي األيمن من الشاشة وحدد الحساب الذي تريد استرجاع الرسائل منه. ‹ إرسال رسالة بريد إلكتروني 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد بريد إلكتروني ← حساب بريد إلكتروني. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← إنشاء. 3 قم بإضافة مستلمي الرسالة. ● أدخل عناوين البريد اإللكتروني يدويًا، مع الفصل بينها بفاصلة منقوطة أو فاصلة. ● حدد عناوين البريد اإللكتروني من القوائم بواسطة تحديد خيارات ضمن حقل المستلمين.االتصاالت ٥2 4 حدد حقل Cc/Bcc وأضف المزيد من المستلمين. 5 حدد حقل الموضوع وأدخل موضوعً ا. 6 حدد حقل إدخال النصوص وأدخل نص البريد اإللكتروني الخاص بك. 7 حدد إرفاق وأرفق ملفاً. يمكنك تحديد ملف من قائمة الملفات أو إنشاء صورة أو فيديو أو صوت جديد. ال يمكنك إرفاق الملفات المحمية بـ ”إدارة الحقوق الرقمية“ )DRM(. 8 حدد إرسال إلرسال الرسالة. إذا لم تكن متصالً باإلنترنت أو كنت خارج منطقة الخدمة، يتم وضع الرسالة في صندوق الوارد حتى تتصل باإلنترنت في منطقة الخدمة لديك. ‹ عرض رسالة بريد إلكتروني عندما تفتح حساب بريد إلكتروني، يمكنك عرض رسائل البريد اإللكتروني التي تم استرجاعها مسبقًا دون االتصال باإلنترنت أو االتصال بخادم البريد اإللكتروني لعرض الرسائل الجديدة. بعد استرجاع رسائل البريد اإللكتروني، يمكنك عرضها دون االتصال باإلنترنت. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد بريد إلكتروني ← حساب بريد إلكتروني. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← إنعاش لتحديث قائمة الرسائل. 3 حدد رسالة بريد إلكتروني. من عرض الرسالة، استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● للرد على الرسالة، اضغط على ] [ ← رد. ● لتحويل الرسالة إلى أشخاص آخرين، اضغط على ] [ ← تحويل.االتصاالت ٥3 ● لمسح الرسالة، اضغط على ] [ ← مسح. ● لنقل الرسالة إلي مجلد آخر، اضغط على ] [ ← االنتقال إلى مجلد. ● لتحميل صور من الرسالة، اضغط على ] [ ← عرض الصور. ● لتغيير حجم النص، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← حجم النص. ● إلضافة عنوان البريد اإللكتروني إلى دليل الهاتف، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← عرض االسم. ● لحفظ الرسالة كحدث، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← حفظ في التقويم. ● لعرض مرفق، حدد عنصر المرفق. لحفظه على بطاقة الذاكرة، حدد . Talk تعلم كيفية الدردشة مع األصدقاء والعائلة باستخدام ™Google Talk. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ إضافة أصدقاء إلى قائمة األصدقاء 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Talk. تعرض قائمة األصدقاء كل حسابات Google Talk في مرة واحدة. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← إضافة صديق. 3 أدخل عنوان بريد إلكتروني للصديق وحدد إرسال الدعوة. عند قبول صديقك للدعوة، تتم إضافة الصديق إلى قائمة األصدقاء.االتصاالت ٥4 ‹ بدء دردشة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Talk. 2 حدد صديقاً من قائمة األصدقاء. يتم فتح شاشة الدردشة. 3 أدخل الرسالة الخاصة بك وحدد إرسال. إلدخال تعبيرات، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← إدخال وجه مبتسم. 4 للتحويل بين الدردشات النشطة، اضغط على ] [ ← تبديل الدردشات. 5 إلنهاء الدردشة، اضغط على ] [ ← إنهاء الدردشة. Social Hub تعلم كيفية الوصول إلى ™Social Hub، تطبيق التوصيل المتكامل للبريد اإللكتروني لخدمة الشبكة االجتماعية )SNS(، أو رسائل البريد اإللكتروني، أو الرسائل، أو الرسائل الفورية، أو األسماء أو معلومات التقويم. يُرجى زيارة socialhub.samsungapps.com لمزيد من التفاصيل. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Social Hub. 2 راجع المحتويات المقدمة من Social Hub، وتمتع باستخدامها.الترفيه ٥٥ الترفيه تصميم تعلم كيفية التقاط الصور والفيديو وعرضهما. يمكنك التقاط صور بمستويات دقة تصل إلى 1٥36 x 2٠48 بكسل )3.2 ميجا بكسل( وفيديو بمستويات دقة تصل إلى 24٠ × 32٠ بكسل. الستخدام هذه الميزة، يجب عليك أوالً إدخال بطاقة ذاكرة. ● تظهر واجهة الكاميرا فقط في اتجاه أفقي. ● اضغط على الشاشة إلخفاء أو عرض الرموز في العين الفاحصة. ● يتوقف تشغيل الكاميرا تلقائيًا في حالة عدم استخدامها لفترة زمية محددة. ● قد تختلف سعة الذاكرة حسب مشهد التصوير أو ظروف التصوير.الترفيه ٥6 ‹ التقاط صورة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الكاميرا لتشغيل الكاميرا. 2 ركز العدسة على الهدف المراد تصويره إلجراء أي تعديالت ضرورية. 2 3 4 1 6 5 7 الرقم الوظيفة 1 تغيير نمط التصوير. 2 تغيير نمط المشهد. 3 اضبط السطوع. 4 تغيير ضبط الكاميرا. 5 التحويل إلى مسجل الفيديو. 6 التقاط صورة. 7 عرض آخر صورة تم التقاطها. 3 اضغط على مفتاح درجة الصوت للتقريب أو للتبعيد. قد ال تتوفر وظيفة التركيز عند التصوير بأعلى مستويات الدقة. 4 حدد اللتقاط صورة. يتم حفظ الصورة تلقائيًا.الترفيه ٥7 بعد التقاط صورة، حدد لعرض الصور التي تم التقاطها. ● لعرض المزيد من الصور، تنقل إلى اليسار أو اليمين. ● للتكبير، ضع إصبعين على الشاشة وافرق بينهما. للتصغير، حرك أصابعك بالقرب من بعضهما. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد أو أو الضغط المزدوج على الشاشة. ● إلرسال صورة إلى آخرين، حدد مشاركة. ● لضبط صورة كخلفية أو صورة معرف المتصل السم معين، حدد تعيين. ● لحذف صورة، حدد مسح. ‹ التقاط صور عن طريق استخدام خيارات مضبوطة مسبقاً لمشاهد مختلفة توفر الكاميرا الخاصة بك إعدادات معرفة مسبقًا لمشاهد مختلفة. يمكنك ببساطة تحديد الوضع الصحيح لحاالت التصوير واألهداف المراد تصويرها. على سبيل المثال، عندما تلتقط صورًا في الليل، حدد النمط الليلي الذي يستخدم تعرض ممتد. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الكاميرا لتشغيل الكاميرا. 2 حدد ← مشهد. 3 قم بإجراء أية تعديالت ضرورية. 4 حدد اللتقاط صورة.الترفيه ٥8 ‹ التقاط صورة في وضع لقطة االبتسامة يمكن للكاميرا الخاصة بك التعرف على وجوه األشخاص ومساعدتك على التقاط الصور الخاصة بالوجوه المبتسمة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الكاميرا لتشغيل الكاميرا. 2 حدد ← لقطة اإلبتسامة. 3 قم بإجراء أية تعديالت ضرورية. 4 ركز عدسة الكاميرا على الهدف المراد تصويره وحدد . يقوم جهازك بالتعرف على األشخاص الموجودين في صورة معينة ويتتبع حركات ابتساماتهم. عندما يبتسم الهدف المراد تصويره، يقوم الجهاز تلقائيًا بالتقاط صورة. ‹ التقاط صورة بانورامية يمكنك التقاط صور بانورامية عريضة باستخدام وضع التصوير البانورامي. وهذا الوضع يعتبر مناسبًا اللتقاط صور فوتوغرافية ألوضاع أفقية. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الكاميرا لتشغيل الكاميرا. 2 حدد ← بانوراما. 3 قم بإجراء أية تعديالت ضرورية. 4 حدد اللتقاط أول صورة. 5 حرك الجهاز ببطء في أي اتجاه وقم بمحاذاة اإلطار األخضر باستخدام العين الفاحصة. عند محاذاة اإلطار األخضر وشاشة التصوير، ستقوم الكاميرا تلقائيًا بالتقاط الصورة التالية. 6 كرر الخطوة رقم ٥ إلتمام الصورة البانورامية.الترفيه ٥9 ‹ تخصيص ضبط الكاميرا قبل التقاط صورة، حدد ← للنفاذ إلى الخيارات التالية: الخيار الوظيفة المؤقت تحديد طول التأخير قبل التقاط الكاميرا للصورة. الدقة تغيير خيار الدقة. توازن اللون األبيض تعديل توازن األلوان حسب ظروف اإلضاءة. المؤثرات قم بتطبيق تأثير خاص. القياس تحديد نوع مقياس التعرض. جودة الصورة ضبط مستوى الجودة للصور. قبل التقاط صورة، حدد ← للنفاذ إلى اإلعدادات التالية: الضبط الوظيفة خطوط اإلرشاد عرض التعليمات على شاشة المعاينة. إعادة عرض ضبط الكاميرا لعرض الصورة التي تم التقاطها.الترفيه 6٠ الضبط الوظيفة GPS ضبط الكاميرا لتضمين معلومات الموقع لصورك. ● لتحسين إشارات GPS، تجنب التصوير في األماكن التي تعاق فيها اإلشارة، كما هو الحال بين المباني أو في المناطق المنخفضة، أو في ظروف الطقس السيئة. ● قد يظهر موقعك في الصور عندما تقوم بتحميلها على الويب. لكي تتجنب ذلك، قم بإلغاء تنشيط ضبط رمز GPS. إرجاع إرجاع القوائم وخيارات التصوير. ‹ تسجيل فيديو 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الكاميرا لتشغيل الكاميرا. 2 حدد للتحويل إلى كاميرا الفيديو. 3 ركز العدسة على الهدف المراد تصويره إلجراء أي تعديالت ضرورية. 1 2 3 4 6 5الترفيه 61 الرقم الوظيفة 1 تغيير وضع التسجيل )إلرفاق رسالة وسائط متعددة أو للحفظ يدويًا(. 2 اضبط السطوع. 3 تغيير ضبط مسجل الفيديو. 4 التحويل إلى الكاميرا. 5 قم بتسجيل فيديو. 6 اعرض آخر فيديو قمت بتسجيله. 4 اضغط على مفتاح درجة الصوت للتقريب أو للتبعيد. قد ال تتوفر وظيفة التركيز عند التسجيل بأعلى مستويات الدقة. 5 حدد لبدء التسجيل. 6 حدد إليقاف التسجيل. يتم حفظ الفيديو تلقائيًا. قد يتعذر على كاميرا الفيديو تسجيل الفيديو بشكل مناسب على بطاقة الذاكرة بسرعة نقل بطيئة. بعد تسجيل الفيديو، حدد لعرض الفيديو الذي تم تسجيله. ● لعرض المزيد من الفيديو، تنقل إلى اليسار أو اليمين. ● إلرسال فيديو إلى آخرين، حدد مشاركة. ● لتشغيل فيديو، حدد تشغيل. ● لحذف فيديو، حدد مسح.الترفيه 62 ‹ تخصيص ضبط كاميرا الفيديو قبل تسجيل فيديو، حدد ← للوصول إلى الخيارات التالية: الخيار الوظيفة المؤقت تحديد طول التأخير قبل بدء تصوير الفيديو. الدقة تغيير خيار الدقة. توازن اللون األبيض تعديل توازن األلوان حسب ظروف اإلضاءة. المؤثرات قم بتطبيق تأثير خاص. جودة الفيديو ضبط مستوى الجودة للفيديو. قبل تسجيل فيديو، حدد ← للنفاذ إلى الضبط التالي: الضبط الوظيفة خطوط اإلرشاد عرض التعليمات على شاشة المعاينة. إعادة عرض ضبط الكاميرا لعرض الفيديو المسجل. إرجاع قم بإعادة تعيين القوائم وخيارات التسجيل. األستديو تعرف على طريقة عرض الصور وتشغيل لقطات الفيديو المحفوظة على بطاقة الذاكرة. الترفيه 63 ‹ تنسيقات الملفات المدعمة النوع التنسيق الصورة االمتداد: wbmp ،png ،jpg ،gif ،bmp الفيديو ● االمتداد: mkv ،mp4 ،3gp ● الترميز: mpeg4 ،H.264 ،H.263 ● ال يتم دعم بعض تنسيقات الملفات حسب برنامج الجهاز. ● إذا تجاوز حجم الملف الذاكرة المتوفرة، فيمكن ظهور خطأ عند فتح الملفات. ● قد تختلف جودة العرض حسب المحتوى. ● قد ال يتم تشغيل بعض الملفات بطريقة صحيحة حسب طريقة ترميزها. ‹ عرض صورة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد استوديو. 2 حدد مجلداً. 3 لتغيير وضع العرض، حدد أو بالجزء العلوي األيمن من الشاشة. 4 حدد صورة )بدون رمز( لعرضها. أثناء عرض صورة، استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● لعرض المزيد من الصور، تنقل إلى اليسار أو اليمين. ● للتكبير، ضع إصبعين على الشاشة وافرق بينهما. للتصغير، حرك أصابعك بالقرب من بعضهما. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد أو أو الضغط المزدوج على الشاشة.الترفيه 64 ● لبدء عرض الشرائح في المجلد المحدد، حدد عرض الشرائح. اضغط على الشاشة إليقاف عرض الشرائح. ● إلرسال صورة إلى آخرين، حدد القائمة ← مشاركة. ● لحذف صورة، حدد القائمة ← مسح. ● الستخدام ميزات إضافية مع الصورة، حدد القائمة ← المزيد واستخدم الخيارات التالية: - تفاصيل: اعرض تفاصيل الصورة. - تعيين: تعيين الصورة على هيئة خلفية شاشة أو كصورة هوية متصل ألحد األسماء. - اقتصاص: قم باقتصاص صورة من صورة. - تدوير لليسار: قم بتدوير صورة عكس اتجاه عقارب الساعة. - تدوير لليمين: قم بتدوير صورة في اتجاه عقارب الساعة. ‹ تشغيل فيديو 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد استوديو. 2 حدد فيديو )مع الرمز ( لتشغيله. 3 قم بتدوير الهاتف للعرض األفقي. 4 تحكم في العرض باستخدام المفاتيح التالية: 2 5 1 4 3 الرقم الوظيفة 1 إيقاف العرض مؤقتًا؛ حدد الستئناف العرض. 2 البحث للخلف في ملف.الترفيه 6٥ الرقم الوظيفة 3 انتقل إلى نقطة في الملف عن طريق سحب الشريط أو الضغط عليه. 4 البحث لألمام في ملف. 5 قم بتشذيب مقطع من فيديو. الموسيقى تعلم كيفية االستماع إلى موسيقاك المفضلة مباشرة مع مشغل الموسيقى. يدعم مشغل الموسيقى تنسيقات الملفات التالية: mp4 ،3gp ،m4a ،mp3، ogg )الترميز: eaac+ ،aac+ ،aac ،)ogg( vorbis ،mp3، midi ،wav ،amr-nb/wb(. الستخدام هذه الميزة، يجب عليك أوالً إدخال بطاقة ذاكرة. ● ال يتم دعم بعض تنسيقات الملفات حسب برنامج الجهاز. ● إذا تجاوز حجم الملف الذاكرة المتوفرة، فيمكن ظهور خطأ عند فتح الملفات. ● قد تختلف جودة العرض حسب المحتوى. ● قد ال يتم تشغيل بعض الملفات بطريقة صحيحة حسب طريقة ترميزها. ‹ إضافة ملفات موسيقى إلى بطاقة الذاكرة ابدأ بنقل الملفات إلى بطاقة الذاكرة: ● تنزيل من الويب الالسلكي. ◄ ص. 8٠ ● تنزيل من جهاز الكمبيوتر باستخدام برنامج Samsung Kies. ◄ ص. 98 ● استقبال عبر البلوتوث. ◄ ص. 93 ● انسخ إلى بطاقة الذاكرة الخاصة بك. ◄ ص. 98الترفيه 66 ‹ تشغيل الموسيقى بعد نقل ملفات موسيقى إلى بطاقة الذاكرة، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الموسيقى. 2 حدد فئة موسيقى ← ملف موسيقى. 3 تحكم في العرض باستخدام المفاتيح التالية: 4 3 1 2 5 6 7 8 الرقم الوظيفة 1 تنشيط نظام الصور المحيط قناة 5.1 عند توصيل سماعة الرأس. 2 انتقل إلى نقطة في الملف عن طريق سحب الشريط أو الضغط عليه. 3 إعادة تشغيل العرض، التجاوز للخلف )الضغط المزدوج(؛ البحث للخلف في ملف )اضغط مطوالً(. 4 إيقاف العرض مؤقتًا؛ حدد الستئناف العرض. 5 تغيير وضع التكرار )إيقاف، أو تكرار ملف واحد، أو تكرار كل الملفات(. 6 قم بنتنشيط وضع الخلط. 7 افتح قائمة العرض.الترفيه 67 الرقم الوظيفة 8 التجاوز لألمام؛ البحث لألمام في ملف )اضغط بشكل مطول(. ● يمكنك التحكم في مشغل الموسيقى من خالل سماعة الرأس. في وضع الجاهزية، اضغط مع االستمرار على زر سماعة الرأس لتشغيل مشغل الموسيقى. اضغط على زر سماعة الرأس لبدء التشغيل أو إليقاف التشغيل مؤقتًا. ● يقوم ™SRS CS Headphone بتوفير تجربة صوتية محيطية 5.1 عبر مكبرات الصوت القياسية أو سماعات األذن عند االستماع إلى المحتوي متعدد القنوات، مثل أفالم DVD. ● يقوم ™WOW HD بتحسين جودة تشغيل الصوت، مع توفير تجربة ترفيهية ديناميكية ثالثية األبعاد 3D يميزها وضوح تردد جهير وعالٍ يتسم بالعمق والقوة. ‹ استخدام ميزة خلط الحفلة عندما تقوم بتشغيل ميزة ”خلط موسيقى الحفلة“، يحدد جهازك ملفات الموسيقى ويقوم بتشغيلها بطريقة عشوائية. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الموسيقى. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← خلط الحفلة. 3 إليقاف تشغيل ميزة خلط الحفلة، اضغط على ] [ ← إيقاف خلط الحفلة.الترفيه 68 ‹ تخصيص ضبط مشغل الموسيقى 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الموسيقى. 2 حدد فئة ← ملف موسيقى. 3 اضغط على ] [ ← الضبط. 4 قم بتعديل اإلعدادات التالية لتخصيص مشغل الموسيقى الخاص بك: الخيار الوظيفة 5.1 القناة حدد ما إذا كنت تريد تنشيط نظام الصور المحيط بقناة 5.1 المرئية عند توصيل سماعة الرأس. المعادل حدد نوع معادل الصوت االفتراضي. راديو FM تعلم كيفية االستماع إلى الموسيقى واألخبار على راديو FM. لالستماع إلى راديو FM، يجب عليك توصيل سماعة رأس تعمل كهوائي راديو. ‹ استمع إلى راديو FM 1 قم بتوصيل سماعة رأس بالجهاز. 2 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد راديو FM. يقوم راديو FM بمسح المحطات المتاحة ضوئيًا وحفظها تلقائيًا. في المرة األولى التي تقوم فيها بتشغيل راديو FM، سيبدأ التوليف التلقائي.الترفيه 69 3 التحكم في راديو FM باستخدام المفاتيح التالية: 3 4 5 1 3 2 الرقم الوظيفة 1 تشغيل راديو FM أو إيقاف تشغيله. 2 التوليف الدقيق للتردد. 3 البحث عن محطة راديو متوفرة. 4 عدّل مستوى الصوت. 5 إضافة محطة الراديو الحالية إلى قائمة التفضيل. ‹ حفظ محطة راديو تلقائياً 1 قم بتوصيل سماعة رأس بالجهاز. 2 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد راديو FM. 3 اضغط على ] [ ← بحث ← خيار مسح. يقوم راديو FM بمسح المحطات المتاحة ضوئيًا وحفظها تلقائيًا.الترفيه 7٠ ‹ إضافة محطة الراديو إلى قائمة التفضيل 1 قم بتوصيل سماعة رأس بالجهاز. 2 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد راديو FM. 3 االنتقال إلى محطة الراديو التي تريدها. 4 حدد إلضافة محطة راديو إلى قائمة المفضلة. يمكنك إضافة اسم لمحطة الراديو، أو إزالة محطة راديو، والضغط مع االستمرار على محطة الراديو الموجودة في القائمة ”المفضلة“ وحدد حذف أو تغيير االسم. ‹ تخصيص إعدادات راديو FM 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد راديو FM. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← الضبط. 3 قم بتعديل اإلعدادات التالية لتخصيص راديو FM: الخيار الوظيفة المنطقة تحديد منطقتك. التشغيل في خلفية العرض ضبط ما إذا كنت تريد تشغيل راديو FM في الخلفية أثناء استخدام تطبيقات أخرى. في حالة تشغيل هذه الميزة، يمكنك التحكم في راديو FM من لوحة اإلشعارات.الترفيه 71 الخيار الوظيفة إظهار هوية القناة ضبط ما إذا كنت تريد عرض معرف المحطة على شاشة راديو FM؛ تتوفر معرفات المحطات فقط من محطات الراديو التي توفر تلك المعلومات. التردد البديل ضبط ما إذا كنت ترغب في أن يحاول راديو FM إعادة توليف محطة راديو عندما تكون اإلشارة ضعيفة أم ال. إيقاف التشغيل التلقائي لراديو FM ضبط راديو FM على إيقاف التشغيل التلقائي بعد فترة زمنية محددة.المعلومات الشخصية 72 المعلومات الشخصية األسماء تعرف على كيفية إنشاء وإدارة قائمة تضم األسماء الشخصية وأسماء العمل الخاصة بك. يمكنك حفظ األسماء، وأرقام الهواتف الجوالة، وأرقام الهواتف المنزلية، وعناوين البريد اإللكتروني، وأعياد الميالد والمزيد الخاصة باألسماء الخاصة بك. ‹ إنشاء اسم 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 حدد ← موقع ذاكرة. وإذا كان لديك أكثر من حساب، فحدد حسابًا ترغب في إضافة االسم إليه. 3 أدخل معلومات جهة االتصال. 4 حدد حفظ إلضافة االسم إلى الذاكرة. يمكنك أيضً ا إنشاء جهة اتصال من شاشة االتصال. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← لوحة المفاتيح. 2 أدخل رقم هاتف. 3 حدد إضافة إلى األسماء ← إنشاء جهة اتصال جديدة. 4 حدد موقع ذاكرة. وإذا كان لديك أكثر من حساب، فحدد حسابًا ترغب في إضافة االسم إليه. 5 أدخل معلومات جهة االتصال. 6 حدد حفظ إلضافة االسم إلى الذاكرة.المعلومات الشخصية 73 ‹ إيجاد اسم 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 تنقل إلى األعلى أو األسفل على قائمة األسماء. يمكنك أيضً ا سحب إصبعك بطول المؤشر الموجود على الجانب األيمن للتمرير السريع خالل القوائم. 3 حدد اسماً لجهة االتصال. بمجرد العثور على اسم معين، يمكنك استخدام الخيارات التالية: ● اتصل بجهة االتصال، حدد رقم هاتف. ● إلرسال رسالة، حدد رسالة. ● إلرسال رسالة بريد إلكتروني، حدد عنوان بريد إلكتروني. ● لتعديل معلومات االسم اضغط على ] [ ← تعديل. ● لضبط الصورة حسبما تفضل، حدد . ‹ ضبط رقم االتصال السريع 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← إعداد االتصال السريع. 3 حدد رقم موقع ← اسم. 4 حدد رقم الهاتف )إذا لزم األمر(. يمكنك االتصال بهذا الرقم بسرعة عن طريق النقر فوق رقم الموقع بشكل مطول من شاشة االتصال. ‹ إنشاء بطاقة أسماء 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← وضعي.المعلومات الشخصية 74 3 أدخل التفاصيل الشخصية الخاصة بك. 4 حدد حفظ. يمكنك إرسال بطاقة االسم الخاصة بك عن طريق إرفاقها برسالة أو بريد إلكتروني أو نقلها بواسطة ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية. ‹ استرجع األسماء من حسابات المجتمع الخاصة بك. يمكنك عرض قائمة حسابات مواقع الويب المجتمعية وتحديد حساب إلضافة اسم من موقع الويب إلى أسماء الهاتف الخاصة بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← عرض أصدقاء SNS. 3 حدد حسابًا. 4 حدد األسماء وحدد إضافة. يمكنك إضافة تعليقات إلى الرسائل المحملة بواسطة األسماء وعرض الصور التي تمت مشاركتها. في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات واسم ← األنشطة أو وسائط. ‹ إنشاء مجموعة من األسماء من خالل إنشاء مجموعات األسماء، يمكنك إدارة العديد من األسماء وإرسال رسائل أو بريد إلكتروني إلى مجموعة كاملة. ابدأ بإنشاء مجموعة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← المجموعات. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← إنشاء. 3 أدخل اسمًا وحدد نغمة رنين للمجموعة. 4 حدد حفظ.المعلومات الشخصية 7٥ ‹ نسخ األسماء لنسخ جهات اتصال من بطاقة SIM أو USIM إلى جهازك، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← استيراد/تصدير ← استيراد من بطاقة SIM. 3 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM. 4 حدد موقع ذاكرة. وإذا كان لديك أكثر من حساب، فحدد حسابًا ترغب في إضافة االسم إليه. 5 حدد جهات االتصال لنسخها وحدد تخزين. لنسخ جهات اتصال من جهازك إلى بطاقة SIM أو USIM، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← استيراد/تصدير ← التصدير إلى بطاقة SIM. 3 حدد بطاقة SIM أو USIM. 4 حدد جهات االتصال لنسخها وحدد تصدير← نعم. ‹ استيراد أو تصدير األسماء الستيراد ملفات جهات اتصال )بتنسيق vcf( من بطاقة الذاكرة إلى جهازك، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← استيراد/تصدير ← إستيراد من بطاقة SD. 3 حدد موقع ذاكرة. وإذا كان لديك أكثر من حساب، فحدد حسابًا ترغب في إضافة االسم إليه. 4 حدد أخد الخيارات الستيراد جهة اتصال واحدة، أو عدة ملفات جهات اتصال، أو جميع جهات االتصال، وحدد موافق. 5 حدد ملفات اسم الستيرادها وحدد موافق.المعلومات الشخصية 76 لتصدير جهات اتصال من جهازك إلى بطاقة الذاكرة، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد . 2 اضغط على ] [ ← استيراد/تصدير ← التصدير إلى بطاقة SD. 3 حدد نعم للتأكيد. ‹ عرض سجل االتصال يمكنك عرض سجل االتصاالت الخاصة بالمكالمات، الرسائل، البريد اإللكتروني أو مؤشرات ترابط SNS. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← المحفوظات. 2 حدد العنصر الذي تريد عرضه. ‹ عرض أنشطة الشبكات االجتماعية يمكنك عرض األنشطة الحديثة لألسماء في خدمات الشبكات االجتماعية، مثل Facebook وTwitter. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ← األنشطة. 2 حدد العنصر الذي تريد عرضه. التقويم تعلم كيفية إنشاء وإدارة األحداث اليومية أو األسبوعية أو الشهرية، وضبط المنبهات لتذكيرك باألحداث المهمة. ‹ إنشاء حدث 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد التقويم. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← إنشاء.المعلومات الشخصية 77 3 أدخل التفاصيل الخاصة بالحدث حسب الطلب. 4 حدد تمت. ‹ عرض األحداث لتغيير عرض التقويم، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد التقويم. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← يوم، األسبوع، أو شهر. لعرض األحداث الخاصة بتاريخ معين، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد التقويم. 2 حدد تاريخً ا على التقويم. ● للتحرك إلى يوم محدد عن طريق إدخال تاريخ بطريقة يدوية، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← انتقل إلى، أدخل التاريخ بواسطة تحديد + أو -، وحدد ضبط. ● لتحديد تاريخ اليوم، اضغط على ] [ ← اليوم. 3 حدد حدثًا لعرض تفاصيله. ‹ إيقاف منبه حدث إذا قمت بضبط منبه الحدث تقويم، سوف تظهر رمز منبه الحدث في الوقت المحدد. 1 افتح لوحة اإلشعارات في الجزء العلوي من الشاشة. 2 حدد تذكيراً لعرض المزيد من التفاصيل حول الحدث. 3 لعمل غفوة أو لفصل التذكير، حدد غفوة للكل أو استبعاد الكل.المعلومات الشخصية 78 المذكرة تعلم كيفية تسجيل معلومات مهمة للحفظ والعرض في تاريخ الحق. ‹ إنشاء مذكرة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد المذكرة. 2 حدد إنشاء مذكرة. 3 أدخل نص مذكرتك. 4 اضغط على ] [ ← لونًا لتغيير لون خلفية. 5 حدد حفظ. ‹ عرض المذكرات 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد المذكرة. 2 حدد مذكرة لعرض تفاصيلها. ● لتحرير مذكرة، حدد . ● لحذف المذكرة، حدد ← موافق. يمكنك إرسال المذكرة إلى آخرين عن طريق الضغط مطوالً على المذكرة وتحديد إرسال عبر ← خيار. مسجل الصوت تعلم كيفية تشغيل مسجل الصوت بجهازك. الستخدام هذه الميزة، يجب عليك أوالً إدخال بطاقة ذاكرة.المعلومات الشخصية 79 ‹ تسجيل مذكرة صوتية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد مسجل الصوت. 2 حدد تسجيل لبدء التسجيل. 3 تحدث في الميكروفون. 4 عند االنتهاء، حدد إيقاف. يتم حفظ مذكرتك تلقائيًا. 5 لتسجيل مذكرات صوتية إضافية، حدد تسجيل مرة أخرى. ‹ تشغيل مذكرة صوتية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد مسجل الصوت. 2 حدد الالئحة. 3 حدد مذكرة صوتية لتشغيلها. يمكنك إرسال المذكرة الصوتية إلى آخرين بواسطة الضغط على ] [ ← مشاركة ← خيار.الويب 8٠ الويب تتطلب خدمات الويب وجود اتصال بيانات. اتصل بالمشغل الخاص بك الختيار أفضل خطة بيانات. الويب تعرف على كيفية الوصول إلى صفحات الويب المفضلة وتعليمها. ● قد تتحمل رسومًا إضافية مقابل النفاذ إلى الويب وتنزيل ملفات الوسائط. لمعرفة التفاصيل، يُرجى االتصال بمزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ● قد يتم تعليم قائمة متصفح الويب حسب مزود الخدمة الخاص بك. ● قد تختلف األيقونات المتاحة حسب منطقتك أو مزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ تصفح صفحات الويب 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد اإلنترنت لتشغيل الصفحة الرئيسية المحددة. للنفاذ إلى صفحة ويب محددة، حدد حقل إدخال URL، أدخل عنوان الويب )URL( الخاص بصفحة الويب، وحدد . 2 تنقل بين صفحات الويب مستخدمًا المفاتيح التالية: 1 2 الرقم الوظيفة 1 أدخل عنوان ويب لصفحة الويب التي تريد الوصول إليها. 2 افتح قائمة بالعالمات المرجعية المحفوظة، الصفحات التي تتم زيارتها بشكل متكرر وسجل اإلنترنت الحديث.الويب 81 أثناء تصفح صفحة الويب، استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● للتكبير، ضع إصبعين على الشاشة وافرق بينهما. للتصغير، حرك أصابعك بالقرب من بعضهما. يمكنك أيضً ا الضغط المزدوج على الشاشة. ● لفتح إطار جديد، اضغط على ] [ ← إطار جديد. ● لعرض اإلطارات النشطة حالياً، اضغط على ] [ ← اإلطارات. يمكنك فتح العديد من الصفحات والتبديل بينها. ● إلعادة تحميل صفحة الويب الحالية، اضغط على ] [ ← إنعاش. ● لالنتقال إلى صفحة تالية في السجل، اضغط على ] [ ← التالي. ● لتعليم صفحة الويب الحالية، اضغط على ] [ ← إضافة عالمة. ● إلضافة اختصار لصفحة الويب الحالية إلى شاشة الجاهزية، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← إضافة اختصار إلى الرئيسية. ● للبحث عن نص على صفحة الويب، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← البحث في الصفحة. ● لعرض تفاصيل صفحة الويب، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← م. الصفحة. ● إلرسال عنوان الويب )URL( لصفحة الويب إلى آخرين، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← مشاركة الصفحة. ● لعرض سجل التنزيل، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← الملفات المحملة. ● لتخصيص إعدادات المتصفح، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← الضبط.الويب 82 ‹ ابحث عن المعلومات حسب الصوت قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد اإلنترنت. 2 حدد حقل إدخال URL. 3 حدد وانطق كلمة أساسية في ميكروفون الجهاز الخاص بك. يبحث الجهاز عن معلومات وصفحات ويب مرتبطة بالكلمة األساسية. ‹ تعليم صفحات الويب المفضلة إذا كنت تعرف عنوان الويب الخاص بصفحة الويب، يمكنك إضافة عالمة مرجعية يدويًا. إلضافة عالمة مرجعية، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد اإلنترنت. 2 حدد ← ع. مرجعية. 3 حدد إضافة. 4 أدخل عنوان صفحة وعنوان ويب )URL(. 5 حدد موافق. من قائمة العالمات المرجعية، اضغط بشكل مطول على عالمة واستخدم الخيارات التالية: ● لكي تفتح صفحة ويب في النافذة الحالية، حدد فتح. ● لفتح صفحة الويب في إطار جديد، حدد فتح في إطار جديد. ● لتحرير تفاصيل العالمة المرجعية، حدد تعديل العالمة. ● إلضافة اختصار العالمة المرجعية إلى شاشة الجاهزية، حدد إضافة اختصار إلى الرئيسية.الويب 83 ● إلرسال عنوان الويب )URL( لصفحة الويب إلى آخرين، حدد مشاركة االرتباط. ● لنسخ عنوان الويب )URL( لصفحة الويب إلى آخرين، حدد نسخ عنوان االرتباط. ● لحذف العالمة المرجعية، حدد حذف عالمة مرجعية. ● الستخدام صفحة الويب كصفحتك الرئيسية للمتصفح، حدد ضبط كصفحة رئيسية. ‹ الوصول إلى الصفحات التي تتم زيارتها بشكل متكرر أو السجل الحديث 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد اإلنترنت. 2 حدد ← األكثر زيارة أو المحفوظات. 3 حدد صفحة ويب للوصول إليها. يمكنك إضافة صفحة ويب إلى قائمة العالمات المرجعية بواسطة تحديد . Maps تعلم كيفية استخدام ™Google Maps للبحث عن موقعك، أو البحث على خريطة موجودة على اإلنترنت عن شوارع، أو مدن، أو دول، والحصول على االتجاهات. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ البحث عن موقع معين 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Maps. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد OK. تعرض الخريطة موقعك الحالي.الويب 84 3 اضغط على ] [ ← Search. 4 أدخل كلمة أساسية للموقع وحدد . للبحث عن موقع بواسطة البحث الصوتي، حدد . 5 حدد الموقع الذي تريد عرض تفاصيله. ● لعرض قائمة بالنتائج للبحث الخاص بك، حدد . ● للتكبير، ضع إصبعين على الشاشة وافرق بينهما. للتصغير، حرك أصابعك بالقرب من بعضهما. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد أو . ● إلضافة طبقات إلى الخريطة، اضغط على ] [ ← Layers. ● لعرض موقعك الحالي، اضغط على ] [ ← My Location. ● إلضافة نجمة إلى الموقع، حدد بالون اسم الموقع ← . ‹ الحصول على اتجاهات إلى وجهة معينة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Maps. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← Directions. 3 أدخل عنوانيّ موقع البدء وموقع النهاية. لتحديد عنوان من قائمة األسماء الخاصة بك أو األماكن المميزة بعالمة نجمية أو تعليم الموقع على الخريطة، حدد ← Contacts، Point on map، أو My Places. 4 حدد طريقة السفر )سيارة، أتوبيس، أو سيراً( وحدد Get directions. يتم اإلشارة إلى المسار على الخريطة. استنادًا إلى أسلوب السفر المحدد، يمكنك مشاهدة مسارات عديدة. حدد مسارًا لعرض تفاصيل رحلتك وحدد لعرض المسار على الخريطة. 5 حدد أو لعرض جزء واحد فقط من المسار. 6 عند االنتهاء، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← Clear Map.الويب 8٥ خط العرض تعلم كيفية مشاركة موقعك مع األصدقاء وعرض مواقع األصدقاء بواسطة ™Google Latitude. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Latitude. ينضم الجهاز تلقائيًا إلى Latitude. 2 حدد ← Select from Contacts أو Add via email address. 3 حدد الصديق الذي تريد إضافتة أو أدخل عنوان بريد إلكتروني وحدد Add friends. 4 حدد Yes. عند قبول صديقك لدعوتك، يمكنك مشاركة المواقع. 5 اضغط على ] [ ← Map view. يتم تمييز مواقع أصدقائك باستخدام الصور الخاصة بهم على الخريطة. Places تعرف على كيفية البحث عن مكان من حولك. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Places. 2 حدد فئة. يبحث الجهاز الخاص بك عن األماكن المحيطة بموقعك الحالي والمتعلق بالفئة.الويب 86 3 حدد اسم مكان لعرض تفاصيله. 4 أثناء عرض المعلومات، استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● لعرض المكان على الخريطة، حدد Map. ● لعرض المسار المؤدي إلى المكان، حدد Directions. ● لعرض رقم الهاتف المؤدي إلى المكان، حدد Call. التنقل تعرف على كيفية استخدام نظام التجوال باستخدام GPS لكي تبحث عن وجهتك وتعرضها باستخدام اإلرشاد الصوتي. ● خرائط التجوال، وموقعك الحالي، وبيانات التجوال األخرى قد تختلف من المعلومات الموقع الفعلي. ينبغي عليك دومًا االنتباه لظروف الطريق، والمرور، وأي عوامل أخرى قد تؤثر على القيادة، واتبع جميع تحذيرات وقواعد األمان أثناء القيادة. ● قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد التنقل. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد موافقة. 3 أدخل وجهتك باستخدام أحد األساليب التالية: ● انطق وجهتك: انطق باسم الوجهة مثل ”االنتقال إلى الوجهة.“ ● اكتب الوجهة: أدخل وجهتك باستخدام لوحة المفاتيح الفعلية.الويب 87 ● جهات االتصال: حدد وجهتك من العناوين الخاصة باألسماء. ● األماكن المميزة بنجمة: حدد وجهتك من القائمة الخاصة باألماكن المميزة بالنجوم. YouTube تعلم كيفية عرض ومشاركة ملفات الفيديو عبر YouTube. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ مشاهدة الفيديو 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد YouTube. 2 حدد فيديو من القائمة. 3 قم بتدوير الهاتف للعرض األفقي. 4 تحكم في التشغيل باستخدام األيقونات الموجودة على الشاشة. ‹ مشاركة الفيديو 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد YouTube. 2 حدد فيديو. 3 حدد ← خيار.الويب 88 ‹ تحميل ملفات الفيديو 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد YouTube. 2 اضغط على ] [ ← تحميل وحدد فيديو. انتقل إلى الخطوة رقم 7. إذا كنت تريد تحميل ملفات فيديو جديدة، حدد لتشغيل الكاميرا. 3 ركز العدسة على الهدف المراد تصويره وقم بإجراء أية تعديالت. 4 حدد لبدء التسجيل. 5 حدد إليقاف التسجيل. 6 حدد حفظ لتحميل الفيديو الذي تريد تسجيله. 7 حدد حساب Google في حالة ما إذا كان مرتبطً ا بـ YouTube. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد إضافة حساب وإعداد حساب لتسجيل الدخول إلى YouTube. 8 أدخل تفاصيل التحميل وحدد تحميل. Samsung Apps يتيح لك Samsung Apps ببساطة وسهولة تنزيل كثرة من التطبيقات مباشرة على جهازك. مع وجود مجموعة كبيرة من األلعاب، األخبار، المراجع، الشبكات االجتماعية، التنقل، التطبيقات المرتبطة بالصحة والمزيد، يتيح لك Samsung Apps وصوالً فورياً إلى مجموعة خيارات كبيرة لتجربة الموبايل. يصبح جهازك أكثر ذكاءً مع تطبيقات محسنة بالكامل من Samsung Apps. استكشف التطبيقات المدهشة وحسن من عمر جهاز الهاتف الجوال الخاص بك.الويب 89 ● قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزود الخدمة الخاص بك. ● للحصول على تفاصيل، يُرجى زيارة www.samsungapps.com. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Samsung Apps. 2 إذا كنت تحاول تشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، اقرأ اتفاقية الشروط والبنود وحدد قبول. 3 ابحث عن التطبيقات التي تريدها وقم بتنزيلها. Market يمكنك تنزيل األلعاب، نغمات الرنين، أو التطبيقات األخرى من Android Market. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Market. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد قبول. 3 ابحث عن ملف معين وقم بتنزيله على الجهاز. ◄ ص. 39الويب 9٠ األخبار والطقس تعرف على طريقة عرض معلومات الطقس وتابع آخر األخبار ومقاالت الرأي األخرى. ‹ عرض معلومات الطقس 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد األخبار والطقس. 2 حدد الطقس في الجزء العلوي من الشاشة. يبحث جهازك عن الموقع الحالي ويعرض معلومات الطقس. يمكنك تغيير الموقع لعرض معلومات الطقس في منطقة أخرى. اضغط على ] [ ← اإلعدادات ← إعدادات الطقس وامسح خانة االختيار المجاورة لـ استخدام موقعي. ثم حدد موقعًا في تعيين الموقع. ‹ قراءة المقاالت اإلخبارية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد األخبار والطقس. 2 انتقل لليسار إلى موضوع جديد في الجزء العلوي من الشاشة. 3 حدد مقالة لفتحها. إلضافة موضوعات إخبارية، اضغط على ] [ ← اإلعدادات ← إعدادات األخبار ← تحديد مواضيع األخبار.التوصيل 91 التوصيل البلوتوث البلوتوث هو عبارة عن تكنولوجيا اتصاالت ال سلكية قصيرة المدى يمكن عن طريقه القيام بتبادل المعلومات لمسافة تقدر بحوالي 1٠ م دون الحاجة إلي اتصال فعلي. ليس من الضروري محاذاة األجهزة لنقل المعلومات باستخدام البلوتوث. إذا كانت األجهزة تقع ضمن نفس النطاق، فيمكنك تبادل المعلومات بينها حتى إذا كانت موجودة في غرف مختلفة. ● شركة سامسونج غير مسؤولة عن فقد البيانات المرسلة أو المستقبلة عبر ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية، أو عن تأخيرها أو سوء استخدامها. ● تأكد دائمًا من مشاركة البيانات واستقبالها باستخدام األجهزة المؤمنة بشكل موثوق منه وبشكل صحيح. في حالة وجود عوائق بين األجهزة، قد يتم تقليل مسافة التشغيل. ● بعض األجهزة، خصوصً ا التي لم يتم اختبارها أو اعتمادها من شركة Bluetooth SIG، قد ال تكون متوافقة مع جهازك. ‹ تشغيل ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات بلوتوث. 2 حدد البلوتوث لتشغيل ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية. التوصيل 92 ‹ البحث والمزاوجة مع األجهزة الممكنة بواسطة البلوتوث 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات بلوتوث ← البحث عن أجهزة. 2 حدد جهازًا. 3 أدخل رمز PIN لميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية أو رمز PIN لبلوتوث جهاز آخر، إذا كان يحتوي على رمز، وحدد موافق. بشكل بديل، حدد قبول لمطابقة رمز PIN بين جهازك والجهاز. عندما يدخل صاحب الجهاز نفس رمز PIN أو يقبل االتصال، فإن المقارنة تكون قد تمت. إذا نجحت عملية االقتران، فسيقوم الجهاز تلقائيًا بالبحث عن األجهزة المتوفرة. بعض األجهزة، خصوصً ا سماعات الرأس أو عدة السيارة دون استخدام األيدي، قد تحتوي على رمز PIN ثابت للبلوتوث مثل 0000. إذا كان الجهاز اآلخر يحتوي على رمز PIN، فيجب عليك إدخاله. ‹ إرسال البيانات باستخدام ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية 1 حدد ملفاً أو عنصراً، مثل اسم، أو مذكرة، أو ملف وسائط، من تطبيق مناسب أو ملفاتي. 2 حدد خيار إلرسال البيانات عبر البلوتوث. قد تختلف طريقة تحديد الخيار حسب نوع البيانات. 3 البحث عن جهاز يعمل بنظام البلوتوث واالقتران معه.التوصيل 93 ‹ استالم البيانات باستخدام ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات بلوتوث ← قابل لالكتشاف. جهازك مرئي ألجهزة أخرى تعمل بنظام البلوتوث لمدة 12٠ ثانية. 2 عند طلب ذلك، أدخل رمز PIN الخاص بميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية وحدد موافق. بشكل بديل، حدد قبول لمطابقة رمز PIN بين جهازك والجهاز. 3 حدد قبول للتأكيد على أنك ترغب في استالم بيانات من الجهاز. يتم حفظ البيانات المستلمة إلى مجلد بلوتوث. في حالة تلقي اسم، يتم حفظه تلقائيًا إلى دليل الهاتف. Wi-Fi تعلم كيفية استخدام قدرات الشبكات الالسلكية للجهاز لتنشيط أي شبكة منطقة محلية السلكية )WLAN( متوافقة مع معايير IEEE 802.11 b/g/n، واالتصال بها. يمكنك االتصال باإلنترنت وبأجهزة الشبكة األخرى في أي مكان تتوفر فيه نقطة نفاذ أو حث ساخن السلكي. يستخدم هذا الجهاز تردداً غير متوافق وهو مخصص لالستخدام في جميع الدول األوروبية. يمكن تشغيل شبكة Wi-Fi داخل المباني في منطقة االتحاد األوروبي بدون قيود، ولكن ال يمكن تشغيلها خارج المباني في فرنسا.التوصيل 94 ‹ تنشيط ميزة Wi-Fi في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات Wi-Fi ← Wi-Fi. ميزة Wi-Fi التي تعمل في الخلفية ستؤدي إلى استهالك طاقة البطارية. للحفاظ على طاقة البطارية، قم بتنشيط الميزة عند الحاجة فقط. ‹ البحث عن Wi-Fi AP واالتصال به 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات Wi-Fi. سيقوم الجهاز تلقائيًا بالبحث عن شبكات Wi-Fi AP المتوفرة. 2 حدد شبكة تحت شبكات Wi-Fi. 3 أدخل كلمة مرور للشبكة )إذا لزم األمر(. 4 حدد توصيل. ‹ إضافة Wi-Fi AP يدويًا 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات Wi-Fi ← إضافة شبكة Wi-Fi. 2 أدخل SSID الخاص بالشبكة وحدد نوع األمان. 3 اضبط إعدادات األمان حسب نوع األمان المحدد. 4 حدد حفظ.التوصيل 9٥ ‹ االتصال بشبكة Wi-Fi AP باستخدام إعداد Wi-Fi المحمي )WPS( باستخدام WPS، يمكنك االتصال بشبكة مؤمنة. لالتصال بشبكة Wi-Fi AP باستخدام زر WPS، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات Wi-Fi. 2 حدد اتصال زر WPS. 3 اضغط على زر WPS على نقطة الوصول خالل دقيقتين 2. لالتصال بشبكة Wi-Fi AP باستخدام رمز WPS PIN، 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات Wi-Fi. 2 حدد شبكة موضحة برمز WPS وحدد WPS PIN. 3 على نقطة الوصول، أدخل رمز PIN واضغط على زر البدء. مشاركة شبكة المحمول تعرف على كيفية ضبط جهازك كمودم السلكي، أو نقطة وصول السلكية ألجهزة الكمبيوتر، أو األجهزة األخرى، ومشاركة اتصال شبكة الهاتف المحمول الخاصة بالجهاز. ‹ مشاركة شبكة الهاتف المحمول عبر Wi-Fi 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← التقييد ونقطة االتصال النقالة. 2 حدد نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi المحمولة لتنشيط ميزة ربط Wi-Fi.التوصيل 96 3 حدد إعدادات نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi نقالة ← تهيئة نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi النقالة لتهيئة ضبط الشبكة الستخدام جهازك كنقطة وصول. الخيار الوظيفة شبكة SSID قم بعرض وتعديل اسم الجهاز الذي سيظهر لألجهزة الخارجية. الحماية حدد نوع األمان. كلمة المرور قم بعرض أو تعديل مفتاح الشبكة لكي تمنع الوصول غير المسموح به للشبكة. 4 عند االنتهاء، حدد حفظ. 5 من خالل جهاز آخر، حدد اسم جهازك من بين قائمة االتصاالت المتاحة واتصل بالشبكة. يقوم جهازك بمشاركة اتصال شبكة الهاتف المحمول باستخدام جهاز آخر. ‹ مشاركة شبكة الهاتف المحمول الخاص بالجهاز عبر USB 1 باستخدام كبل USB، قم بتوصيل المنفذ المتعدد األغراض الموجود في جهازك بالكمبيوتر. 2 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← التقييد ونقطة االتصال النقالة. 3 حدد تقييد USB لتنشيط ميزة ضبط نطاق USB. سيقوم جهازك بمشاركة اتصال شبكة الهاتف المحمول من خالل الكمبيوتر. إليقاف مشاركة اتصال الشبكة، امسح خانة االختيار المجاورة لـ تقييد USB. قد تختلف طريقة المشاركة التصال الشبكة حسب نظام التشغيل الخاص بالكمبيوتر.التوصيل 97 GPS يعد جهازك مزودًا بمستقبل نظام تحديد المواقع العالمية )GPS(. تعرف على طريقة تنشيط الخدمات. الستقبال أفضل إشارات GPS تجنب استخدام جهازك في األحوال التالية: ● في وسط البنايات أو داخل األنفاق أو في الممرات الموجودة تحت األرض، أو داخل البنايات ● في سوء األحوال الجوية ● حول مناطق الجهد العالي أو في المجاالت الكهرومغناطيسية ● في مركبة مزودة بطبقة وقاية من الشمس ال تلمس أو تغطي منطقة الهوائي بيديك أو أي أشياء أخرى أثناء استخدام وظائف GPS. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. ‹ تنشيط خدمات الموقع يجب عليك تنشيط خدمات الموقع لتلقي معلومات الموقع والبحث على الخريطة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الموقع واألمان. 2 اضبط اإلعدادات التالية لتنشيط خدمات الموقع: الخيار الوظيفة استخدام شبكات السلكية قم بالتعيين الستخدام شبكات Wi-Fi و/أو شبكات الهاتف المحمول للبحث عن موقعك. استخدام األقمار الصناعية GPS قم بالتعيين الستخدام أقمار GPS الصناعية للبحث عن موقعك.التوصيل 98 توصيالت الحاسوب تعلم كيفية توصيل جهازك بالكمبيوتر باستخدام كبل USB في أوضاع توصيل USB. عن طريق توصيل جهازك بالكمبيوتر، يمكنك مزامنة نقل البيانات من جهازك وإليه مباشرةً واستخدم برنامج Samsung Kies. ‹ االتصال ببرنامج Samsung Kies تأكد من تثبيت برنامج Samsung Kies على الكمبيوتر الخاص بك. يمكنك تنزيل البرنامج من موقع سامسونج على الويب على العنوان )www.samsung.com/kies(. 1 باستخدام كبل USB، قم بتوصيل المنفذ المتعدد األغراض الموجود في جهازك بالكمبيوتر. 2 انقر نقرًا مزدوجً ا على رمز Samsung Kies على الكمبيوتر لتشغيل Samsung Kies. 3 انقل أو قم بمزامنة بيانات الهاتف المحمول، مثل األسماء، أو التقاويم، أو الموسيقى، أو الصور، بين Samsung Kies واألجهزة المتصلة. ارجع إلى تعليمات Samsung Kies للحصول على مزيد من المعلومات. ‹ االتصال كجهاز مخزن البيانات يمكنك الوصول إلى دليل الملفات الخاص ببطاقة الذاكرة باستخدام الجهاز كقارئ بطاقة الذاكرة. 1 أدخل بطاقة ذاكرة في الجهاز. 2 باستخدام كبل USB، قم بتوصيل المنفذ المتعدد األغراض الموجود في جهازك بالكمبيوتر.التوصيل 99 3 افتح لوحة اإلشعارات وحدد متصل USB ← توصيل وحدة تخزين USB ← موافق. 4 افتح المجلد لعرض الملفات. 5 انسخ الملفات من جهاز الكمبيوتر إلى بطاقة الذاكرة. 6 عند االنتهاء، حدد فصل وحدة التخزين عن الكمبيوتر. لفصل الجهاز عن الكمبيوتر، انقر فوق رمز جهاز USB الموجودة على شريط مهام Windows وانقر فوق الخيار إلزالة جهاز مخزن البيانات بشكل آمن. ثم انفصل كبل USB من الكمبيوتر. وإال، فقد تفقد البيانات المخزنة على بطاقة الذاكرة أو تتلف بطاقة الذاكرة. اتصاالت VPN يمكنك إنشاء الشبكات الخاصة االفتراضية )VPNs( وتوصيلها بشبكتك الخاصة بأمان من خالل شبكة عامة، مثل اإلنترنت. ينبغي أن يكون قد تمت فعالً تهيئة جهازك بالنفاذ إلى اإلنترنت. إذا واجهت أية مشاكل عند النفاذ إلى اإلنترنت، فإنك تحتاج إلى تحرير التوصيالت. إذا لم تكن متأكدًا من معلومات االتصال التي أدخلتها، فاستفسر من مزوّد الخدمة.التوصيل 1٠٠ ‹ إعداد توصيالت VPN 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات VPN ← إضافة VPN. 2 حدد نوع VPN. 3 قم بتخصيص معلومات االتصال. قد تختلف الخيارات المتوفرة حسب نوع VPN. الخيار الوظيفة اسم VPN أدخل اسمًا لخادم VPN. تعيين خادم VPN أدخل عنوان IP لخادم VPN. تفعبل التشفير اضبط لتشفير خادم VPN. تعيين مفتاح IPsec المشترك مسبقا أدخل مفتاح تمت مشاركته مسبقًا. تفعيل سر L2TP اضبط الستخدام كلمة مرور L2TP السرية. تعيين سر L2TP أدخل كلمة مرور L2TP السرية. تعيين شهادة المستخدم حدد شهادة المستخدم التي يستخدمها خادم VPN لتعريف هويتك. يمكنك استيراد الشهادات من خادم VPN أو تنزيلها من الويب.التوصيل 1٠1 الخيار الوظيفة تعيين شهادة CA حدد شهادة المرجع المصدق )CA( التي يستخدمها خادم VPN لتعريف هويتك. يمكنك استيراد الشهادات من خادم VPN أو تنزيلها من الويب. مجاالت بحث DNS أدخل عنوان خادم اسم المجال )DNS(. 4 عند االنتهاء، اضغط على ] [ ← حفظ. ‹ االتصال بالشبكة الخاصة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط ← الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات ← إعدادات VPN. 2 حدد شبكة خاصة. 3 أدخل اسم المستخدم وكلمة المرور وحدد توصيل.األدوات 1٠2 األدوات الساعة تعلم كيفية استخدام شاشة الساعة على شاشة الجاهزية، واضبط وتحكم في المنبهات الخاصة باألحداث المهمة. ‹ استخدام جهاز عرض الساعة 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الساعة. 2 أثناء استخدام جهاز عرض الساعة، استخدام المزايا التالية: ● إلنشاء أو حذف منبه، حدد . ● لبدء عرض شرائح مع الصور في المعرض، حدد . ● لتشغيل مشغل الموسيقى، حدد . ● للعودة إلى شاشة الجاهزية، حدد . ‹ ضبط منبه جديد 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الساعة. 2 حدد ← إضافة تنبيه أو اضغط على ] [ ← إضافة تنبيه. 3 اضبط تفاصيل المنبه. 4 عند االنتهاء، حدد تمت. ‹ إيقاف منبه عندما يصدر صوت المنبه، ● حدد إيقاف إليقاف المنبه. ● حدد غفوة لتكرار المنبه بعد الفترة الزمنية المحددة.األدوات 1٠3 ‹ حذف منبه 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الساعة ← . 2 حدد تنبيه لحذفه. 3 حدد مسح ← موافق. الحاسبة تعلم كيفية تنفيذ العمليات الحسابية مباشرة على جهازك كآلة حاسبة يدوية نموذجية أو آلة حاسبة على سطح المكتب. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الحاسبة. 2 استخدم المفاتيح التي تتوافق مع شاشة الحاسبة إلجراء عمليات رياضية أساسية. اضغط على ] [ ← اللوحة المتقدمة الستخدام حاسبة علمية. تنزيالت تعرف على كيفية إدارة سجالت الملفات التي قمت بتنزيلها من الويب. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد تنزيالت. 2 حدد مجلد للتنزيل. 3 لكي تفتح ملف تم تنزيله، حدد السجل. لحذف سجل، حدد خانة االختيار ثم حدد مسح.األدوات 1٠4 Google Search يمكنك البحث عن التطبيقات والبيانات الموجودة في جهازك والبيانات المحددة الموجودة على الويب. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Google Search. 2 في حالة تشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، قم بتعيين ما إذا كان ممكنًا عرض سجل البحث الخاص بحساب Google من عدمه. 3 أدخل حرفاً أو كلمة من البيانات المراد البحث عنها. 4 حدد اسم العنصر الذي تريد الوصول إليه. ملفاتي تعلم كيفية الوصول إلى كل الصور، ملفات الفيديو، الموسيقى، المقاطع الصوتية، وأنواع أخرى من الملفات المخزنة في بطاقة ذاكرة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد ملفاتي. 2 حدد مجلداً. ● للعودة إلى الدليل الرئيسي، حدد صفحة البدء. ● لالنتقال مستوى واحد ألعلى في دليل الملفات، حدد أعلى. 3 اختر أحد الملفات لفتحه. في أحد المجلدات، اضغط على ] [ الستخدام الخيارات التالية: ● إلرسال ملف إلى آخرين، حدد مشاركة. ● إلنشاء مجلد جديد، حدد إنشاء مجلد. ● لحذف الملفات أو المجلدات، حدد مسح. ● لتغيير وضع العرض، حدد عرض حسب. ● لفرز الملفات أو المجلدات، حدد سرد حسب. ● الستخدام ميزات إضافية باستخدام ملف، مثل نقل، نسخ، أو إعادة تسمية خيار، حدد المزيد.األدوات 1٠٥ Polaris Viewer تعرف على طريقة عرض مستندات ”عارض Polaris“ على بطاقة الذاكرة. ‹ فتح مستند 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Polaris Viewer. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، قم بالتسجيل كمستخدم عبر اإلنترنت، أو تخطى عملية التسجيل. 3 حدد مجلد ضمن ملفاتي أو الملفات المستخدمة حديثا ← ملف مستند. 4 اعرض المستند حسبما هو مطلوب. ● للتكبير، ضع إصبعين على الشاشة وافرق بينهما. للتصغير، حرك أصابعك بالقرب من بعضهما. للرجوع إلى الحجم األصلي، اضغط ضغطً ا مزدوجً ا على الشاشة. يمكنك أيضً ا الضغط على ] [ ← تكبير/تصغير ← خيار. ● لوضع عالمة مرجعية على الصفحة الحالية، اضغط على ] [ ← قصاصة. ● للبحث عن نص في المستند، اضغط على ] [ ← بحث. ● لتخصيص إعدادات لعرض المستندات أو إدارة المستندات، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← االعدادات. ● إلرسال ملف إلى اآلخرين، اضغط على ] [ ← المزيد ← إرسال ملف. قد تختلف الخيارات المتوفرة حسب نوع المستند.األدوات 1٠6 ‹ إدارة المستندات عبر اإلنترنت 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد Polaris Viewer. 2 حدد ملفات الويب ← خدمة. 3 أدخل عنوان البريد اإللكتروني وكلمة المرور للوصول إلى حسابك، ثم حدد إضافة. 4 قم بعرض وإدارة المستندات الخاصة بك على الملقم كما هو مطلوب. مجموعة أدوات SIM استخدم العديد من الخدمات اإلضافية التي يقدمها مزود الخدمة. قد تكون هذه القائمة متاحة ولكن باسم مختلف، وذلك حسب بطاقة SIM أو بطاقة USIM. في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد مجموعة أدوات SIM. مدير المهام باستخدام مدير المهام، يمكنك عرض التطبيقات التي تعمل حاليًا ومعلومات الذاكرة. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد مدير المهام. 2 استخدم الخيارات التالية: ● التطبيقات النشطة: اعرض قائمة تضم جميع التطبيقات التي يتم تشغيلها حاليًا على جهازك. ● تم التنزيل: شاهد المقدار الكلي المستخدم من مساحة الذاكرة للتطبيقات المثبتة على الجهاز.األدوات 1٠7 ● ذاكرة الوصول العشوائي )RAM(: قم بفحص وإدارة RAM الخاصة بجهازك. ● مكان التخزين: اعرض مساحة الذاكرة المستخدمة والخالية المتاحة على جهازك وعلى بطاقة الذاكرة. ● مساعدة: اعرض معلومات المساعدة المتعلقة بزيادة عمر البطارية ومدير RAM. البحث الصوتي تعرف على كيفية استخدام ميزة األوامر الصوتية لالتصال برقم، أو إرسال رسالة، أو البحث عن المواقع والمعلومات بالصوت. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك. 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد البحث الصوتي. 2 إذا كنت تقوم بتشغيل هذا التطبيق ألول مرة، فحدد موافق أو تغيير اللغة. 3 حدد تحدث اآلن )إذا لزم األمر(. 4 انطق أمرًا في الميكروفون. 5 حدد اسم العنصر الذي تريد الوصول إليه )إذا لزم األمر(.الضبط 1٠8 الضبط الوصول إلى قائمة الضبط 1 في وضع الجاهزية، افتح قائمة التطبيقات وحدد الضبط. 2 حدد فئة ضبط وحدد خيارًا معينًا. إدارة بطاقة SIM ادخل وقم بتعديل اإلعدادات للتحكم في الشبكة وإعدادات البطاقة للجهاز. ◄ ص. 34 الشبكة الالسلكية والشبكات قم بتغيير اإلعدادات الخاصة باتصاالت الشبكة الالسلكية. ‹ نمط الطيران قم بتعطيل كل الوظائف الالسلكية على جهازك. يمكنك استخدام الخدمات غير الشبكية فقط. ‹ إعدادات Wi-Fi ● Wi-Fi: قم بتشغيل ميزة Wi-Fi أو إيقاف تشغيلها. ◄ ص. 94 ● إخطارات الشبكة: اضبط الجهاز لتبليغك عندما تتوفر شبكة مفتوحة. ● اتصال زر WPS: االتصال بشبكة Wi-Fi AP باستخدام زر إعداد Wi-Fi المحمي )WPS(. ● إضافة شبكة Wi-Fi: قم بإضافة Wi-Fi AP يدويًا.الضبط 1٠9 ‹ إعدادات بلوتوث ● البلوتوث: قم بتشغيل ميزة البلوتوث الالسلكية أو إيقاف تشغيلها. ◄ ص. 91 ● اسم الجهاز: اضبط اسم البلوتوث الخاص بجهازك. ● قابل لالكتشاف: اضبط جهازك ليكون مرئياً ألجهزة بلوتوث أخرى. ● البحث عن أجهزة: ابحث عن أجهزة البلوتوث المتوفرة. ‹ أدوات USB صل جهازك بالكمبيوتر كمخزن كبير السعة. ◄ ص. 98 ‹ التقييد ونقطة االتصال النقالة ● تقييد USB: قم بتنشيط ميزة ضبط نطاق USB لمشاركة اتصال شبكة الجهاز المحمول مع أجهزة كمبيوتر من خالل USB. عند التوصيل بجهاز كمبيوتر، يتم استخدام جهازك كمودم السلكي لجهاز الكمبيوتر. ◄ ص. 96 ● نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi المحمولة: قم بتنشيط ميزة ربط Wi-Fi لمشاركة اتصال شبكة الجهاز المحمول مع أجهزة الكمبيوتر، أو األجهزة األخرى من خالل ميزة Wi-Fi. ◄ ص. 9٥ ● إعدادات نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi نقالة: - نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi المحمولة: قم بتنشيط ميزة ربط Wi-Fi لمشاركة اتصال شبكة الجهاز المحمول مع أجهزة الكمبيوتر، أو األجهزة األخرى من خالل ميزة Wi-Fi. ◄ ص. 9٥ - تهيئة نقطة اتصال Wi-Fi النقالة: قم بتهيئة ضبط الشبكة لكي تستخدم جهازك كنقطة اتصال. ‹ إعدادات VPN قم باإلعداد واالتصال بالشبكات الخاصة االفتراضية )VPNs(. ◄ ص. 99الضبط 11٠ ‹ شبكات الهواتف المحمولة ● استخدام حزم البيانات: ضبط السماح لشبكات البيانات المشغلة بالحزمة للنفاذ إلى خدمات الشبكات. ● التجوال لتبادل البيانات: اضبط الجهاز لالتصال بشبكة أخرى عند التجوال أو عندما تكون شبكتك الرئيسية غير متوفرة. ● أسماء نقاط الوصول: قم بإعداد أسماء نقاط الوصول )APNs(. ● استخدم فقط شبكات 2G: اضبط الجهاز لالتصال فقط بشبكة 2G. ● مشغلو الشبكة: ابحث عن الشبكات المتوفرة وحدد شبكة للتجوال. ضبط المكالمة تخصيص الضبط الخاص بميزات االتصال. ‹ أرقام االتصال الثابتة ● تفعيل FDN: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط وضع FDN لحظر المكالمات إلى األرقام الموجودة في قائمة FDN. يجب عليك إدخال رمز PIN2 المرفق مع بطاقة SIM أو USIM. ● تغيير رمز PIN2: قم بتغيير رمز PIN2، الذي يُستخدم لحماية رمز PIN األساسي. في حالة قفل SIM أو USIM، تتغير هذه القائمة إلى إلغاء قفل PIN2. ● قائمة FDN: قم بإعداد قائمة باألسماء الخاصة باالتصال الثابت. ‹ البريد الصوتي ● خدمة البريد الصوتي: حدد خدمة البريد الصوتي لمزوِّد الخدمة الخاص بك. يمكنك أيضً ا تحديد خدمات بريد صوتي أخرى في حالة تنزيل التطبيقات التي تدعمها. ● رقم البريد الصوتي: أدخل الرقم للوصول إلى خدمة البريد الصوتي. يمكنك الحصول على هذا الرقم من مزود الخدمة الخاص بك. يختلف موقع هذه الخيارات عندما تقوم بإدخال بطاقة SIM أو USIM واحدة.الضبط 111 ‹ تشغيل مستشعر التقارب قم بالضبط لتشغيل مستشعر االقتراب خالل إجراء االتصال. ‹ تحويل المكالمة تحويل المكالمات الواردة إلى رقم آخر. ‹ إعدادات إضافية ● المتصل ID: قم بعرض هوية المتصل الخاصة بك لألطراف األخرى بخصوص المكالمات الصادرة. ● انتظار المكالمات: اسمح بعمل تنبيهات للمكالمات الواردة عندما تكون المكالمة قيد التشغيل. صوت قم بتغيير الضبط لألصوات المختلفة الموجودة في جهاز. ● نمط الصمت: قم بتنشيط الوضع الصامت لكتم كل األصوات باستثناء أصوات الوسائط ونغمات رنين التنبيهات. ● اهتزاز: قم بتعيين الوقت الذي سيهتز فيه الجهاز عند وقوع ”أحداث“ متنوعة. ● درجة الصوت: اضبط درجة الصوت لجميع نغمات الرنين، والموسيقى، والفيديو، ونغمات رنين التنبيه، وصوت النظام، ونغمات رنين اإلشعارات. ● نغمة الرنين: - نغمة رنين الهاتف: حدد نغمة رنين لتنبيهك بالمكالمات الواردة. - نغمة رنين اإلخطار: حدد نغمة رنين لتنبيهك باألحداث، مثل الرسالة الواردة، والمكالمات التي لم يتم الرد عليها. ● نغمات اللمس المسموعة: اضبط الجهاز إلصدار صوت عند لمس المفاتيح على شاشة االتصال. ● تحديد مسموع: اضبط الجهاز إلصدار صوت عندما تقوم بتحديد تطبيق أو خيار على شاشة اللمس. ● أصوات قفل الشاشة: قم بتعيين الجهاز لكي يصدر صوتًا عندما تقوم بقفل أو إلغاء قفل شاشة اللمس.الضبط 112 الشاشة قم بتخصيص الضبط الخاص بالشاشة. ● شاشة العرض: - أسلوب الخط: قم بتغيير نوع الخط للنص الظاهر على الشاشة. يمكنك تنزيل خطوط من Android Market عن طريق تحديد الحصول على الخطوط عبر اإلنترنت. - الشاشة الرئيسية: خلفية الشاشة: حدد صورة خلفية لشاشة الجاهزية. - قفل الشاشة: خلفية الشاشة: حدد صورة لعرضها عند قفل الشاشة. موضع الساعة: حدد موقع الساعة على الشاشة المقفلة. ● السطوع: اضبط سطوع الشاشة. ● تدوير تلقائي للشاشة: حدد ما إذا كنت تريد تدوير المحتوى تلقائياً عند تدوير الجهاز. ● رسوم متحركة: اضبط الجهاز لعرض رسوم متحركة عند التبديل بين النوافذ. ● زمن توقف الشاشة: حدد طول الفترة الزمنية التي ينتظرها الجهاز قبل إيقاف تشغيل الضوء الخلفي للشاشة. الموقع واألمان قم بتغيير اإلعدادات الخاصة بأمان الجهاز وبطاقة SIM أو USIM، ووظائف GPS. ● استخدام شبكات السلكية: قم بالتعيين الستخدام شبكات Wi-Fi و/أو شبكات الهاتف المحمول للبحث عن موقعك. ● استخدام األقمار الصناعية GPS: قم بالتعيين الستخدام أقمار GPS الصناعية للبحث عن موقعك.الضبط 113 ● تعيين قفل الشاشة: قم بتعيين رمز أمان إلغاء القفل. عندما تقوم بتعيين رمز األمان، يتغير هذا الخيار إلى تغيير قفل الشاشة. - ال شيء: قم بتعطيل قفل الشاشة. - النمط: اضبط نمط إلغاء التأمين إللغاء تأمين الشاشة. - PIN: قم بتعيين رمز PIN )رقمي( إللغاء قفل الشاشة. - كلمة المرور: قم بتعيين كلمة مرور )أبجدي رقمي( إللغاء قفل الشاشة. ● إعداد قفل بطاقة SIM: - قفل بطاقة SIM: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط ميزة قفل PIN لطلب رمز PIN قبل استخدام الجهاز. - تغيير رمز PIN لبطاقة SIM: قم بتغيير رمز PIN المستخدم للوصول إلى بيانات SIM أو USIM. ● تنبيه تغيير بطاقة SIM: قم بتنشيط أو إلغاء تنشيط ميزة Find my mobile التي تساعدك على تحديد موقع جهازك في حالة فقده أو سرقته. ◄ ص. 33 ● تنبيه مستلمي الرسالة: قم بإضافة مستلمين أو تعديل بياناتهم لرسالة التنبيه. ● أدوات التحكم عن بعد: اضبط للتحكم في الجهاز المفقود عن بُعد عبر الويب. ● كلمات مرور مرئية: اضبط الجهاز لعرض كلمة مرورك كما تدخلها. ● تحديد مسؤولي األجهزة: اعرض مسؤولي الجهاز المثبتين على الجهاز لديك. يمكنك تنشيط مسؤولي الجهاز لتطبيق سياسات جديدة على الجهاز. ● استخدام بيانات االعتماد اآلمنة: استخدم الشهادات وأوراق االعتماد لضمان االستخدام اآلمن لتطبيقات متنوعة. ● التثبيت من بطاقة SD: قم بتثبيت الشهادات المشفرة المخزنة على بطاقة ذاكرة. ● تعيين كلمة المرور: قم بإنشاء وتأكيد كلمة مرور للوصول إلى أوراق االعتماد. ● مسح وحدة التخزين: امسح محتويات أوراق االعتماد من الجهاز وأعد ضبط كلمة المرور.الضبط 114 التطبيقات قم بتغيير اإلعداد الخاص بإدارة التطبيقات المثبتة. ● مصادر غير معروفة: حدد لتنزيل التطبيقات من أي مصدر. إذا لم تقم بتحديد هذا الخيار، يمكنك تنزيل التطبيقات فقط من Android Market. ● إدارة التطبيقات: قم بالوصول إلى قائمة التطبيقات المثبتة على الجهاز وحدد معلومات التطبيق. ● الخدمات المشغلة: اعرض الخدمات التي تستخدمها وقم بالوصول إليها إلدارتها. ● استخدام الذاكرة: اعرض مساحة الذاكرة المتاحة، ومساحة الذاكرة المستخدمة بواسطة التطبيقات الموجودة على جهازك. ● استخدام البطارية: اعرض مقدار الطاقة المستهلك بواسطة الجهاز. ● تطوير: - تصحيح USB: هذا مخصص لتطوير التطبيق. عند توصيل الجهاز بالكمبيوتر باستخدام كبل USB، فإن وضع تصحيح خطأ USB سيتم تنشيطه وسيتم تشغيل Samsung Kies تلقائيًا. - البقاء نشطا: اضبط شاشة الجهاز لكي تبقى مشغلة أثناء شحن البطارية. - السماح بالمواقع الوهمية: اسمح بإرسال المواقع الوهمية ومعلومات الخدمة إلى خدمة مدير المواقع بهدف االختبار. هذا مخصص لتطوير التطبيق. ● Samsung Apps: حدد اتصال شبكة )Wi-Fi أو شبكة بيانات مشغلة بالحزمة( للحصول على إشعارات بالتطبيقات الجديدة من Samsung Apps. قد ال تتوفر هذه الميزة حسب منطقتك ومزوّد الخدمة الخاص بك.الضبط 11٥ الحسابات والمزامنة قم بتغيير اإلعدادات الخاصة بميزة المزامنة التلقائية أو إدارة الحسابات الخاصة بالمزامنة. ● بيانات الخلفية: حدد هذا اإلعداد الستخدام ميزة المزامنة التلقائية. سوف تعمل ميزة المزامنة التلقائية في الخلفية بدون فتح بيانات مزامنة التطبيقات. ● مزامنة تلقائية: اضبط الجهاز لمزامنة االسم، التقويم وبيانات البريد اإللكتروني بشكل تلقائي. الخصوصية قم بتغيير اإلعدادات الخاصة بإدارة إعداداتك والبيانات. ● النسخ االحتياطي لبياناتي: قم بعمل نسخ احتياطي إلعدادات جهازي إلى خادم Google. ● استعادة تلقائية: قم بضبط الجهاز ليقوم باسترداد بيانات التطبيقات التي قمت بعمل نسخة احتياطية منها عند تثبيتها على الجهاز. ● إعادة تعيين بيانات المصنع: أعد ضبط إعداداتك على القيم االفتراضية للشركة المصنعة لحذف كل بياناتك. تخزين الهاتف ويطاقة SD اعرض معلومات الذاكرة لجهازك ولبطاقة الذاكرة. يمكنك أيضً ا تنسيق بطاقة الذاكرة. تهيئة بطاقة ذاكرة ستؤدي إلى محو جميع البيانات من بطاقة الذاكرة بشكل دائم.الضبط 116 اإلعدادات المحلية والنص قم بتغيير اإلعدادات الخاصة بإدخال النص. ‹ اختيار اللغة حدد لغة العرض لكل القوائم والتطبيقات. ‹ تحديد أسلوب اإلدخال حدد نوع لوحة مفاتيح افتراضية إلدخال النصوص. ‹ Swype ● اللغة: حدد لغة إدخال النصوص. ال يمكنك إدخال نص ببعض اللغات. إلدخال نص، يتعين عليك تغيير لغة الكتابة إلى إحدى اللغات المدعمة. ● التنبؤ بالكلمة: اضبط الجهاز لتوقع الكلمات حسب إدخالك واقتراحات كلمات الشاشة. ● تعليقات توضيحية صوتية: اضبط التنبيه في حالة عدم وجود كلمات بديلة لإلدخال في حالة الضغط المزدوج على إحدى الكلمات. ● تميكن مؤشر التلميحات: اضبط لتنبيهك للقيام بتقديم المساعدة السريعة بواسطة وميض مؤشر الت